SECTION – 5

Technical
Specification
(Civil)

- 92 -
 SPECIFICATION – I (Civil work)

SUB HEAD : 0.0

GENERAL

Note:- All Work shall be carried out as per latest NCHM/AICTE and CPWD specification
Volume -1 &-2 and corrigendum issued from time to time by appropriate authority.
Contractor to abide to follow the specification as mentioned. However brief
specification for building work, sanitary work and electrical enclosed for ready reference
and implement on ground while executing the work.

0.1 Reference mentioned herein shall be applicable to all sections to the extent the
context permits and are intended to supplement the provisions in the particular
section. In case of any discrepancy/deviation, the provisions in the particular section
shall take precedence.

0.2 The rates for all items of work unless clearly specified otherwise shall include cost
of all labour, materials and other inputs involved in the execution of the items.

0.3 INTERPRETATIONS
0.3.1 The Director General (Works), CPWD shall be the sole deciding authority as to the
meaning, interpretation and implications for various provisions of the specifications.
His decision in writing shall be final.
0.3.2 Wherever any reference is made to any Indian Standard, it shall be taken as reference
to the latest edition with all amendments issued thereto. In the event of any variation
between the CPWD specifications and the Indian Standard, the former shall take
precedence over the latter.
0.3.3 To Insure the construction of building according to design and provide arrangement
for office installation based on sustainable design principles and also insure OHS,
NIC & LEED norms.

0.4 DEFINITIONS
The following terms and expressions in the specifications shall have the meaning or
implication hereby assigned to them unless otherwise specified elsewhere.
0.4.1 Contractor: The Contractor shall mean the individual or firm or company whether
incorporated or not undertaking the works and shall include the legal personal
representatives of such individual or the persons composing such firm or company,
or the successors of such individual or firm or company and the permitted assignees
of such individual or firm of company.
0.4.2 Engineer-in-Charge: The ‘Engineer-in-Charge’ means the Engineer officer who
shall supervise and be in-charge of the work and who shall sign the contract on
behalf of the President.
0.4.3 Site: The ‘site’ shall mean the land/ or other places on, in, into or through which the
work is to be executed under the contract or any adjacent land, path or street through
which the work is to be executed under the contract, or any adjacent land, path or
street which may be allotted or used for the
purpose of carrying out the contract.

0.4.4 Store: The ‘store’ shall mean the place of issue of materials included in the
appropriate schedule of a contract for issue by the CPWD. In all other cases ‘Store’
shall mean any CPWD store in the district.

- 98 -
0.4.5 IS: The standards, specification and code of practices issued by the Bureau of Indian
Standards.
0.4.6 Best: The word ‘best’ when used shall mean that in the opinion of the Engineer-in-
Charge, there is no superior material/ article and workmanship obtainable in the market
and trade respectively. As far as possible the standard required shall be specified in
preference to the word ‘best’.
0.4.7 Department: ‘Department’ shall mean Central Public Works Department (CPWD).

0.5 FLOOR AND LEVELS

0.5.1 Building
0.5.1.1 Floor 1 is the lowest floor above the ground level in the building unless otherwise
specified in a particular case. The floors above floor 1 shall be numbered in
sequence as floor 2, floor 3 and so on. The number shall increase upwards.
0.5.1.2 Floor level: For floor 1, top level of finished floor shall be the floor level and for all
other floors above floor 1, top level of the structural slabs shall be the floor level.
0.5.1.3 Plinth level: Floor 1 level or 1.2 m above the ground level whichever is lower shall
be the plinth level.
0.5.2 Special Structures
0.5.2.1 For structures like retaining walls, wing walls, chimneys, over head reservoirs/ tanks
and other elevated structures, where elevations/ heights above a defined datum level
have not been specified and identification of floors cannot be done as in case of
building. Level, at 1.2 m above the ground level shall be the floor 1 level as well
as plinth level. Level at a height of 3.5 m above floor 1 level will be reckoned as floor
2 level and level at a height of 3.5 m above the floor 2 level will be floor 3 level
and so on, where the total height above floor 1 level is not a whole number multiple
of 3.5 metre. Top most floor level shall be the next in sequence to the floor level below
even if the difference in height between the two upper most floor levels is less than
3.5 metres
0.6 FOUNDATION AND PLINTH
The work in foundation and plinth shall include:
(a) For buildings: All works upto 1.2 metre above ground level or upto floor 1 level
whichever is lower:
(b) For abutments, piers and well steining: all works upto 1.2 m above the bed level:
(c) For retaining wall, wing walls, compound walls, chimneys, over head reservoirs/
tanks and other elevated structures: All works upto 1.2 metre above the ground level:
(d) For reservoirs/ tanks (other than overhead reservoirs/ tanks): All works upto 1.2
metre above the ground level:
(e) For basements: All works upto 1.2 m above ground level or upto floor 1 level
whichever is lower.
Note: Specific provision shall be made in the estimate for such situations where the
foundation level is more than 3 (three) metre depth from the plinth for all types of
structures mentioned above.

0.7 MEASUREMENTS
0.7.1 In booking dimensions, the order shall be consistent and in the sequence of length,
width and height or depth or thickness.
0.7.2 Rounding off: Rounding off where required shall be done in accordance with IS: 2-
1960. The number of significant places rounded in the rounded off value should
be as specified.
0.8 MATERIALS
0.8.1 Samples of all materials to be used on the work shall be got approved by the
contractor from the Engineer-in-Charge well in time. The approved samples duly
authenticated and sealed shall be kept in the custody of the Engineer-in-Charge till

- 99 -
the completion of the work. All materials to be provided by the contractor shall be
brand new and as per the samples approved by the Engineer- in- Charge.

0.8.2 Materials obtained by the contractor from the sources approved by the Department
shall be subjected to the Mandatory tests. Where such materials do not conform to
the relevant specifications, the matter shall be taken up by the Engineer-in-
Charge for appropriate action against the defaulters. In all such cases, necessary
documents in original and proof of payment relating to the procurement of materials
shall be made available by the contractor to the Engineer-in-Charge.

0.8.3 Samples, whether submitted for approval to govern bulk supplies or required for
testing before use and also the sample of materials bearing ‘Standard mark,’ if
required for testing, shall be provided free of cost by the contractor. All other
incidental expenditure to be incurred for testing of samples e.g. packaging, sealing
transportation, loading, unloading etc. except testing charges shall be borne by the
contractor.

0.8.4 The materials, supplied by the Department shall be deemed to be complying with the
specifications.
0.8.5 Materials stored at site, depending upon the individual characteristics, shall be
protected from atmospheric effects due to rain, sun, wind and moisture to
avoid deterioration.

0.8.6 Materials like timber, paints etc. shall be stored in such a way that there may not be
any possibility of fire hazards. Inflammable materials and explosives shall be
stored in accordance with the relevant rules and regulations or as approved by Engineer-
in- Charge in writing so as to ensure desired safety during storage.

0.8.7 The unit weight of materials unless otherwise specified shall be reckoned as given in
IS: 1911- 1967.
0.9 SAFETY IN CONSTRUCTION

0.9.1 The contractor shall employ only such methods of construction, tools and plant as
are appropriate for the type of work or as approved by Engineer-in-Charge in
writing.

0.9.2 The contractor shall take all precautions and measures to ensure safety of works and
workman and shall be fully responsible for the same. Safety pertaining to
construction works such as excavation, centering and shuttering, trenching,
blasting, demolition, electric connections, scaffolds, ladders, working platforms,
gangway, mixing of bituminous materials, electric and gas welding, use of hoisting
and construction machinery shall be governed by CPWD safety code, relevant safety
codes and the direction of Engineer-in-Charge

0.10 ABBREVIATIONS
The following abbreviations wherever they appear in the specifications, shall have
the meaning or implication hereby assigned to them:
Mm Millimetre
Cm Centimetre
M Metre
Km Kilometre
Mm2/sqmm Square Milimetre
Cm2/sqcm Square centimetre
Dm2/sqdm Square decimetre
- 100 -
 M2/sqm Square metre
Cm3/ cubic cm Cubic centimetre
Dm3/ cubic dm Cubic decimetre
M3/cum Cubic metre
Ml Millilitre
Kl Kilolitre
Gm Gram
Kg Kilogram
Q Quintal
T Tonne
Fps system Foot pound second system
°C Degree Celsius temperature
Fig Figure
Re/Rs Rupee/ Rupees
No Number
Dia Diameter
AC Asbestos cement
CI Cast Iron
GC Galvanised corrugated
GP Galvanised plain
GI Galvanised iron
PVC Polyvenyl chloride
RCC Reinforced cement concrete
SW Stone ware
SWG Standard wire Gauge

0.11 Application of specification and item of work:

This specification forms part of the contract and shall be read in conjunction with
other documents forming the contract, viz. Notice inviting BID, conditions and
requirements of tendering, Scope of work and technical information, General
terms and conditions of contract, General and Technical Specification, drawings, Bill of
quantities and schedule of probable items of works.

The offered rates must cover the cost of all materials, all taxes & duties in vogue,
labour, tools, machinery, plant, explosives, scaffolding, staging, shoring,
props, bamboos, ropes templates, pegs, and all appliances and operations whatever
necessary for efficient execution and completion of the work.

All works are to be executed in accordance with descriptions in the schedule

of item of works along with The specifications, terms, conditions provided
elsewhere in the tender documents.

Item of works and their details, which are not covered by this specification, shall be
carried out as per those of P.W.D department, Govt. of Uttarakhand/CPWD, and
relevant IS recommendation.

Manner of works not included above, should be carried out as per relevant
provisions of CPWD/PWD Uttarakhand Manual relevant I.S. specifications and code of
practice and as per manufacturer‘s specification (where ever necessary), as per direction
of Engineer-In-charge.

The overall outline of works to be done by the contractor and the detail have been
mentioned in the item of works in the schedule and in the specification, drawing and
elsewhere in the tender documents. Each scheduled item has to be carried out and
- 101 -
completed by the contractor at the accepted rate covering the full extent outlined in the
schedule and specification and not withstanding any omission in mentioning of supply
and execution of such component of works except in special case specifically
mentioned. Items indicated in the schedule are exhaustive. Yet if there by any short
fall felt by the tenderer he may include the same while quoting his rate so as to make the
item complete in all respect for successful completion of the work.

The contractor‘s works shall be guided by the total requirement briefly outlined and
shall include additional works other than those component of works mentioned in the item
to complete the work. The tenderer or the contractor has to completely execute the full
requirements ensuring performance guarantee of each component of the works, equipment
and machinery so that all the individual components are brought up to the optimum
condition for sustained and satisfactory operation individually and collectively.

0.12 Site Condition:

The contractor is to visit the site and ascertain local conditions, traffic restrictions,
and obstructions in the area before submission of tender paper to satisfy himself.

0.13 Setting out and leveling:

The contractor is to set out and level all the works in accordance with the approved
drawings, and will be responsible for the accuracy of the same. They have to provide all
instruments, setting out equipments and proper qualified staff required for the setting
works. If any error will be found during checking by the department, re-setting out will
have to be carried out by the contractor with out any extra payment. If any works
found faulty due to erroneous setting outworks, the contractor shall have to rectify the
same with out any extra cost.

0.14 Safety Code:

The contractor shall take adequate precaution to provide complete safety for
prevention of accidents on the site.

0.15 Arrangement of Water & Electricity:

The contractor shall provide and maintain at his own cost, the drinking water for the
labours and staff, construction water for the project, electricity for the construction of
work (If required) and Chowkidar (Guard) for protection of material and site, till the site
is handed over to the complete satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.

0.16 Clear Site:

The site during the execution of works should have sober and tidy appearance with
everything necessary for the work neatly and systematically arranged.

After the completion of the work, the entire site shall be cleared satisfactorily with
(a) all pits, diggings and trenches properly filled up (b) all surfaces adequately dressed (c)
all surplus materials, sheds, tents and all other ancillaries removed from the site at his
own cost.

0.17 Bench Marks and Ground Water Gauges:

The contractor shall establish and protect surveyor‘s benchmarks and base line
marks from damage or movement during work at his cost.

- 102 -
0.18 Inspection:

The contractor shall inspect the site of work and ascertain site conditions and the
nature of soil to be excavated and other work to be executed for completion of the
project.

0.19 Contractor’s Staff:

The contractor must provide at all times efficient staff of trustworthy, skilful and
experienced assistants capable of carrying out the work in accordance with the drawings
and specifications and to correct levels in accordance with the provisions made in the
relevant clause of the PQ Bid document and contract agreements and also as per good
Engineering practices.

0.20 Measurement of Work:

The CONTRACTOR or his authorized site engineer shall be available at site at all
reasonable times to take joint measurement of work done for the purpose of payment and
shall also provide without any extra charges, the necessary measuring instruments
and men.

0.21 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS

Sample of materials in sufficiently large quantity with descriptive data thereof shall
be furnished by the contractor to the Engineer-in-charge well before the collection of
such materials and equipments so as to permit inspection, testing and approval. The
sample shall be properly marked to show the name of the materials, name of manufacturer,
place of origin and item for which it is to be used. After approval, the sample shall be
available for inspection at all time.

All materials to be supplied by the contractor shall conform to the requisite I.S.
specification properly tested and duly certified. Those are to be approved by the Engineer-
in-charge before use.

- 103 -
 SUB HEAD : 1.0
CARRIAGE OF MATERIALS

1.0 GENERAL
The carriage and stacking of materials shall be done as directed by the Engineer-in-
Charge. Any tools and plants, required for the work shall be arranged by the Contractor. The
carriage of materialsincludes loading within a lead of 50 metres, unloading and stacking
within a lead of 50 metres.

GENERAL CONSIDERATION FOR STACKING AND STORAGE

1. Planning of Storage Layout
For any site, there should be proper planning of the layout for stacking and storage of
different materials, components and equipments with proper access and proper
manoeuvrability of the vehicles carrying the material.

STACKING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

Cement
In case cement is received in bags. Cement shall be stored at the work site in a building
or a shed which is dry, leakproof and as moisture proof as possible. The building or shed for
storage should have minimum number of windows and close fitting doors and these should
be kept closed as far as possible. Cement shall be stored and stacked in bags and shall be
kept free from the possibility of any dampness or moisture coming in contact with them.
Cement bags shall be stacked off the floor on wooden planks in such a way as to keep about
150 mm to 200 mm clear above the floor. The floor may comprise of lean cement concrete
or two layers of dry bricks laid on well consolidated earth. A space of 600 mm minimum
shall be left all around between the exterior walls and the stacks In the stacks the cement
bags shall be kept close together to reduce circulation of air as much as possible. Owing to
pressure on the bottom layer of bags sometimes ‘warehouse pack’ is developed in these
bags. This can be removed easily by rolling the bags when the cement is taken out for use.
lumbed bags, if any should be removed and disposed off.

1.8 BRICKS
Bricks shall be stacked in regular tiers as and when they are unloaded to minimize
breakage and defacement. These shall not be dumped at site. Bricks stacks shall be
placed close to the site of work so that least effort is required to unload and transport
the bricks again by loading on pallets or in barrows. Building bricks shall be loaded
or unloaded a pair at a time unless palletized. Unloading of building bricks or
handling in any other way likely to damage the corners or edges or other parts of
bricks shall not be permitted.

1.8.4 Bricks of different types, such as clay bricks, clay fly ash bricks, fly ash lime bricks,
sand lime (calcium silicate) bricks, auto-clave bricks etc. shall be stacked separately.
Bricks of different classification and size consideration (such as, conventional and
modular) shall be stacked separately. Also bricks of different types, such as, solid,
hollow and perforated shall be stacked separately.

1.9 BLOCKS
1.9.1 Blocks are available as hollow and solid concrete blocks, hollow and solid light
weight concrete blocks, autoclaved aerated concrete blocks, concrete stone masonry
blocks and soil based blocks.
- 104 -
1.9.2 Blocks shall be unloaded one at a time and stacked in regular tiers to minimize
breakage and defacement. These shall not be dumped at site. The height of the stack
shall not be more than 1.2 m. The length of the stack shall not be more than 3.0 m, as
far as possible and the width shall be of two or three blocks.

1.9.4 Blocks shall be placed close to the site of work so that least effort is required for
their transportation.

1.10 FLOOR, WALL AND ROOF TILES

1.10.1 Floor, wall and clay roof tiles of different types, such as, cement concrete tiles (plain,
coloured and terrazzo) and ceramic tiles (glazed and unglazed) shall be stacked on
regular platform as far as possible under cover in proper layers and in tiers and they
shall not be dumped in heaps. In the stack, the tiles shall be so placed that the mould
surface of one faces that of another. Height of the stack shall not be more than one
metre. During unloading, these shall be handled carefully so as to avoid breakage.
Tiles of different quality, size and thickness shall be stacked separately to facilitate
easy removal for use in work. Tiles when supplied by manufacturers packed in
wooden crates, shall be stored in crates. The crates shall be opened one at a time as
and when required for use. Ceramic tiles and clay roof tiles are generally supplied in
cartons which shall be handled with.

1.11 AGGREGATES
1.11.1 Aggregates shall be stored at site on a hard dry and level patch of ground. If such a
surface is not available, a platform of planks or old corrugated iron sheets, or a floor
of bricks, or a thin layer of lean concrete shall be made so as to prevent
contamination with clay, dust, vegetable and other foreign matter.

1.11.2 Stacks of fine and coarse aggregates shall be kept in separate stock piles sufficiently
removed from each other to prevent the material at the edges of the piles from
getting intermixed. On a large job, it is desirable to construct dividing walls to give
each type of aggregates its own compartment. Fine aggregates shall be stacked in a
place where loss due to the effect of wind is minimum.

1.13 STEEL
1.13.1 For each classification of steel, separate areas shall be earmarked. It is desirable that
ends of bars and sections of each class be painted in distinct separate colours.

1.13.2 Steel reinforcement shall ordinarily be stored in such a way as to avoid distortion
and to prevent deterioration and corrosion. It is desirable to coat reinforcement with
cement wash before stacking to prevent scaling and rusting.

1.13.3 Bars of different classification, sizes and lengths shall be stored separately to
facilitate issues in such sizes and lengths so as to minimize wastage in cutting from
standard lengths.

1.13.4 In case of long storage, reinforcement bars shall be stacked above ground level by at
least 150 mm. Also in coastal areas or in case of long storage a coat of cement wash
shall be given to prevent scaling and rusting.

1.13.5 Structural steel of different classification, sizes and lengths shall be stored
separately. It shall be stored above ground level by at least 150 mm upon platforms,
skids or anyother suitable supports to avoid distortion of sections. In coastal areas or
- 105 -
 in case of long storage suitable protective coating of primer paint shall be given to
prevent scaling and rusting.

1.17 GYPSUM BOARDS, PLYWOOD, FIBREBOARD, PARTICLE BOARD,

BLOCK BOARD, ETC.
1.17.1 These boards shall be stored flat in a covered clean and dry place. Different sizes and
types of each of these boards shall be stacked separately. The board shall be stacked
on a flat platform on which a wooden frame shall be constructed with 50 mm x 25
mm battens in such a way that it will give support to all four edges and corners of the
boards with intermediate battens placed at suitable intervals to avoid warping. The
boards shall be stacked in a solid block in a clear vertical alignment. The top sheet of
each stack shall be suitably weighed down to prevent warping wherever necessary.
The boards shall be unloaded and stacked with utmost care avoiding damage to the
corners and surface. In case of decorative plywood and decorative boards, the
surfaces of which are likely to get damaged by dragging one sheet over another it is
advisable that these are lifted as far as possible in pairs facing each other.

1.23 WATER

1.23.1 Wherever water is to be stored for construction purposes this shall be done in proper
storage tanks to prevent any organic impurities getting mixed up with it.
1.26 OTHER MATERIALS
1.26.1 Small articles like nails, screws, nuts and bolts, door and window fittings, polishing
stones, protective clothing, spare parts of machinery, linings, packing, water supply
and sanitary fittings, electrical fittings, insulation board, etc, shall be kept in suitable
and properly protected store rooms. Valuable small material such as, copper pipes
and fittings shall be kept under lock and key.

For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 1, Clause 1.0

- 106 -
 SUB HEAD : 2.0
EARTH WORK
DEFINITIONS
Deadmen or Tell Tales: Mounds of earth left undisturbed in pits dug out for borrowing
earth
Burjis: Short pillars of brick/ stone having top surface finished with cement plaster for
marking etc.
Formation or Profile: Final shape of the ground after excavation or filling up.
Foul condition: Filthy and unhygienic conditions where physical movements are hampered
such as soil mixed with sewage or night soil.

Lead : All distances shall be measured over the shortest practical route and not necessarily
the route actually taken. Route other than shortest practical route may be considered in cases
of unavoidable circumstances and approved by Engineer-in-charge along with reasons in
writing. Carriage by manual labour shall be reckoned in units of 50 metres or part thereof.
Carriage by animal and mechanical transport shall be reckoned in one km. unit. Distances of
0.5 km. or more shall be taken as 1 km. and distance of less than 0.5 km. shall be ignored.
However, when the total lead is less than 0.5 km., it will not be ignored but paid for
separately in successive stages of 50 metres subject to the condition that the rate worked on
this basis does not exceed the rate for initial lead of 1 km. by mechanical/animal transport.

Lift: The vertical distance for removal with reference to the ground level. The excavation up
to 1.5 metres depth below the ground level and depositing the excavated materials upto 1.5
metres above the ground level are included in the rate of earth work. Lifts inherent in the
lead due to ground slope shall not be paid for.

Safety rules: Safety rules as laid down by the statutory authority and as provided in
National Building Code (NBC) shall be followed.

2.1 CLASSIFICATION OF SOILS

2.1.0 The earthwork shall be classified under the following categories and measured
separately for each category:
(a) All kind of soils: Generally any strata, such as sand, gravel, loam, clay, mud, black
cotton moorum, shingle, river or nallah bed boulders, siding of roads, paths etc. and
hard core, macadam surface of any description (water bound, grouted tarmac etc.),
lime concrete mud concrete and their mixtures which for excavation yields to
application of picks, showels, jumper, sacrifiers, ripper and other manual digging
implements.
(b) Ordinary rock: Generally any rock which can be excavated by splitting with crow
bars or picks and does not require blasting, wedging or similar means for excavation
such as lime stone, sand stone, hard laterite, hard conglomerate and un-reinforced
cement concrete below ground level. If required light blasting may be resorted to for
loosening the materials but this will not in any way entitle the material to be
classified as ‘Hard rock’.
(c) Hard rock: Generally any rock or boulder for the excavation of which blasting is
required such as quartzite, granite, basalt, reinforced cement concrete (reinforcement
to be cut through but not separated from concrete) below ground level and the like.
2.2 ANTIQUITIES AND USEFUL MATERIALS
2.2.1 Any finds of archaeological interest such as relics of antiquity, coins, fossils or other
articles of value shall be delivered to the Engineer-in-Charge and shall be the
property of the Government. 2.2.2 Any material obtained from the excavation which
in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge is useful shall be stacked separately in

- 107 -
 regular stacks as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and shall be the property of the
Government.
2.3 PROTECTIONS
2.3.1 Excavation where directed by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be securely barricaded
and provided with proper caution signs, conspicuously displayed during the day and
properly illuminated with red lights and/or written using fluorescent reflective paint
as directed by engineer in charge during the night to avoid accident.

2.3.2 The Contractor shall take adequate protective measures to see that the excavation
operations do not damage the adjoining structures or dislocate the Service. Water
supply pipes, sluice valve chambers, sewerage pipes, manholes, drainage pipes and
chambers, communication cables, power supply cables etc. met within the course of
excavation shall be properly supported and adequately protected, so that these
Service remain functional. However, if any service is damaged during excavation
shall be restored in reasonable time.

2.3.3 Excavation shall not be carried out below the foundation level of the adjacent
buildings until underpinning, shoring etc. is done as per the directions of the
Engineer-in-Charge for which payment shall be made separately.

2.3.4 Any damages done by the contractor to any existing work shall be made good by
him at his own cost. Existing drains pipes, culverts, over head wires, water supply
lines and similar Service encountered during the course of execution shall be
protected against damage by the contractor. The contractor shall not store material or
otherwise occupy any part of the site in manner likely to hinder the operations of
such Service.

2.4 SITE CLEARANCE

2.4.1 Before the earth work is started, the area coming under cutting and filling shall be
cleared of shrubs, rank vegetation, grass, brushwood, trees and saplings of girth up
to 30cm measured at a height of one metre above ground level and rubbish removed
up to a distance of 50 metres outside the periphery of the area under clearance. The
roots of trees and saplings shall be removed to a depth of 60cm below ground level
or 30 cm below formation level or 15 cm below sub grade level, whichever is lower,
and the holes or hollows filled up with the earth, rammed and leveled.

2.4.2 The trees of girth above 30 cm measured at a height of one metre above ground shall
be cut only after permission of the Engineer-in-Charge is obtained in writing. The
roots of trees shall also be removed as specified in 2.4.1. payment for cutting such
trees and removing the roots shall be made separately.

2.4.3 Existing structures and Service such as old buildings, culverts, fencing, water supply
pipe lines, sewers, power cables, communication cables, drainage pipes etc. within
or adjacent to the area if required to be diverted/removed, shall be
diverted/dismantled as per directions of the Engineer-in-Charge and payment for
such diversion/dismantling works shall be made separately.

2.4.4 In case of archaeological monuments within or adjacent to the area, the contractor
shall provide necessary fencing alround such monuments as per the directions of the
Engineer-in-Charge and protect the same properly during execution of works.
Payment for providing fencing shall be made separately.

- 108 -
2.4.5 Lead of 50 m mentioned in the ‘Schedule Of Quantities’ is the average lead for the
disposal of excavated earth within the site of work. The actual lead for the lead for
the disposal of earth may be more or less than the 50 m for which no cost adjustment
shall be made in the rates.

2.4.6 Disposal of Earth shall be disposed off at the specified location or as decided by the
Engineer-in-Charge. The contractor has to take written permission about place of
disposal of earth before the earth is disposed off, from Engineer-in-Charge.

2.5 SETTING OUT AND MAKING PROFILES

2.5.1 A masonry pillar to serve as a bench mark will be erected at a suitable point in the
area, which is visible from the largest area. This bench mark shall be constructed as
per Fig. 2.1 and connected with the standard bench mark as approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge. Necessary profiles with strings stretched on pegs, bamboos or
‘Burjis’ shall be made to indicate the correct formation levels before the work is
started. The contractor shall supply labour and material for constructing bench mark,
setting out and making profiles and connecting bench mark with the standard bench
mark at his own cost. The pegs, bamboos or ‘Burjis’ and the bench mark shall be
maintained by the contractor at his own cost during the excavation to check the
profiles.

2.5.2 The ground levels shall be taken at 5 to 15 metres intervals (as directed by the
Engineer-in- Charge) in uniformly sloping ground and at closer intervals where local
mounds, pits or undulations are met with. The ground levels shall be recorded in
field books and plotted on plans. The plans shall be drawn to a scale of 5 metres to
one cm or any other suitable scale decided by the Engineer-in-Charge. North
direction line and position of bench mark shall invariable be shown on the plans.
These plans shall be signed by the contractor and the Engineer-in-Charge or their
authorized representatives before the earth work is started. The labour required for
taking levels shall be supplied by the contractor at his own cost.

2.6 EXCAVATION IN ALL KINDS OF SOILS

2.6.1 All excavation operations manually or by mechanical means shall include excavation
and ‘getting out’ the excavated materials. In case of excavation for trenches,
basements, water tanks etc. ‘getting out’ shall include throwing the excavated
materials at a distance of at least one metre or half the depth of excavation,
whichever is more, clear off the edge of excavation. In all other cases getting out’
shall include depositing the excavated materials as specified. The subsequent
disposal of the excavated material shall be either stated as a separate item or
included with the items of excavation stating lead.

2.6.2 During the excavation the natural drainage of the area shall be maintained.
Excavation shall be done from top to bottom. Undermining or undercutting shall not
be done.

2.6.3 In firm soils, the sides of the trenches shall be kept vertical upto a depth of 2 metres
from the bottom. For greater depths, the excavation profiles shall be widened by
allowing steps of 50 cms on either side after every 2 metres from the bottom.
Alternatively, the excavation can be done so as to give slope of 1:4 (1 horizontal : 4
vertical). Where the soil is soft, loose or slushy, the width of steps shall be suitably
increased or sides sloped or the soil shored up as directed by the Engineer-in-
Charge. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to take complete instructions
in writing from the Engineer-in-Charge regarding the stepping , sloping or shoring to
be done for excavation deeper than 2 metres.
- 109 -
2.6.4 The excavation shall be done true to levels, slope, shape and pattern indicated by the
Engineer-in-Charge. Only the excavation shown on the drawings with additional
allowances for centering and shuttering or as required by the Engineer-in-Charge
shall be measured and recorded for payment.

2.6.5 In case of excavation for foundation in trenches or over areas, the bed of excavation
shall be to the correct level or slope and consolidated by watering and ramming. If
the excavation for foundation is done to a depth greater than that shown in the
drawings or as required by the Engineer-in-Charge, the excess depth shall be made
good by the contractor at his own cost with the concrete of the mix used for
levelling/ bed concrete for foundations. Soft/defective spots at the bed of the
foundations shall be dug out and filled with concrete (to be paid separately) as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.6.6 While carrying out the excavation for drain work care shall be taken to cut the side
and bottom to the required shape, slope and gradient. The surface shall then be
properly dressed. If the excavation is done to a depth greater than that shown on the
drawing or as required by the Engineer-in-Charge, the excess depth shall be made
good by the contractor at his own cost with stiff clay puddle at places where the
drains are required to be pitched and with ordinary earth, properly watered and
rammed, where the drains are not required to be pitched. In case the drain is required
is to be pitched, the back filling with clay puddle, if required, shall be done
simultaneously as the pitching work proceeds. The brick pitched storm water drains
should be avoided as far as possible in filled-up areas and loose soils.

2.6.7 In all other cases where the excavation is taken deeper by the contractor, it shall be
brought to the required level by the contractor at his own cost by filling in with earth
duly watered, consolidated and rammed.
2.6.8 In case the excavation is done wider than that shown on the drawings or as required
by the Engineer-in-Charge, additional filling wherever required on the account shall
be done by the contractor at his own cost.
2.6.9 The excavation shall be done manually or by mechanical means as directed by
Engineer-in-charge considering feasibility, urgency of work, availability of labour
/mechanical equipments and other factors involved. Contractor shall ensure every
safety measures for the workers. Neither any deduction will be made nor any extra
payment will be made on this account.

2.7 EARTH WORK BY MECHANICAL MEANS

Earth work by mechanical means involves careful planning keeping in view site
conditions i.e. type of soil, nature of excavation, distances through which excavated
soil is to be transported and working space available for employing these machines.
The earth moving equipment should be accordingly selected. The earth moving
equipment consists of excavating and transporting equipment. Excavating equipment
may be further classified as excavators and tractor based equipment.
2.7.1 Excavators
Excavators generally used at site are as follows:
(i) Dipper–shovel : It is used for excavating against a face or bank consisting of open-
top bucket or dipper with a bottom opening door, fixed to an arm or dipper stick
which slides and pivots on the jib of the crane. It is suitable for excavating all clay
chalk and friable materials and for handling rock and stone. However, it is not
suitable for surface excavation for which a skimmer is used. (ii) Backhoe : It is
similar to face shovel except that the dipper stick pivots on the end of the jib and the
dipper or bucket works towards the chassis and normally has no bottom door but is
emptied by swinging away from the chassis to invert the bucket. It may be designed
- 110 -
 to carry both a front –mounted bucket loading mechanism and a rear mounted
backhoe. It is mainly used to excavate trenches and occasionally used for the
excavation of open areas such as small basements. In the backhoe mode the bucket
lifts, swings and discharges materials while the undercarriage is stationary. When
used in the ‘loader’ mode, the machine loads or excavated through forward motion
of the machine, and lifts, transports and discharges materials.
(iii) Skimmer : This arrangement is similar to the face shovel except that in this case the
bucket slides on rollers directly along the jib and thus has a more restricted
movement. It is used for surface excavation and levelling in conjunction with
transport to haul away the excavated material.
(iv) Dragline : It is usually fitted with a long slender boom or jib and the bucket, which
in operation faces towards the machine and has no door, is supported by cable only
as on a crane. It works from the side of the excavation at normal ground level and is
used for excavating large open excavations such as basements when the depth is
beyond the limit of the boom of a backhoe. It is commonly used for open cast
mining operations.
(v) Clamshell : It consists of two hinged half-buckets or jaws pivoted to a frame which
is suspended by cable from a long jib of an excavation. The grab is used for deep
excavations of limited area on all types of soil except rock. Crane and Grab is a
variant of this type of equipment.

2.7.2 Tractor–based Equipment

It is a self–propelled crawler or wheeled machine used to exert a push or pull force
through mounted equipment. It is designed either as attachments to normal tracked
or wheeled tractors or as machines in which the earth moving attachments and the
tractor are designed as a single integrated unit. A tractor, which is hydraulically
operated, can be rigged as :
(i) Loaders : It is used for loading, light dozing, scraping and grabbing operations,
lifting and transporting the materials (loose earth, rubble, sand, gravel aggregate etc)
at various sites through forward motion of the machine.
(ii) Tractor Shovel : This consists of a tipping bucket at the front attached by strong
pivoted arms or booms to the frame of the machine. It is used for stripping top soil,
excavating against a face, bulldozing and for loading spoil or loose materials. It is
similar to crawler dipper-shovel.
(iii) Trench Digger : It operates on the same principle as a backhoe excavator except
that the bucket is controlled by hydraulic rams instead of cables and pulleys.
(iv) Scraper : Scrapers provide unique capability to excavate, load, haul and dump
materials. Scrapers are available in various capacities by a number of manufacturers
with options such as self – loading with elevators, twin engines or push-pull
capability. They are cost effective where the haul distance is too long for bulldozers,
yet too short for trucks. This distance typically ranges from 120 m to 1200 m;
however, the economics should be evaluated for each project. Scraper has an open
bowl with a cutting edge positioned between the axles, which cuts, loads, transports,
discharges and spreads through forward motion of the machine. Loading through
forward motion of the machine can be assisted by a powered mechanism (elevator)
fixed to the scraper bowl.
(v) Bulldozer and Angle-dozer : The most common equipment used for clearing and
levelling activities is a bulldozer. The terms bulldozer is used to define a tractor
mounted with a dozing blade.The bulldozer consists of a rectangular steel blade with
renewable cutting edge set at right angles (capable of only tilting but not angling) to the direct

2.28 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT

2.28.0 Sub-terranean termites are responsible for most of the termite damage in buildings.
Typically, they form nests or colonies underground. In the soil near ground level in a
- 111 -
 stump or other suitable piece of timber in a conical or dome shaped mound. The
termites find access to the super-structure of the building either through the timber
buried in the ground or by means of mud shelter tubes constructed over unprotected
foundations. Termite control in existing as well as new building structures is very
important as the damage likely to be caused by the termites to wooden members of
building and other household article like furniture, clothing, stationery etc. is
considerable. Anti-termite treatment can be either during the time of construction i.e.
pre-constructional chemical treatment or after the building has been constructed i.e.
treatment for existing building. Prevention of the termite from reaching the super-
structure of the building and its contents can be achieved by creating a chemical
barrier between the ground, from where the termites come and other contents of the
building which may form food for the termites. This is achieved by treating the soil
beneath the building and around the foundation with a suitable insecticide.
2.28.1 Materials
2.28.1.0Chemicals: Any one of the following chemicals in water emulsion to achieve the
percentage concentration specified against each chemical shall be used:
(i) Chlorphriphos emulsifiable concentrate of 20%
(ii) Lindane emulsifiable concentrate of 20%

Anti-termite treatment chemical is available in concentrated form in the market and

concentration is indicated on the sealed containers. To achieve the specified percentage of
concentration, Chemical should be diluted with water in required quantity before it is used.
Graduated containers shall be used for dilution of chemical with water in the required
proportion to achieve the desired percentage of concentration. For example, to dilute
chemical of 20% concentration. 19 parts of water shall be added to one part of chemical for
achieving 1% concentration.

Engineer-in-Charge shall procure the chemical of required concentration in sealed

original containers directly from the reputed and authorized dealers, chemical shall be kept
in the custody of the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representatives and issued for use
to meet the day’s requirements. Empty containers after washing and concentrated chemical
left unused at the end of the day’s work shall be returned to the Engineer-in-Charge or his
authorized representative.

For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 1, Clause 2.0

- 112 -
 SUB HEAD : 3.0
MORTARS
3.0 GENERAL
Desirable properties of mortars for use in masonry are:
(a) Workability
(b) Water retentivity
(c) Rate of stiffing
(d) Strength
(e Resistance to rain penetration
(f) Durability
3.1 MATERIALS
3.1.1 Water
3.1.1.1 Water used for mixing and curing shall be clean and free from injurious quantities of
alkalies, acids, oils, salts, sugar, organic materials, vegetable growth or other
substance that may be deleterious to bricks, stone, concrete or steel. potable water is
generally considered satisfactory for mixing. The Ph value of water shall be not less
than 6. The following concentrations represent the maximum permissible values: (of
deleterious materials in water).
(a) Limits of Acidity: To neutralize 100ml sample of water, using phenolphthalein as
an indicator, it should not require more than 5ml of 0.02 normal NaOH. The details
of test shall be as given in IS 3025 (part 22).
(b) Limits of Alkalinity: To neturalise 100ml sample of water, using mixed indicator, it
should not require more than 25ml of 0.02 normal H2SO4. The details of tests shall
be as given in IS 3025 (part 23).
(c) Percentage of Solids: Maximum permissible limits of solids when tested in
accordance with IS 3025 shall be as under:
Organic 200mg/ litre
Inorganic 3000 mg/ litre
Sulphates 400 mg/ litre
Chlorides 2000 mg/ litre.for concrete not containing embedded steel and 500
mg./ltr.for reinforced concrete work.
Suspended matter 2000 mg/ litre
The physical and chemical properties of ground water shall be tested along with soil
investigation and if the water is not found conforming to the requirements of IS 456-2000,
the tender documents shall clearly specify that the contractor has to arrange good quality
water for construction indicating the source.

3.1.1.2 Water found satisfactory for mixing is also suitable for curing. However, water used
for curing shall not produce any objectionable stain or unsightly deposit on the
surface.
3.1.1.3 Sea water shall not be used for mixing or curing
3.1.1.4 Water from each source shall be tested before the commencement of the work and
thereafter once in every three months till the completion of the work. In case of
ground water, testing shall also be done for different points of drawdown. Water
from each source shall be got tested during the dry season before monsoon and again
after monsoon.

3.1.2 Cement
3.1.2.1 The cement used shall be any of the following grade and the type selected should be
appropriate for the intended use.
(a) 33 grade ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 269.
(b) 43 grade ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 8112.
(c) 53 grade ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 12269.
(d) Rapid hardening Portland cement conforming to IS 8041.
- 113 -
(e) Portland slag cement conforming to IS 455.
(f) Portland Pozzolana cement (flyash based) conforming to IS 1489 (Part 1).
(g) Portland Pozzolona cement (calcined clay based) conforming to IS 1489 (part 2).
(h) Hydrophobic cement conforming to IS 8043
(i) Low heat Portland cement conforming to IS 12600.
(j) Sulphate resisting Portland cement conforming to IS 12330
(k) White cement conforming to IS 8042
Different types of cement shall not be mixed together. In case more than one type of cement
is used in any work, a record shall be kept showing the location and the types of cement
used.
3.1.2.2 Caution in Use of Cement Grade 53 in Construction: Because of the faster
hydration process, the concrete releases heat of hydration at a much faster rate initially and
release of heat is the higher in case of Grade. 53. The heat of hydration being higher, the
chances of micro-cracking of concrete is much greater. Thus, during initial setting period of
concrete, the higher heat of hydration can lead to damaging micro-cracking within the
concrete which may not be visible at surface. This cracking is different from shrinkage
cracks which occurs due to faster drying of concrete in windy conditions. The situation can
be worse when we tend to increase the quantity of the cement in the concrete with a belief
that such increases are better for both strength and durability of concrete. Thus, it is very
essential to be forewarned that higher grade cement specially grade 53 should be used only
where such use is warranted for making higher strength concrete and also where good
Quality Assurance measures are in place, by which proper precaution are taken to relieve the
higher heat of hydration through chilling of aggregates or by proper curing of concrete.
There are instances where higher grade cement is being used even for low strength concrete,
as, mortar or even for plastering. This can lead to unnecessary cracking of concrete/
surfaces. Another issue to be cautioned against is the tendency of the manufacturers to
project Grade 53 cement as stronger cement, whereas Grade 33 or 43 are enough to produce
the concrete of desired characteristic strength. The scenario of method of production of
cement by various manufacturers should also be kept in mind while ordering various grades
of cement. The ability to produce cements of particular fineness get fixed by the machinery
installed by the manufacturers, and thus the ability to produce other various grades of
cement by a particular manufacturer also gets limited. Whereas tendency today is to supply
the consumer what he orders for by the manufacturers by simply stamping such grades on
the bags. Thus, it is often observed that cement bags marked as grade 33 or 43 may really be
containing cements of much higher grade.

3.1.2.3 Compressive Strength : Compressive strength requirement of each type of cement

for various grades when tested in accordance with IS 4031 (part 6) shall be as under:

3.1.2.4 Setting Time: Setting time of cement of any type of any grade when tested by Vicat
apparatus method described in IS 4031 shall conform to the following requirement:
(a) Initial setting time: Not less than 30 minutes
(b) Final setting time: Not more than 600 minutes

- 114 -
3.1.2.5 Supply : The cement shall be packed in jute sacking bags conforming to IS 2580,
double hessian bituminized (CRI type) or woven HDPE conforming to IS 11652.
Woven polypropylene conforming to IS 11653, jute synthetic union conforming to
IS: 12174, or any other approved composite bags, bearing the manufacturer’s name
or his registered trade mark if any, with grade batch no. and type of cement, with
date of manufacturing of batch of cement. Every delivery of cement shall be
accompanied by a producer’s certificate conforming that the supplied cement
conforms to relevant specifications. These certificates shall be endorsed to the
Engineer-in-Charge for his record. Every consignment of cement must have
identification marks on packages indicating date of manufacturing grade and type of
cement batch no. etc. Cemnt brought to works shall not be more than 6 weeks old
from the date of manufacture. Effective precautionary measures shall be taken to
eliminate dust-nuisance during loading or transferring cement.

3.1.2.6 Stacking and Storage : Cement in bags shall be stored and stacked in a shed which
is dry, leakproof and as moisture-proof as possible. Flooring of the shed shall
consists of the two layers of dry bricks laid on well consolidated earth to avoid
contact of cement bags with the floor. Stacking shall be done about 150 to 200 mm
clear above the floor using wooden planks. Cement bags shall be stacked at least 450
mm clear off the walls and in rows of two bags leaving in a space of atleast 600 mm
between two consecutive rows. In each row the cement bags shall be kept close
together so as to reduce air circulation. Stacking shall not be more than 10 bags high
to avoid lumping under pressure. In stacks more than 8 bags high, the cement bags
shall be arranged in header and stretcher fashion i.e. alternately lengthwise and
crosswise so as to tie the stacks together and minimise the danger of toppling over. A
typical arrangement for storing and stacking of cement is shown in Fig. 1. of sub-
head of Carriage of Materials. Different types of cement shall be stacked and stored
separately. Cement bags shall be stacked in a manner to facilitate their removal and
use in the order in which they are received. For extra safety during monsoon, or
when cement is expected to be stored for an unusually long period, each stack shall
be completely enclosed by a water proofing membrane, such as polyethylene, which
shall cover the top of the stack. Care shall be taken to see that the water proofing
membrane is not damaged at any time during use. Storage of cement at the work site
shall be at the contractor’s expense and risk. Any damage occurring to cement due to
faulty storage in contractor’s shed or on account of negligence on his part shall be
the liability of the contractor.
3.1.3 Fine Aggregate
3.1.3.1 Aggregate most of which passes through 4.75 mm IS sieve is known as fine
aggregate. Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand, crushed stone sand, crushed
gravel sand stone dust or marble dust, fly ash and broken brick (Burnt clay). It shall
be hard, durable, chemically inert, clean and free from adherent coatings, organic
matter etc. and shall not contain any appreciable amount of clay balls or pellets and
harmful impurities e.g. iron pyrites, alkalies, salts, coal, mica, shale or similar
laminated materials in such form or in such quantities as to cause corrosion of metal
or affect adversely the hardening, the strength, the durability or the appearance of
mortar, plaster or concrete. The sum of the percentages of all deleterious material
shall not exceed 5%. Fine aggregate must be checked for organic impurities such as
decayed vegetation humps, coal dust etc. in accordance with the procedure
prescribed in Appendix ‘A’ of Chapter 3.
3.1.3.2 Silt Content : The maximum quantity of silt in sand as determined by the method
prescribed in Appendix ‘C’ of Chapter 3 shall not exceed 8%.
Fine aggregate containing more than allowable percentage of silt shall be washed as
many times as directed by Engineer-in-charge so as to bring the silt content within
allowable limits for which nothing extra shall be paid.
- 115 -
3.1.3.3 Grading : On the basis of particle size, fine aggregate is graded in to four zones.
The grading when determined in accordance with the procedure prescribed in
Appendix ‘B’ of Chapter 3 shall be within the limits given in Table 3.1 below.
Where the grading falls outside the limits of any particular grading zone of sieves,
other than 600 micron IS sieve, by a total amount not exceeding 5 per cent, it shall
be regarded as falling within that grading zone.

Note 1: For crushed stone sands, the permissible limit on 150 micron sieve is increased to
20 per cent. This does not affect the 5 per cent allowance permitted in 3.1.3.4 (e) (1)
applying to other sieves.
Note 2: Allowance of 5% permitted in 3.1.3.4 (e) (1) can be split up, for example it could be
1% on each of three sieves and 2% on another or 4% on one sieve and 1% on another.
Note 3: Fine aggregate conforming to Grading Zone IV shall not be used in reinforced
cement concrete unless tests have been made to ascertain the suitability of proposed mix
proportions.
Note 4: Sand requiring use for mortar for plaster work shall conform to IS 1542 and for
masonry work shall conform to IS 2116.
3.1.3.4 Type and grading of fine aggregate to be used shall be specified. It shall be coarse
sand, fine sand, stone dust or marble dust, fly ash and surkhi. Use of sea sand shall not be
allowed, unless otherwise specified.
(a) Coarse sand shall be either river sand or pit sand or a combination of the two.
Badarpur sand available in Delhi generally falls in category of pit sand. It shall be
clean, sharp, angular, gritty to touch and composed of hard silicious material. Its
grading shall fall within the limits of grading zone I, II, III of Table 3.1. Grading of
sand shall conform to IS 2116 for use in Masonry work.
(b) Fine sand shall be either river sand or pit sand or a combination of the two. Its
grading shall fall within the limits of Grading zone IV of Table 3.1. As a guideline,
fine sand conforming to grading Zone IV can be generally obtained in Delhi by
mixing one part of Badarpur sand and two parts of jamuna Sand (by volume).
Grading of sand shall conform to IS 1542 for use in plaster work.
(c) Stone dust shall be obtained by crushing hard stones or gravel. Its grading shall fall
within the limits of grading Zone, I, II, or III of Table 3.1.
(d) Marble dust shall be obtained by crushing marble. Its grading shall fall within the
limits of Grading Zone IV of Table 3.1. Grading of Marble dust for use in Mortar
shall be as per following table.

- 116 -
(e) Sand for Masonry Mortar and for Plaster- Sand shall consist of natural sand, crushed
stone sand or crushed gravel sand or a combination of any of these. Sand shall be
hard durable, clean and free from adherent coating and organic matter and shall not
contain the amount of clay, silt and fine dust more than specified as under.
Deleterious Material: Sand shall not contain any harmful impurities such as iron,
pyrites, alkalis, salts, coal or other organic impurities, mica, shale or similar
laminated materials, soft fragments, sea shale in such form or in such quantities as to
affect adversely the hardening, strength or durability of the mortar. The maximum
quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities in the sand / Marble dust
shall not exceed the following limits:

Note: For crushed stone sands, the permissible limit on 150 micron IS Sieve is increased to
20%, this does not affect the 5% allowance as per IS 2386 (Part 1).
3.1.3.5 Bulking: Fine aggregate, when dry or saturated, has almost the same Volume but
dampness causes increase in volume. In case fine aggregate is damp at the time of
proportioning the ingredients for mortar or concrete, its quantity shall be increased suitably
to allow for bulkage, which shall be determined by the method prescribed in Appendix ‘D’
of Chapter 3.0 Table 3.3 gives the relation between moisture content and percentage of
bulking for guidance only.

- 117 -
3.1.3.6 Stacking: Fine aggregate shall be so stacked as to prevent dust and foreign matter
getting mixed up with it as far as practically possible. Marble dust in dry condition
shall be collected in bags and properly staked so as not to form lumps, suitable
arrangements shall be made to protect it from moisture similar to those adopted for
stacking of cement bags.
3.1.3.7 Measurements: As the fine aggregate bulks to a substantial extent when partially
wet, measurements shall be taken when the stacks are dry or appropriate allowance
made for bulking.
3.1.4 Broken Brick (Burnt Clay) Fine Aggregate
3.1.4.1 Broken Brick (Burnt Clay) Fine Aggregate, also known as Surkhi, shall be made by
grinding well burnt (but not under or over burnt) broken bricks as specified in IS
3068-1986. It shall not contain any harmful impurities, such as iron pyrites, salts,
coal, mica, shale or similar laminated or other materials in such form of quantity as
to adversely affect hardening, strength, durability or appearance of the mortar. The
maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities in surkhi (all
taken together) shall not exceed five per cent by weight. The particle size grading of
surkhi for use in lime mortars shall be within the limits specified in Table 3.4.

3.1.4.2 Stacking: Surkhi shall be stacked on a hard surface or platform so as to prevent the
admixture of clay, dust, vegetation and other foreign matter. It shall be also protected
form rain and dampness and kept under adequate coverings.
3.1.4.3 Measurements: Surkhi shall be measured in regular stacks in cubic metres.
Alternatively it may be measured by weight when supplied in bags.
3.1.5 Fly Ash
Fly ash is finely divided residue resulting from the combustion of pulverized coal in
boilers. Fly ash is the pulverized fuel ash extracted from the flue gases by any
suitable process such as cyclone separation or electrostatic precipitation. The ash
collected from the bottom of boilers is termed as bottom ash. Fly ash is finer than
bottom ash. Siliceous fly ash (ASTM Class F) containing calcium oxide less than
10% by mass is normally produced from burning anthracite or bituminous coal and
possesses pozzolanic properties. Calcareous fly ash (ASTM Class C) is poruduced
by burning lignite or sub-bituminous coal and contains calcium exide more than 10%
by mass; the content could be as high as 25%. This fly ash has both hydraulic and
pozzolanic properties. It shall be clean and free from any contamination of bottom
ash, grit or small pieces of pebbles. It is obligatory on the part of supplier/
manufacture that the fly ash conforms to the requirements if mutually agreed upon &
shall furnish a certificate to this effect to the purchaser or his representative.

- 118 -
3.1.5.1 Characteristics: The physical requirements of fly-ash shall be as specified in
Annexure ‘E’ of Chapter 3. The chemical properties of fly ash shall be as per IS 3
812 (part 1 & 2) depending on the usage.
3.1.5.2 Stacking: Fly ash shall be protected from dirt collecting on it.
3.1.5.3Measurements: Fly ash shall be measured in regular stacks in cubic metres.
Alternatively it may be measured by weight when supplied in bags.
3.2 PREPARTATION OF MORTARS AND ITS GRADE
3.2.0 Grade of Masonry Mortar
The grade of masonry mortar will be defined by its compressive strength in N/mm2 at the
age of 28 days as determined by the standard procedure detailed in IS 2250.
3.2.0.1 For proportioning the ingredients by volume, the conversion of weight into volume
shall be made on the following basis:

For details of grades and criteria for selection of Masonry mortars see Appendix ‘F’ of
chapter-3.
3.2.1 Cement Mortar
3.2.1.1 This shall be prepared by mixing cement and sand with or without the addition of
pozzolana in specified proportions as per Appendix ‘F’.
3.2.1.2 Proportioning: Proportioning on weight basis shall be preferred taking into account
specific gravity of sand and moisture content . Boxes of suitable size shall be prepared to
facilitate proportioning on weight basis. Cement bag weighting 50 kg shall be taken as 0.035
cubic metre. Other ingredients in specified proportion shall be measured using boxes of size
40 x 35 x 25 cm. Sand shall be measured on the basis of its dry volume in the case of
volumetric proportioning.
3.2.1.3 Mixing
3.2.1.3.1 The mixing of mortar shall be done in mechanical mixers operated manually or by
power as decided by Engineer-in-Charge. The Engineer-in-Charge may, however, permit
hand mixing at his discretion taking into account the nature, magnitude and location of the
work and practicability of the use of mechanical mixers or where item involving small
quantities are to be done or if in his opinion the use of mechanical mixer is not feasible. In
cases, where mechanical mixers are not to be used, The contractor shall take permission of
the Engineer-in-Charge in writing before the commencement of the work.

(a) Mechanical Mixing: Cement and sand in the specified proportions shall be mixed dry
thoroughly in a mixer. Water shall then be added gradually and wet mixing continued for at
least three minutes. only the required quantity of water shall be added which will produce
mortar of workable consistency but not stiff paste. Only the quantity of mortar, which can
be used within 30 minutes of its mixing shall be prepared at a time. Mixer shall be cleaned
with water each time before suspending the work.

(b) Hand Mixing: The measured quantity of sand shall be leveled on a clean masonry
platform and cement bags emptied on top. The cement and sand shall be thoroughly mixed
dry by being turned over and over, backwards and forwards, several times till the mixture is
of a uniform colour. The quantity of dry mix which can be used within 30 minutes shall then
be mixed in a masonry trough with just sufficient quantity of water to bring the mortar to a
stiff paste of necessary working consistency.

3.2.1.4 Precautions: mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and before it
begins to set, and in any case within half hour, after the water is added to the dry mixture.

- 119 -
3.2.2 Cement Flyash Sand Mortar

3.2.2.1 This shall be prepared by mixing cement, flyash and sand in specified proportions as
per Appendix G. Mixing shall be done in a mechanical mixer (operated manually or by
power) unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge in writing. The Engineer-in-
Charge may, however, permit hand mixing at his discretion, taking into account the nature,
magnitude and location of the work and practicability of the use of mechanical mixer or
where items involving small quantities are to be done or if in his opinion the use of
mechanical mixer is not feasible. In case, where mechanical mixer is not to be used, the
contractor shall take permission of the Engineer-in-Charge in writing before the
commencement of the work.

3.2.2.2 Proportioning: Proportioning on weight basis shall be preferred taking into account
specific gravity of Fly Ash, sand and moisture content. Boxes of suitable size shall be
prepared to facilitate proportioning on weight basis. Cement bag weighting 50 kg shall be
taken as 0.035 cubic metre. Other ingredients in the specified proportions shall be measured
using boxes of suitable sizes. Sand and flyash shall be measured on the basis of their dry
volume in the case of volumetric proportioning.

3.2.2.3 Mixing
(a) Mechanical Mixing: Sand and flyash in the specified proportions shall be mixed dry in a
mixer and then the specified quantity of cement shall be added and mixed dry thoroughly.
Water shall then be added gradually and wet mixing continued for atleast one minute. Water
shall be just sufficient to bring the mortar to the consistency of a workable paste. Only the
quantity of mortar which can be used within 30 minutes of its mixing shall be prepared at a
time.
(b) Hand Mixing: The measured quantity of sand and flyash shall be mixed dry on a clean
masonry platform before adding specified quantity of cement to it. The resulting mixture of
cement, sand and flyash shall then be mixed thoroughly being turned over and over,
backward several times till the mixture is of a uniform colour. The quantity of dry mix
which can be used within 30 minutes shall then be mixed in a clean watertight masonry
trough with just sufficient quantity of water, to bring the mortar to a stiff paste of necessary
working consistency.

3.2.2.4 Precautions: Shall be same as specified in 3.2.1.4.

Note:- For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 1, Sub Head 3.0

- 120 -
 SUB HEAD : 4.0
CONCRETE WORK
4.1. MATERIAL
Water, cement, fine aggregate or sand, surkhi, and fly ash shall be as specified in Chapter
3.0 – Mortar.
4.1.1 Coarse Aggregate
4.1.1.1 General: Aggregate most of which is retained on 4.75 mm IS Sieve and contains
only as much fine material as is permitted in IS 383 for various sizes and grading is
known as coarse aggregate. Coarse aggregate shall be specified as stone aggregate,
gravel or brick aggregate and it shall be obtained from approved/ authorized sources.
(a) Stone Aggregate: It shall consist of naturally occurring (uncrushed, crushed or
broken) stones. It shall be hard, strong, dense, durable and clean. It shall be free from
veins, adherent coating, injurious amounts of disintegrated pieces, alkali, vegetable
matter and other deleterious substances. It shall be roughly cubical in shape. Flaky
and elongated pieces shall be avoided. It shall conform to IS 383 unless otherwise
specified.
4.1.1.2 Deleterious Material: Coarse aggregate shall not contain any deleterious material,
such as pyrites, coal, lignite, mica, shale or similar laminated material, clay, alkali,
soft fragments, sea shells and organic impurities in such quantity as to affect the
strength or durability of the concrete. Coarse aggregate to be used for reinforced
cement concrete. Coarse aggregate to be used for reinforced cement concrete shall
not contain any material liable to attack the steel reinforcement. Aggregates which
are chemically reactive with alkalies of cement shall not be used. The maximum
quantity of deleterious material shall not be more than five percent of the weight of
coarse aggregate when determined in accordance with IS 2386.
4.1.1.3 Size and Grading
(i) Stone aggregate and gravel: It shall be either graded or single sized as specified.
Nominal size and grading shall be as under:-
(a) Nominal sizes of graded stone aggregate or gravel shall be 40, 20, 16, or 12.5 mm as
specified. For any one of the nominal sizes, the proportion of other sizes as
determined by
1.1 the method prescribed in Appendix ‘A’ of Chapter 4 shall be in accordance with
Table 4.1

(b) Nominal sizes of single sized stone aggregate or gravel shall be 63, 40, 20, 16, 12.5
or 10 mm as specified. For any one of the nominal size, the proportion of other
sizes as determined by the method prescribed in Appendix ‘A’ of Chapter 4 shall be
in accordance with Table 4.2.

- 121 -
(c) When stone aggregate or gravel brought to site is single sized (ungraded), it shall be
mixed with single sized aggregate of different sizes in the proportion to be
determined by field tests to obtain graded aggregate of specified nominal size. For
the required nominal size, the proportion of other sizes in mixed aggregate as
determined by method prescribed in Appendix ‘A’ of Chapter 4 shall be in
accordance with Table 4.1. Recommended proportions by volume for mixing of
different sizes of single size (ungraded) aggregate to obtain the required nominal size
of graded aggregate are given in Table 4.3

.
Note:
(i) The proportions indicated in Table 4.3 above are by volume when considered
necessary, these proportions may be varied marginally by Engineer-in-Charge after
making sieve analysis of aggregate brought to site for obtaining required graded
aggregate.
(ii) No adjustments in rate shall be made for any variation in the proportions so ordered
by the Engineer-in-Charge. If single size coarse aggregate are not premixed at site to
obtain the graded coarse aggregate required for the mix, the volume of single size
aggregates required for the mix shall be suitably increased to account for reduction
in total volume at the site of mixing.

- 122 -
 (ii) Brick Aggregate: Nominal size of brick aggregate shall be 40 mm and its grading
shall be as specified in Table 4.4 when tested for sieve analysis for the method
prescribed in Appendix ‘A’ of Chapter 4.0.

4.1.1.4 Stacking: Aggregate shall be stacked on a hard, dry and level patch of ground.
When stackpiling, the aggregate shall not form pyramids resulting in segregation of
different sized materials. It shall be stacked separately according to nominal size of coarse
aggregates. Stacking shall be done in regular stacks, of height not exceeding 100 cm.

4.1.1.5 Testing: Coarse aggregate shall be tested for the followings (as per IS 2386)
(a) Determination of particle size and shape (Appendix ‘A’ of Chapter 4)
(b) Estimation of organic impurities (as per IS 2386 - Part II)
(c) Surface moisture (Appendix ‘B’ of Chapter 4)
(d) Determination of 10% fine value (Appendix ‘C’ of Chapter 4)

4.1.1.6 Measurements: The aggregates shall be measured in stacks and paid for after
making a deduction of 7.5% of the gross measurements of stacks in respect of aggregates of
nominal size 40 mmand above. No deduction from the gross measurements of the stacks is
to be made in respect of aggregate of nominal size below 40 mm.

4.1.2 Chemical Admixtures

When required, admixtures of approved quality shall be mixed with concrete, as specified.
The admixtures shall conform to IS 9103 and as specified in Chapter 5 - R.C.C.

4.1.2.1 Admixtures may be any one of the following classes for use in concrete:-
(a) Water Reducing Admixtures
(b) Retarding Admixtures
(c) Accelerating Admixtures.
(d) Water Reducing and Retarding Admixtures.
(e) Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures.
(f) Permeability Reducing (water proofing) Admixtures.

4.1.2.2 Liquid Admixtures: Admixtures introduced into the concrete as liquids generally
fall into thefollowing categories.
(a) Air Entraining.
(b) Water Reducing.
(c) Water Reducing Retarders.
(d) Retarders.
(e) Water Reducing Accelerators.
(f) Accelerators.

4.1.2.3 Dosage of these admixtures may vary according to manufacturers specification.

4.1.2.4 Two or more admixtures may not be compatible in the same solution. It is therefore
mandatory that when two admixtures manufactured by the same manufacturers is being used
simultaneously, the manufacturer shall certify their compatibility. In case the two or more
admixtures are produces by different manufacturers, then, before their use in concrete, test

- 123 -
shall be performed by the manufacturer to establish their compatibility, all such test reports
shall be furnished to the Engineer-in-Charge for his approval before their use in concrete.

4.1.2.5 Some admixture may be in the form of powder, particle or high concentration liquids
which may require mixing with water prior to dosing. Under these conditions water in
solution shall be considered as part of total water content in the batch in order to maintain
the water-cement ratio.

4.1.2.6 Admixture manufacturer’s recommendation shall be carefully followed so as to

ensure complete solution of the product or to prepare a standard solution of uniform strength
for easier use.

4.1.2.7 Certain admixtures may contain significant amounts of finely divided insoluble
materials or active ingredients which may or may not be readily soluble. It is essential for
such admixtures that precautions be taken to ensure that these constituents be kept in a state
of uniform suspension before actual batching. When relatively small amounts of powered
admixtures are to be used directly, these shall be pre-blended with cement.

4.1.2.8 Admixtures are sold under various trade names and may be in the form of liquids or
powders. The proprietary name and the net quantity of content shall be clearly indicated in
each package or container of admixtures. The admixtures shall be uniform within each batch
and uniform between all batches.

4.1.2.9 No admixtures shall be accepted for use in concrete unless these are tested in
accordance with IS 9103 and the test results are approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

4.2. CEMENT CONCRETE

4.2.1 Grades of Cement Concrete
The concrete shall be in grade designated as under:

Notes :
1. In the designation of concrete mix M refers to the mix and the number to the specified
compressive strength of 150 mm size cube at 28 days, expressed in N/mm2.

- 124 -
2. For concrete of compressive strength greater than M55, design parameters given in the
standard may not be applicable and the values may be obtained from specialized literatures
and experimental results.
4.2.1.1 The characteristic strength is defined as the strength of material below which not
more than 5percent of the test results are expected to fall.

Notes:
1. Cement content prescribed in this Table is irrespective of the grades of cement. The
additions such as fly or ground granulated blast furnace slag may be taken into account in
the concrete composition with respect to the cement content and water-cement ratio, if the
suitability is established and as long as the maximum amounts taken into account do not
exceed the limit of pozzolona and slag specified in IS 1489 (Part 1) and IS 455 respectively.
2. Minimum grade for plain concrete under mild exposure condition is not specified.
3. The above minimum cement content and maximum water cement ratio apply only to 20
mm nominal maximum size aggregate. For other sizes of aggregate, these should be
changed as per The minimum grade of concrete for plain and reinforced concrete shall be as
per
4.2.1.2 Concrete of grades lower than those given in may be used for lean concrete,
foundation for masonry walls or temporary reinforced concrete construction.

4.2.2 Workability of Concrete

4.2.2.1 The concrete mix proportion chosen should be such that the concrete is of adequate
workability for the placing conditions of the concrete and can properly be compacted with
the means available Suggested ranges of workability of concrete measured in accordance
with IS 1199 are given below:

- 125 -
Note:- For most of the placing conditions, internal vibrators (needle vibrators) are suitable.
The diameter of the needle shall be determined based on the density and spacing of
reinforcement bars and thickness of sections For tremie concrete, vibrators are not required
to be used.
4.2.2.2 In the ‘very low’ category of workability where strict control is necessary, for
example, pavement quality concrete, measurement of workability be determination of
compacting factor will be more appropriate than slump ( see IS 1199) and a value of
compacting factor of 0.75 to 0.80 is suggested.
4.2.2.3 In the ‘very high’ category of workability, measurement of workability by
determination of flow will
be appropriate (see IS 9103).

4.2.3 Concrete Mix Proportioning

4.2.3.1 The determination of the proportion of cement, aggregate and water to attain the
required strength shall be made as follows:
(a) By designing the concrete mix: such concrete shall be called ‘Design mix concrete’, for
details reference may be made to RCC Chapter.
(b) By adopting nominal concrete mix: such concrete shall be called ‘Nominal mix concrete
Design mix concrete is preferred to nominal mix. If design mix concrete cannot be used for
any reason on the work for grades of M20 or lower, nominal mixes may be used with the
permission of Engineer-in-Charge, which, however, is likely to involve a higher cement
content.
4.2.3.2 Nominal Mix Concrete: Nominal Mix Concrete may be used for concrete of M20
or lower. The proportions of materials for nominal mix concrete shall be in accordance with
The cement content of the mix specified in Table 4.7 for any nominal mix shall be
proportionately increased if the quantity of water in the mix has to be increased to overcome
the difficulty or placement and compaction, so that the water cement ratio as specified is not
exceeded.

Note : - The proportion of the fine to coarse aggregate should be adjusted from upper limit
progressively as the grading of fine aggregate becomes finer and the maximum size of
coarse aggregate becomes larger Graded coarse aggregate shall be used.
Note : - Quantity of water required from durability point of view may be less than the value
given above.
Example
For an average grading of fine aggregate (that is, Zone II of Table 4 of IS 383), the
proportions shall be 1:1 ½ , 1:2 and 1:2 ½ for maximum size of aggregates 10 mm, 20 mm
and 40 mm respectively.
- 126 -
4.2.4 Batching
To avoid confusion and error in batching, consideration should be given to using the
smallest practical number of different concrete mixed on any site or in any one plant. In
batching concrete, the quantity of both cement and aggregate shall be determined by mass;
admixture, if solid, by mass: liquid admixture may however be measured in volume or mass:
water shall be weighed or measured by volume in a calibrated tank Ready-mixed concrete
supplied by ready-mixed concrete plant shall be preferred. For large and medium project
sites the concrete shall be sourced from ready-mixed concrete plants or from on site or off
site batching and mixing plants (see IS 4926).

4.2.4.1 Except where it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge that
supply of properly graded aggregate of uniform quality can be maintained over a period of
work, the grading aggregate should be controlled by obtaining the coarse aggregate in
different sizes and blending them in the right proportions when required, the different sizes
being stocked in separate stock-piles. The material should be stock-piled for several hours
preferably a day before use. The grading of coarse and fine aggregate should be checked as
frequently as possible, the frequency for a given job being determined by the Engineer-in-
Charge to ensure that the specified grading is maintained.

4.2.4.2 The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within + 2 percent of the quantity
of cement being measured and within + 3 percent of the quantity of aggregate, admixtures
and water being measured.

4.2.4.3 Proportion/Type and grading of aggregates shall be made by trial in such a way so as
to obtain densest possible concrete. All ingredients of the concrete should be used by mass
only.

4.2.4.4 Volume batching may be allowed only where weigh-batching is not practicable and
provided accurate used in concrete have earlier been established. Allowance for bilking shall
be made in accordance with IS 2386 (Part 3). The mass volume relationship should be
checked as frequently as necessary, the frequency for the given job being determined by
Engineer-in-Charge to ensure that the specified grading is maintained.

4.2.4.5 It is important to maintain the water cement ratio constant at its correct value. To this
end, determination of moisture contents in both fine and coarse aggregates shall be made as
frequently as possible, the frequency for a given job being determined by the Engineer-in-
Charge according to weather conditions. The amount of the added water shall be adjusted to
compensate for any observed variations in the moisture contents. For the determination of
moisture content in the aggregates, IS 2386 (Part 3) may be referred to. To allow for the
variation in mass for aggregate due to variations in their moisture content, suitable
adjustments in the masses of aggregates shall be made. In the absence of exact data, only in
the case of nominal mixes, the amount of surface water may be estimated from the values
given in Table 4.8.

- 127 -
4.2.4.6 No substitutions in materials used on the work or alteration in the established
proportions, except as permitted in 4.2.4.4 and 4.2.4.5 shall be made without additional tests
to show that the quality and strength of concrete are satisfactory.

4.2.5 Mixing
Concrete shall be mixed in mechanical batch type concrete mixers conforming to IS 1791
having two blades and fitted with power loader (lifting hopper type). Half bag mixers and
mixers without lifting hoppers shall not be used for mixing concrete. In exceptional
circumstances, such as mechanical breakdown of mixer, work in remote areas or power
breakdown and when the quantity of concrete work is very small, hand mixing may be done
with the specific prior permission of the Engineer-in-Charge in writing subject to adding
10% extra cement. When hand mixing is permitted, it shall be carried out on a water tight
platform and care shall be taken to ensure that mixing is continued until the concrete is
uniform in colour and consistency. Before mixing the brick aggregate shall be well soaked
with water for a minimum period of two hours and stone aggregate or gravel shall be
washed with water to remove,
dirt, dust and other foreign materials. For guidance, the mixing time may be 11/2 to 2
minutes, for hydrophobic cement it may be taken as 21/2 to 3 minutes.

4.2.5.1 Power Loader: Mixer will be fitted with a power loader complying with the
following requirements.
(a) The hopper shall be of adequate capacity to receive and discharge the maximum nominal
batch of unmixed materials without spillage under normal operating conditions on a level
site.
Note: In such a case the volume of the maximum nominal batch of mixed material is 50%
greater than the nominal mixed batch capacity.
(b) The minimum inside width of the feeding edge of the hopper shall be as specified below
in Table4.9.

(c) The design of the loader shall be such that it allows the loading hopper to be elevated to
such a height that the centre line of the chute plate of the hopper when in discharge position,
is at an angle of not less than 50º to the horizontal. A mechanical device to aid discharge of
the contents as quickly as possible from the hopper to the drum may also be provided. Even
when a mechanical device is provided, it is recommended that the angle of centre line of the
chute plate of the hopper when in discharge position, should be as larger as practicable,
- 128 -
preferably not less than 40º to horizontal. (d) When the means of raising and lowering the
loading hopper includes flexible wire ropes winding on to a drum or drums, the method of
fastening the wire to rope to the drums shall be such as to avoid, as far as possible any
tendency to cut the strands of the ropes and the fastening should preferably be positioned
clear of the barrel of the drum for example, outside the drums flange When the loading
hopper is lowered to its normal loading position, these should be at least one and a half
drums of rope on the drum.c) The design of the loader shall be such that it allows the
loading hopper to be elevated to such a height that the centre line of the chute plate of the
hopper when in discharge position, is at an angle of not less than 50º to the horizontal. A
mechanical device to aid discharge of the contents as quickly as possible from the hopper to
the drum may also be provided. Even when a mechanical device is provided, it is
recommended that the angle of centre line of the chute plate
of the hopper when in discharge position, should be as larger as practicable, preferably not
less than 40º to horizontal.
(d) When the means of raising and lowering the loading hopper includes flexible wire ropes
winding on to a drum or drums, the method of fastening the wire to rope to the drums shall
be such as to avoid, as far as possible any tendency to cut the strands of the ropes and the
fastening should preferably be positioned clear of the barrel of the drum for example,
outside the drums flange When the loading hopper is lowered to its normal loading position,
these should be at least one and a half drums of rope on the drum.
(e) Clutch brake and hydraulic control lever shall be designed so as to prevent displacement
by liberation or by accidental contact with any person.
(f) The clutch and brake control arrangements shall also be so designed that the operator can
control the falling speed of the loader.
(g) Safety device shall be provided to secure the hopper in raised position when not in use.

4.2.5.2 Mixing Efficiency: The mixer shall be tested under normal working conditions in
accordance with the method specified in IS 4643 with a view to check its ability to mix the
ingredients to obtain concrete having uniformity within the prescribed limits. The
uniformity of mixed concrete shall be evaluated by finding the percentage variation in
quantity (mass in water) of cement, fine aggregate and coarse aggregate in a freshly mixed
batch of concrete.
The percentage variation between the quantities of cement, fine aggregate and coarse
aggregates(as found by weighing in water) in the two halves of a batch and average of the
two halve of the batch shall not be more than the following limits:
Cement 8%Fine aggregate 6%Coarse aggregate 5%

4.2.5.3 Machine Mixing: The mixer drum shall be flushed clean with water. Measured
quantity of coarse aggregate shall be placed first in the hopper. This shall be followed with
measured quantity of fine aggregate and then cement. In case fine aggregate is damp, half
the required quantity of coarse aggregate shall be placed in the hopper, followed by fine
aggregate and cement. Finally the balance quantity of coarse aggregate shall be fed in the
hopper, & then the dry materials are slipped into the drum by raising the hopper. The dry
material shall be mixed for at least four turns of the drum. While the drum is rotating, water
shall be added gradually to achieve the water cement ratio as specified or as required by the
Engineer-in-Charge. After adding water, the mixing shall be continued until concrete of
uniform colour, uniformly distributed material and consistency is obtained. Mixing shall be
done for atleast two minutes after adding water. If there is segregation after unloading from
the mixer, the concrete should be remixed. The drum shall be emptied before recharging.
When the mixer is closed down for the day or at any time exceeding 20 minutes, the drum
shall be flushed cleaned with water.

- 129 -
4.2.5.4 Hand Mixing: When hand mixing has been specifically permitted in exceptional
circumstances by the Engineer-in-Charge in writing, subject to adding 10% extra cement, it
shall be carried out on a smooth, clean and water tight platform of suitable size. Measured
quantity of sand shall be spread evenly on the platform and the cement shall be dumped on
the sand and distributed evenly. Sand and cement shall be mixed intimately with spade until
mixture is of even colour throughout. Measured quantity of coarse aggregate shall be spread
on top of cement sand mixture and mixing done by showlling and turning till the coarse
aggregate gets evenly distributed the cement sand mixture. Three quarters of the total
quantity of water required shall be added in a hollow made in the middle of the mixed pile
and the material is turned towards the middle of pile with spade. The whole mixture is
turned slowly over and again and the remaining quantity of water is added gradually. The
mixing shall be continued until concrete of uniform colour and consistency is obtained. The
mixing platform shall be washed and cleaned at the end of the day.

4.2.5.5 Transportation and Handling : Concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the
place of laying as rapidly as possible by methods which will prevent the segregation or loss
of any of the ingredients and maintaining the required workability. During hot or cold
weather, concrete shall be transported in deep containers, other suitable methods to reduce
the loss of water by evaporation in hot weather and heat loss in cold weather may also be
adopted.

4.2.6 Placing
The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid
rehandling. It shall be laid gently (not thrown) and shall be thoroughly vibrated and
compacted before setting commences and should not be subsequently disturbed. Method of
placing shall be such as to preclude segregation. Care shall be taken to avoid displacement
of reinforcement or movement of form work and damage due to rains. As a general
guidance, the maximum free fall of concrete may be taken as 1.5 metre.

4.2.7 Compaction
Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and fully worked around embedded fixtures and
into corners of the form work. Compaction shall be done by mechanical vibrator of
appropriate type till a dense concrete is obtained. The mechanical vibrators shall conform to
IS 2505, IS 2506, IS 2514 and IS 4656. To prevent segregation, over vibration shall be
avoided.
Compaction shall be completed before the initial setting starts. For the items where
mechanical vibrators are not to be used, the contractor shall take permission of the
Engineer-in-Charge in writing before the start of the work. After compaction the top surface
shall be finished even and smooth with wooden trowel before the concrete begins to set.

4.2.8 Construction Joints

Concreting shall be carried out continuously upto construction joints. The position and
arrangement of construction joints shall be as shown in the structural drawings or as directed
by the Engineer-in- Charge. Number of such joints shall be kept minimum. Joints shall be
kept as straight as possible. Construction joints should comply with IS 11817.

4.2.8.1 When the work has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, such surface
shall be roughened. It shall then be swept clean and thoroughly wetted. For vertical joints,
neat cement slurry, of workable consistency by using 2 kgs of cement per sqm shall be
applied on the surface before it is dry. For horizontal joints, the surface shall be covered
with a layer of mortar about 10-15 mm thick composed of cement and sand in the same ratio
as the cement and sand in concrete mix. This layer of cement slurry of mortar shall be
freshly mixed and applied immediately before placing of the concrete.

- 130 -
4.2.8.2 Where the concrete has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be removed by
scrubbing the wet surface with wire or bristle brushes, care being taken to avoid
dislodgement of particles of coarse aggregate. The surface shall be thoroughly wetted and
all free water removed. The surface shall then be coated with neat cement slurry @ 2 kgs of
cement per sqm. On this surface, a layer of concrete not exceeding 150 mm in thickness
shall first be placed and shall be well rammed against old work particular attention being
paid to corners and close spots; work, thereafter, shall proceed in the normal way.

4.2.10 Curing
Curing is the process of preventing loss of moisture from the concrete. The following
methods shall be employed for effecting curing.

4.2.10.1 Moist Curing : Exposed surfaces of concrete shall be kept continuously in a damp
or wet condition by ponding or by covering with a layer of sacking, canvas, Hessian or
similar materials and kept constantly wet for at least 7 days from the date of placing
concrete in case of ordinary Portland cement and at least 10 days where mineral admixtures
or blended cements are used. The period of curing shall not be less than 10 days for concrete
exposed to dry and hot weather conditions. In the case of concrete where mineral
admixtures or blended cements are used, it is recommended that above minimum periods
may be extended to 14 days.

4.2.10.2 Membrane Curing : Approved curing compounds may be used in lieu of moist
curing with the permission of the Engineer-in-Charge. Such compound shall be applied to
all exposed surfaces of the concrete as soon as possible after the concrete has set.
Impermeable membrane such as polythene sheet covering the concrete surface may also be
used to provide effective barrier against the evaporation. 4.2.10.3 Freshly laid concrete shall
be protected from rain by suitable covering.

4.2.10.4 Over the foundation concrete, the masonry work may be started after 48 hours of its
compaction but the curing of exposed surfaces of cement concrete shall be continued along
with the masonry work for atleast 7 days. And where cement concrete is used as base
concrete for flooring, the flooring may be commenced before the curing period of base
concrete is over but the curing of base concrete shall be continued along with top layer of
flooring for a minimum period of 7 days.

4.2.11 Testing of Concrete

Testing of concrete shall be done as described in chapter of R.C.C.

4.2.12 Form Work

Form work shall be as specified in R.C.C. chapter and shall be paid for separately unless
otherwise specified.

4.2.13 Finishes
Plastering and special finishes other than those, obtained through form work shall be
specified and paid for separately unless otherwise specified.

4.2.14 Durability of Concrete

A durable concrete is one that performs satisfactorily in the working environment during its
anticipated exposure conditions during service. The materials and mix proportions shall be
such as to maintain its integrity and, if applicable, to protect reinforcement from corrosion.
The factors influencing durability include.
(a) The environment;
(b) The cover to embedded steel;
(c) The type and quality of constituent materials;
- 131 -
(d) The cement content and water/ cement ratio of the concrete;
(e) Workmanship, to obtain full compaction and efficient curing; and
(f) The shape and size of the member.

4.2.14.1 Requirements for Durability

4.2.14.1.1 General Environment : The general environment to which the concrete will be
exposed during Its working life is classified into five levels of severity, that is, mild,
moderate, severe, very severe and extreme as described in Table 4.9.

4.2.14.1.5 Sulphates in Concrete : The total water-soluble sulphate content of the concrete
mix, expressed as SO3 should not exceed 4 per cent by mass of the cement in the mix. The
sulphate content should be calculated as the total from the various constituents of the mix.
The 4 per cent limit does not apply to concrete made with supersulphate cement complying
with IS 6909.

- 132 -
- 133 -
4.2.15 Measurements
4.2.15.1Dimensions of length, breadth and thickness shall be measured correct to nearest
cm. except for the thickness of slab and partition which shall be measured to nearest 5 mm.
Areas shall be worked out to nearest 0.01 sqm and the cubic contents of consolidated
concrete shall be worked out to nearest 0.01 cum. Any work done in excess over the
specified dimension or sections shown in the drawing shall be ignored.

4.2.15.2 Concrete work executed in the following conditions shall be measured separately:
(a) Work in or under water
(b) Work in liquid mud
(c) Work in or under foul positions

4.2.15.3 Cast-in-situ concrete and or precast concrete work shall be measured in stages
described in the item of work, such as:
(a) At or near the ground level
(b) Upto specified floor level
(c) Between two specified floor levels
(d) Upto specified height above or depth below plinth level/ defined datum level.
(e) Between tow specified heights or depths with reference to plinth/defined datum level.

4.2.15.4 No deduction shall be made for the following:

(a) Ends of dissimilar materials for example beams, posts, girders, rafters, purlins, trusses,
corbels and steps upto 500 sq cm in cross sections.
(b) Opening upto 0.1 sq metre (1000 sq.cm)
(c) Volume occupied by pipes, conduits, sheathing etc. not exceeding 100 sq cm each in
cross sectional areas.
(d) Small voids such as shaded portions in Figure A to J below when these do not exceed 40
sq cm each in cross section.

Note: In calculating area of opening, the thickness of any separate lintel or sill shall be
included in the height. Nothing extra shall be payable for forming such openings or voids.
Area of Fig. A to G shall be = L x B Area of Fig. H & J shall be = L x {Average of B and
B’}

- 134 -
4.3 DAMP PROOF COURSE
4.4.1 Cement Concrete Layer
This shall consist of cement concrete of specified proportions and thickness. The surface of
brick or stone masonry work shall be levelled and prepared before laying the cement
concrete. Edge of damp proof course shall be straight, even and vertical. Side shuttering
shall consist of steel forms and shall be strong and properly fixed so that it does not get
disturbed during compaction and the mortar does not leak through. The concrete mix shall
be of workable consistency and shall be tamped thoroughly to make a dense mass. When the
sides are removed, the surface should come out smooth without honey coming Continuity
shall be maintained while laying the cement concrete layer and laying shall be terminated
only at the predetermined location where damp proof course is to be discontinued. There
shall be no construction joints in the Damp Proof Course.

4.4.2 Curing
Damp proof course shall be cured for at least seven days, after which it shall be allowed to
dry.

4.4.3 Application of Hot Bitumen

Where so directed, hot bitumen in specified quantity shall be applied over the dried up
surface of cement concrete, properly cleaned with brushes and finally with a piece of cloth
soaked in kerosene oil
Bitumen of penetration A 90 or equivalent where used shall be heated to a temperature of
160º ± 5ºCThe hot bitumen shall be applied uniformly all over, so that no blank spaces are
left anywhere. It will be paid for separately.

4.4.4 Water Proofing Materials

Where so specified, water proofing material of approved quality shall be added to the
concrete mixture in accordance with the manufacturer’s specification stating the quantity of
water proofing material in litres or kg per 50 kg or cement and will be paid for separately.

4.4.5 Measurements
The length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm and its area shall be calculated in
square metres correct to two places of decimal. The depth shall not be less than the specified
thickness at any section.

4.4.6 Rate
The rate is inclusive of the cost of materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above except for the applications of a coat of hot bitumen and addition of water
proofing materials which shall be paid for separately, unless otherwise specified.

- 135 -
 DETERMINATION OF TEN PER CENT FINE VALUE
(Clause 4.1.1.5)

Apparatus: The apparatus for the standard test shall consist of the following:
(a) A 15 cm diameter open-ended steel cylinder, with plunger and base-plate, as shown in
Fig. in the end of this appendix. The surfaces in contact with the aggregate shall be
machined and case hardened or otherwise treated so as to have a diamond (VH) pyramid
hardness number of not less than 650 VH.
(b) A straight metal tamping rod of circular cross-section 16 mm in diameter and 45 to 60
cm long, rounded at one end.
(c) A balance of capacity 3 Kg, readable and accurate to one gram.
(d) I.S. Sieve of sizes 12.5, 10 and 2.36 mm.
(e) A compression testing machine capable of applying a load of 50 tonnes and which can
be operate to give a uniform rate of loading so that the maximum load in any test is reached
in 10 minutes. This load may vary from 0.5 to 50 tonnes.
(f) For measuring the sample, a cylindrical metal measure of sufficient rigidity to retain its
form
under rough usage and of the following internal dimensions:
Diameter 11.5 cm Height 18.0 cm
(g) Means of measuring the reduction in the distance between the plates of the testing
machine tothe nearest one millimetre during the test (for example, dial gauge).

Test Sample: Material for the test shall consist of aggregate passing a 12.5 mm I.S. Sieve
and retained on a 10 mm I.S. Sieve. The aggregate shall be tested in a surface dry condition.
If dries by heating the period of drying shall not exceed four hours, the temperature shall be
100ºC to 110ºC and the aggregate shall be cooled to room temperature before testing. The
quantity of aggregate shall be such that the depth of material in the cylinder, after tamping
as described below, shall be 10 cm. The weight of material comprising the test sample shall
be determined (weight A) and the same weight of sample shall be taken for the repeat test.

Note: About 6.5 kg of natural aggregate is required to provide the two test samoles. Less of
light weight aggregate is required. The measuring cylinder is filled in three layers of
approximately equal depth with aggregate passing a 12.5 mm I.S. Sieve and retained on 10
mm I.S. Sieve. Each layer is subjected to 25 strokes from the tamping rod (16 mm dia and
- 136 -
45 to 60 cm long) rounded to one end, care being taken in case of weak materials not to
break the particles. The surface of the aggregate shall be carefully levelled and the plunger
inserted so that it rests horizontally on this surface.
Test Procedure: The apparatus, with the test sample and plunger in position, shall then be
placed in the compression testing machine. The load shall be applied at a uniform rate so as
to cause a total penetration of a plunger in 10 minutes of about: 15.0 mm for rounded or
partially rounded aggregates

(for example uncrushed gravel) 20 mm for nominal crushed aggregate & 24 mm for honey
combed aggregate (for example expanded shales and slags). These figures may be varied
according to the extent of the rounding or honey combing.
After reaching the required maximum penetration, the load shall be released and the whole
of the material removed from the cylinder and sieved on a 2.36 mm I.S. Sieve. The fines
passing the sieve shall be weighed, and this weight expressed as a percentage of the weight
of the test sample. Normally, this percentage will fall within the range 7.5 to 12.5, but if it
does not, a further test shall be made at a load adjusted appropriately, to bring the
percentage fines within the range of 7.5 to 12.5. A repeat test shall be made at the load that
gives as percentage fines within the range 7.5 to 12.5. Calculations: The mean percentage
fines from the two tests at this load shall be used in the following formula to calculate the
load required to give 10 percentage fines. Load required for 10 percent fines = ×+14 XY 4
Where X = Load in tonnes and
Y= mean percentage fines from two test at X tonnes load.

Reporting of Results: The load required to produce 10 percent fines shall be reported to the
nearest whole number for loads of 10 tonnes or more, the nearest 0.5 tonne for loads of less
than 10 tonnes.
The value expressed to the nearest 0.5 tonne should be as follows:
(a) For normal concrete, not less than 5 tonnes.
(b) For wearing surfaces, not less than 10 tonnes.
(c) For granolithic concrete, not less than 15 tonnes.

Fig. C-4.1 : Apparatus for Determination of Ten per cent Fine Value

- 137 -
 SLUMP TEST
(Clause 4.2.2)

Apparatus: Mould shall consist of a metal frustum of cone having the following internal
dimensions:
Bottom diameter……………………………………………………..20 cm
Top diameter…………………………………………………………10 cm
Height…………………………………………………………………30 cm
The mould shall be of a metal other than brass and aluminum of at least 1.6 mm (or 16 BG)
thickness. The top and bottom shall be open and at right angles to the axis of the cone. The
mould shall have a smooth internal surface. It shall be provided with suitable foot pieces and
handles to facilitate lifting it from the moulded concrete test specimen in a vertical direction
as required by the test. A mould provided with a suitable guide attachment may be used.
Tamping rod shall be of steel or other suitable material 16 mm in diameter 60 mm long and
rounded at one end.

Procedure: The internal surface of the mould shall be thoroughly cleaned and free form
superfluous moisture and any set concrete before commencing the test. The mould shall be
placed on a smooth horizontal, rigid and non-absorbent surface viz. levelled metal plate. The
operator shall hold the mould firmly in place while it is being filled with test specimen of
concrete. The mould shall be filled in four layers, each approximately one quarter of height
of mould. Each layer shall be tamped with twenty five strikes of the rounded end of the
tamping rod. The strokes shall be distributed in a uniform manner over the cross section of
the mould and for the second and subsequent layers shall penetrate into the underlying layer.
The bottom layer shall be tamped through out its depth. After the top layer has been rodded,
the concrete shall be struck off level with trowel or the tamping rod, so that the mould is
exactly filled. Any mortar which shall leak out between the mould and the base plate shall
be cleaned away. The mould shall be removed from the concrete immediately after filling by
raising it slowly and carefully in a vertical direction. The moulded concrete shall then be
allowed to subside and the slump shall be measured immediately by determining the
difference between the height of the mould and that of the highest point of specimen. The
above operations shall be carried out at a place free from vibration or shock, and within a
period of two minutes after sampling.

Result: The slump shall be recorded in terms of millimeters of subsidence of the specimen
during the test. Any slump specimen which collapses or shears off laterally give incorrect
result. If this occurs, the test shall be repeated with another sample. The slump test shall not
be used for very dry mixes as the results obtained are not accurate.

Note:- For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 1, Sub Head 4.0.

- 138 -
 SUB HEAD 5.0
REINFORCED CEMENTCONCRETE WORK
5.0 GENERAL
Reinforced cement concrete work may be cast-in-situ or Precast as may be directed by
Engineer in-m Charge according to the nature of work. Reinforced cement concrete work
shall comprise of the following which may be paid separately or collectively as per the
description of the item of work. (a) Form work (Centering and Shuttering)
(b) Reinforcement
(c) Concreting: (1– Cast-in-situ), (2 – Precast)

Note: Regarding Mix Design M25:- Due to structural/design requirement, M25 design mix
concrete have been taken. It is learnt that due to site condition/remote area the installation of
batch mixing plant is very difficult or practically not feasible for obtaining design mix
concrete as per standard specification. So it is suggested that the contractor can be obtained
M25 grade of concrete by volumetric ratio through mixing of concrete by concrete mixer
and vibrator. To achieve the M25 grade concrete the mix design will be obtained by the
contractor, from any reputed lab through implementing agency or as per the direction of
Engineer Incharge as per available ingredients (Cement, Sand, Aggregate, admixture and
Water). According to mix design the contractor will be allowed to carry out the RCC M25
work after converting the design weight of each ingredient mention in mix design into
volumetric ratio. The trial sample will be prepared by the contractor before commencement
of RCC M25 and after getting satisfactory test report on proposed volumetric ratio, the
contractor will be allowed to start the work as per direction of Engineer Incahrge.

5.1 MATERIALS
5.1.1 Water, cement, fine and coarse aggregate shall be as specified under respective clauses
of chapter 03 mortars and chapter 04 concrete work as applicable.

5.1.2 Fly Ash admixed cement concrete (FACC) and fly ash Blended cements in Cement
Concrete (PPCC) in RCC structures.

5.1.2.0 Fly ash Blended Cements conforming to IS 1489 (Part I) may be used in RCC
structures as per guidelines given below :

5.1.2.1 General
(i) IS 456- 2000 Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete (as amended up to date)
shall be followed in regard to Concrete Mix Proportion and its production as under :
(a) The concrete mix design shall be done as “Design Mix Concrete” as prescribed in
clause-9 of IS 456 mentioned above.
(b) Concrete shall be manufactured in accordance with clause 10 of above mentioned IS 456
covering quality assurance measures both technical and organizational, which shall also
necessarily require a qualified Concrete Technologist to be available during manufacture of
concrete for certification of quality of concrete.
(ii) Minimum M -25 grade of concrete shall be used in all structural elements made with
RCC both in load bearing and framed structure.
(iii) The mechanical properties such as modulus of elasticity, tensile strength, creep and
shrinkage of fly ash mixed concrete or concrete using fly ash blended cements (PPCs) are
not likely to be significantly different and their values are to be taken same as those used for
concrete made with OPC.

- 139 -
(iv) To control higher rate of carbonation in early ages of concrete both in fly ash admixed
as well as PPC based concrete, water/binder ratio shall be kept as low as possible, which
shall be closely monitored during concrete manufacture.
If necessitated due to low water/binder ratio, required workability shall be achieved by use
of chloride free chemical admixtures conforming to IS 9103. The compatibility of chemical
admixtures and super plasticizers with each set OPC, fly ash and /or PPC received from
different sources shall be ensured by trials.
(v) In environment subjected to aggressive chloride or sulphate attach in particular, use of
fly ash admixed or PPC based concrete is recommended. In cases, where structural concrete
is exposed to excessive magnesium sulphate, flyash substitution/content shall be limited to
18% by weight Special type of cement with low C3A content may also be alternatively
used. Durability criteria like minimum binder content and maximum water /binder ratio
also need to be given due consideration in such environment.

(vi) Wet curing period shall be enhanced to a minimum of 10 days or its equivalent. In hot
& arid
regions, the minimum curing period shall be 14 days or its equivalent.

5.1.2.2 Use of Fly ash Admixed Cement Concrete (FACC) in RCC structures
There shall be no bar on use of FACC in RCC structures subject to following additional
conditions.
(i) Fly ash shall have its chemical characteristics and physical requirements etc. conforming
to IS3812 (part I & II) and shall be duly certified.
(ii) To ensure uniform blending of fly ash with cement in conformity with IS 456, a specific
facility needs to be created at site with complete computerized automated process control to
achieve design quality or with similar facility from Ready Mix Concrete (RMC) plants.
(iii) As per IS 1489 (Part-I) maximum 35% of OPC by mass is permitted to be substituted
with fly ash conforming to IS 3812 (Part –I) and same is reiterated.
(iv) Separate storage for dry fly ash shall be provided. Storage bins or silos shall be weather
proof and permit a free flow and efficient discharge of fly ash. The filter or dust control
system provided in the bins or silos shall be of sufficient size to allow delivery of fly ash
maintained at specified pressure to prevent due emission of fly ash dust, which may
interfere weighing
accuracy.

5.1.2.3 Use of Fly Ash Blended Cements in Cement Concrete (PPCC) in RCC
Structures
(i) Subject to General Guidelines detailed out as above, PPC manufactured conforming to IS
1489(Part-I) shall be treated at par with OPC for manufacture of Design Mix concrete for
structural use in RCC.

(ii) Till the time, BIS makes it mandatory to print the %age of fly ash on each bag of
cement, the certificate from the PPC manufacture indicating the same shall be insisted upon
before allowing use of such cements in works.
(iii) While using PPC for structural concrete work, no further admixing of fly ash shall be
permitted.
5.1.3 Steel for Reinforcement
5.1.3.1 The steel used for reinforcement shall be any of the following types (as shown in
Structural Drawings)
(a) Mild steel and medium tensile bars conforming to IS 432 (Part I)
(b) High strength deformed steel bars conforming to IS 1786
(c) Hard drawn steel wire fabric conforming to IS 1566
(d) Structural steel conforming to Grade A of IS 2062
(e) Thermo-mechanically treated (TMT) Bars.
- 140 -
5.1.3.2 Elongation percent on gauge length is 5.65 A where A is the cross sectional areas of
the test piece.
5.1.3.3 Mild steel is not recommended for the use in structures located in earthquake zone
subjected to severe damage and for structures subjected to dynamic loading (other than wind
loading) such as railway and highway bridges.
5.1.3.4 Welding of reinforcement bars covered in this specification shall be done in
accordance with the
requirements of IS 2751.
Nominal mass/weight : The tolerance on mass/ weight for round and square bars shall be
the percentage given in Table 5.1 of the mass/ weight calculated on the basis that the
masses of the bar/wire of nominal diameter and of density 7.85 kg/ cm3 or 0.00785
kg/mm3.

+ for individual sample plus tolerance is not specified (x) for coil batch tolerance is not
applicable
Tolerance shall be determined in accordance with method given in IS 1786.

5.1.3.5 High strength deformed bars & wires shall conform to IS 1786. The physical
properties for all sizes of steel bars are mentioned below in Table 5.2.

- 141 -
5.1.3.6 Chemical composition of reinforcement bars shall be as per Table 5.3 as follows:-

5.1.3.7 Thermo Mechanically treated reinforcement bars:

(a) There is no BIS code for TMT bars. The available code BIS 1786 pertains to HSD Bars.
Therefore there should be no stipulation that TMT bars should conform to relevant BIS
code.
(b) The TMT bars are being produced under valid licence from either of the firms namely
Tempcore Thermex Evcon Turbo & Turbo Quench. These firms have acquired patents and
are giving licences to various producers to produce TMT Bars.
(c) The TMT bars shall conform to IS 1786 pertaining to Fe 415 D or Fe 500 D or Fe grade
of steel as specified.
(d) In design and construction of reinforced concrete building in seismic zone III and above,
steel reinforcement of Grade Fe 415 D shall be used. However, high strength deformed steel
bars, produced by thermo mechanical treatment process of grade Fe 415, Fe 500 and Fe 550
having elongation more than 14.5. % and conform to other requirements of Fe 415 D, Fe
500 D and Fe550 D respectively of IS 1786 may also be used for reinforcement. In future,
latest provision of IS 456 and IS 13920 or any other relevant code as modified from time to
time shall be applicable.

5.2 FORM WORK (CENTRING & SHUTTERING)

5.2.1 Form Work

Form work shall include all temporary or permanent forms or moulds required for forming
the concrete which is cast-in-situ, together with all temporary construction required for their
support.

5.2.2 Design & Tolerance in Construction

Form work shall be designed and constructed to the shapes, lines and dimensions shown on
the drawings with the tolerance given below.
(a) Deviation from specified dimension of cross +12 mm section of columns and beams -6
mm
(b) Deviation from dimensions of footings
(i) Dimension in Plan (+ 50 mm ( -12 mm
(ii) Eccentricity in plan 0.02 times the width of the footing in the direction of deviation but
notmore than 50 mm.
(iii) Thickness + 0.05 times the specified thickness.
(Note- These tolerance apply to concrete dimensions only, and not to positioning of vertical
steel or dowels).

5.2.3 General Requirement

It shall be strong enough to withstand the dead and live loads and forces caused by ramming
and librations of concrete and other incidental loads, imposed upon it during and after
casting of concrete. It shall be made sufficiently rigid by using adequate number of ties and
braces, screw jacks or hard board wedges where required shall be provided to make up any
settlement in the form work either before or during the placing of concrete. Form shall be so
constructed as to be removable in sections in the desired sequence, without damaging the
surface of concrete or disturbing other sections, care shall be taken to see that no piece is
keyed into the concrete.
- 142 -
5.2.3.1 Material for Form Work
(a) Propping and Centering : All propping and centering should be either of steel tubes with
extension pieces or built up sections of rolled steel.

5.2.3.2 (a) Centering/Staging : Staging should be as designed with required extension

pieces as approved by Engineer-in-Charge to ensure proper slopes, as per design for slabs/
beams etc. and as per levels as shown in drawing. All the staging to be either of Tubular
steel structure with adequate bracings as approved or made of built up structural sections
made form rolled structural steel sections
(b) In case of structures with two or more floors, the weight of concrete, centering and
shuttering of any upper floor being cast shall be suitably supported on one floor below the
top most floor already cast.
(c) Form work and concreting of upper floor shall not be done until concrete of lower floor
has set at least for 14 days.

5.2.3.3 Shuttering: Shuttering used shall be of sufficient stiffness to avoid excessive

deflection and joints shall be tightly butted to avoid leakage of slurry. If required, rubberized
lining of material as
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be provided in the joints. Steel shuttering used or
concreting should be sufficiently stiffened. The steel shuttering should also be properly
repaired before use and properly cleaned to avoid stains, honey combing, seepage of slurry
through joints etc.(a) Runner Joists: RSJ, MS Channel or any other suitable section of the
required size shall be used as runners.
(b) Assembly of beam head over props. Beam head is an adopter that fits snugly on the head
plates of props to provide wider support under beam bottoms.
(c) Only steel shuttering shall be used, except for unavoidable portions and very small
works for which 12 mm thick water proofing ply of approved quality may be used.

5.2.3.4 Form work shall be properly designed for self weight, weight of reinforcement,
weight of fresh concrete, and in addition, the various live loads likely to be imposed during
the construction process(such as workmen, materials and equipment). In case the height of
centering exceeds 3.50 metres, the prop may be provided in multi-stages. A typical detail of
multistage shuttering is given in Fig. 5.9.
5.2.3.5 Camber: Suitable camber shall be provided in horizontal members of structure,
especially in cantilever spans to counteract the effect of deflection. The form work shall be
so assembled as to provide for camber. The camber for beams and slabs shall be 4 mm per
metre (1 to 250 ) or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge, so as to offset the subsequent
deflection, For cantilevers the camber at free end shall be 1/50th of the projected length or
as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

5.2.3.5.1 Typical arrangement of form work for ‘beams, columns and walls’ are shown in
Figures 5.1 to
5.8 and form secured by wall ties is shown in Fig. 5.3.

5.2.3.6 Walls : The form faces have to be kept at fixed distance apart and an arrangement of
wall ties with spacer tubes or bolts is considered best. A typical wall form with the
components identified is given in Fig. 5.1, 5.2 & 5.3. The two shutters of the wall are to be
kept in place by appropriate ties, braces and studs, some of the accessories used for wall
form are shown in Fig. 5.3.

5.2.3.7 Removal of Form work (Stripping Time) : In normal circumstance and where
various types of cements are used, forms, may generally be removed after the expiry of the
following periods:
- 143 -
 5.2.4 Surface Treatment
5.2.4.1 Oiling the Surface : Shuttering gives much longer service life if the surfaces are
coated with suitable mould oil which acts both as a parting agent and also gives surface
protections. A typical mould oil is heavy mineral oil or purified cylinder oil containing not
less than 5% pentachlorophenol conforming to IS 716 well mixed to a viscosity of 70-80
centipoises. After 3-4 uses and also in cases when shuttering has been stored for a long time,
it should be recoated with mould oil before the next use.

5.2.5 Inspection of Form Work

The completed form work shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge
before the reinforcement bars are placed in position. Proper form work should be adopted
for concreting so as to avoid honey combing, blow holes, grout loss, stains or discoloration
of concrete etc. Proper and accurate alignment and profile of finished concrete surface will
be ensured by proper designing and erection of form work which will be approved by
Engineer-in-Charge. Shuttering surface before concreting should be free from any defect/
deposits and full cleaned so as to give perfectly straight smooth concrete surface. Shuttering
surface should be therefore checked for any damage to its surface and excessive roughness
before use.

5.2.5.1 Erection of Form Work (Centering and shuttering): Following points shall be
borne in mind while checking during erection.
(a) Any member which is to remain in position after the general dismantling is done, should
be clearly marked.
(b) Material used should be checked to ensure that, wrong items/ rejects are not used. (c) If
there are any excavations nearby which may influence the safety of form works, corrective
and strengthening action must be taken.
(d) (i) The bearing soil must be sound and well prepared and the sole plates shall bear well
on the ground.
(ii) Sole plates shall be properly seated on their bearing pads or sleepers
(iii) The bearing plates of steel props shall not be distorted.
(iv) The steel parts on the bearing members shall have adequate bearing areas.
(e) Safety measures to prevent impact of traffic, scour due to water etc. should be taken.
Adequate precautionary measures shall be taken to prevent accidental impacts etc.
- 144 -
(f) Bracing, struts and ties shall be installed along with the progress of form work to ensure
strength and stability of form work at intermediate stage. Steel sections (especially deep
sections) shall be adequately restrained against tilting, overturning and form work should be
restrained against horizontal loads. All the securing devices and bracing shall be tightened.

5.2.6 Measurements
5.2.6.1 General : The form work shall include the following:
(a) Splayed edges, notching, allowance for overlaps and passing at angles, sheathing battens,
strutting, bolting, nailing, wedging, easing, striking and removal.
(b) All supports, struts, braces, wedges as well as mud sills, piles or other suitable
arrangements to support the form work.
(c) Bolts, wire, ties, clamps, spreaders, nails or any other items to hold the sheathing
together.
(d) Working scaffolds, ladders, gangways, and similar items.
(e) Filleting to form stop chamfered edges of splayed external angles not exceeding 20mm
wide to beams, columns and the like.
(f) Where required, the temporary openings provided in the forms for pouring concrete,
inserting vibrators, and cleaning holes for removing rubbish from the interior of the
sheathing before pouring concrete.
(g) Dressing with oil to prevent adhesion and
(h) Raking or circular cutting

5.2.6.2 Classification of Measurements : Where it is stipulated that the form work shall be
paid for separately, measurements shall be taken of the area of shuttering in contact with the
concrete surface. Dimensions of the form work shall be measured correct to a cm. The
measurements shall be taken separately for the following.

(a)Foundations, footings, bases of columns etc. and for mass concrete

(b)Walls (any thickness) including attached pilasters, buttresses, plinth and string courses
etc.
(c) Suspended floors, roofs, landings, shelves and their supports and balconies.
(d) Lintels, beams, plinth beams, girders, bressummers and cantilevers.
(e) Columns, pillars, piers, abutments posts and struts.
(f) Stairs (excluding landings) except spiral staircase.
(g) Spiral staircases (including landings).
(h) Arches,Domes, vaults, shells roofs, arch ribs, curvilinear shaped folded plates
(i) Extra for arches, domes, vaults exceeding 6 m span other than curvilinear shaped
(j) Chimneys and shafts.
(k) Well steining.
(l) Vertical and horizontal fins individually or forming box, louvers and bands. facias and
eaves board
(m) Waffle or ribbed slabs.
(n) Edges of slabs and breaks in floors and walls (to be measured in running metres where
below 200 mm in width or thickness).
(o) Cornices and mouldings.
(p) Small surfaces, such as cantilevers ends, brackets and ends of steps, caps and boxes to
pilasters and columns and the like.
(q) Chullah hoods, weather shades, chajjas, corbels etc. including edges and
(r) Elevated water reservoirs.

- 145 -
5.3 REINFORCEMENTS

5.3.1 General Requirements

Steel conforming to para 5.1.3 for reinforcement shall be clear and free from loose mill
scales, dust, loose rust, coats of paints, oil or other coating which may destroy or reduce
bond. It shall be stored in such a way as to avoid distortion and to prevent deterioration and
corrosion. Prior to assembly of reinforcement on no account any oily substance shall be
used for removing the rust.

5.3.1.1 Assembly of Reinforcement : Bars shall be bent correctly and accurately to the size
and shape as shown in the detailed drawing or as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. Preferably
bars of full length shall be used. Necessary cutting and straightening is also included.
Overlapping of bars, where necessary shall be done as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The overlapping bars shall not touch each other and these shall be kept apart with concrete
between them by 25mm or 11/4 times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate whichever
is greater. But where this is not possible, the overlapping bars shall be bound together at
intervals not exceeding twice the dia. of such bars with two strands annealed steel wire of
0.90 mm to 1.6 mm twisted tight. The overlaps/ splices shall be staggered as per directions
of the Engineer-in-Charge. But in no case the overlapping shall be provided in more than
50% of cross sectional area at one section.

5.3.1.2 Bonds and Hooks Forming End Anchorages: Reinforcement shall be bent and
fixed in accordance with procedure specified in IS 2502, code of practice of bending and
fixing of bars for concrete reinforcement. The details of bends and hooks are shown below
for guidance.
(a) U-Type Hook
In case of mild steel plain bars standard U type hook shall be provided by bending ends of
rod into semicircular hooks having clear diameter equal to four times the diameter of the
bar.
Note: In case of work in seismic zone, the size of hooks at the end of the rod shall be eight
times the diameter of bar or as given in the structural drawings.
(b) Bends
Bend forming anchorage to a M.S. plain bar shall be bent with and internal radius equal to
two times the diameter of the bar with a minimum length beyond the bend equal to four
times the diameter of the bar.
5.3.1.3 Anchoring Bars in Tension : Deformed bars may be used without end anchorages
provided, development length equipment is satisfied. Hooks should normally be provided
for plain bars in tension.Development length of bars will be determined as per IS: 456.

5.3.1.4 Anchoring Bars in Compression : The anchorage length of straight bar in

compression shall be equal to the ‘Development length’ of bars in compression as specified
in IS: 456. The projected length of hooks, bend and straight lengths beyond bend, if
provided for a bar in compression, shall be considered for development length.

5.3.1.5 Binders, stirrups, links etc. : In case of binders, stirrups, links etc. the straight
portion beyond the curve at the end shall be not less than eight times and nominal size of
bar.

5.3.2 Welding of Bars

Wherever facility for electric arc welding or gas pressure welding is available, welding of
bars shall be done in lieu of overlap. The location and type of welding shall be got approved
by the Engineer-in-Charge. Welding shall be as per IS 2751 and 9417.

- 146 -
5.3.3 Placing in Position
5.3.3.1 Fabricated reinforcement bars shall be placed in position as shown in the drawings
or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The bars crossing one another shall be tied
together at every intersection with two strands of annealed steel wire 0.9 to 1.6 mm
thickness twisted tight to make the skeleton of the steel work rigid so that the reinforcement
does not get displaced during deposition of concrete.

Notes : 1. For main reinforcement upto 12 mm diameter bar for mild exposure the nominal
cover may be reduced by 5 mm.
2. Unless specified otherwise, actual concrete cover should not deviate from the required
nominal cover by + 10 mm.
3. For exposure condition ‘severe’ and ‘very severe’ reduction of 5 mm may be made,
where concrete rade is M35 and above.
4. Nominal cover to meet specified period of fire resistance shall not be less than as given in
Table 16A of IS 456.

5.3.4 Measurement
Reinforcement including authorized spacer bars and lappages shall be measured in length of
different diameter, as actually (not more than as specified in the drgs.) used in the work
nearest to a centimeter and their weight calculated on the basis of standard weight given in
Table 5.4 below. In case actual unit weight of the bars is less than standard unit weight, but
within variation, in such cases weight of reinforcement shall be calculated on the basis of
actual unit weight. Wastage and unauthorized overlaps shall not be paid for. Annealed steel
wire required for binding or tack welding shall not be measured, its cost being included in
the rate of reinforcement. Where tack welding is used in lieu of binding, such welds shall
not be measured. Chairs separators etc. shall be provided as directed by the Engineer-in-
Charge and measured separately and paid for.

5.4.3 Compaction

It shall be as specified in sub-head of Concrete Work of this specification.

- 147 -
5.4.3.1 Concrete shall be compacted into dense mass immediately after placing by means of
mechanical vibrators designed for continuous operations complying with IS 2505, IS 2506,
IS 2514 and IS 4656. The Engineer-in-Charge may however relax this condition at his
discretion for certain items depending on the thickness of the members and feasibility of
vibrating the same and permit hand compaction instead. Hand compaction shall be done
with the help of tamping rods so that concrete is thoroughly compacted and completely
worked around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures, and into corners of the form. The
layers of concrete shall be so placed that the bottom layer does not finally set before the top
layer is placed. The vibrators shall maintain the whole of concrete under treatment in an
adequate state of agitation; such that de-aeration and effective compaction is attained at a
rate commensurate with the supply of concrete from the mixers. The vibration shall continue
during the whole period occupied by placing of concrete, the vibrators being adjusted so that
the centre of vibrations approximates to the
centre of the mass being compacted at the time of placing.

5.4.3.2 Concrete shall be judged to be properly compacted, when the mortar fills the spaces
between the coarse aggregate and begins to cream up to form an even surface. When this
condition has been attained, the vibrator shall be stopped in case of vibrating tables and
external vibrators. Needle vibrators shall be withdrawn slowly so as to prevent formation of
loose pockets in case of internal vibration. In case both internal and external vibrators are
being used, the internal vibrator shall be first withdrawn slowly after which the external
vibrators shall be stopped so that no loose pocket is left in the body of the concrete. The
specific instructions of the makers of the particular type of vibrator used shall be strictly
complied with. Shaking of reinforcement for the purpose of compaction should be avoided.
Compaction shall be completed before the initial setting starts, i.e. with 30 minutes of
addition of water to the dry mixture.

5.4.5 Expansion Joints

Expansion joints shall be provided as shown in the structural drawings or as indicated in
Fig. 5.10 to 5.25 or as directed by Engineer-in-Charge, for the purpose of general guidance.
However it is recommended that structures exceeding 45 m in length shall be divided by one
or more expansion joints. The filling of these joints with bitumen filler, bitumen felt or any
such material and provision of copper plate, etc. shall be paid for separately in running
metre. The measurement shall be taken two places of decimal stating the depth and width of
joint.

5.4.6 Curing
After the concrete has begun to harden i.e. about 1 to 2 hours after its laying, it shall be
protected from quick drying by covering with moist gunny bags, sand, canvass Hessian or
any other material approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. After 24 hours of laying of
concrete, the surface shall be cured by ponding with water for a minimum period of 7 days
from the date of placing of concrete in case of OPC and at least 10 days where mineral
admixtures or blended cements are used. The period of curing shall not be less than 10 days
for concrete exposed to dry and hot weather condition.

5.4.7 Finishing
5.4.7.1 In case of roof slabs the top surface shall be finished even and smooth with wooden
trowel, before the concrete begins to set. Sprinkling of dry cement while finishing shall
not be resorted to.

- 148 -
5.4.7.2 Immediately on removal of forms, the R.C.C. work shall be examined by the
Engineer-in-Charge,
before any defects are made good.
(a) The work that has sagged or contains honey combing to an extent detrimental to
structural safety or architectural concept shall be rejected as given in para 5.4.9.4 for visual
inspection test. (b) Surface defects of minor nature may be accepted. On acceptance of such
a work by the Engineer-in-Charge, the same shall be rectified as follows:
1. Surface defects which require repair when forms are removed, usually consist of bulged
due to movement of forms, ridges at form joints, honey-combed areas, damage resulting
from the stripping of forms and bolt holes, bulges and ridges are removed by careful
chipping or tooling and the surface is then rubbed with a grinding stone. Honey-combed and
other defective areas must be chipped out, the edges being cut as straight as possible and
perpendicularly to the surface, or preferably slightly under cut to provide a key at the edge
of the patch.
2. Shallow patches are first treated with a coat of thin grout composed of one part of cement
and one part of fine sand and then filled with mortar similar to that used in the concrete. The
mortar is placed in layers not more than 10mm thick and each layer is given a scratch finish
to secure bond with the succeeding layer. The last layer is finished to match the surrounding
concrete by floating, rubbing or tooling on formed surfaces by pressing the form material
against the patch while the mortar is still plastic.
3. Large and deep patches require filling up with concrete held in place by forms. Such
patches are reinforced and carefully dowelled to the hardened concrete.
4. Holes left by bolts are filled with mortar carefully packed into places in small amounts.
The mortar is mixed as dry as possible, with just enough water so that it will be tightly
compacted when forced into place.
5. Tiered holes extending right through the concrete may be filled with mortar with a
pressure gun similar to the gun used for greasing motor cars.
6. Normally, patches appear darker than the surrounding concrete, possibly owing to the
presence on their surface of less cement laitance. Where uniform surface colour is
important, this defect shall be remedied by adding 10 to 20 percent of white Portland cement
to the patching mortar, the exact quantity being determined by trial.
7. The same amount of care to cure the materials in the patches should be taken as with the
whole structure. Curing must be started as soon as possible, after the patch is finished to
prevent early drying. Damp Hessian may be used but in some locations it may be difficult to
hold it in place. A membrane curing compound in these cases will be most convenient.

5.4.9 Testing of Concrete

5.4.9.0 Regular mandatory tests on the workability of the fresh concrete shall be done to
achieve the
specified compressive strength of concrete. These will be of two types
(a) Mandatory Lab, Test
(b) Mandatory Field Test
Results of Mandatory Field Test will prevail over mandatory Lab. Test.

5.4.9.1 Cube Test for Compressive Strength of Concrete - Mandatory Lab Test :
Mandatory tests shall be carried out as prescribed in Appendix A of Chapter 5.

5.4.9.2 Additional Test : Additional test, if required, shall be carried out as prescribed in
Appendix B of Chapter 5.

5.4.9.3 Slump Test : This test shall be carried out as prescribed in sub-head 4 of concrete.

5.4.9.4 Visual Inspection Test : The concrete will be inspected after removal of the form
work as described in para 5.4.7.2 The question of carrying out mandatory test or other tests
- 149 -
described in Appendix A and B (para 5.4.9.1 and 5.4.9.2) will arise only after satisfactory
report of visual inspection. The concrete is liable to be rejected if:
(i) It is porous or honeycombed as per para 5.4.7.2 (a).
(ii) Its placing has been interrupted without providing a proper construction joint.
(iii) The reinforcement has been displaced beyond tolerance specified or construction
tolerances have not been met. However, the hardened concrete may be accepted after
carrying out suitable remedial measures to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge at the
risk and cost of the contractor.
5.4.10 Standard of Acceptance – for Nominal Mix

5.4.10.1 Mandatory Lab. Test : For concrete sampled and tested as prescribed in Appendix
A of Chapter 5, the following requirement shall apply.

5.4.10.2 Out of six sample cubes, three cubes shall be tested at 7 days and remaining three
cubes at 28days.

5.4.10.3 7 days’ Tests

Sampling: The average of the strength of three specimen shall be accepted as the
compressive strength of the concrete provided the variation in strength of individual
specimen is not more than + 15% of the average. Difference between the maximum and
minimum strength should not exceed 30% of average strength of three specimen. If the
difference between maximum and minimum strength exceeds 30% of the average strength,
then 28 days’ test shall have to be carried out.
Strength: If the actual average strength of sample accepted in para ‘sampling’ above is equal
to or higher than specified strength upto +15% then strength of the concrete shall be
considered in order. In case the actual average strength of sample accepted in the above para
is lower than the specified or higher by ore than 15% then 28 days’ test shall have to be
carried out to determine the compressive
strength of concrete cubes.

5.4.10.4 28 days’ Test

(a) The average of the strength of three specimen be accepted as the compressive strength of
the concrete provided the strength of any individual cube shall neither be less than 70% nor
higher than 130% of the specified strength.
(b) If the actual average strength of accepted sample exceeds specified strength by more
than 30%the Engineer-in-Charge, if he so desires, may further investigate the matter.
However, if the strength of any individual cube exceeds more than 30% of specified
strength, it will be restricted to 130% only for computation of strength.
(c) If the actual average strength of accepted sample is equal to or higher than specified
strength upto 30% then strength of the concrete shall be considered in order and the concrete
shall be accepted at full rates.
(d) If the actual average strength of accepted sample is less than specified strength but not
less than 70% of the specified strength, the concrete may be accepted at reduced rate at the
discretion of Engineer-in-Charge
(e) If the actual average strength of accepted sample is less than 70% of specified strength,
the Engineer-in-Charge shall reject the defective portion of work represented by sample and
nothing shall be paid for the rejected work. Remedial measures necessary to retain the
structure shall be taken at the risk and cost of contractor. If, however the Engineer-in-
Charge so desires, he may order additional tests (See Appendix B of Chapter 5) to be carried
out to ascertain if the structure can be retained. All the charges in connection with these
additional tests shall be borne by the contractor.

5.4.10.5 Acceptance Criteria of Field Test (Additional Test – Not Mandatory)

- 150 -
(A) Preparation of Standard Test Cubes for calibration of Rebound Hammer at site

(a) In the beginning the standard test cubes of the specified mix shall be prepared by field
units before undertaking any concrete work in each project.
(b) At least 18 standard cubes necessary for formation of one specimen of specified mix,
shall be cast by site staff well in advance. From these 18 cubes any 3 cubes may be selected
at random to be tested for crushing strength of 7 days. The crushing strength obtained
should satisfy the specified strength for the mix as per specification or agreement. If the
strength is satisfactory then the remaining cube will form the standard samples for
calibration of rebound
hammer. In case of failure, the site staff should totally reject the samples and remove them
also and then make another set of samples by fresh mixing or alternatively, out of the
remaining 15 cubes, 3 cubes will be tested on 28 days. If the 28 days’ tests are found
satisfactory then remaining 12 cubes will form the standard sample for calibration at 28
days’ strength otherwise all samples shall be rejected and whole procedure repeated to form
a fresh specimen. All the results shall be recorded in a register. (c) No concreting will be
allowed unless the standard specimen cubes are obtained The criteria for acceptance and
calibration of hammer will be 28 days’ strength. The 7 days’ strength is only to facilitate the
work to start.
(d) No work (for the concrete cast between 8th and 28th day) shall be allowed to be paid
unless 28 days’ cube strength is obtained. For the concrete cast between 8th and 28th day,
the decision to make the payment may be taken by the Engineer-in-charge on the basis of
existing criteria. Concrete work will be rejected if 28 days’ strength falls short as per
acceptance criteria. No further work will be allowed till the acceptable standard cubes are
obtained.
(e) Frequency: it will be once in each quarter or as per the direction and discretion of
Engineer-in- Charge. Whenever the acceptance criteria is changed or concrete mix or type
of cement is changed or Engineer-in-Charge feels it necessary for recorded reasons with the
approval of the authority according to technical sanction, fresh specimen shall be prepared.
(B) Calibration of Hammer
(a) Simultaneously, same three cubes to be tested on 28 days as referred in para A (b) above
shall be used to correlate the compressive strength of their concrete with rebound number as
per procedure described in para 5.2 of the IS 13311 (Part 2) “Indian standard for
nondestructive testing of concrete Method of test by rebound hammer which is given below
in para B (b). The average of values of the rebound number (minimum readings) obtained in
respect of same three cubes passing on 28 days’ work test shall form the datum reference for
remaining cubes for the strength of cubes
(b) The concrete cubes specimens are held in a compression testing machine under a fixed
load, measurements of rebound hammer taken and then compressive strength determined as
per IS 516. The fixed load required is of the order of 7 N/mm2 when the impact energy of
the hammer is about 2.2 NM. If the specimen are wet cured, they should be removed from
wet storage & kept in the laboratory atmosphere for about 24 hours before testing. Only the
vertical faces of the cubes as cast should be tested for rebound number. At least nine
readings should be taken on each of the three vertical faces accessible in the compression
testing machine when using rebound hammers. The points of impact in the specimen must
not be nearer than 20 mm from the edge & should not be

(c) The rebound number of hammer will be determined on each of the remaining (18-3-
3=12) cubes. Whenever the rebound number of hammer of any individual cube varies by
more than +25% form the datum readings referred to in para B (a) above, that cube will be
excluded and will not be considered for standard specimen cubes for calibration. It must be
ensured that at least 8 cubes out of 12 that is 66.67% are within the permissible range of
variation of rebound number i.e. +25% or otherwise whole procedure shall have to be
repeated and fresh specimen prepared. These 8 cubes will form one standard sample in the
- 151 -
beginning before commencement of work and shall be kept carefully for the visiting officers
who will calibrate their hammers on these cubes. (d) This calibration will be done by field
staff with their hammer and then chart of calibration giving the details of the average
readings, date & month of casting, mix of the concrete etc. shall be prepared and signed by
Engineer-in-Charge and will be duly preserved for future reference as and when required.

(C) Preservation of Cubes at site

Standard sample cubes cast shall be carefully preserved at site under the safe custody of AE
or his representative for making them available together with the charts, to the officers of
QCTA/CTE or any other senior departmental officer, during their inspection of the work.
They will calibrate their hammer on these cubes if required.

(D) Testing at Site

(D-1) Testing Equipments
(D-2) Testing will be done generally by non-destructive methods like rebound hammers etc.
Each field Division/ Sub Division/ Unit will purchase rebound hammers and keep them in
working order at work site. The testing will be done only by hammers which are duly
calibrated. (D-3) The relative strength of actual field work will be tested with reference to
strength of these standard cubes and calibration charts of a hammer for determining the
rebound number on the field work. The hammer will be used as per manufacturer’s
guidelines at various locations chosen at random. The number of location/reading on each
wall, beam or column etc. shall not be less than 12. All the readings should be within the
+25% range of values prescribed in calibration chart normally. However, reading indicating
good strength will be when it is at per with calibrated value or between 100% & 125% and
very good if more than 125% any value between 100% & 75% of calibrated value shall be
considered satisfactory. Values from 75% to 50% shall be considered for payment at rates
reduced on prorate basis. The concrete indicating rebound number less than 50% of
calibrated value shall be rejected and not paid for.

(E) Acceptance of Field Tests and Strength

If the relative strength of actual field work is found satisfactory considering the calibration
charts with reference to the standard cube test kept at site, the representative work will be
considered satisfactory. If the work is considered below satisfactory, the same will be dealt
as stated in para D-3 above. (F) 7 days’ Strength in Rare Cases only
Normally cube crushing strength on 28 days’ test shall form the basis of acceptance.
However in rare cases of time bound projects/ urgent repairs 7 days’ cube test strength
criteria may be adopted on similar lines using 7 days’ standard test cubes and calibration
graphs/ curves/ charts for 7 days’ in lieu of 28 days’ and testing work done at 7 days’.
(G) Precautions
(G-1) The testing shall be done generally as per guidelines of manufacture of the apparatus
and strictly in accordance with the procedure laid down in clause 6 of IS 13311 (Part 2):
Indian Standard for Non-Destructive Testing of Concrete - Method of Test by Rebound
Hammer.
(G-2) The rebound hammers are influenced by number of factor like type of cement
aggregate, surface conditions, moisture content, age of concrete & extent of calibration of
concrete etc. hence care shall be taken to compare the cement, aggregate etc. and tested
under the similar surface conditions having more or less same moisture content and age.
However effect of age can be ignored for concrete between 3 days & 3 months old.

- 152 -
5.4.11 Measurements
5.4.11.1 Dimensions shall be measured nearest to a cm except for the thickness of slab
which shall be measured correct to 0.5 cm. The areas shall be worked out nearest to 0.01 Sq.
mt. The cubical contents shall be worked out to nearest 0.01 cubic metre.

5.4.11.2 Reinforced cement concrete whether cast-in-situ or pre cast shall be classified and
measured separately as follows.

(a) Raft, footing, bases of columns and mass concrete etc. all work up to plinth level,
column up to plinth level, plinth beams.
(b) Wall (any thickness) including attached pilasters, buttresses plinth and string course,
fillets, column, pillars, piers, abutments, post and struts etc.
(c) Suspended floors, roofs, landings and balconies.
(d) Shelves
(e) Chajjas
(f) Lintel, beams and bressummers.
(g) Columns, pillars, piers, abutments, posts and struts.
(h) Stair-cases including waist or waist less slab but excluding landing except in (i) below.
(i) Spiral stair-case (including landing).
(j) Arches, arch ribs, domes and vaults.
(k) Chimneys and shafts.
(l) Well steining.
(m) Vertical and horizontal fins individually or forming box, louvers and facias.
(n) Kerbs, steps and the like.
(o) String courses, bands, coping, bed plates, anchor blocks, plain window sills and the like.
(p) Mouldings as in cornices, window sills etc.
(q) Shell, dome and folded plates.
(r) Extra for shuttering in circular work in plan.

5.5 ENCASING ROLLED STEEL SECTIONS

5.5.1 General Requirements
Before concrete work is started, the Engineer-in-Charge shall check that all rolled steel
sections to be encased, have been erected truly in position. The sections shall be unpainted
and shall be wire brushed to remove the loose rust/ scales etc. Where so specified,
ungalvanised metal, having mesh or perforations large enough to permit the free passage of
12.5 mm nominal size aggregate through them shall be wrapped round the section to be
encased and paid for separately.

5.5.2 Wrapping
5.5.2.1 In case of columns, the wrapping shall be arranged as illustrated in Fig. 5.27 to pass
through the centre of the concreting. The wrapping of the entire length of the columns be
carried out in stages and no stage shall cover more than 1.5 metre of height of columns.
Successive wrappings shall be carried out only after the immediate adjacent wrapping has
been encased in concrete. The surface and edges of the flanges of the steel columns shall
have a concrete cover of not less than 50mm. The wrappings of the successive stages shall
be tied together.

5.5.2.2 In the case of beams and grillages, the wire mesh or expanded metal shall be
wrapped round the lower flange of the beam as illustrated in Fig. 5.28 and the wrapping
shall be suspended by wire hangers5 mm diameter placed at about 1.2 metres centres. The
surfaces and edges of the steel sections shall have a concrete cover of not less than 50mm.
The wrapping shall pass through the centre of the concrete covering at the edges and soffits
of the flanges.

- 153 -
5.5.3 Form Work shall be as prescribed in 5.2.
5.5.4 Concreting
Concrete shall consist of a mix of 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse and : 4 graded stone aggregate
of 12.5 mm nominal size) unless a richer mix is specified. The mix shall be poured solidly
around the steel sections and around the wrapping by vibrating the concrete into position.
Consistency of concrete, Placing of concrete and its compaction, curing, finishing and
strength of concrete shall be as described in 5.4.

5.5.5 Measurements
The length shall be measured correct to one cm and other dimensions correct of 0.5 cm. The
cement concrete shall be measured as per gross dimensions of the encasing exclusive of the
thickness of plaster. No deduction shall be made for the volume of steel sections, expanded
metal, mesh or any other reinforcement used therein. However, in case of boxed stanchions
or girders, the boxed portion only shall be deducted. Fabric reinforcement such as expanded
metal shall be measured separately in square metres stating the mesh and size of strands.
The description shall include the bending of the fabric as necessary, Racking or circular
cutting and waste shall be included in the description.

CUBE TEST FOR COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE -

MANDATORY LAB TEST

(Clause 5.4.9.1)

A-0 One sample (consisting of six cubes 15x15x15 cm shall be taken for every 20 cum or
part there of concrete work ignoring any part less than 5cum or as often as considered
necessary by the Engineer-in-Charge. The test of concrete cubes shall be carried out in
accordance with the procedure as described below. A register of cubes shall be maintained
at the site of work in Appendix C. The casting of cubes, concrete used for cubes and all
other incidental charge, such are curing, carriage to the testing laboratory shall be borne by
the contractors. The testing fee for the cubes, if any, shall be borne by the
department.
A-1 Test Procedure
A-1.1 Mould
The mould shall be of size 15 cmx15 cmx15 cm for the maximum nominal size of aggregate
not exceeding 40 mm. For concrete with aggregate size more than 40 mm size of mould
shall be specified by the Engineer-in-charge, keeping in view the fact that the length of size
of mould should be about four times the size of aggregate.
The moulds for test specimens shall be made of non-absorbent material and shall be
substantially strong enough to hold their form during the moulding of test specimens. They
shall not vary from the standard dimensions by more than one percent. The moulds shall be
so constructed that there is no leakage of water from the test specimen during moulding. All
the cube moulds for particular site should, prior to use, be checked for accuracy in
dimensions and geometric form and such test should at least be made once a year.
Each mould shall be provided with a base plate having a plane surface and made of non-
absorbent material. This plate shall be large enough in diameter to support the moulds
properly without leakage Glass plates not less than 6.5mm thick or plain metal not less than
12mm thick shall be used for this purpose. A similar plate shall be provided for covering the
top surface of the test specimen when moulded.
Note: Satisfactory moulds can be made from machine or steel castings, rolled metal plates
or galvanized.

- 154 -
A-1.2 Sample of Concrete
Sample of concrete for test specimen shall be taken at the mixer or in the case of ready
mixed concrete from the transportation vehicle discharge or as directed by Engineer-in-
Charge. Such samples shall be obtained by repeatedly passing a scoop or pail through the
discharge stream of concrete. The sampling operation should be spread over evenly to the
entire discharging operation. The samples thus obtained shall be transported to the place of
moulding of the specimen to counteract segregation. The concrete shall be mixed with a
shovel until it is uniform in appearance. The location in the work of the batch of concrete
this sampled shall be noted for further reference. In case of paving concrete, samples shall
be taken from the batch immediately after deposition of the sub grade. At least five samples
shall be taken from different portion of the pile and these samples shall be thoroughly mixed
before being used to form the test specimen. The sampling shall be spread as evenly as
possible throughout the day. When wide changes occur during concreting, additional sample
shall be taken if so desired by the Engineer-in-Charge.

A-1.3 Preparation of Test Specimens

The interior surfaces of the mould and base plate shall be lightly oiled before the concrete is
placed in the mould. The samples of concrete obtained as described under the test specimen
shall be immediately moulded by one of the following methods as indicated below:-
When the job concrete is compacted by manual methods, the test specimen shall be moulded
by placing the fresh concrete in the mould in three layers, each approximately one third of
the volume of the mould. In placing each scoopful of concrete the scoop shall be moved
around the top edge do the mould as the concrete there sided from it, in order to ensure a
uniform distribution of concrete within the mould. Each layer shall be rodded 35 times with
16 mm rod, 60 cm in length, bullet pointed at the lower end. The trokes shall be distributed
in uniform manner over the cross section of the mould and shall penetrate into underlying
layer. The bottom layer shall be rodded through its depth. After the top layer
has been rodded, the surface of the concrete shall be struck off with a trowel and covered
with a glass plate at least 6.5 mm thick or a machined plate. The whole process of moulding
shall be carried out in such a manner as to preclude the change of the water cement ratio of
the concrete, by loss of water either by leakage from the bottom or over flow from the top of
the mould.
When the job concrete is placed by vibration and the consistency of the concrete is such that
the test specimens cannot be properly moulded by hand rolling as described above, the
specimens shall be vibrated to give a compaction corresponding to that of the job concrete.
The fresh concrete shall be placed in mould in two layers, each approximately half the
volume of the mould. In placing each scoopful of concrete the scoop shall be moved around
the top edge of the mould as the concrete there slides from it, in order to ensure a
symmetrical distribution of concrete within the mould. Either internal or external vibrators
may be used. The vibration of each layer shall not be continued longer than is necessary to
secure the required density. Internal vibrators shall only be used when the concrete is
required to be compacted in layers. In compacting the first layer, the vibrators shall not be
allowed to rest on the bottom of the mould. In placing the concrete for top extent that there
will be no mortar loss during vibrations. After vibrating the second layer enough concrete
shall be added to bring level above the top of the mould. The surface of the concrete shall
then the struck off with a trowel and covered with a glass or steel plate as specified above.
The whole process of moulding shall be carried out in such a manner as to preclude the
alteration of water-cement ratio of the concrete by loss of water, either by leakage for the
bottom or over flow from the top of the mould.

A-1.4 Curing and Storage of Test Specimen

In order to ensure reasonably uniform temperature and moisture conditions during the first
24 hours for curing the specimen and to protect them from damage, moulds shall be covered
with wet straw or gunny sacking and placed a storage box so constructed and kept on the
- 155 -
work site that its air temperature when containing concrete specimens shall remain 22ºC to
33ºC. Other suitable means which provide such a temperature and moisture conditions may
be used.
Note:- It is suggested that the storage box be made of 25 mm dressed tongued and grooved
timber well braced with battens to avoid warping. The box should be well painted inside and
outside and should be provided with a hinged cover and padlock.
The test specimen shall be removed from the moulds at the end of 24 hours and stored in a
moist condition at a temperature within 24ºC to 30ºC until the time of test. If storage in
water is desired, a saturated lime solution shall be used.
A-1.5 Testing
The specimens shall be tested in accordance with procedure as described below: 171 SUB
HEAD 5.0 : REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE WORK
(a) The tests shall be made at an age of concrete corresponding to that for which the
strengths are specified.
(b) Compression tests shall be made immediately upon removal of the concrete test
specimen from the curing room i.e. the test specimen shall be loaded in damp
condition. The dimensions of the test specimens shall be measured in mm accurate to
0.5 mm.
(c) The metal bearing plates of the testing machine shall be placed in contact with the
ends of the test specimens. Cushioning materials shall not be used. In the case of
cubes, the test specimen shall be laced in the machine in such a manner that the load
is applied to sides of the
specimens as cast. An adjustable bearing block shall be used to transmit the load to
the test specimen. The size of the bearing block shall be the same or slightly larger
than that of test specimen. The upper or lower section of the bearing block shall be
kept in motion as the head of the testing machine is brought to a bearing on the test
specimen.
(d) The load shall be applied axially without shock at the rate of approximately 140 kg.
per sq.cm. per minute. The total load indicated by the testing machine at failure of
test specimen shall be recorded and the unit compressive strength is calculated in kg
per sq. cm. using the area computed from the measured dimension of the test
specimen. The type of failure and Appearance of the concrete shall be noted.

ADDITIONAL TESTS FOR CONCRETE

(Clause 5.4.9.2)
B-0 In case the concrete fails when tested as per the method prescribed in Appendix A, one
or more of the following check tests may be carried out at the discretion of Engineer-in-
Charge to satisfy the strength of the concrete laid. All testing expenditure shall be borne by
the contractor, the number of additional tests to be carried out shall be determined by the
Engineer-in-Charge. He shall be the final authority for interpreting the results of additional
test and shall decide upon the acceptance or otherwise. His decision in this regard shall be
final and binding. For the purpose of payment, the Hammering test results only shall be the
criteria. Some of the tests are outlined below:-
B-1 REBOUND HAMMER TEST
If a rebound hammer is regularly used by trained personnel in accordance with procedure
described in IS 13311 (part II) and a continuously maintained individual charts are kept
showing a large number of reading and the relation between the reading and strength of
concrete cubes made from the same batch of concrete, such charts may be used in
conjunction with hammer readings to obtain an approximate indication of the strength of
concrete in a structure for element. If calibration charts are available from manufactures, it
can be used. When making rebound hammer test each result should be the average of at least
12 readings. Reading should not be taken within 20mm of the edge of concrete members
and it may be necessary to distinguish between readings taken on a trowled face and those

- 156 -
on a moulded face. When making the tests on a precast unit, special care should be taken to
bed them firmly against the impact of the hammer.

B-2 CUTTING CORES

This method involves drilling and testing cores from the concrete for determination of
compressive strength. In suitable circumstances, the compressive strength of the concrete in
the structure may be assessed by drilling cores from the concrete and testing. The procedure
used shall comply with the requirements of IS 1199 and IS 516.The points from which cores
shall be taken shall be representative of the whole concrete and at least three cores shall be
obtained and tested. If the average of the strength of all cores cut from the structure is less
than the specified strength, the concrete represented by the cores shall be liable to rejection
and shall be rejected if a static load test (B-5) either cannot be carried out or is not permitted
by the Engineer-in-Charge.

B-3 ULTRASONIC TEST

If an ultrasonic apparatus is regularly used by trained personnel in accordance with IS 13311
(part I)and continuously maintained individual charts are kept showing a large number of
readings & the relation between the reading and strength of cubes made from the same batch
of concrete, such charts may be used to obtain approximate indications of the strength of
concrete in the structures. In cases of suspected lack of compaction or low cube strength the
results obtained from the ultrasonic test results on adjacent acceptable section of the
structures may be used for the purpose of assessing the strength of concrete in the suspected
portion.

B- 4 LOAD TESTS ON INDIVIDUAL PRECAST UNITS

The load tests described in this clause are intended as check on the quality of the units and
should not be used as substitute for normal design procedure. Where members require
special testing. Such special testing procedures shall be in a accordance with the
specification. Test loads shall be applied and removed incrementally.

B-4.1 Non Destructive Tests

The unit shall be supported at its designed point of support and loaded for five minutes with
a load equal to the sum of the characteristic dead load plus one and a quarter time the
characteristic imposed 173 SUB HEAD 5.0 : REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE
WORK load. The deflection is then recorded. The maximum deflection after application of
the load shall be in accordance with the requirements defined by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The recovery is measured five minutes after the removal of the load and the load then
reemployed. The percentage recovery after the second loading shall be not less than that
after the first loading nor less than 90% of the deflection recorded during the second
loading. At no time during the tests, shall the unit show any sign of weakness or faulty
construction as defined by the Engineer-in-Charge in the light of reasonable interpretation of
relevant data.
B-4.2 Destructive Tests
The unit is loaded while supported at its design point of support and must not fail at its
design load for collapse, within 15 minutes of time when the test load becomes operative. A
deflection exceeding 1/40 of the test span is regarded as failure of the unit.

B-4.3 Special Tests

For very large units or units not readily amenable to the above test e.g. columns, the precast
parts of composite beams and members designed for continuity or fixity, the testing
arrangements shall be agreed upon before such units are cast.

- 157 -
B-5 Load Test of Structures or Parts of Structures
The test described in this clause are intended as a check where there is a doubt regarding
structural strength. Test loads are to be applied and removed incrementally.

B-5.1 Age at Tests

The test is to be carried as soon as possible after the expiry of 28 days from the time of
placing of the concrete. When the test is for a reason other than the quality of concrete in the
structure being in doubt, the test may be carried out earlier, provided that the concrete has
already reached its specified characteristic strength.

B-5.2 Test Load

The test loads to be applied for the limit state of deflection and local damage are the
appropriate design loads i.e., the characteristic dead and superimposed loads. When the limit
state of collapse is being considered the test load shall be equal to the sum of characteristic
dead load plus one and a quarter times the characteristic imposed load and shall be
maintained or a period of 24 hours. In any of the test temporary supports of sufficient
strength to take the whole load shall be placed in position underneath but not in contact with
the members being tested. Sufficient precautions must be taken to safeguard persons in the
vicinity of the structure.

B-5.3 Measurement During Tests

Measurements of deflection and crack width shall be taken immediately after applications of
the load and, in the case of 24 hour sustained load test, at the end of 24 hour loaded period,
after removal of the load and after 24 hour recovery period. Sufficient measurements shall
be taken to enable side effect to be taken in account. Temperature and weather conditions
shall be recorded during the tests.

B-5.4 Assessment of Results

In assessing the strength of a structure or a part of the structure following a loading test, the
possible effects of variation in temperature and humidity during the period of the test shall
be considered The following requirements shall be met:
(a) The maximum width of any crack measured immediately on application of the test load
for local damage, is to be not more than 2/3 of the value of the appropriate limit state
requirement. (b) For members spanning between two supports the deflection measured
immediately on application of the test load for deflection is to be not more than 1/500 of the
effective span limits shall be agreed upon before testing cantilevered portions of structure.
CPWD SPECIFICATIONS 2009 174
(c) If maximum deflection in mm shown during 24 hour under load is less than 40L2/D
where L is effective span in mm and D is overall depth of construction in mm, it is not
necessary for the recovery to be measured and the requirement (D) does not apply, and
(d) If within 24 hours of the removal of test load for collapse as calculated in clause (a) a
reinforced concrete structure does not show a recovery of at least 75 per cent of the
maximum deflection shown during the 24 hour under load, the loading should be repeated.
The structure should be considered to have failed to pass the test if the recovery after second
loading is not at least 75 per cent of the maximum deflection shown during the second
loading.

B-6 DETERMINATION OF WATER SOLUBLE AND ACID SOLUBLE

CHLORIDES IN CONCRETE
Determination of water soluble and acid soluble chlorides in Concrete shall be done as per
method of test given in IS 14959 (Part 1) which covers volumetric method of test as
described below : (a) Quality of reagents

- 158 -
Unless otherwise specified, pure chemicals of analytical reagent grade and distilled water
(see IS 1070) shall be used in the test.
(b) Nitric Acid (HNO3) Concentrated (Specific Gravity 1.42) Prepare the solution, (6N
(approximately), by diluting 38ml of concentrated Nitric acid to 100 ml with distilled water.
(c) Ferric Alum(FeNH4 (SO4)2 12 H2O)
Dissolve 10 g of ferric alum in 100 ml of distilled water and add 1 ml of Nitric acid.
(d) Potassium Chromate 5% Solution
Dissolve 5 g of potassium chromate (K2 CrO4) 100 ml of distilled water to form 5%
Solution.
(e) Nirabenzene
(f) Silver Nitrate (AgNO3)Solution, 0.02 N
Weigh 1.7 g of silver nitrate, dissolve in distilled water and dilute to 500 ml in a volumetric
flask. tandardize the silver nitrate solution against 0.02 N sodium chloride solution using
potassium chromate solution as indicator ( 5 percent m/v) in accordance with the procedure
given in IS 3025 (Part 32).
(g) Ammonium thiocyanate (NH4 SCN) Solution
Weigh 1.7 g of ammonium thiocyanate (NH4 SCN) and dissolve in one litre of distilled
water in a volumetric flask. Shake well and standardize by titrating with 0.02 N silver nitrate
solution using ferric alum solution as an indicator. Adjust the normality exactly to 0.02 N.
(h) Sodium chloride (NaCl) 0.02N Weigh 1.1692 g of sodium chloride (NaCl) dried at 105
+/- 2ºC, dissolve in distilled water and make upto 1000 ml in a volumetric flask.
(i) Use of Filter Paper
(j) In the methods prescribed in this standard, relative numbers of Watman filter paper only
have been prescribed since these are commonly used. However, any other suitable brand of
filter papers with equivalent porosity may be used.
(k) Procedure for Water Soluble Chloride
Weigh 1 000+/-5 g of fresh mortar or concrete sample in a 2 litre capacity beaker and add
500 ml of distilled water (chloride free). Stir the mixture vigorously for 15 minutes. After
allowing the into a clean dry 250 ml capacity beaker. Immediately, filter the solution
through Watman filter paper No.1 and collect the filtrate.
Pipette 50 ml of filtrate in a 250 ml capacity conical flask. Add 5 ml of 6 N Nitric acid. Add
a known volume (X), preferably 25 ml of nitrobenzene. Shake vigorously to coagulate the
precipitate. Titrate the excess silver nitrate with 0.02 N ammonium thiocyanate solution
until a permanent faint reddish brown colour appears. Note down the volume (Y) of
ammonium
thiocyanate used.
(l) Procedure for Acid Soluble Chloride
Weigh about 1000 +/- 5 g of the fresh mortar or concrete sample in a 2 litre capacity beaker
and add 50 ml of 6 N nitric acid and 450 ml of distilled water (chloride free) after stirring
for few Minutes. Stir the mixture vigorously for 15 minutes. After allowing the mixture to
stand for 10 to 15 minutes for settling, decant about 200 ml of the supernatant solution into a
clean dry 250 ml capacity beaker. Immediately, filter the solution through Watman filter
paper No.1 and collect the
filterate. Pipette 50 ml of filtrate in a 250 ml capacity conical flask. Add 5 ml of 6 N nitric
acid. Add a known volume ( X ) preferably 25 ml of standard silver nitrate solution. Add 1
ml ferric alum and 5 ml of nitrobenzene Shake vigorously to coagulate the precipitate.
Titrate the excess silver nitrate with 0.02 N ammonium thiocyanate solution until a
permanent faint reddish brown colour appears. Note down the volume (Y) of ammonium
thiocyanate used.
(m) CalculationCalculate the percentage of chloride(acid soluble/water soluble) by mass of
mortar or concrete as follows:
Chloride, percent = 0.0007 1 (X – Y), Where
X = volume of silver nitrate added, in ml; and
Y = volume of 0.02 N ammonium thiocyanate consumed.
- 159 -
Note: Interference of silver chloride particles (which are generated in situ) in titration by
reacting with thiocyanants can be avoided by the addition of nitrobenzenes which forms a
film on silver chloride articles.

- 160 -
- 161 -
- 162 -
- 163 -
- 164 -
- 165 -
 SUB HEAD : 6.0
BRICK WORK

6.0. TERMINOLOGY
Bond
The arrangement of the bricks in successive courses to tie the brick work together both
longitudinally and transversely. The arrangement is usually designed to ensure that no
vertical joint of one course is exactly over the one in the next course above or below it, and
there is greatest possible amount of lap.
Bed Joint
Horizontal joint in brick work or masonry.
Closer
Any portion of a brick used in constructing a wall, to close up the bond next to the end brick
of a course (See Fig. 6.3).
Coping or Weathering
The cover applied over or the geometrical form given to a part of structure to enable it to
shed rain water.
Corbel
A cantilever projecting from the face of a wall to form a bearing (see Fig. 6.1D)
Cornice
Horizontal or ornamental feature projecting from the face of a wall (see Fig. 6.1D)
Course
A layer of bricks including bed mortar.
Cross joint
A joint other than a bed joint normal to the wall face.
Efflorescence
A powdery incrustment of salts left by evaporation. This may be visible on the surface or
may be below surface. In the latter case, this is termed as crypto Efflorescence.
Header
A brick laid with its length across the wall.
Indenting
The leaving recesses into which future work can be bonded.
Jamb
The part of the wall at the side of an opening.
Joint
A junction of bricks.
Jointing
The operation of finishing joints as the masonry work proceeds.
Pier
A thickened section forming integral part of the wall placed at intervals along the wall
primarily to increase the stiffness of the wall or to carry a vertical concentrated load. The
thickness of a pier is the over all hickness including the thickness of the wall, or when
bonded into one leaf of a cavity wall the thickness obtained by treating this leaf as an
independent wall (see Fig. (6.1A, 6.1B)).
Pillar
Pillar means a detached masonry support. This can be rectangular, circular, elliptical etc. In
case of rectangular pillar, the breadth shall not exceed three times the thickness and
thickness itself shall notexceed more than thrice the length of brick (See Fig. 6.1C).
Quoin
An external corner in brick work, the term may also denote the brick used to form the quoin.
Scaffolding
A temporary erection of timber or steel work used in the construction, alteration, demolition
or repairs of a building to support or to attend of the hoisting or lowering of workmen, their
- 166 -
tools and materials Scaffoldings are of two types, namely single and double scaffoldings.
Single scaffolding consists of a row of verticals connected to wall by horizontal supported
on and tied to the structure. Double scaffolding consists of two rows of verticals secured or
leashed together with horizontal and diagonal bracings forming essentially a structure
independent of the building. It may also connect to the structure at convenient points for the
sake of better stability.
Sill
A brick work forming the lower boundary of door or window opening (see Fig. 6.1D).
Spandrel
The space between the haunches and the road decking of an arch.
Strecher
A brick laid with its length in the direction of the wall.
String course
A horizontal course projecting from a wall usually introduced at every floor level or
windows or below parapet for imparting architectural appearance to the structure and also
keeping off the rain water. (seeFig. 6.1D).
Templet
A pattern of sheet metal used as a guide for setting out specific section and shape.
Toothing
Bricks left projecting in alternate courses to bond with future work.
Wall joint
A joint parallel to the wall face.
6.1 BRICKS/BRICK TILES/BRICK BATS/MECHANIZED AUTOCLAVE FLY ASH
LIME BRICK
Bricks used in the masonry may be of the following type.
(a) The Common Burnt Clay Bricks shall conform to IS:1077 and shall be hand moulded
or machine moulded. They shall be free from nodules of free lime, visible cracks, flaws
warpage and organic matter, have a frog 100 mm in length 40 mm in width and 10 mm to 20
mm deep on one of its flat sides. Bricks made by extrusion process and brick tiles may not
be provided with frogs. Each brick shall be marked (in the frog where provided) with the
manufacturer’s
identification mark or initials.
(b) Fly Ash Lime Bricks (FALG Bricks) : The Fly Ash Lime Bricks (FALG Bricks) shall
conform to IS 2894. Visually the bricks shall be sound, compact and uniform in shape free
from visible cracks, warpage, flaws and organic matter. The bricks shall be solid and with or
without frog on
one of its flat side.
Fly Ash: Fly ash shall conform to IS 3812.

Note: This item will be operated only for load bearing structure upto 2 storeys and for non-
load bearing walls 23 cms thick for multi-storeyed building's. Bottom ash used as
replacement of sand shall not have more than 12% loss on ignition when tested. Sand:
Deleterious materials, such as clay and silt in the sand shall preferably be less than 5%.
Lime: Lime shall conform to class ‘C’ hydrated lime of IS 712.
Additives: Any suitable additive considered not detrimental to the durability of bricks may
be used. (c) Clay Fly Ash Bricks: The clay fly ash bricks shall conform to IS 13757. The
bricks shall be sound, compact and uniform in shape and colour. Bricks shall have smooth
rectangular faces with sharp and square corners. The bricks shall be free from visible cracks,
flaws, warpage, nodules of free lime and organic matter, the bricks shall be hand or machine
moulded. The bricks shall have frog of 100 mm in length 40 mm width and 10 to 20 mm
deep on one of its flat sides. If made by extrusion process may not be provided with frogs.
Fly Ash shall conform to grade I or grade II of IS 3812.
(d) Calcium Silicate Bricks: The bricks shall conform to IS 4139. The Calcium silicate
bricks shall be sound, compact and uniform in shape. Bricks shall be free from visible
- 167 -
cracks, warpage, organic matter, large pebbles and nodules of free lime. Bricks shall be
solid and with or without frog. The bricks shall be made of finely grounded sand siliceous
rock and lime. In addition limited quantity of fly ash conforming to IS 3812 may be used in
the mix. These bricks are also known as Fly Ash Sand Lime bricks in the construction
industry.
(e) Tile Brick: The bricks of 4 cm height shall be moulded without frogs. Where modular
tiles are not freely available in the market, the tile bricks of F.P.S. thickness 44 mm (1-3/4")
shall be used unless otherwise specified.
(f) Brick Bats: Brick bats shall be obtained from well burnt bricks.

(g) Mechanized Autoclave Fly Ash Lime Brick: These bricks shall be machine moulded
and prepared in plant by appropriate proportion of fly ash and lime. The autoclave fly ash
bricks shall conform to IS 12894. Visually, the bricks shall be sound, compact and uniform
shape, free from visible cracks warpage and organic matters. The brick shall be solid with
or without frog, and of 100/80 mm in length, 40 mm width and 10 to 20 mm deep one of its
flat side as per IS 12894. The brick shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners
and shall be uniform in shape and colour. Fly ash shall conform to IS 3812 and lime shall
conform to class ‘C’ hydrated lime of IS 712.
6.1.1 Dimensions
The brick may be modular or non-modular. Sizes for both types of bricks/tiles shall be as
per Table 6.1. While use of modular bricks/tiles is recommended, non-modular (FPS)
bricks/tiles can also be used where so specified. Non-modular bricks/tiles of sizes other than
the sizes mentioned in Table 6.1 may also be used where specified.

The bricks shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp corner and shall be uniform in
colour and emit clear ringing sound when struck.
(Note: Upper limits specified in Table 6.2 are for calculating the average compressive
strength in accordance with Appendix B of Chapter 6).
6.1.3 Sampling and Tests
Samples of bricks shall be subjected to the following tests :
(a) Dimensional tolerance.
(b) Water absorption.
(c) Efflorescence.

- 168 -
(d) Compressive strength.

6.1.3.1 Sampling: For carrying out compressive strength, water absorption, efflorescence
and dimensional tests, the samples of bricks shall be taken at random according to the size
of lot as given in Table 6.3 below. The sample thus taken shall be stored in a dry place until
tests are made. For the purpose of sampling, the following definition shall apply.
(a) Lot: A collection of bricks of same class and size, manufactured under relatively similar
conditions of production. For the purpose of sampling a lot shall contain a maximum, of
50,000 bricks. In case a consignment has bricks more than 50,000 of the same classification
and size and manufactured under relatively similar conditions of production, it shall be
divided into lots of
50,000 bricks or part thereof.
(b) Sample: A collection of bricks selected for inspection and/or testing from a lot to reach
the decision regarding the acceptance or rejection of the lot.
(c) Defective: A brick failing to meet one or more of the specified requirements.

6.1.3.2 The samples shall be taken as below:

(i) Sampling from a Stack: When it is necessary to take a sample from a stack, the stack
shall be divided into a number of real or imaginary sections and the required number of
bricks drawn from each section. For this purpose bricks in the upper layers of the stack shall
be removed to enable units to be sampled from places within the stack.
Note: For other methods of sampling i.e. sampling in motion and sampling from lorries or
trucks, IS :5454 may be referred. Scale of sampling and criteria for conformity for visual
and dimensional characteristics:—

Visual characteristics: The bricks shall be selected and inspected for ascertaining their
conformity to the requirements of the relevant specification. The number of bricks to be
selected from a lot shall depend on the size of lot and shall be in accordance of Col. 1 and 2
of Table 6.3 for visual characteristics in all cases and dimensional characteristics if specified
for individual bricks.

(ii) Visual Characteristics: All the bricks selected above in accordance with Col. 1 and 2 of
Table 6.3 shall be examined for visual characteristics. If the number of defective bricks
found in the sample is less than or equal to the corresponding number as specified in Col. 3
of Table 6.3 the lot shall be considered as satisfying the requirements of visual
characteristics, otherwise the lot shall be deemed as not having met the visual requirements.

(iii) Dimensional Characteristics: The number of bricks to be selected for inspecting the
dimensions and tolerance shall be in accordance with Col. 1 and 4 of Table 6.3. These
bricks will be divided into groups of 20 bricks at random and each of the group of 20 bricks
thus formed will be tested for all the dimensions and tolerances. A lot shall be considered
having found meeting the requirements of dimensions and tolerance if none of the groups of
bricks inspected fails to meet the specified requirements.

- 169 -
Brick Tiles

760 to 840 mm (800 ± 40 mm) for 40 mm high brick tiles In case of non-modular bricks, %
age tolerance will be ± 2% for group of 20 numbers of class 10bricks, and ± 4% for other
class of bricks.
6.1.3.4 Compressive Strength: The bricks, when tested in accordance with the procedure
laid down in Appendix B of Chapter 6 shall have a minimum average compressive strength
for various classes as given in Table 6.2. The compressive strength of any individual brick
tested shall not fall below the min. average compressive strength specified for the
corresponding class of brick by more than 20%. In case compressive strength of any
individual brick tested exceeds the upper limit specified in Table 6.2 for the corresponding
class of bricks, the same shall be limited to upper limit of the class as specified in Table6.2
for the purpose of calculating the average compressive strength.

6.1.3.5 Water Absorption: The average water absorption of bricks when tested in
accordance with the procedure laid down in Appendix C of Chapter 6 shall be not more than
20% by weight.

6.1.3.6 Efflorescence: The rating of efflorescence of bricks when tested in accordance with
the procedure laid down in Appendix D of Chapter 6 shall be not more than moderate.

6.1.4 Sewer Bricks

6.1.4.1 Sewer bricks are intended for the lining of walls, roofs and floors of sewers used for
ordinary sanitary (domestic) sewage. The general practice in the country is also to utilize
common building bricks in the construction of sewers which is not satisfactory. However,
these sewer bricks may not be suitable for sewers dealing with industrial effluent (sewage)
for which the use of acid resistant bricks in accordance with IS 4860 may be considered.
Sewer bricks shall conform to IS 4885.

- 170 -
6.1.4.3 Compressive Strength: The average compressive strength obtained on a sample of
sewer bricks when tested in accordance with the procedure laid down in IS 3495 (Part I)
shall be not less than 17.5 N/mm2 (175 kgf/cm2 approximately) and the individual strength
of any brick shall be not less than 16 N/mm2 (160 kgf/cm2 approximately).

6.1.4.4 Water Absorption: The average value of water absorption for five bricks after 24 h
cold water immersion test when tested in accordance with IS 3495 (Part 2) shall not exceed
10 per cent of the average dry weight of the brick and the absorption for any individual
brick shall not exceed 12 per cent.

6.1.4.5 Efflorescence: When the bricks are tested in accordance with the method laid down
in IS 3495(Part 3), the rating of efflorescence shall not be more than ‘slight’.

6.1.5 Burnt Clay Perforated Building Bricks

6.1.5.1 General Quality: The bricks shall be made of suitable clay and shall be thoroughly
burnt at the maturing temperature of clay. They shall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules
of free lime. They shall have rectangular face with sharp straight edge at right angle. They
shall be of uniform colour and texture. These bricks generally should conform to IS 2222.

6.1.5.2 Dimensions and Tolerances: The standard size of burnt clay perforated bricks shall
be as
follows:

6.2 BRICK WORK

6.2.1 Classification
The brick work shall be classified according to the class designation of bricks used.

6.2.2 Mortar
The mortar for the brick work shall be as specified, and conform to accepted standards.
Lime shall not be used where reinforcement is provided in brick work.
- 171 -
6.2.3 Soaking of Bricks
Bricks shall be soaked in water before use for a period for the water to just penetrate the
whole depth of the bricks. Alternatively bricks may be adequately soaked in stacks by
profusely spraying with clean water at regular intervals for a period not less than six hours.
The bricks required for masonry work using mud mortar shall not be soaked. When the
bricks are soaked they shall be removed from the tank sufficiently early so that at the time
of laying they are skin-dry. Such soaked bricks shall be stacked on a clean place where they
are not again spoiled by dirt earth etc.
Note I: The period of soaking may be easily found at site by a field test in which the bricks
are soaked in water for different periods and then broken to find the extent of water
penetration. The least period that corresponds to complete soaking will be the one to be
allowed for in construction work Note II : If the bricks are soaked for the required time in
water that is frequently changed the soluble salt in the bricks will be leached out, and
subsequently efflorescence will be reduced.

6.2.8 Measurements
6.2.8.1 Brick work shall be measured in cubic metres unless otherwise specified. Any extra
work over the specified dimensions shall be ignored. Dimensions shall be measured correct
to the nearest 0.01 m i.e. 1 cm. Areas shall be calculated to the nearest 0.01 sq mtrs and the
cubic contents shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01 cubic metres.

6.2.8.2 Brick work shall be measured separately in the following stages:

(a) From foundation to floor one level (Plinth level)
(b) Plinth (floor one) level to floor two level
(c) Between two specified floor levels above floor two level
Note : (i) Brick work in parapet walls, mumty, lift machine room and water tanks
constructed on the roof upto 1.2 m height above roof shall be measured together with the
corresponding work of the floor next below.

6.2.8.3 No deductions or additions shall be done and no extra payment made for the
following :
Note : Where minimum area is defined for deduction of an opening, void or both, such areas
shall refer only to opening or void within the space measured.
(a) Ends of dissimilar materials (that is, joists, beams, lintels, posts, girders, rafters, purlins,
trusses, corbels, steps, etc.); up to 0.1 m2 in section;
(b) Opening up to 0.1 m2 in area (see Note);
(c) Wall plates, bed plates, and bearing of slabs, chajjas and the like, where thickness does
not exceed 10 cm and bearing does not extend over the full thickness of wall;
(d) Cement concrete blocks as for hold fasts and holding down bolts;
(e) Iron fixtures, such as wall ties, pipes upto 300 mm diameter and hold fasts for doors and
windows; and
(f) Chases of section not exceeding 50 cm in girth.
(g) Bearing portion of drip course, bearing of moulding and cornice.
Note : In calculating area of an opening, any separate lintel or sills shall be included with
the size of the opening but end portions of lintel shall be excluded. Extra width of rebated
reveals, if any, shall also be excluded.

6.2.8.4 Walls half brick thick and less shall each be measured separately in square metres
stating thickness.

6.2.8.5 Walls beyond half brick thickness shall be measured in multiples of half brick which
shall be deemed to be inclusive of mortar joints. For the sizes of bricks specified in 6.1.1,
half brick thickness shall mean 100 mm for modular and 115 mm for non-modular bricks

- 172 -
Where fractions of half brick occur due to architectural or other reasons, measurement shall
be as follows :
(a) upto 1/4th brick-actual measurements and
(b) exceeding 1/4 brick-full half bricks.

6.2.8.6 String courses, projecting pilasters, aprons, sills and other projections shall be fully
described and measured separately in running metres stating dimensions of each projection.

6.2.8.7 Square or rectangular pillars shall be measured separately in cubic metres in multiple
of half brick.

6.2.8.8 Circular pillars shall be measured separately in cubic metres as per actual
dimensions.

6.2.8.9 Brick work curved on plan shall be measured like the brick work in straight walls
and shall include all cutting and wastage of bricks, tapered vertical joints and use of extra
mortar, if any. Brick work curved on plan to a mean radius not exceeding six metres shall be
measured separately and extra shall be payable over the rates for brick work in straight
walls. Nothing extra shall be payable if the mean radius of the brick work curved in plan
exceeds six metres.

6.2.8.10 Tapered walls shall be measured net as walls and extra payment shall be allowed
for making tapered surface for brick work in walls.

6.2.8.11 Brick work with brick tiles shall be measured and paid for separately.

6.4 HALF BRICK WORK

Brick work in half brick walls shall be done in the same manner as described above in 6.2.4
except that the bricks shall be laid in stretcher bond. When the half brick work is to be
reinforced, 2 Nos. M.S. bars of 6 mm dia., shall be embedded in every third course as given
in the item (the dia of bars shall not exceed 8 mm). These shall be securely anchored at their
end where the partitions end. The free ends of the reinforcement shall be keyed into the
mortar of the main brick work to which the half brick work is joined. The mortar used for
reinforced brick work shall be rich dense cement mortar of mix 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse
sand). Lime mortar shall not be used. Over laps in reinforcement, if any shall not be less
than 30 cm. The mortar interposed between the reinforcement bars and the brick shall not be
less than 5 mm. The mortar covering in the direction of joints shall not be less than 15 mm.

6.4.1 Measurements
The length and height of the wall shall be measured correct to a cm. The area shall be
calculated in sqm. where half brick wall is joined to the main walls of one brick or greater
thickness

6.6 HONEY COMB BRICK WORK

The honeycomb brick work shall be done with specified class of brick, laid in specified
mortar. All joints and edges shall be struck flush to give an even surface. The thickness of
the brick honeycomb work shall be half-brick only, unless otherwise specified. Openings
shall be equal and alternate with half brick laid with a bearing of 2 cm on either side.

6.6.1 Measurements
The length and height shall be measured correct to a cm. Area shall be calculated in square
metres correct to two places of decimal. Honeycomb openings shall not be deducted.
Note:- For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 1, Sub Head 6.0

- 173 -
 SUB HEAD: 7.0
STONE WORK

7.0 TERMINOLOGY
Ashlar
Stone masonry using dressed square stone blocks of given dimensions having faces
perpendicular to each other and laid in courses.

Bed Joint
The joint where one stone presses on another for example, a horizontal joint in a wall or
radiating joint between the voussoirs or arch (See Fig. 7.1 and 7.13)

Block
(a) Hollow (Open and Closed Cavity) Block: A concrete masonry unit with any one of the
external dimension greater than the corresponding dimension of a brick and having one or
more large holes or cavities which either pass through the block (open cavity) or do
effectively pass through the block (closed cavity) and having the solid material between
50% and 75% of the total volume of the block calculated from the overall dimensions.
(b) Solid Block: A concrete masonry unit with external dimensions greater than
corresponding dimension of a brick and having solid material not less than 75% of the total
volume of the block calculated from over all dimension.

Bond
An interlocking arrangement of structural units in a wall to ensure stability.

Bond Stone (through Stone)

Selected long stone used to hold a wall together transversely (See Fig. 7.8).

Corbel
Stone bonded well into the wall with part of it projecting out of the face of wall to form a
bearing surfaces.

Cornice
A horizontal moulded projection which crowns or finishes either a wall, any horizontal
division of wall, or any architectural feature (See Fig. 7.1C).

Cramp
A small piece of metal or the hardest or toughtest stone procurable, sunk in mortices and
fixed across joints as additional ties. The ends of metal cramps are bent at right angles and
stone cramps are dovetailed (See Fig. 7.1B).

Course
A layer of stones in wall including the bed mortar.

Dowels
Dowels are small sections of metal, stone or pebbles bedded with mortar in corresponding
mortice in bed or side joint or adjacent stones (See Fig. 7.1A).

Jamb
The part of the wall at the side of an opening.

- 174 -
Joggle
A key between the stones by providing a groove in one stone to take a corresponding
concealed projection in the edges on the other stone (See Fig. 7.1B).

Natural Bed
The planes of stratification that occurs in a sedimentary rocks.

Parapet
A solid or pierced guard wall for flat stone terrace or balcony (or a bridge) or a curb wall at
the lower part of a pitched roof which is exposed to atmosphere on face back and top (See
Fig. 7.1C).

Quoin
A quoin is the external angle of wall or building. The term is also applied to stone specially
selected and neatly dressed for forming such angle.

Random
Random or irregular size and shapes.

Reveal
The part of the jamb between the frame and the arris.

Rubble Masonry
Masonry built of stones either irregular in shapes as quarried or squared and only hammer
dressed and having comparatively thick joints. As far as possible, stones for rubble masonry
shall be angular.

Skewback
Sloping surface against which the springing of an arch rests.

Spandrel
Space between the haunches below the decking level.

String Course
A horizontal band, plain or moulded, usually projecting slightly from the face of wall (See
Fig. 7.1C).

Surfacing or Dressing of Stones

The stones are dressed to have different surfaces as indicated below.

Template or Bed Block

A block of stone or concrete bedded on a wall to distribute the pressure from a concentrated
load.

Self Faced Surfaces

Surfaces of stone slabs used for roofing, flooring, lintels etc. as obtained from quarry.

Squared Back Surface

Means the surface shall be dressed back at right angles to the face of the stone.

Chisel Drafted Margin

The dressing done with a drafting chisel in narrow strips of width generally 2 to 5 cm.
Chisel drafted margin shall be punch dressed.

- 175 -
Hammer Dressed Surface
A hammer dressed stone shall have no sharp and irregular corners and shall have a
comparatively even surface so as to fit well in masonry. Hammer dressed stone is also
known as hammer faced, quarry faced and rustic faced. The bushing from the general wall
face shall not be more than 40 mm on exposed face and 10 mm on faces to be plastered (Fig.
7.2).

Rock Faced Surface

A rock faced stone shall have a minimum of 25 mm wide chisel drafted margin at the four
edges, all the edges being in the same plane (Fig. 7.3).

Rough Tooled Surface

A rough tooled surface shall have a series of bands, made by means of a plane chisel 4 to 5
cm wide, more or less parallel to tool marks all over the surface. These marks may be either
horizontal, vertical or at an angle of 45° as directed (Fig. 7.4). The edges and corners shall
be square and true. The depth or gap between the surface and straight edge, held against the
surface shall not be more than 3mm (Rough tooled stones are used where fairly regular
plane faces are required for masonry work).

Punched Dressed Surface

A rough surface is further dressed by means of punch chisel to show series of parallel
ridges. The depth of gap between the surface and a straight edge held against the surface
shall not exceed 3 mm (Fig. 7.5). Punched dressed stones are used where even surfaces are
required.

Close Picked Surface

A punched stone is further dressed by means of point chisel so as to obtain a finer surface,
ridges or chisel marks left over being very tiny. The depth of gap between the surface and a
straight edge kept over the surface shall not exceed 1.5 mm (Fig. 7.6).

Fine Tooled Surface

Close picked surface is further dressed so that all the projections are removed and fairly
smooth surface is obtained. The surfaces shall have 3 to 4 lines per centimetre width
depending on the degree of hardness of stone and degree of fineness required (Fig. 7.7).
This type of dressing is commonly adopted for ashlar work.

Polished Surface
Surfaces having a high gloss finish. Polishing of stones shall be done by rubbing them with
suitable abrasive, wetting the surface where necessary with water. Alternatively polishing of
stones shall be done by holding them firmly on the top of revolving table to which some
abrasive material like sand or carborundum is fed. The final polishing shall be performed by
rubber or felt, using oxide of lime (called by trade name as putty powder) as a polishing
medium.

Moulded
Cut to profile of a moulding with punched dressed surfaces, unless otherwise specified.
7.1 RANDOM RUBBLE STONE MASONRY

7.1.0 Material
7.1.1 Stone
The stone shall be of the type specified such as granite, trap, limestone, sand stone,
quartzite, etc. and shall be obtained from the quarries, approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Stone shall be hard, sound, durable and free from weathering decay and defects like cavities,
cracks, flaws, sand holes, injurious veins, patches of loose or soft materials and other similar
- 176 -
defects that may adversely affect its strength and appearance. As far as possible stones shall
be of uniform colour, quality or texture. Generally stone shall not contain crypst crystalline
silica or chart, mica and other deleterious materials like iron-oxide organic impurities etc.
Stones with round surface shall not be used. The compressive strength of common types of
stones shall be as per Table 7.1 and the percentage
of water absorption shall generally not exceed 5% for stones other than specified in Table
7.1. For laterite this percentage is 12%.

Note 1: Test for compressive strength shall be carried out as laid down in IS 1121 (Part I).
Note 2: Test for water absorption shall be carried out as laid down in IS 1124.
7.1.2 Size of Stones
Normally stones used should be small enough to be lifted and placed by hand. Unless
otherwise indicated, the length of stones for stone masonry shall not exceed three times the
height and the breadth on base shall not be greater than three-fourth of the thickness of wall,
or not less than 150 mm. The height of stone for rubble masonry may be upto 300 mm. The
selection and grading of stones for rubble masonry is largely done at site and the smaller
stones are used in the hearting of wall.

7.1.3 Random Rubble Masonry shall be uncoursed or brought to courses as specified (Fig.
7.8 and 7.9). Uncoursed random rubble masonry shall be constructed with stones of sizes as
referred to in para 7.0 and shapes picked up random from the stones brought from the
approved quarry. Stones having sharp corners or round surfaces shall, however, not be used.

7.1.4 Random rubble masonry brought to the course is similar to uncoursed random rubble
masonry except that the courses are roughly levelled at intervals varying from 300 mm to
900 mm in height according to the size of stones used.

7.1.5 Dressing
Each stone shall be hammer dressed on the face, the sides and the beds. Hammer dressing
shall enable the stones to be laid close to neighbouring stones such that the bushing in the
face shall not project more than 40 mm on the exposed face.
(i) Face stone: At least 25% stones shall be headers tailing into the work at least 2/3rd the
thickness of wall in super structure masonry. Such stones shall not be less than 200 sq. cm
in cross sections.
(ii) Hearting Stones: The hearting or interior filling of a wall face shall consist of rubble
stones not less than 150 mm in any direction, carefully laid, hammered down with a wooden
mallet into position and solidly bedded in mortar. The hearting should be laid nearly level
with facing and backing.
(iii) Quoin Stone: Quoin stone shall be less than 0.03 cum in volume.
(iv) Jamb stones: The jambs shall not be made with stones specified for quoins except that
the stones which were required to be provided at 1 metre centre to centre on both the
exposed faces shall here be provided only on the jamb and the length shall be equal to the
thickness of the wall for wall upto 60 cm and a line of headers shall be provided for walls
thicker than 60 cm as specified for bond.
- 177 -
7.1.5 (A) Courses
The masonry shall be carried out in regular courses of height not exceeding 50 cm and
masonry on any day will not be raised more than 60 cm in height when using mortars
having compressive strength less than 20 kg./sq. cm at 28 days and 100 cm when using
mortars exceeding this strength.

7.1.5 (B) Thickness of Joints

The joint thickness shall not exceed 30 mm at any point on the face. Chips of the stone and
spalls shall be wedged into seating bed of face stones to avoid excessive bed thickness. No
pinning shall be allowed to avoid excessive joint thickness.

7.1.6 Mortar
The mortar used for joining shall be as specified.

7.1.7 Laying
Stone shall be laid on their natural bed and shall be solidly bedded full in mortar with close
joints, chips of stone spalls be wedged into the work wherever necessary. No dry work or
hollow spaces shall be allowed and every stone whether large or small shall be carefully
selected to fit snugly the interstices between the large stones. Masonry shall be built
breaking joints in all the three directions. Bond stone and headers shall be properly laid into
the work and shall be marked by the contractor with white lead paint. The bond stones shall
be provided as specified in para 7.1.8. The masonry work in wall shall be carried up true to
plumb or to specified batter. Random rubble masonry shall be brought to the level courses at
plinth, window sills, lintel and roof levels. Levelling shall be done with concrete comprising
of one part of the mortar as used for masonry and two parts of graded stone aggregate of 20
mm nominal size. The masonry in structure shall be carried uniformly. Where the masonry
of one part is to be delayed, the work shall be raked back at an angle not steeper than 45°.

7.1.7 (A) Raking out joints

All the joints on the faces to be pointed or plastered shall be racked out with racking tool to
a depth of 20mm while the mortar is still green.

7.1.8 Bond Stones

Though bond stones shall be provided in walls upto 600 mm thickness, a set of two or more
bond stones overlapping each other by at least 150 mm shall be provided in a line from face
to back. In case of highly absorbent types of stones (porous lime stone and sand stone etc.)
the bond stone shall extend about two-third into the wall, as through stones in such walls a
set of two or more bond stones overlapping each other by at least 150 mm shall be provided.
Each bond stone or a set of bond stones shall be provided for every 0.5 m2 of the wall
surface and shall be provided at 1.5 m to 1.8 m apart clear in every course. In case of highly
absorbent types of stones (porous lime stone and sand stone etc.) single piece bond stones
may give rise to dampness. For all thicknesses of such walls a set of two or more bond
stones overlapping each other by at least 15 cm shall be provided. Length of each such bond
stone shall not be less than two-third of the thickness of the wall. Where bond stones of
suitable lengths are not available pre-cast cement concrete block of 1:3:6 mix (1 cement : 3
coarse sand: 6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) of cross section not less than
225 square centimeters and length equal to the thickness. At least one bond stone or a set of
bond stones shall be provided at 1.5 m to 1.8 m apart clear in every course. (Bond stones
shall be marked suitably with paint as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge).
7.1.9 Quoin and Jamb Stones
The quoin and jamb stones shall be of selected stones neatly dressed with hammer or chisel
to form the required angle. Quoin stones shall not be less than 0.01 cum in volume. Height
of quoins and jamb stones shall not be less than 15 cm. Quoins shall be laid header and
stretcher alternatively.
- 178 -
7.1.10 Joints
Stones shall be so laid that all joints are fully packed with mortar and chips. Face joints shall
not be more than 20 mm thick. The joints shall be struck flush and finished at the time of
laying when plastering or pointing is not to
be done. For the surfaces to be plastered or pointed, the joints shall be raked to a minimum
depth of 20 mm when the mortar is still green.
7.1.11 Scaffolding
Single scaffolding having one set of vertical support shall be allowed. The supports shall be
sound and strong, tied together by horizontal pieces, over which the scaffolding planks shall
be fixed. The inner end of the horizontal scaffolding member may rest in a hole provided in
the masonry. Such holes, however, shall not be allowed in pillars under one metre in width
or near the skew back of arches. The holes left in masonry work for supporting scaffolding
shall be filled and made good with cement concrete 1 : 3 : 6 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6
stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size).
7.1.12 Curing
Masonry work in cement or composite mortar shall be kept constantly moist on all faces for
a minimum period of seven days. In case of masonry with fat lime mortar curing shall
commence two days after laying of masonry and shall continue for at least seven days
thereafter.
7.1.13 Protection
Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering. The work shall also be
suitably protected from damage, mortar dropping and rain during construction.
7.1.14 Measurements
7.1.14.1 The length, height and thickness shall be measured correct to a cm. The thickness
of wall shall be measured at joints excluding the bushing. Only specified dimensions shall
be allowed; anything extra shall be ignored. The quantity shall be calculated in cubic metre
nearest to two places of decimal.
7.1.14.2 The work under the following categories shall be measured separately.
(i) From foundation to plinth level (level one) :
(a) work in or under water and or liquid mud,
(b) work in or under foul positions.
(i) Above plinth level and upto floor five level.
(ii) Above floor five level to every floor/floors or part thereof.
(iv) Stone masonry in parapet shall be measured together with the corresponding item in the
wall of
the storey next below.
7.1.14.3 No deduction shall be made nor extra payment made for the following :
(i) Ends of dissimilar materials (that is joists, beams, lintels, posts, girders, rafters purlins,
trusses, corbels, steps etc.) upto 0.1 sqm in section.
(ii) Openings each upto 0.1 sqm in area. In calculating the area of openings, any separate
lintels or sills shall be included alongwith the size of opening but the end portions of the
lintels shall be excluded and the extra width of rebated reveals, if any, shall also be
excluded. (iii) Wall plates and bed plates, and bearing of chajjas and the like, where the
thickness does not exceed 10 cm and the bearing does not extend over the full thickness of
the wall.
Note: The bearing of floor and roof shall be deducted from wall masonry.
(iv) Drain holes and recesses for cement concrete blocks to embed hold fasts for doors,
windows etc.
(v) Building in masonry, iron fixture, pipes upto 300 mm dia, hold fasts of doors and
windows etc.
(vi) Forming chases in masonry each upto section of 350 sq cm.
Masonry (excluding fixing brick work) in chimney breasts with smoke of air flues not
exceeding 20 sq dm (0.20 sq m) in sectional area shall be measured as solid and no extra
payment shall be made for pargetting and coring such flues. Where flues exceed 20 sq dm
- 179 -
(0.20 sq m) sectional area, deduction shall be made for the same and pargetting and coring
flues shall be measured in running metres stating size of flues and paid for separately.
Aperture for fire place shall not be deducted and no extra payment made for splaying of
jambs and throating.
7.1.14.5 Apertures for fire places shall not be deducted and extra labour shall not be
measured for splaying of jambs, throating and making arch to support the opening.
7.1.14.6 Square or Rectangular Pillars: These shall be measured as walls, but extra
payment shall be allowed for stone work in square or rectangular pillars over the rate for
stone work in walls. Rectangular pillar shall mean a detached masonry support rectangular
in section, such that its breadth does not exceed two and a half times the thickness.
7.1.14.7 Circular Pillars (Columns): These shall be measured as per actual dimensions, but
extra payment shall be allowed for stone work in circular pillars over the rate for stone work
in walls. The diameter as well as length shall be measured correct to a cm.
7.1.14.8 Tapered walls shall be measured net, as per actual dimensions and paid for as other
walls.
7.1.14.9 Curved Masonry: Stone masonry curved on plan to a mean radius exceeding 6
metres shall be measured and included with general stone work. Stone work circular on plan
to a mean radius not exceeding 6 metres shall be measured separately and shall include all
cuttings and waste and templates. It shall be measured as the mean length of the wall.
7.1.15 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour required for all the operations
described above and shall include the following:
(a) Raking out joints for plastering or pointing done as a separate item, or finishing flush as
the work proceeds.
(b) Preparing tops and sides of existing walls for raising and extending.
(c) Rough cutting and waste for forming gables cores, skew backs or spandrels of arches,
splays at eaves and all rough cutting in the body of walling unless otherwise specified.
(d) Bond stones or cement concrete bond blocks.
(e) Leading and making holes for pipes etc.
(f) Bedding and pointing wall plates, lintels, sills etc. in or on walls, bedding roof tiles and
corrugated sheets in or on walls.
(g) Building in ends of joists, beams, lintels etc.

Note:-
1. For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 1, Sub Head 7.0
2. For site development works like RR masonery and other related work, the
specification for Specific Items will be govern by PWD SOR (Road & Bridge)/
MORD.

Note:- For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 1, Sub Head 7.0

- 180 -
 SUB HEAD : 8.0
MARBLE WORK
8.0 GENERAL
Marble shall be hard, sound, dense and homogeneous in texture with crystalline texture as
far as possible. It shall generally be uniform in colour and free from stains, cracks, decay
and weathering. Marbles are metamorphic rocks capable of taking polish, formed from the
re-crystallization of lime stones or dolomitic lime stones and are distinguished from lime
stone by even visibly crystalline nature and no flaggy stratification.
Note : Marble is a product of nature hence it is difficult to guarantee uniformity of colour,
veining or other characteristics that may be represented in any sample submitted. A sample
will indicate only an average of colour, veining and other general texture and specified
finish.

8.1 CLASSIFICATION
The marble blocks, slabs and tiles shall be classified broadly in the following two
categories:
8.1.1 White Marble
Raj Nagar (plain white) Marble: It shall be plain white marble with coarse grains
predominantly showing mica particles givingreflection in light.

8.1.2 Coloured Marble

(i) Plain Black Marble
Black marble sawn along veins locally known as ‘Peta Pasu sawing’ available at
Bhainslana.
(ii) Black Zebra Marble
(a) Bhainslana Black Zebra Marble: Black marble having grey or white veins available at
Bhainslana.
(b) Kishangarh Black Zebra Marble: Black marble with grey and/or white veins available at
Kishangarh.
(c) Abu Black Zebra Marble: Black marble having white patches and streaks available at
Abu. (d) Narnaul Black Zebra Marbles: Black marble with thin white veins available at
Narnaul. (e) Makrana Dhobi Doongri Zebra Marble: Greyish black marble with white
flowery pattern available at Dhobi Doongri.
(iii) Green Marble
(a) Baroda Green Marble: Dark green marble with flowery pattern available at Baroda.
(b) Abu Green Marble: Light green marble with green and/or brown streaks on white
ground available at Ambaji.
(c) Falna Green Marble: Green marble with prominent yellowish pattern available at Falna.
(d) Bundi Green Marble: Green marble with pinkish shades available at Umar, (Bundi).
(iv) Grey Marble
(a) Kumari Grey Marble: Grey marble having light blue shades available at Makrana.
(b) Bundi Grey Marble: Grey Marble with pink or green or black streaks available at Umar
(Bundi).
(v) Brown Marble
(a) Bar Brown Marble/Brown Marble with light and dark brown shades available at Bar.
(b) Narnaul Brown MarbleBrown marble having teak wood shades available at Narnaul.

8.1.3 Granite Stone

It shall be of any colour and size as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. Granite shall be plain
machinecut and mirror polished. The stone shall be smooth and of even surface without
holes or pits.
8. SIZES AND TOLERANCES
- 181 -
The size of marble blocks, slabs and tiles shall be as mentioned in Table 8.1

TABLE 8.1

Notes:
(1) All dimensions are in centimeter.
(2) The length and width, of the blocks shall be in multiple of 30 cm.
(3) Length and width of slab shall be in multiple of 10 cm. and thickness in multiple of 1
cm.
(4) Tiles shall be square cut and linear dimensions in multiple of 10 cm.
(5) Only slabs and tiles shall be machine cut and factory made.
(6) For 8 mm thick tiles, special precautions will be required for fixing them like using
special adhesive as per manufacturer’s specifications. Such tiles are not suitable for outside
veneering
work exposed to rains/sun if used in large areas in continuous stretches. For tiles of
thickness 20mm and above cramps may be provided if approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
Tolerance
The following tolerances shall be allowed in the dimension of blocks, slabs and tiles:
Tolerance
Blocks
(a) Length + 2 per cent
(b) Width + 2 per cent
(c) Thickness + 2 per cent Slabs
(a) Length + 2 per cent
(b) Width + 2 per cent
(c) Thickness + 3 per cent Tiles
(a) Linear dimension + 3 per cent
(b) Thickness + 1 per cent
The sizes other than those mentioned above may be provided as directed by the Engineer-in-
Charge and nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

8.3 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

8.3.1 The physical properties of marble for blocks, slabs and tiles and method of tests are
mentioned in Table 8.2

TABLE 8.2

- 182 -
8.5.1 Dressing, Cutting and Rubbing
Every marble stone shall be gang saw/machine cut to the required size and shape, chisel
dressed machine finished on all beds and joints, so as to be free from any waviness and to
give truly vertical horizontal, radial or circular joints as required. The exposed faces and
sides of stones forming joints upto6mm. from the face shall be fine tooled machine cut such
that a straight edge laid along the face of the stone is in contact with every point on it. All
window sills, tread of steps, counters vanities moulding edges etc. shall be machine cut &
polished to give high gloss mirror finish as per direction of Engineer in- Charge. These
surfaces shall then be rubbed smooth. All visible angles and edges shall be true square and
free from chipping. Beyond the depth of 6 mm from face, the joints shall be dressed with as
light splay so that the thickness of joint increases, in an inverted V shape as shown in Fig.
below. The surfaces of the stones coming in contact with backing need not be chisel
dressed.

A sample of dressed and rubbed stone shall be prepared for approval and it shall be
kept on work site after being approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
8.5.11 Measurements
For plain work: Measurements shall be taken correct to a cm in length and breadth and
correct to 0.5 cm in thickness.
8.5.11.1 In the case of radially dressed or circular stone used in the work, the dimensions of
the circumscribing rectangle of the dressed stone, shall be measured correct to a centimetre
and thickness,correct to 0.5 cm.The cubical contents shall be calculated in cubic decimetre
nearest to two places of decimal.
8.5.11.2 The marble work in arches and domes shall be measured as for plain work, but
extra shall beallowed for such work over the rate for plain work.
8.5.11.3 Sunk or moulded work in marble shall be measured by volume as per plain marble
work or work in arches or domes as the case may be on the basis of circumscribed
rectangular block of the finished work but extra shall be paid for such work over the rate for
plain work for work in arches and domes. Forthe purpose of extra payment, volume of every
stone sunk or moulded shall be considered.

8.6 WALL LINING/VENEER WORK

8.6.1 Unless and otherwise specified in the nomenclature of the item, the marble slabs used
for wall lining/veneer work shall be gang saw cut (polished & machine cut) and conform to
dimensions given in
Table 8.1 above. Back shall not be polished/ cut in order to ensure a good grip with the
hearting of backing. The cut slabs shall be of the thickness as specified with a tolerance
permissible under para 8.2 above. The tolerance in wall lining when straight edge of 3 m
length is placed should not be more than 2 mm.

8.6.6 Measurements
The length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. In case of radially dressed or
circular slabs used in the work, the dimensions of the circumscribing rectangles of the

- 183 -
dressed stone used in the work, shall be measured & paid for. The area shall be calculated in
sqm nearest to two places of decimal. Marble work in lining upto 4 cm thickness shall be
paid by area under veneer work and lining of greater thickness paid by volume under plain
marble work.

8.7 MARBLE STONE FLOORING AND MARBLE STONE IN RISERS OF STEPS

AND SKIRTI
8.7.0 Marble Slab Urinal Partitions
The partitions shall be of marble slab embedded in the wall. The size and shape of the
marbles slab shall be as per direction of Engineer-in-Charge. The finished thickness shall be
18 mm. The specifications for marble/granite stone work, in general, shall be as specified.
The marble granite stone shall be cut into slabs of required thickness and shall be one piece.
(Fig. 8.4).
8.7.1 Finishing
The partition of the slab to be embedded in the masonry shall be rough dressed. Dressing
and rubbing of the exposed portion of the slab shall be as described. The dressed slab shall
be of the thickness as Specified with a tolerance of + 1.5mm. The slab shall be got
approved from the Engineer-in-Charge before fixing.
8.7.2 Fixing shall be as specified except that the recess shall be 7.5 cm wide. Fixing shall be
done by cutting chase with chase cutter/fine tools in a recess of 7.5 cm X 7.5 cm filled with
cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 6mm nominal
size). Fixing can also be done by epoxy grout in a chase of 2.0 X 7.5 cm as per direction of
Engineer-in-Charge.
8.7.3 Measurement shall be as per para 8.6.6.
Note:- For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 1, Sub Head 8.0

- 184 -
 SUB HEAD : 9.0
WOOD WORK AND P.V.C. WORK

9.3.4 Measurements
Wood work wrought, framed and fixed shall be measured for finished dimension without
any allowance for the wastage or for dimensions beyond specified dimension. However, in
case of members having mouldings, roundings or rebates and members of circular or
varying sections, finished dimensions shall be taken as the sides of the smallest square or
rectangle from which such a section can be cut. Length of each member shall be measured
over all to the nearest cm so as to include projection for tenons. Width and thickness shall be
measured to the nearest mm and the quantity shall be worked out in unit of upto three places
of decimal.

9.4 FALSE CEILING AND PARTITION FRAMES

This work shall be done as specified in 9.3 except that the scantlings need not be planed
unless otherwise specified.

9.7 FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS

9.7.0 Flush door shutters shall have a solid core and may be of the decorative or non-
decorative (Paintable type as per IS 2202 (Part I). Nominal thickness of shutters may be 25,
30 or 35 mm. Thickness and type of shutters shall be as specified.

9.7.1 Width and height of the shutters shall be as shown in the drawings or as indicated by
the Engineerin-Charge. All four edges of the shutters shall be square. The shutter shall be
free from twist or warp in its plane. The moisture content in timbers used in the manufacture
of flush door shutters shall be not more than 12 per cent when tested according to IS 1708.

9.7.2 Core
The core of the flush door shutters shall be a block board having wooden strips held in a
frame
constructed of stiles and rails. Each stile and rail shall be a single piece without any joint.
The width of the stiles and rails including lipping, where provided shall not be less than 45
mm and not more than 75mm. The width of each wooden strip shall not exceed 30 mm.
Stiles, rails and wooden strips forming the core of a shutter shall be of equal and uniform
thickness. Wooden strips shall be parallel to the stiles. End joints of the pieces of wooden
strips of small lengths shall be staggered. In a shutter, stiles and rails shall be of one species
of timber. Wooden strips shall also be of one species only but it may or may not be of the
same species as that of the stiles and rails. Any species of timber may be used for core of
flush door. However, any non-coniferous (Hard wood) timber shall be used for stiles, rails
and lipping

9.7.3 Face Panel

The face panel shall be formed by gluing, by the hot-press process on both faces of the core,
either plywood or cross-bands and face veneers. The thickness of the cross bands as such or
in the ply woodshall be between 1.0 mm and 3.0 mm. The thickness of the face veneers as
such or in the plywood shall be between 0.5 mm and 1.5 mm for commercial veneers and
between 0.4 mm and 1.0 mm for Decorative veneers, provided that the combined thickness
of both is not less than 2.2 mm. The direction of the veneers adjacent to the core shall be at
right angles to the direction of the wooden strips. Finished faces shall be sanded to smooth
even texture. Commercial face veneers shall conform to marine grade plywood and
decorative face veneers shall conform to type I decorative plywood in IS 1328.

- 185 -
9.8 WIRE GAUZE FLY PROOF SHUTTERS
9.8.0 Specified timber shall be used, and it shall be sawn in the direction of the grains.
Sawing shall be truly straight and square. The timber shall be planed smooth and accurate to
the full dimensions, rebates, roundings and mouldings as shown in the drawings made,
before assembly. Patching or plugging of any kind shall not be permitted except as
provided.

9.8.2 Wire Gauze

This shall be unless specified otherwise conform to para 8.2.7 and8.6.4.5. The wire gauze
shall be bent at right angles in the rebates of stiles and rails, turned back and fixed tight with
blue tacks at about 75 mm centres, fixed alternately in the two faces of the rebates. Over
this, wooden beading shall be fixed with brads or small screws at about 75 mm centres.

9.13 HOLD FASTS

9.13.0 These shall be made from mild steel flat 40 × 5 mm size conforming to IS 7196
without any burnsor dents. 5 cm length of M.S. flat at one end shall be bent at right angle
and one hole 11 mm dia shall bemade in it for fixing to wooden frame with 10 mm dia nut
bolt. The bolt head shall be sunk into the wooden frame, 10 mm deep and pluged with
wooden plug. At the other end 10 cm length of the hold fast flat shall be forked and bent of
length as specified at right angle in opposite direction and embedded in cement concrete
block of size 30 x 10 x 15 cm of mix 1:3:6 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone
aggregate, 20 mm nominal size) or as specified

9.15.7 Sliding Door Bolts (Aldrops) (Fig. 8.7)

9.15.7.1 These shall be of mild steel, cast brass, aluminum or as specified, and shall be
capable of smooth sliding action.

9.15.7.4 Aluminum Sliding Door Bolts : These shall be made of aluminum alloy and shall
generally conform to IS 2681. Aluminum sliding door bolts shall be anodized. All screw
holes shall be counter sunk to suit the counter sunk head of screws of specified sizes. All
edges and corners shall be finished smooth. In case of single leaf door, when iron socket
plate or a brass or aluminum fixing bolts (or sliding door bolt) cannot be fixed, hole of
suitable size shall be drilled in the door frame and an iron or brass plate cut to hape shall be
fixed at the face of the hole. The leading dimensions of the sliding door bolts are illustrated.

9.15.8 Tower Bolts (Fig. 9.8)

9.15.8.0 These shall generally conform to IS 204 (Part. I) & IS 204 (Part. II). Tower bolts
shall be well made and shall be free from defects. The bolts shall be finished to the correct
shape and shall have a smooth action. All tower bolts made with sheet of 1.2 mm thickness
and above shall have counter sunk screw holes to suit counter sunk head of wood screws.
All sharp edges and corners shall be removed and finished smooth

9.15.10 Pull Bolt Locks

9.15.10.1 These shall be of M.S. cast brass or aluminium as specified. M.S. pull bolt locks
shall be copper oxidized (black finish) or as specified.
9.15.10.2 Brass pull bolt locks shall be finished bright, chromium plated or oxidised as
specified. Aluminium pull bolt locks shall be anodised and the anodic coating shall not be
less than grade. A.C. 10of IS 1868. The bolt shall be 10 mm in diameter and the fixing plate
3 mm thick. The stop block shall be screwed to the fixing plate by a small ball and spring
over which the bolt shall slide.
9.15.10.3 The fixing plate shall have four holes for fixing it to the door leaf, two of which
shall be square to receive 6 mm dia. bolts with round heads, the remaining two shall receive
machine screwed with locknuts. The receiving plate shall be of the same width and
- 186 -
thickness as the fixing plate and shall have 3counter sunk holes. Where the bolt slides into
wooden members, like the chowkhat, which have a rebate, the receiving plate shall also be
correspondingly shaped so as to fit into the rebate. The screws and bolts shall have the same
finish as the main bolt. The leading dimensions of pull bolt locks are given in the drawing.
The denominating size of the pull bolt locks shall be length of the fixing plate between
guides plus the
thickness of the guides.

9.15.19 Door Handles (Doors and Windows)

9.15.19.1 These should generally conform to IS 208. The door handles shall be well made
and free from defects. These shall be finished correct to shape and dimensions. All edges
and corners shall be removed and finished smooth so as to facilitate easy handling. Cast
handle shall be free from casting defects. Where the grip portion of the handle is joined with
the base piece by mechanical means, the arrangement shall be such that the assembled
handle shall have adequate strength comparable to that of integrally cast type handles.

Floor Door Stopper

9.15.20.1 The floor door stopper shall conform to IS 1823. This shall be made of cast brass
of overall size as specified and shall have rubber cushion. The shape and pattern of stopper
shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. It shall be of brass finished bright, chromium
plated or oxidised or as specified The size of floor stopper shall be determined by the length
of its plate. It shall be well made and shall have four counter sunk holes for fixing the door
stoppers to the floor by means of wood screws. The body for ousing of the door stopper
shall be cast in one piece and it shall be fixed to the cover plate by means of brass or mild
steel screws and cover plate shall be of casting or of sheet metal. The spring shall be fixed
firmly to the pin. Tongue which would be pressed while closing or opening of the door shall
be connected to the lower part by means of copper pin. On the extreme end a rubber piece
shall be attached to absorb shock. All parts of the door stopper shall be of good
workmanship and finish, burrs and sharp edges removed. It shall be free from surface and
casting defects. Aluminium stopper shall be anodised and anodic film shall not be less than
grade AC-10 of IS 1868.
Note:- For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 1, Sub Head 9.0

- 187 -
- 188 -
- 189 -
 SUB HEAD : 10.0
STEEL WORK

10.0 DEFINITIONS/ TERMINOLOGY

Bead
A single run of weld metal deposited on surface.
Butt Weld
A weld in which the weld metal lies substantially within the extension of the planes arc the
surfaces on the parts joined.
Crater
A depression left in weld metal where the arc was broken or the flame was removed.
End Crater
A crater at the end of a weld or at the end of a joint.
Fillet Weld
A weld of approximately triangular cross-section joining two surfaces approximately at the
right angles to each other in a lap joint, tee joint or corner joint. It is of two types:
(1) Continuous
(2) Intermittent.
Fusion Welding
Any welding process in which the weld is made between metals in a state of fusion without
hammering or pressure.
Non- fusion Welding
A term applied to the deposition, by the Oxy-Acetylene process of filler metal on parent
metal without fusion of the latter.
Oxy-Acetylene Pressure Welding
Pressure welding in which any Oxy-Acetylene flame is used to make the surface to be
united plastic. No filler metal is used.
Run
The metal deposited during one passage of the electrode or blow pipe in the making of a
joint.
Throat thickness
See Fig. 10.1.
Weld
A union between two pieces of metal at faces rendered plastic or liquid by heat or pressure,
or both, Filler metal may be used to effect the union.
10.1 MATERIALS
Micro-Alloying Elements
Elements such as niobium, boron, vanadium and titanium added singly or in combination to
obtain higher strength to weight ratio and better toughness, formability and weldability as
compared to unalloyed steel of similar strength level.
Weldability
A metallic substance is considered to be weldable by a given process and for the given
purpose, when metallic continuity to a stated degree can be obtained by welding using a
suitable procedure, so that the joints comply with the requirements specified in regard to
both their local properties and their influence on the construction of which they form a part.
Controlled Rolling
A hot rolling process in which the temperature of the steel and its reduction ratio are
controlled, particularly during the final rolling passes, in order to achieve fine grain micro
structure and optimum mechanical properties.
Normalizing Rolling
A hot rolling process in which the final rolling passes are carried out at a suitable higher
temperature, followed by cooling in natural air to a temperature below the transformation

- 190 -
temperature, in order to produce a structure, analogous to that obtained by a separate
normalizing treatment of hot rolled product.
10.1.1 Steel
10.1.1.1 Supply of Material : General requirements relating to supply of structural steel
shall conform
to IS 8910.
10.1.1.2 Grades : There shall be nine grades of steel as given in Tables 10.1 and 10.2. While
placing the order the steel should be designated by ‘Designation’ (See Table 10.1 and 10.2).
10.1.1.3 Manufacture : The processes used in the steel making and further hot rolling into
steel plates, strips, sections, flats, bars, etc., are left to the discretion of the
manufacturer/supplier. If required, secondary refining may follow steel making, as also
normalizing rolling/controlled rolling during manufacturing of sections or as per the
agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer/supplier.
10.1.1.4 Freedom from Defects
10.1.1.4.1 All finished materials shall be well and cleanly rolled to the dimensions, sections
and masses specified. The finished material shall be reasonably free from surface flaws;
laminations; rough/jagged and imperfect edges and all other harmful defects.
10.1.1.4.2 Minor surface defects may be removed by the manufacturer/supplier by grinding
provided the thickness is not reduced locally by more than 4 percent below the minimum
specified thickness. Reduction in thickness by grinding greater than 4 percent but not
exceeding 7 percent may be made subject to mutual agreement between the purchaser and
manufacturer/supplier.
10.1.1.4.3 Subject to agreement with the purchaser, surface defects which cannot be dealt
with as in 10.1.1.4.2 may be repaired by chipping or grinding followed by welding and
inspection by a mutually agreed procedure such that :
(a) After complete removal of the defects and before welding, the thickness of the item is
not to be reduced by more than 20 percent at any place.
(b) Welding is carried out by procedure APPROVED by competent authority with approved
electrodes and the welding is ground smooth to the correct nominal thickness; and
(c) Subsequent to the finish grinding, the item may be required to be normalized or
otherwise heat treated
at the purchaser’s discretion.
10.1.1.4.4 Welding as mentioned in 10.1.1.4.3 is not permissible for grade designation E
250 material.
10.1.1.5 Chemical Composition : Ladle Analysis the ladle analysis of the steel, when
carried out by the method specified in the relevant part of IS 228 or any other established
instrumental /chemical method, shall be as given in Table 10.1. In case of dispute, the
procedure given in IS 228 and its relevant parts shall be the referee method and where test
methods are not specified shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the
manufacturer/supplier.
10.1.2 Rivets
Rivets shall be made from rivet bars of mild steel as per IS 1148.
10.1.3 Bolts
These are of two types namely turned and fitted bolts and black bolts. Turned & fitted bolts
are turned to exact diameter in automatic lathe. For these bolts, whether reamed or drilled
bolts, the same unit stresses are allowed as for rivets. In case of black bolts which are not
finished to exact sizes, a lower working stress other than for turned bolts is adopted. They
shall conform to IS 1367 – Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners.
10.1.4 Electrodes
The electrodes required for metal arc welding shall be covered electrodes and shall conform
to IS 814.
10.2 STEEL WORK IN SINGLE SECTION FIXED INDEPENDENTLY WITH
CONNECTING PLATE

- 191 -
10.2.0 The steel work in single section of R.S. joists, flats, Tees Angles fixed independently
with or without connecting plate, is described in these clauses.
10.2.1 Fabrication
The steel sections as specified shall be straightened and cut square to correct lengths and
measured with a steel tape. The cut ends exposed to view shall be finished smooth. No two
pieces shall be welded or otherwise jointed to make up the required length of member. All
straightening and shaping to form, shall be done by pressure. Bending or cutting shall be
carried out in such a manner as not to impair the strength of the metal.
10.2.2 Painting
All surfaces which are to be painted, oiled or otherwise treated shall be dry and thoroughly
cleaned to remove all loose scale and loose rust. Surfaces not in contact but inaccessible
after shop assembly, shall receive the full specified protective treatment before assembly.
This does not apply to the interior of sealed hollow sections. Part to be encased in concrete
shall not be painted or oiled. A priming coat of approved steel primer such as Red
Oxide/Zinc Chromate primer conforming to IS 2074 shall be applied before any member of
steel structure are placed in position or taken out of workshop.
10.2.3 Erection
Steel work shall be hoisted and placed in position carefully without any damage to itself and
other building work and injury to workmen. Where necessary mechanical appliances such as
lifting tackle winch etc. shall be used. The suitability and capacity of all plant and
equipment used for erection shall
be upto the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.
10.2.4 Measurements
The work as fixed in place shall be measured in running metres correct to a millimetre and
weights calculated on the basis of standard tables correct to the nearest kilogram. The
standard weight of steel sections shall conform to IS 808 with tolerance in sizes as per IS
1852. Tolerance in weight is given in Table 10.3. Steel sections shall be acceptable within
tolerance limits. Payment for steel sections shall be made as per actual weight within
tolerances. Sections having weight on higher side than permissible tolerance, may be
acceptable but payment shall be made on the basis of standard weight only. Steel sections
having weight variations lower side than permissible variation shall not be acceptable.
Unless otherwise specified, weight of cleats, brackets, packing pieces, bolts, nuts, washers,
distance pieces, separaters, diaphgram gussets (taking overall square dimension) fish plates,
etc. shall be addedto the weight of respective items. In riveted work allowance is to be made
for weight of rivet heads. Unless otherwise specified an addition of 2.5% of the weight of
structure shall be made for shop and site rivet heads in riveted steel structures. No deduction
shall be made for rivet/ or bolt holes (excluding holes for anchor or holding down bolts).
Deduction in case of rivet or bolt hole shall however be made if its area exceeds 0.02 sqm.
The weight of steel sheets, plates and strips shall be taken from relevant Indian standards
based on 7.85 Kg/m2 for every millimetre sheet thickness. For rolled sections, steel rods and
steel strips, weight given in relevant Indian Standards shall be used.
10.2.5 Rate
Rate includes the cost of labour and materials required for all the operations described
above.
10.3 STEEL WORK IN BUILT UP SECTIONS (RIVETED AND BOLTED)
The steel work in built up section (Riveted and bolted) such as trusses, framed work etc. is
specified in this clause.
10.3.1 Laying Out
A figure of the steel structure to be fabricated shall be drawn on a level platform to full
scale. This may be done in full or in parts, as shown on drawings or as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge. Steel tape shall be used for measurements.
10.3.2 Fabrication
Fabrication shall generally be done as specified in IS 800. In major works or where so
specified, shop drawings giving complete information for the fabrication of the component
- 192 -
parts of the structure including the location, type, size, length and details or rivets, bolts or
welds, shall be prepared in advance of the actual fabrication and approved by the Engineer-
in-charge. The drawings shall indicate the shop and field rivets, bolts and welds. The steel
members shall be distinctly marked or stenciled with paint with the identification marks as
given in the shop drawings. Great accuracy shall be observed in the fabrication of various
members, so that these can be assembled without being unduly packed, strained or forced
into position and when built up, shall be true and free from twist, kinks, buckles or open
joints. Wooden or metal sheet templates shall be made to correspond to each member, and
position of rivet holes shall be marked accurately on them and holes drilled. The templates
shall then be laid on the steel members, and holes for riveting and bolting marked on them.
The ends of the steel members shall also be marked for cutting as per required dimensions.
The base of steel columns and the positions of anchor bolts shall be carefully set out at the
required location.
10.3.2.1 The steel section shall be straight or to be straightened or flattened by pressure
unless required to be of curvilinear form and shall free from twists. These shall be cut
square either by shearing or sawing to correct length and measured by steel tape. No tow
pieces shall be welded or joined to make up for the required length of member.
10.3.2.2 Making Holes : Holes through more than one thickness of materials for members,
such as compound stanchion and girder flanges shall, where possible, be drilled after the
members are assembled and tightly clamped or bolted together. Punching may be permitted
before assembly, provided the holes are punched 3mm less in diameter than the required
size and reamed after assembly to the full diameter. The thickness of material punched shall
be not greater than 16 mm.
Rivet Holes
The diameter for rivets and black bolts holes shall be taken as the nominal diameter of a
rivet/ black bolts plus 1.5 mm for rivets/ bolts of nominal diameter less than or equal to 25
mm” and 2.0 mm for rivets of nominal diameter exceeding 25 mm, unless specified
otherwise. Holes for turned and fitted bolts shall be drilled or reamed large by 0.2 to 8 mm
depending upon the dia. of bolts. Holes shall have their axis perpendicular to the surface
bored through. The drilling or reaming shall be free from burrs, and the holes shall be clean
and accurate. Holes for rivets and bolts shall not be formed by gas cutting process. Holes for
counter sunk bolts shall be made in such a manner that their heads sit flush with the surface
after fixing.
10.3.2.3 Assembly : Before making holes in individual members, for fabrication and steel
work intended to be riveted or bolted together shall be assembled and clamped properly and
tightly so as to ensure close abutting, or lapping of the surfaces of the different members.
All stiffeners shall be fixed (or placed) tightly both at top and bottom without being drawn
or caulked. The abutting joints shall be cut or dressed true and straight, and fitted close
together. Web plates of girders, which have no cover flange plates, shall have their ends
flush with the tops of angles unless otherwise required. The web plate when spliced, shall
have clearance of not more than 5mm. The erection clearance of cleated ends of members
connecting steel to steel shall preferably be not greater than 1.5 mm. The erection clearance
at the ends of beams without web cleats shall not be more than 3 mm at each end but where
for practical reasons, greater clearance is necessary, seating designed suitably shall be
provided. Column splices and butt joints of struts and compression members requiring
contact for stress transmission shall be accurately, machined and close butted over the whole
section. In column caps and bases, the ends of shafts together with the attached gussets,
angles, channels etc. after riveting together shall be accurately machined so that the parts
connected, butt against each other over the entire surfaces of contact. Connecting angles or
channels shall be fabricated and placed in position with great accuracy so that they are not
unduly reduced in thickness by machining. The ends of all bearing stiffeners shall be
machined or grounded to fit tightly both at top and bottom.
10.3.2.4 Riveting : Rivets shall be used, where slip under load has to be avoided.

- 193 -
Preliminaries before Riveting:- Members to be riveted shall have all parts firmly placed and
held together before and during riveting, and special care shall be taken in this respect for all
single riveted connections. For multiple riveted connections, a service bolt shall be provided
in every third or fourth hole.
Process of Riveting
The riveting shall be carried out by using machines of the steady pressure type. However,
where such facilities are not available hand riveting may be permitted by the Engineer-in-
charge. The rivets shall be heated red hot, care being taken to control the temperature of
heating so as not to burn the steel. Rivets of diameter less than10mm may be driven cold.
Rivets shall be finished neat with heads full and of equal size. The heads shall be central on
shanks and shall grip the assembled members firmly. All loose, burnt, or badly formed
rivets with eccentric or deficient heads shall be cut out and replaced. In cutting out rivets,
care shall be taken so as not to injure the assembled members. Caulking and recapping shall
not be permitted. For testing rivets, a hammer weighing approx. 0.25 kg shall be used and
both heads of the rivet (Specially the machine head) shall be tapped. When so tested, the
rivets shall not give a hollow sound and a jar where so specified, other tests shall be carried
out to ensure the soundness of rivets. All rivets heads shall be painted with approved steel
primer paint within a week of their fixing.
10.3.2.5 Bolting : The nominal length of the bolt shall be the distance from the underside of
the head to the further end of the shank. The nominal diameter of the bolt shall be the
diameter at the shank above the screwed threads. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be
thoroughly cleaned and dipped in double boiled linseed oil, before use. All bolts heads and
nuts shall be hexagonal unless specified otherwise. The screwed threads shall conform to IS
1363 and the threaded surface shall not be tapered. The bolts shall be of such length as to
project at least two clear threads beyond the nuts when fixed in position, and these shall fit
in the holes without any shake. The nuts shall fit in the threaded ends of bolts properly.
Where necessary, washers shall be tapered or otherwise suitably shaped to give the heads
and nuts of bolts a satisfactory bearing. The threaded portion of each bolt shall project
through the nut at least two thread. In all cases where the full bearing area of the bolt is to be
developed, the bolt shall be provided with a washer of sufficient thickness under the nuts to
avoid any threaded portion of the bolt being within the thickness of the parts bolted together.
Where there is a risk of the nuts being removed or becoming loose due to vibrations or
reversal of stresses, these shall be secured from slackening by the use of lock nut, spring
washers as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
10.3.3 Erection
10.3.3.0 Steel members shall be hoisted and erected in position carefully, without any
damage to itself, other structures and equipment and injury to workmen. The method of
hoisting and erection proposed to be adopted by the contractor shall be got approved from
the Engineer-in-charge in advance. The contractor however shall be fully responsible for the
work being carried out in a safe and proper manner without unduly stressing the various
members and proper equipment such as derricks, lifting tackles, winches, ropes etc. shall be
used.
10.3.3.1 The work of erection may be done in suitable units as may be directed by the
Engineer-in-charge. Fabricated members shall be lifted at such points so as to avoid
deformation or excessive stress in members. The structure or part of it placed in position
shall be secured against over-turning or collapse by suitable means. During execution, the
steel members shall be securely bolted or otherwise fastened when necessary temporarily
braced to provide for all loads including those due to erection equipments and its operation
to be carried safely by structure during erection. The steel members shall be placed in proper
position as per approved drawing, final riveting or permanent bolting shall be done only
after proper alignment has been checked and confirmed. 10.3.3.2 Trusses shall be lifted only
at nodes. The trusses above 10 m in span shall not be lifted by slinging at two mid points of
rafters, which shall be temporary braced by a wooden member of a suitable section. After
the trusses are placed in position, purlins and wind bracings shall be fixed as soon as
- 194 -
possible. The end of the truss which faces the prevailing winds shall be fixed with holding
down bolts, and the other end kept free to move. In case of trusses of spans upto 10m the
free end of the truss shall be laid on lead sheet or steel plate as per design, and the holes for
holding down bolts shall be made in the form of oblong slots so as to permit the free
movements of the truss end. For larger spans the truss shall be provided with proper bearing
as per design. 10.3.3.3 Columns and stanchions shall be erected truly vertical with the
necessary cross bracing etc. and the base shall be properly fixed with the foundation
concrete by means of anchor bolts etc. as per drawing.
10.3.3.4 Anchor bolts to be placed in the concrete foundation should be held in position with
a wooden template. At the time of concreting anchor bolt locations shall be provided with
suitable timber mould or pipe sleeve to allow for adjustment which shall be removed after
initial setting of concrete. The spaces left around anchor bolts shall be linked to a stopping
channel in the concrete leading to the side of the pedestal and on the underside of the base
plate to allow the spaces being grouted up after the base plate is fixed in the position along
with the column footing. Grouting shall be of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand)
or as specified.
10.3.3.5 Bedding of Column, Stanchions etc.:- Bedding shall not be carried out until the
steel work has been finally levelled, plumbed and connected together. The stanchion shall
be supported on steel wedges and adjusted to make the column plumb. For multistoreyed
buildings, the bedding shall not be done until sufficient number of bottom lengths of
stanchions have been properly lined, levelled and plumbed and sufficient floor beams are
fixed in position. The base plates shall be wedged clear of the bases by M.S. wedges and
adjusted where necessary to plumb the columns. The gaps under the base plate may be made
upto 25 mm which shall be pressure grouted with cement grouts. With small columns, if
permitted by the Engineer-in-charge, the column base shall be floated on a thick cement
grout on the concrete pedestal. The anchor bolt holes in the base plate may be made about
10 to 15 mm larger than the bolts. In such cases suitable washers shall be provided.
10.3.4 Painting
Before the members of the steel structure are placed in position or taken out of the workshop
these shall be painted as specified in 10.2.2.
10.3.5 Measurements
The work as fixed in position shall be measured in running metres correct to a millimeter
and their weight calculated on the basis of standard tables correct to the nearest kilogram.
The standard weight of steel sections shall conform to IS 808 with tolerance in sizes as per
IS 1852. Tolerenace in weight is given in Table 10.3. Steel sections shall be acceptable
within tolerance limits. Payment for steel sections shall be made as per actual weight within
tolerances. Sections having weight on higher side than permissible tolerance, may be
acceptable but payment shall be made on the basis of standard weight only. Steel sections
having weight variations lower than permissible variation shall not be acceptable. Unless
otherwise specified. Weight of cleats, brackets, packing pieces, bolts nuts, washers, distance
pieces, separators diaphragm gussets (taking overall square dimensions) fish plates etc. shall
be added to the weight of respective items. No deductions shall be made for skew cuts. In
riveted work, allowance is to be made for weight of rivet heads. Unless otherwise specified
and addition of 2.5% of the weight of structure shall be made for shop and site rivet heads in
riveted steel structures. No deduction shall be made for rivet/ or bolt holes (excluding holes
for anchor or holding down bolts). Deduction in case of rivet or bolt hole shall, however, be
made if its area exceeds 0.02 m2. The weight of steel sheet and strips shall be taken from
relevant Indian Standards based on 7.85 kg/m2 for every millimeter sheet thickness. For
rolled sections, steel rods and steel strips, weight given in relevant Indian Standards shall be
used.
10.3.6 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operation
described above.
10.4 STEEL WORK IN BUILT UP SECTION (WELDED)
- 195 -
10.4.0 The steel work in built up sections (welded) such as in trusses, form work etc. is
specified in this clause.
10.4.1 Laying out
It shall be as specified in 10.3.1.
10.4.2 Fabrication
10.4.2.1 Straightening, shaping to form, cutting and assembling, shall be as per 10.3.2 as far
as applicable, except that the words “riveted or bolted” shall be read as “welded” and holes
shall only be used for the bolts used for temporary fastening as shown in drawings.
10.4.2.2 Welding : Welding shall generally be done by electric arc process as per IS 816 and
IS 823. The electric arc method is usually adopted and is economical. Where electricity for
public is not available generators shall be arranged by the contractor at his own cost unless
otherwise specified. Gas welding shall only by resorted to using oxyacetylene flame with
specific approval of the Engineer-in-charge. Gas welding shall not be permitted for
structural steel work Gas welding required heating of the members to be welded along with
the welding rod and is likely to create temperature stresses in the welded members.
Precautions shall therefore be taken to avoid distortion of the members due to these
temperature stresses. The work shall be done as shown in the shop drawings which should
clearly indicate various details of the joint to be welded, type of welds, shop and site welds
as well as the types of electrodes to be used. Symbol for welding on plans and shops
drawings shall be according to IS 813. As far as possible every efforts shall be made to limit
the welding that must be done after the structure is erected so as to avoid the improper
welding that is likely to be done due to heights and difficult positions on scaffolding etc.
apart from the aspect of economy. The maximum dia of electrodes for welding work shall
be as per IS 814. Joint surfaces which are to be welded together shall be free from loose mill
scale, rust, paint, grease or other foreign matter, which adversely affect the quality of weld
and workmanship.
10.4.2.3 Precautions : All operation connected with welding and cutting equipment shall
conform to the safety requirements given in IS 818 for safety requirements and Health
provision in Electric and gas welding and cutting operations.
10.4.2.4 Operation, Workmanship and process of Welding is described in Appendix B,
10.4.2.5 Inspection and testing of welds shall be as per IS 822.
10.4.2.6 Assembly : Before welding is commenced, the members to be welded shall first be
brought together and firmly clamped or tack welded to be held in position. This temporary
connection has to be strong enough to hold the parts accurately in place without any
disturbance. Tack welds located in places where final welds will be made later shall
conform to the final weld in quality and shall be cleaned off slag before final weld is made.
10.4.2.7 Erection : The specification shall be as described in 10.3.3 except that while
erecting a welded structure adequate means shall be employed for temporary fastening the
members together and bracing the frame work until the joints are welded. Such means shall
consists of applying of erection bolts, tack welding or other positive devices imparting
sufficient strength and stiffness to resist all temporary loads and lateral forces including
wind. Owing to the small number of bolts ordinarily employed for joints which are to be
welded, the temporary support of heavy girders carrying columns shall be specially
attended. Different members which shall be fillet welded, shall be brought into as close
contact as possible. The gap due to faulty workmanship or incorrect fit if any shall not
exceed. 1.5 mm if gap exceeds 1.5 mm or more occurs locally the size of fillet weld shall be
increased at such position by an amount equal to the width of the gap.
10.4.2.8 Painting : Before the member of the steel structures are placed in position or taken
out of the workshop these shall be painted as specified in para 10.2.2.
10.4.3 Measurements
The mode of measurements shall be the same as specified in 10.2.4 except that weight of
welding material shall not be added in the weight of members for payment and nothing extra
shall be paid for making and filling holes for temporary fastening of members during
erection before welding.
- 196 -
10.4.4 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the operations
described above.
10.5 COLLAPSIBLE STEEL GATES
10.5.0 These shall be of approved manufacture and shall be fabricated from the mild steel
sections.
10.5.1 The gates shall consist of double or single collapsible gate depending on the size of
the opening. These shall consist of vertical double channels each 20 x 10 x 2 mm. at 10 cm.
centre to centre braced with flat iron diagonals 20 x 5 mm and top and bottom rails of T-
iron 40 x 40 x 6 mm @ 3.5 kg/m with 40 mm dia. ball bearings in every fourth double
channel, unless otherwise specified. Wherever collapsible gate is not provided within the
opening and fixed along the outer wall surface, T- iron at the top may be replaced by flat
iron 40 x 10 mm. The collapsible gate shall be provided with necessary bolts and nuts,
locking arrangement, stoppers and handles. Any special fittings like spring, catches and
locks, shall be so specified in the description of item where so required. The gate shall open
and close smoothly and easily.
10.5.2 Fixing
T- iron rails shall be fixed to the floor and to the Lintel at top by means of anchor bolts
embedded in cement concrete of floor and lintel. The anchor bolts shall be placed
approximately at 45 cm centres alternatively in the two flanges of the T- iron. The bottom
runner (T- iron) shall be embedded in the floor and proper groove shall be formed along the
runner for the purpose. The collapsible shutter shall be fixed at sides by fixing the end
double channel with T-iron rails and also by hold- fasts bolted to the end double channel and
fixed in masonry of the side walls on the other side. In case the collapsible shutter is not
required to reach the lintel, beam or slab level, a Tee-section suitably designed may be fixed
at the top, embedded in masonry and provided with necessary clamps and roller
arrangement at the top. All the adjoining work damaged in fixing of gate shall be made good
to match the existing work, without any extra cost.
10.5.3 Painting
All the members of the collapsible gate including T-iron shall be thoroughly cleaned off
rust, scales, dust etc. and given a priming coat of approved steel primer conforming to IS
2074 before fixing them in position.
10.5.4 Measurements
The height and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. The height of the gate shall be
measured as the length of the double channels and breadth from outside to outside of the end
fixed double channels in open position, of the gate. The area shall be calculated in square
metres, correct to two places of decimal.
10.5.5 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above.
10.6 M.S. SHEET SLIDING SHUTTER
10.6.0 These shall be manufactured as per drawings and specification. These shall be
fabricated from mild steel sheets.
10.6.1 The shutters shall be double or single leaf shutter as specified. The shutters shall be
fabricated of specified size of M.S. angle iron frame diagonally braced with the same size of
M.S. angle riveted / welded together with 3mm gusset plate at junction to form a rigid
frame. M.S. sheet of 1 mm thickness or as specified shall be fixed to the frame with
rivets/welds as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. These shall also be provided with top
and bottom guide rails of specified size angles or T- irons and 25 mm diameter pulley or
with 25 mm diameter ball bearing at the bottom and guide block with steel pulleys at the
top. The shutters shall also be provided with locking arrangement, handles, stoppers, and
holdfasts, other fittings as specified in the description of the item. The guide rails shall be
sufficiently long and continued along the wall on both ends so that the sliding shutters can
rest against the walls, giving full opening when so required.
- 197 -
10.6.2 Fixing
The guide rails shall be fixed to the floor by means of anchor bolts embedded in the cement
concrete floor. The steel section at the top shall be suitably supported from the walls. Two
channel sections shall be suitable fixed vertically below the extreme clamps in the wall and
floor to avoid the shutter from going out of the supports at top and bottom. A suitable
clamping arrangement will be provided at either end of the opening to avoid the shutters
from rolling back into the opening. All the adjoining work damaged in fixing shall be made
good to match the existing work.
10.6.3 Painting
All members of the sliding shutters including fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust,
scales, dust etc. and given a priming coat of approved steel primer i.e. Red oxide zinc
chrome primer conforming to IS 2074 before fixing them in position.
10.6.4 Measurements
The height and width shall be measured correct to a cm and its area for payment shall be
calculated in square metres correct to two places of decimal. The height of the shutter shall
be measured from outside to outside of the guide rail and width out side to out side of the
shutter including the vertical position channels in sides, when shutter closed.
10.6.5 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour involved in all the operation described
above. It also includes the cost of the full length of guide rails.
10.7 M.S. SHEET SHUTTERS
10.7.0 These shall be manufactured as per drawing and specification. These shall be
fabricated from mild steel sheets and angle iron.
10.7.1 The doors shall be provided as double leaf shutters unless otherwise specified . The
shutters shall be fabricated with frame of M.S. angle 40 x 40 x 6 mm @ 3.5 kg/ metre and
two diagonal braces of the same section as shown in Fig. 3 unless otherwise specified. The
frame shall be riveted and/ or welded at the junctions. Wherever riveting shall be done 3.15
mm (10 G) thick gusset plate shall be provided at the junction. M.S. sheet of 1 mm thickness
or as specified, shall be fixed to the frame with rivets or welds as approved by the Engineer-
in-charge. Alternatively the diagonal bracing may be replaced by one horizontal and two
cross flats 30 x 6 mm
as shown in Fig. 10.3 unless otherwise specified. The outer frame shall be provided with
cleats made of section 40 x 10 mm and bent in the shape of angle cleats with one arm 150
mm long and the other arm 50 mm long and fixed to the angle iron frame of the door with
two 12 mm dia bolts and nuts. For doors upto 2.40 m height, two angles cleats per door shall
be provided. The cleat shall have a vertical leg of 150 mm which shall be fixed with frame
and horizontal leg of about 50 mm which shall be provided with a hole of 24 mm dia and
fixed in the projected pin of the pin clamp.
10.7.2 Fittings and Fixtures
The shutters shall be fixed to the wall masonry with four pin clamps (pintles) where the
height of the shutter is upto 2.4 m. Each pin clamp shall consist of 50 x 6 mm flat iron 45
cm long bent and forked at one end and provided with 20 mm diameter M.S. pin on the
other. The pin shall be firmly riveted or welded to the pin clamp, the other end of which
shall be embedded in masonry by means of cement concrete block 40 x 23 x 20 cm of 1:3:6
mix (1 cement :3 coarse sand:6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size). It shall be so
placed that bottom pin shall face upwards and “top pin downward”in order that the gate may
not be removed by lifting over pins. One hook with eye 45 cm long of 10 mm diameter shall
be provided for each shutter to keep it fixed in open position. The hook shall be fixed in
wall masonry with wooden block and the eye shall be fixed on 6 mm thick M.S. plate as
staple and fixed in the shutter frame with rivet or weld. A cement concrete block 15 x 10 x
20 cm in 1:2:4 (1 cement:2 coarse sand:4 grades stone aggregate of 20 mm nominal size)
mix shall be embedded in the floor or at junction of two shutters so that door shutter open
only on the outside and not on the inside. The shutters shall also be provided with locking

- 198 -
arrangement and two handles of the shape and pattern as approved by the Engineer-in-
charge.
10.7.3 Painting
All the members of the door including angle iron shall be thoroughly cleaned off rust,
scales, dust etc. and given a priming coat of approved steel primer i.e. Red Oxide/ Zinc
chrome primer confirming to IS 2074 before fixing them in position.
10.7.4 Measurements
The width and height of shutters shall be measured to the nearest cm. The area shall be
calculated in square metre correct to two places of decimal.
10.7.5 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour involved in all the operation described
above. Nothing extra shall be paid for cement concrete block or wooden blocks nor anything
deducted for these from the measurement of the masonry wall.
10.8 ROLLING SHUTTERS
10.8.1 Rolling shutters shall conform to IS 6248. These shall include necessary locking
arrangement and handles etc. These shall be suitable for fixing in the position as specified
i.e. outside or inside on or below lintel or between jambs of the opening. The door shall be
either push and pull type or operated with mechanical device supplied by the firm. Shutters
upto 10 sq. metre shall be of push and pull type and shutters with an area of over 10 sq.
metre shall generally be provided with reduction gear operated by mechanical device with
chain or handle, if bearings are specified for each of operation, these shall be paid for
separately.
10.8.1.1 Shutter : The shutter be built up of inter locking lath section formed from cold
rolled steel strips. The thickness of the sheets from which the lath sections have been rolled
shall be not less than 0.90 mm for the shutters upto 3.5 m width. Shutters above 9 metres
width should be divided in 2 parts with provision of one middle fixed or movable guide
channel or supported from the back side to resist wind pressure. The lath section shall be
rolled so as to have interlocking curls at both edges and a deep corrugation at the centre with
a bridge depth of not less than 12 mm to provide sufficient curtain of stiffness for resisting
manual pressures and normal wind pressure. Each lath section shall be continuous single
piece without any welded joint. When interlocked, the lath sections shall have a distance of
75 mm rolling centers. Each alternate lath section shall be fitted with malleable cast iron or
mild steel clips securely riveted at either ends, thus locking in the lath section at both ends
preventing lateral movement of the individual lath sections. The clips shall be so designed
as to fit the contour of the lath sections.
10.8.1.2 Spring : The spring shall be of coiled type. The spring shall be manufactured from
high tensile spring steel wire or strips of adequate strength conforming to IS 4454- Part I .
10.8.1.3 Roller and Brackets : The suspension shaft of the roller shall be made of steel pipe
conforming to heavy duty as per IS 1161. For shutter upto 6 metre width and height not
exceeding 5metre, steel pipes of 50 mm nominal bore shall be used. The shaft shall be
supported on mild steel brackets of size 375 x 375 x 3.15 mm for shutters upto a clear height
of 3.5 metre. The size of mild steel brackets shall be 500 x 500 x 10 mm for shutters of clear
height above 3.5 m and upto 6.5 m. The suspension shaft clamped to the brackets shall be
fitted with rotatable cast iron pulleys to which the shutter is attached. The pulleys and pipe
shaft shall connected by means of pretensioned helical springs to counter balance the weight
of the shutter and to keep the shutter in equilibrium in any partly open position.
10.8.1.4 When the width of the opening is greater than 3.5 mtr. The cast iron pulleys shall
be interconnected with a cage formed out of mild steel flats of at least 32 x 6 mm and mild
steel dummy rings made of similar flats to distribute the torque uniformly. Self aligning two
row ball bearing with special cast iron casings shall be provided at the extreme pulley and
caging rings shall have a minimum spacing of 15mm and at least 4 number flats running
throughout length of roller shall be provided.

- 199 -
10.8.1.5 In case of shutters of large opening with mechanical device for opening the shutter
the roller shall be fitted with a purion wheel at one end which in contact with a worm fitted
to the bracket plate, caging and pulley with two ball bearing shall be provided.
10.8.1.6 Guide Channel : The width of guide channel shall be 25 mm the minimum depth
of guide channels shall be as follows:

10.8.1.7 The gap between the two legs of the guide channels shall be sufficient to allow the
free movement of the shutter and at the same time close enough to prevent rattling of the
shutter due to wind.
10.8.1.8 Each guide channel shall be provided with a minimum of three fixing cleats or
supports for attachment to the wall or column by means of bolts or screws. The spacing of
cleats shall not exceed 0.75 m. Alternatively, the guide channels may also be provided with
suitable dowels, hooks or pins for embedding in the walls.
10.8.1.9 The guide channels shall be attached to the jambs, plumb and true either in the
overlapping fashion or embedded in grooves, depending on the method of fixing.
10.8.1.10 Cover : Top cover shall be of mild steel sheets not less than 0.90 mm thick and
stiffened with angle or flat stiffeners at top and bottom edges to retain shape.
10.8.1.11 Lock plates with sliding bolts, handles and anchoring rods shall be as per IS 6248.
10.8.2 Fixing
The arrangement for fixing in different situations in the opening shall be as per IS 6248.
10.8.2.1 Brackets shall be fixed on the lintel or under the lintel as specified with rawl. Plugs
and screws bolts etc. The shaft along with the spring shall then be fixed on the brackets.
10.8.2.2 The lath portion (shutter) shall be laid on ground and the side guide channels shall
be bound with ropes etc. The shutter shall then be placed in position and top fixed with pipe
shaft with bolts and nuts. The side guide channels and cover frames shall then be fixed to
the walls through the plate welded to the guides. These plates and bracket shall be fixed by
means of steel screws bolts, and rawl plugs concealed in plaster to make their location
invisible. Fixing shall be done accurately in a workmen like manner that the operation of the
shutter is easy and smooth.
10.8.3 Measurements
Clear width and clear height of the opening for rolling shutter shall be measured correct to a
mm. The clear distance between the two jambs of the opening shall be clear width and the
clear distance between the sill and the soffit (bottom of lintel) of the opening shall be the
clear height. The area shall be calculated in square metres correct to two places of decimal.
10.8.4 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including cost of top cover and spring except ball bearing and mechanical
device of chain and crank operation, which shall be paid for separately.
10.9 ROLLING GRILLS – SHUTTERS
10.9.0 Rolling grill shutter is meant to provide visibility or ventilation or both, the degree of
protection and safety is less as compared to a rolling shutter. The situations where a certain
amount of ventilation combined with safety is required rolling shutter-cum-grill may be
provided in which the rolling shutter may have a rolling grill portion either at the top or at
the bottom or at both places. In addition, the rolling grill portion may also be provided in the
middle of the shutter. The total height of the grill portion in all the segments of rolling
shutter-cum-grill shall not exceed 1.0 m and the height of the grill portion in any individual
segment shall not be more than 0.5 m.
10.9.1 Rolling grills shutters are similar in design, construction and operation to rolling
shutters and all the provisions of Para 10.8 shall be applicable to rolling grills shuters except
in respect of the shutterportion, and shall conform to IS 6248.

- 200 -
10.9.2 Shutters
Rolling grill shutter and the rolling grill portion of the rolling shutter-cum-grill shall be
fabricated with 8 mm diameter mild steel round bars. Straight bars and bars bent to the
required profile are placed alternatively and held in position with 20 mm wide and 5 mm
thick mild steel flat links. Straight bars shall be spaced not exceeding 150 mm centre to
centre and the bars bent to required profile shall be placed symmetrically between two
consecutive straight bars. Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer-in-charge,
bars placed alternatively with straight bars shall be bent to form a corrugated profile such
that the pitch of the corrugation is 100 to 120 mm and the depth of corrugation is 80 to 100
mm. all the bent bars shall have uniform profile. Straight bar along with the adjoining bent
bars on it both sides shall be held in position by passing the bars through holes in the links.
Each link shall have three holes and the length of the links shall be such that the distance
from the centre of the hole to the nearest edge of the flat is not less than the diameter of the
hole. The corner of the links shall be rounded. All links shall be of uniform size and shape.
The spacing of the links measured along the straight bar shall be the same as centre to centre
distance between two consecutive crests/ troughs of the bars bent to the required profile.
Each bar and link shall be continuous single piece without any joint.
10.9.3 Measurement & Rate
The measurement and rate shall be as specified in 10.8.3 and 10.8.4 respectively. In case of
Rolling Shutter-cum-Grill, where the area of the grill portion is half or less than half the area
of opening, it shall be measured and paid as rolling shutter and where the area of grill
portion is more than half the area of opening, it shall be measured and paid as rolling grill.
10.10 STEEL DOORS, WINDOWS, VENTILATORS AND COMPOSITE UNITS
(Fig. 10.4)
Hot rolled steel sections for fabrication of steel doors, windows, ventilators and fixed lights
shall conform to IS 7452. Shapes weights and designations of hot rolled sections shall be as
per IS 7452.Appendix ’D’ indicates the purpose or the situation where the sections are
normally used. Tolerance in thickness of the sections shall be + 0.2 mm. The fabricated steel
doors, windows, ventilators and composite units shall confirm to IS 1038 with up-to-date
amendments and shall be IS marked (IS 1038).
10.10.1 The steel doors and windows shall be according to the specified sizes and design.
The size of doors and windows shall be calculated, so as to allow 1.25 cm clearance on all
the four sides of opening to allow for easy fitting of doors windows and ventilators into
opening. The actual sizes of doors, windows and ventilators shall not vary by more than +
1.5 mm from those given in the drawing.
10.10.2 Fabrication
10.10.2.1.1 Frames : Both the fixed and openable frames shall be made of sections which
have been cut to length and mitred. The corner of fixed and openable frames shall be welded
to form a solid fused welded joint conforming the requirements given below. All frames
shall be square and flat. The process of welding adopted shall be flush but welding or can be
any other process as agreed to between the supplier and the purchaser which shall fulfil the
requirements given in clause 6.1.1 of IS 1038, metal arc welding or any other suitable
method. The section for glazing shall be tennoned and riveted into the frames and where
they intersect the vertical tie shall be broached and horizontal tee threads through it, and the
intersection closed by hydraulic pressure.
10.10.2.1.2 Requirements of Welded Joints
(i) Visual Inspection Test: When two opposite corners of the frame are cut, paint removed
and inspected, the joint shall conform to the following:-
(a) Welds should have been made all along the place of meeting the members and tack
welding shall not be permitted.
(b) Welds should have been properly grounded and
(c) Complete cross section of the corner shall be checked up to see that the joint is
completely solid and there are no cavities visible.

- 201 -
(ii) Micro and Macro Examinations: From the two opposite corners obtained for visual
test, the flanges of the sections shall be cut with the help of a saw. The cut surface of the
remaining portions shall be polished, etched and examined. The polished and etched faces
of the weld and the base metal shall be free from cracks and cavity and reasonably free from
under cutting overlaps, gross porosity and entrapped slag.
(iii) Fillet Weld Test: The fillet weld in the remaining portion of the joint shall be fractured
by hammering. The fractured surfaces shall be free from slag inclusion porosity, crack
penetration defects and fusion defects.
10.10.2.2 Doors : The hinges shall be of 50 mm projecting type, Non projecting type hinges
may also be used, if approved by Engineer-in-Charge. The hinge pin shall be of electro-
galvanized steel or aluminum alloy of suitable thickness and size. Door handles shall be
approved by the Engineer-in- Charge. A suitable latch lock for door openable both from
inside and outside shall be provided. In the case of double doors, the first closing leaf shall
be the left hand leaf locking at the door from the push side. The first closing shutter shall
have a concealed steel bolt at top and bottom. The bolts shall be so constructed as not to
work loose or drop by its own weight. Single and double leaf shutter door may be provided
with a three way bolting device. Where the device is provided in the case of double leaf
shutters, concealed brass or steel bolts shall not be provided.
10.10.2.3 Windows
(a) For fixed windows, the frames shall be fabricated as per 10.10.2.1.1.
(b) Side hung windows.
For fixing steel hinges, slots shall be cut in the fixed frame and hinges inserted inside and
welded to the frame at the back. The hinges shall be of projecting type with thickness not
less than 3.15 mm and length not less than 65 mm and width not more than 25 mm. Non
projecting type hinges may also be allowed if approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The
diameter of hinge pins shall not be less than 6 mm. The hinge pin and washer shall be of
galvanized steel or aluminum alloy of suitable thickness. For fixing hinges to inside frame,
the method described above may be adopted but the weld shall be cleaned, or the holes
made in the inside frame and hinge riveted. The handle of side hung shutters shall be
pressed brass, cast brass, aluminium or steel protected against rusting and shall be mounted
on a steel plate. Thickness of handle shall not be less than 3 mm in case of steel or brass and
3.5 mm in case of aluminium. The handle plate shall be welded, screwed and/ or revitted to
the opening frame in such a manner that it should be fixed before the shutter is glazed and
should not be easily removable after glazing. The handle shall have a two point nose which
shall engage with a brass or aluminium alloy striking plate on the fixed frame in a slightly
opened position as well as closed position. The boss of handle shall incorporate a friction
device to prevent the handle from dropping under its own weight and the assembly shall be
so designed that the rotation of the handle may not cause it to unscrew from the pin. The
height of the handle plate in each type of standards windows will be as specified, otherwise
it shall be at a height of 3/8 of the height of shutter, from its bottom. The strike plate shall be
so designed and fixed in such a position in relation to the handle that with the later bearing
against its stop, there shall be adequately tight fit between the casement and outer frames. In
case where no friction type hinges are provided, the windows shall be fitted with peg stays
which shall be either of black oxidised steel, pressed or cast brass or as specified, 300 mm
long or as specified with steel peg and locking brackets. The pegs stay shall have three holes
to open the side hung casement in three different angles. The peg stay shall be of minimum
thickness 2 mm in case of brass or aluminium and 1.25 mm in case of steel. Where specified
friction hinges shall be provided. Side hung shutters fitted with friction hinges shall not be
provided with a peg stay. If specified, side hung shutters may be fitted with an internal
removable fly proof screen in a 1.25 mm thick sheet steel frame to the outer frame of the
shutter by brass turn buckles at the jambs, and brass studs at the sill to allow the screen
being readily removed. The windows with removable fly proof screen shall be fitted with a
through – the screen level operator at the sill level to permit the operation of the shutter

- 202 -
through an angle of 90° without having to remove the fly proof screen. The lever shall
permit keeping the shutter open in minimum three different positions.
10.10.2.4 Ventilators
(a) Top Hung Ventilators
The steel butt hinges for top hung ventilators shall be riveted to the fixed frame or welded to
it at the back after cutting a slot in it. Hinges to the opening frame shall be riveted or
welded. Top hung ventilators shall be provided with a peg stay with three holes which when
closed shall be held tightly by the locking bracket. The locking bracket shall either be fitted
to the fixed frames or to the window.
(b) Centre Hung Ventilators
Central hung ventilators shall be hung on two pairs of brass or aluminium cup pivots as
specified, riveted to the inner and outer frames of ventilators to permit the ventilator shutter
to swing to angle of approx 85°. The opening portion of the ventilators shall be so balanced
that it remains open at any desired angle under normal weather conditions.
10.10.2.4.1 A black oxidised steel spring catch approved by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be
fitted in the centre of the top of the centre hung ventilator, for the operation of ventilators.
The spring catch shall be secured to the frame with M.S. screws and shall close into a mild
steel or malleable iron catch plate riveted, screwed or welded to the outside of the outer
window frame bar.
10.10.2.4.2 A black oxidised cord pulley wheel in galvanized mild steel brackets shall be
fitted at sill of the centre hung window with mild steel screws or alternatively welded
together with mild steel or malleable iron cord-eye riveted or welded to the bottom inner
frame bar of the window in a position corresponding to that of pulley. Removable fly-proof
screen may be provided as specified in 10.10.2.3 (b). This shall be fitted with a through –
the screen operator to enable operating and keeping the shutter open in minimum three
different positions.
10.10.2.5 Composite Units : Composite Units consist of a combination of two or more units
of doors, windows and ventilators etc. as the case may be. The different units shall be
coupled by using coupling sections K-11B or K-12B (Ref. Appendix D) as the case may be.
Wherever the ventilators, windows and doors shall be coupled with a coupling sections,
mastic cement shall be applied between the junction to make the joint water tight.
10.10.3 Glazing
10.10.3.1 Specifications described in para 9.6.4.6 shall apply. The glass panes shall have
square corners and straight edges. The glass panes shall be so cut that it fits slightly loose in
the frames. In doors, windows and clerestory windows of bath, WC and lavatories frosted
glass panes shall be used which shall weight not less than 10.00 kg/m2.
10.10.3.2 Glazing shall be provided on the outside of the frame unless otherwise specified.
Putty of approved make conforming to IS 419 shall be used for fixing glass panes. Putty
shall be applied between glass panes and glazing bars. Putty shall then be applied over the
glass pane, which shall stop 2 to 3 mm from the sight line of the back rebate to enable the
painting to be done upto the sight line to seal the edge of the putty to the glass. The oozed
out putty shall be cleaned and from putty cut to straight line. Quantity of putty shall not be
less than 185 gm/ metre of glass perimetre. Putty shall be painted within 2 to 3 weeks, after
glazing is fixed to avoid its cracking.
Note: Putty may be prepared by mixing one part of white lead with three parts of finely
powdered chalk and then adding boiled linseed oil to the mixture to form a stiff paste and
adding varnish to the paste at the rate of 1 litre of varnish to the 18 kg paste.
10.10.3.3 Four glazing clips may be provided per glass pane for a size larger than 30 cm x
60 cm for all types, where the glass panes size exceed 80 cm x 200 cm, 6 glazing clips shall
be used. In case of doors, windows and ventilators without horizontal glazing bars, the
glazing clips may be spaced according to the slots, in the vertical members provided the
spacing does not exceed 30 cm otherwise the spacing shall be 30 cm.
Note: Where large size glass panes are required to be used or where the door or window is
located in heavily exposed situation, holes for glazing clips have to be drilled prior to
- 203 -
fabrication and cannot be done at any later stages. Use of glazing clips shall be specified
while placing the order.
10.10.3.4 Where specially stipulated, fixing of glass panes may be done with metal or
wooden beading instead of mere putty. Where beading are proposed to be used, the
manufacturers shall be intimated in advance to drill holes for hard screws. Usually beads
shall be fixed with screws spaced not more than 10 cm from each corner and the
intermediate not more than 20 cm apart. When glass panes are fixed with wooden or metal
beading having mitred joints, a thin layer of putty shall be applied between glass panes and
sash bars and also between glass panes and the beading. Size of M.S. beading shall be 10 x
10 mm box section manufactured from 1.6 mm thick sheet unless otherwise specified in the
item. Where metal beading is specified, extra payment shall be made on this account.
10.10.4 Finishing
All steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale and dirt. Where so specified. The
steel surface shall be treated for rust proofing by the hot dip, zinc spray or electro
galvanizing process. A priming coat of approved steel primer i.e. red oxide/ zinc chromate
perimer conforming to IS 2074 shall be given. The fabricated steel door, windows,
ventilators and composite units shall be inspected in the factory and approved by the
Engineer-in-charge before priming coat is applied. Final finishing coat shall be given to the
doors, windows and ventilators after they are erected and fixed in final position. The rate
shall be exclusive of final finishing coats but shall include the priming coat.
10.10.5 Fixing
10.10.5.1 Steel, doors and windows shall be so stacked as to keep them in true shape
without damage. Doors, windows and ventilators shall be fixed as described below.
10.10.5.2 Opening may be flush or rebated as shown in the drawing. The opening may have
rendered finish or a “fair faced” finish (i.e. without rendering as in case of marble or stone
facing). Where openings are flush and with a rendered finish a clearance of 1.25 cm shall be
provided between the steel frame and opening (See Fig. 10.6). In case of external masonry
finish “fair faced” and with rebated jambs, a minimum 1.25 cm clearance between frame
and opening shall provided (See Fig. 10.6) opening in steel work shall be so designed that
the outer flange of the door, windows, or ventilator frame section overlaps the steel surface
by 10 mm (see Fig. 10.6)
Note : The sizes of Indian Standard doors, windows and ventilators, are designed for
modular opening 1.25 cm larger all round than the doors, windows etc. This gap of 1.25 cm
is for the purpose of fixing of doors, windows etc. In masonry opening, the gap is filled up
with mastic cement and plaster after the door or windows is fixed in position. In the case of
steel or timber modular opening, extra steel or timber fillets will be necessary to cover this
gap of 1.25 cm.
10.10.5.3 Fixing in Masonry Openings
(a) Fixing with Lugs
(i) Doors, windows and ventilators unit, shall not be “built in” as the work proceeds but
opening shall be left out and frames fitted afterwards so that the minimum specified
clearance between opening and unit frame is left alround. The size of the opening shall first
be checked and cleared of obstruction, if any. The position of the unit and fixing holes shall
be marked on the jamb. Necessary holes shall be made in the masonry and lugs not less than
10 cm long 15 x 3 mm size M.S flat fixed in cement concrete blocks 15 x 10 x 10 cm size of
1:3:6 mix (1 cement : 3 coarse sand:6 graded stone aggregate 20mm nominal size). The
frames of units shall be set in the opening by using wooden wedges at the jamb, head and
sill, (wedges shall preferably be placed near the points where a glazing bar meets the frames
and be plumbed in position).
(ii) After, the frame shall be fixed with the lugs with 20 mm long and 6.3 mm dia. G.I.
counter sunk machine screws and nuts. In case of flush opening which are rendered smooth,
wedges shall be removed and gap between unit and the jambs shall be filled with cement
mortar (Fig. 10.6)

- 204 -
(iii) In case of flush jamb with external “fair faced” finish the gap between the opening and
frame shall be filled with mastic from inside till it oozed out on eternal face. The oozing
mastic shall be cleaned and flush pointed. The internal gap shall be filled with mastic to
about 1/3rd depth the rest with cement mortar (Fig. 10.6).
(iv) In case of rebated jambs and jambs finished “fair faced” externally, the mastic shall be
freely applied to the inside channel of frame, jamb and sill, so as to ensure a watertight joint.
After the units is firmly fixed in position surplus mastic shall be cleaned and flush pointed,
as shown in Fig. 10.6.
(b) Fixing with Screws and Plugs: In R. C. C. work where lugs cannot be embedded due to
reinforcement bars etc. rawl plugs or other approved metallic fasteners may be fixed in
proper position and frame fixed to them with 60 mm galvanized cross recessed head wood
screws of designation 10.
10.10.5.4 Fixing in Wood Work Opening : Opening in wood work are normally rebated
and approved mastic or rubber linings shall be applied to jambs, sill and channel before
fixing in position, the frame shall be set in opening using wooden wedges as specified in
10.10.5.3 and fixed to the opening with 60 mm galvanized wood screws of designation 10.
Extra timber fillets of hard wood to match the adjoining work shall also be provided around
the frame to close the extra gap between opening and frame (Fig. 10.6).
10.10.5.5 Fixing in Steel Work Opening : Before placing the unit frame in position
approved mastic shall be applied as specified in 10.10.5.3 (a) (iv) and a mild steel or hard
wood fillet shall be provided around the frame to close the extra gap between opening and
frame. The unit shall then be fixed to the opening with fixing clips or with nuts and bolts as
shown in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge (Fig. 10.6)
10.10.5.6 Fixing of Composite Units : The fixing procedure for composite units shall
generally be as described under 10.10.5.1 to 10.10.5.5 except that:
Where large units shall be formed by coupling individual units together (with coupling
sections), the mullions and transom shall be bedded in mastic to ensure water tightness.
Mastic shall be applied liberally to the channels of the outside frame section before
assembly and after coupling. All oozing out mastic shall be cut out neatly.
10.10.6 Precautions
Care shall be taken that steel doors and windows etc. are not deformed/ damaged during
subsequent constructions. Particular care shall be taken that scaffolding do not rest on the
steel door window frames or glazing bars. All fittings and hinges (projecting hinges) shall
be protected, preferably with alkathene sheets so that these may not be damaged during
execution of work.
10.10.7 Measurement
The weight of finished section door/windows of different sizes, inclusive of all fixed
/welded fittings i.e. hinges pivots, lugs, brackets striking plates etc,. shall be worked out
before fixing of windows (exclusive of weight of glass panes, glazing clips, putty etc.).
Sectional weight of steel members only shall be measured without weight of glass panes etc.
Any loose fittings such as casement stays/fastners etc. shall be enumerated and paid for
separately.
10.10.8 Rate
Rate shall include the cost of materials and labour involved in all the operations described
above excluding two coats of painting but including cost of glazing and priming including
the cost of projecting hinges in case of side hung doors/windows, plain hinges in case of
top/ bottom hung windows /ventilators and pivots for centre hung windows/ ventilators.
Metal beading and other fittings such as peg stay and casement window fasteners etc. shall
be enumerated and paid for separately.
10.11 T-IRON DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS FRAMES.
10.11.0 T-iron doors, windows and ventilators frames shall be manufactured from uniform
mild steel Tee section. The steel shall be of the grade as provided in 10.1.1 The frames shall
be got fabricated in approved workshop as approved by the Chief Engineer.

- 205 -
10.11.1 The sizes of doors, windows and ventilator frames shall be as per drawing or as
decided by the Engineer-in-Charge. MS tie bar of 10 mm dia shall be welded at bottom of
the frame. The size of doors, window and ventilators shall be calculated so as to allow 12.5
mm clearance on all sides to allow an easy fittings in opening. The actual size of doors,
windows and ventilator shall not vary by more than + 2 mm than those shown in the
drawings. The size of T section used for manufacture of doors, windows and ventilators
shall not be less than those specified in IS 1038 (see Fig. 10.5) unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer-in-charge.
10.11.2 Fabrications
The frame shall be constructed in section which has been cut to length and mitred. The
corners of the frames shall be butt welded to form a true and right angle. All frames shall be
square and flat meeting the requirements stated under para 10.10.2.1.1.
The T Sections shall be mitre joined and continuously butt welded all along. The
requirement of welded joints shall be as specified under para 10.10.2.1.2.
10.11.3 Fittings
Requisite number of holes shall be made in the frame for fixing of fitting. Detailed
arrangement of fixing fittings shall be as shown in Fig. 10.7. All fitting shall be fillet welded
to T iron frame all along the periphery of contact.
Butt hinges shall be fixed to the frame as below:
(i) MS flat of size 100 mm x 25 mm x 6 mm will be welded with fillet weld all along the
periphery of contact on the rear side of the web of T iron to receive the hinges. Requisite
number of holes shall be made in T iron frame and MS flat for fixing of hinges with counter
sunk steel screws as shown in Fig. 10.7.
(ii) An alternate method of fixing butt hinges can be adopted by fillet welding the hinge to
the T iron frame on three sided. No welding shall be done along the hinge pin to allow free
movement of butt hinges as shown in Fig. 10.7.
10.11.4 Fixing Procedure
Fixing procedure for T iron doors, windows and ventilator frames in masonry opening shall
be as described in 10.10.5. Fixing arrangements of shutters to such frames is shown in Fig.
10.5.
10.11.5 Measurements
T- iron door windows and ventilator frames shall be measured in running metre, along the
centre line of the frame correct to a 1mm and weight calculated on the basis of standard
tables. No deduction or extra payment shall be made for making holes and making
arrangement for fixing fittings including packing wherever necessary. No deduction will be
made for not providing tie bars in case of windows and ventilators.
10.11.6 Rate
The rate includes cost of materials and labour involved in all the operation described above.
It shall include the necessary butt hinges and screws for fixing the same with frame or as
specified. But it does not include the cost of other door, window and ventilator fittings.
10.12 PRESSED STEEL DOOR FRAMES (Fig. 10.8)
10.12.1 Materials
Steel door frames shall be manufactured from commercial mild steel sheet of specified
thickness, conforming to IS 2062 and 4351. Steel door frames with or without fan light shall
be made in the profiles indicated in Fig. 10.8 which may be manufactured to suit doors of
either type opening inwards or outwards as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
10.12.2 Construction
Each door frame shall consist of hinge jamb, lock jamb, head and if required angle threshold
(see Fig. 10.8.) These shall be welded or rigidly fixed together by mechanical means. Where
no angle threshold is required, temporary base tie shall be screwed to the feet of frames in
order to form a rigid unit. Where so specified base ties shall be of pressed mild steel 1.25
mm thick adjustable to suit floor thickness of 35 or 40 mm and removable, or alternatively,
threshold of mild steel angle of section 50 x 25 mm, minimum shall be provided for external
doors frames.
- 206 -
10.12.3 Fabrication
The pressed steel door frames shall be got fabricated in an approved workshop as approved
by the Chief Engineer.
10.12.3.1 Fixing Lugs (Fig. 10.8) : There shall be three adjustable lugs with split end tail to
each jamb without fan light, and four for jamb with fan light.
The head of the fixing lug shall be of one of the following lengths:
(a) 98 mm long for use with profile A
(b) 120 mm long for use with profile B
(c) 160 mm long for use with profile C
The head shall be made from flat steel strip 25 mm wide and not less than 1.60 mm thick
The tail of the lugs shall be 200mm long and shall be made of steel strip not less than 40
mm wide and not less than 1 mm thick.
10.12.3.2 Hinges (Fig. 10.8) : 100 mm mild steel butt hinges shall be used. For door frames
80 cm wide and under, three hinges shall be rigidly fixed to one jamb and for door frames
above 80 cm wide, four hinges shall rigidly fixed to one jamb, if it is single shutter, where
the height of door shutter exceeds 2.15 metres, one additional hinge shall be provided for
every 0.5 m or part thereof the additional height. In all cases the hinges shall be so fixed that
the distance from the inside of the head rebate to the top of the upper hinge is 20 cm and the
distance from the bottom of the door frame to the bottom of the bottom hinge is also kept
about 200 mm. The middle hinges shall be at equal distances from lower and upper hinges
or as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. Hinges shall be made of steel 2.5
mm thick with zinc coated removable pin of 6 mm diameter. The space between the two
leaves of the hinge when closed shall be 3 mm and the leaf that is not welded to the frame
shall have four counter sunk holes to take No. 10 cross recessed head wood screws.
10.12.3.3 Mortar Guards : Mortar guards of thickness of main frame sheet shall be
provided in accordance to provisions of IS 4351 and as instructed by Engineer-in-charge
shall be provided. These shall be welded to the frame at the head of the frame for double
shutter doors to make provision for bolts. These shall also be provided to the frame behind
the hinges, mortice locks and latches, slots, aldrop and sliding /tower bolts.
10.12.3.4 Lock – Strike Plate : There shall be an adjustable lock- strike plate of steel
complete with mortar guard to make provision for locks or latches complying with the
relevant Indian Standards.(IS 4351) Lock-strike plates shall be of galvanized mild steel and
fixed at 95 cm from the head of the frame.
10.12.3.5 Shock Absorbers : For side hung door there shall not be less than three buffers or
rubber or other suitable material inserted in holes in the rebate. one shall be located at the
centre of the lock jamb and the other two shall be at 30 cm. from top and bottom of the
frame. For double leaf shutter door, two buffers shall be provided.
10.12.4 Finishing
The surface of door frame shall be thoroughly cleaned, free of rust, mill-scale dirt oil etc.
either by mechanical means, for example sand or shot blasting or by chemical means such as
picking. After pretreatment of the surface one coat of approved primer i.e. red oxide zinc
chrome primer conforming to IS 2074. Two coats of paints as directed by the Engineer-in-
charge shall be applied to the exposed surface.
10.12.5 Fixing
Frames shall be fixed up right in plumb and plane. To avoid sag or bow in width during
fixing or during construction phase, temporary struts across the width preventing sides
bulging inwards may be provided. Wall shall be built solid on each side and grouted at each
course to ensure solid contact with frame leaving no voids behind the frame. Three lugs
shall be provided on each jamb with spacing not more than 75 cm. The temporary struts
should not be removed till the masonry behind the frame is set. In case screwed base tie is
provided, this should be left in position till the flooring is laid when it can be removed. After
pretreatment of the surface, one coat of steel primer and two coats, of paint, as directed by
Engineer-in-charge shall be applied to the exposed surface.
10.12.6 Measurements
- 207 -
The length shall be measured in running metre correct to a cm along the centre line of the
frames.
10.12.7 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of labour and material involved in all the operation described
above including one coat of approved steel primer but excluding two coats of paint.
10.13 TUBULAR / HOLLOW SECTION TRUSSES
10.13.1 Structural Steel Tube
These shall be of:
1. Hot finished welded (HFW) type, or
2. Hot finished seamless (HFS) type, or
3. Electric resistance or induction butt welded (ERW), having carbon content less than 0.03
percent, yield stress of 21.5 kg/mm2 (YST 210) type. Conforming to the requirement of IS
1161. The steel tubes when analysed in accordance with the method specified in IS 228 shall
show not more than 0.06 percent sulphur, and not more than 0.06 per cent phosphorous.
Tubes shall be designated by their nominal bore. These shall be light, medium or heavy as
specified depending upon the wall thickness. The standard size and weights of tubes are
listed in Appendix C. Hollow sections shall be as per IS 4923. Tubes shall be clean finished
and reasonably free from scale. They shall be free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations
and other defects. The ends shall be cut clean and square with axis of tube, unless otherwise
specified.
10.13.2 Minimum Thickness of Metals
Wall thickness of tubes used for construction exposed to weather shall be not less than 4
mm and for construction not exposed to weather it shall be not less than 3.2 mm where
structures are not readily accessible for maintenance, the minimum thickness shall be 5 mm.
10.13.3 Fabrication
10.13.3.1 The component parts of the structure shall be assembled in such a manner that
they are neither twisted nor otherwise damaged and be so prepared that the specified
cambers, if any, are, maintained. The tubular steel work shall be painted with one coat of
approved steel primer after fabrication. All fabrication and welding is to be done in an
approved workshop. The joint details shall be generally as per S.P-38 of B.I.S publication.
10.13.3.2 Straightening : All material before being assembled shall be straightened, if
necessary, unless required to be of curvilinear form and shall be free from twist.
10.13.3.3 Bolting : Washers shall be specially shaped where necessary, or other means, used
to give the nuts and the heads of bolts a satisfactory bearing. In all cases, where the full area
of the bolts is to be developed, the threaded portion of the bolt shall not be within the
thickness of the parts bolted together and washers of appropriate thickness shall be provided
to allow the nuts to be completely tightened.
10.13.3.4 Welding : Where welding is adopted, it shall be as per IS 816.
10.13.3.5 Caps and Bases for Columns : The ends of all the tubes, for columns transmitting
loads through the ends, should be true and square to the axis of the tubes and should be
provided with a cap or base accurately fitted to the end of the tube and screwed, welded or
shrunk on. The cap or base plate should be true and square to the axis of the column.
10.13.3.6 Sealing of Tubes : When the end of a tube is not automatically sealed by virtue of
its connection be welding to another member the end shall be properly and completely
sealed. Before sealing, the inside of the tubes should be dry and free from loose scale.
10.13.3.7 Flatened Ends : In tubular construction the ends of tubes may be flattened or
otherwise formed to provide for welded. Riveted or bolted connections provide that the
methods adopted for such flattening do not injure the material. The change of sections shall
be gradual.
10.13.4 Hoisting and Erection
Tubular trusses shall be hoisted and erected in position carefully, without damage to
themselves, other structure, equipment and injury to workman. The method of hoisting and
erection proposed to be adopted shall be got approved from the Engineer-in-charge. The

- 208 -
contractor shall however be fully responsible, for the work being carried out in a safe and
proper manner without unduly stressing the various members. Proper equipment such as
derricks, lifting tackles, winches, ropes etc. shall be used.
10.13.5 Measurements
The work as fixed in place shall be measured in running metres correct to a centimeter on
their weights calculated on the basis of standard tables correct to the nearest kilogram unless
otherwise specified. Weight of cleats, brackets, packing pieces bolts nuts, washers distance
pieces separators diapharam gussests (taking overall square dimensions) fish plates, etc.
shall be added to the weight of respective items unless otherwise specified. No deduction
shall be made for skew cuts.
10.13.6 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of labour and materials involved in all the operations
described above including application of one coat of approved steel primer, i.e. red oxide
zinc chrome primer conforming to IS 2074.
10.14 FAN CLAMPS (Fig. 10.9)
10.14.1 The fan clamps shall be of the following types:
(a) Fan clamp to be fixed during the laying of R.C.C. slab, shall be of type I, as shown in
(Fig. 10.9) This shall be made of 16 mm M.S. bar bent to shape with its ends hooked. The
overall height of the clamps shall be made to suit the depth of slab.
(b) Fan clamps for beams shall be of type II as shown in (Fig. 10.9). It shall be similar to fan
clamp, type I, except that its height shall be greater depending on the depth of the beam rib.
(c) In case low ceiling heights, circular cast iron box for ceiling fan clamp shall be fixed
during the laying of R.C.C. slab and shall be as shown in (Fig. 10.9). The size of cast iron
box shall be 140 mm internal dia with 73 mm height, the thickness of cast iron rim shall be
4.5 mm bottom and top lid shall be of 1.5 mm thick M.S. sheet, with its top surface hacked
so as to ensure proper bonding with the concrete. The lids shall be screwed into the cast iron
box by means of 3.3 mm dia round head screws one each at the corners. The box can be of
M.S. sheet, the thickness of side walls can be reduced to 3 mm without effecting inner dia of
the box. The fan clamp shall be made of 12mm dia M.S. bar bent to shape with its ends bent
as per drawing.
10.14.2 Fixing
Holes for inserting the fan clamps in the positions shown in the drawing or as instructed by
the Engineer-in-charge shall be made in the shuttering after the latter has been fixed in
position. After steel reinforcement is tied, fan clamps shall be fixed with their loops truly
vertical and at the correct depth from the under-side of the slab or beam. The hooked arms
and the loop shall be tied to the reinforcement, either directly or through cut pieces of M.S.
bars with annealed steel wire 1.6 mm or 1.00 mm thick. The clamp shall neither be
disturbed out of position during concreting nor shall they be bent out of shape when
shuttering of slabs or beams is removed. The exposed portion of loops of the clamps shall be
given two or more coats of paint, including priming coat, of approved steel primer as
ordered by the Engineer-in-charge.
10.14.3 Measurements
Clamps of type I and 3 shall be counted in numbers. Fan clamps type II, shall be counted
and paid for under fan clamps type I, but they shall in addition be paid for their extra height
as determined by the depth of the beam.
10.14.4 Rate
The rate per fan clamps shall include the cost of labour and materials involved in all the
operations described above. In the case of type I and 3 clamps, the rate shall apply
irrespective of the thickness of the slabs.
10.15 M.S. HOLLOW RECTANGULAR DOOR FRAMES (l-TYPE SECTION)
10.15.1 Materials
Steel door frames shall be manufactured from commercial mild steel sheet of 1.60 mm
thickness, conforming to IS 2062 and 4351. Steel door frames shall be made in the profiles
as per drawings and/or as directed by the Engineerin-charge.
- 209 -
10.15.2 Construction
Each door frame shall consist of hinge jamb, lock jamb, head and if required angle
threshold. These shall be welded or rigidly fixed together by mechanical means. Where no
angle threshold is required, temporary base tie shall be screwed to the feet of frames in order
to form a rigid unit. Where so specified base ties shall be pressed mild steel 1.60 mm thick
adjustable to suit floor thickness of 35 or 40 mm and removable, or alternatively, threshold
of mild steel angle of section 50 x 25 mm, minimum shall be provided for external doors
frames.
10.15.3 Fabrication
The M.S hollow rectangular steel door frames shall be got fabricated in an approved
workshop as approved by the Chief Engineer.
10.15.3.1 Fixing Lugs : There shall be three adjustable lugs with split end tail to each jamb.
The head of the fixing lug shall be 120 mm long and made up flat steel strip 25 mm wide
and 1.60 mm thick.
10.15.3.2 Hinges 100 mm mild steel butt hinges shall be used. Floor door frames 80 cm
wide and under, three hinges shall be rigidly fixed to one jamb and for frames of door above
80 cm wide, four higes shall be rigidly fixed to one jamb, if it is single shutter. Where the
height of door shutter exceeds 2.15 metres, one additional hinge shall be provided for every
0.5 m or part thereof of the additional height. In all cases the hinges shall be so fixed that the
distance from the inside of the head rebate to the top of the upper hinge is 20 cm and the
distance from the bottom of the door frame to the bottom of the bottom hinge is also kept
about 200 mm. The middle hinges shall be at equal distance from lower and upper hinges or
as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. Hinges shall be made of steel 2.5 mm
thick with zinc coated removable pin of 6 mm diameter. The space between the two leaves
of the hinge when closed shall be 3 mm and the leaf that is not welded to the frame shall
have four counter sunk holes to take Number-10 cross recessed head wood screws.
10.15.3.3 Aldrops, Sliding Bolts and Tower Bolts : Provisions shall be made for aldrops,
sliding bolts and tower bolts in the frames as per the positions given by the purchaser.
Necessary mortar guards/metallic or nylon bushes shall be provided inside the frames for
aldrops, sliding bolts and tower bolts.
10.15.3.4 Lock Strike Plate : Provision shall be made to fix lock stricke plates of mortise
locks or latches, complying with the relevant Indian Standards. A slot suitable for lock
stricke plate shall be pierced into the rebate of the frame and necessary fixing arrangement
and mortar guard from the inside of the frame shall be provided.
10.15.3.5 Shock Absorbers : For side-hung door there shall be not less than three buffers of
rubber or other suitable material inserted in holes in the rebate and one shall be located at
the centre of the lock jamb of frame and other two shall be 300 mm from top and bottom of
the frame. For double leaf doors two buffers shall be provided.
10.15.4 Finishing
The surface of door frame shall be thoroughly cleaned, free of rust, mill –scale dirt, oil etc.
either by mechanical means, for example sand or shot blasting or by chemical means such as
picking. After pretreatment of the surface one coat of approved primer i.e. red oxide zinc
chrome primer conforming to IS 2074. Two coats of paints as directed by the Engineer-in-
Charge shall be applied to the exposed surface.
10.15.5 Fixing
Frames shall be fixed up right in plumb and plane. To avoid sag or bow in width during
fixing or during construction phase, temporary struts across the width preventing sides
bulging inwards may be provided. Wall shall be built solid on each side and grouted at each
course to ensure solid contact with frame leaving no voids behind the frame. Three lugs
shall be provided on each jamb with spacing not more than 75 cm the temporary struts
should not be removed till the masonry behind the frame is set. In case screwed base tie is
provided, this should be left in position till the flooring is laid when it can be removed. After
pretreatment of the surface one coat of steel primer and two coats, of paint, as directed by
Engineer-in-charge shall be applied to the exposed surface.
- 210 -
10.15.6 Measurements
The length shall be measured in running metre correct to a cm. along the centre line of the
frames.
10.15.7 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of labour and material involved in all the operation described
above including one coat of approved steel primer but excluding two coats of paint.
10.16 FACTORY MADE GLAZED STEEL DOORS, WINDOWS AND
VENTILATORS
10.16.0 Specifications for this item to be same as for standard steel glazed doors, windows
and ventilators as mentioned in para 10.10, except that Doors, windows and ventilators to be
manufactured in a workshop, approved by the Chief engineer. Also owner of the workshop
shall have a valid ISI license for manufacture of doors, windows and ventilators.
10.17 STEEL WORK WELDED IN BUILT-UP SECTIONS USING STRUCTURAL
STEEL
(A) In Stringers, Treads, Landing etc. of Stair cases including use of Chequred Plate
wherever required
(B) In Grating, Frames, Guard Bar, Ladder, Railings, Brackete, Gates and similar work.
10.17.1 General specifications for these items to be same as for steel work welded in built-
up sections as mentioned in para 10.4 except that steel used for fabrication of these items to
be of type used for structural use/purposes.
10.17.2 Steel members used for fabricating these items to be designed structurally to
withstanding the all loads to be carried out by the members during erection, fixing and
functional use in designed life. Work to be executed as per structural drawings.
10.18 STEEL WORK WELDED IN BUILT-UP SECTIONS FOR HAND RAIL
USING M.S.
TUBULAR/ERW TUBULAR PIPES AND G.I. PIPES
10.18.1 General specifications to be same as for steel work welded in built-up section as
mentioned in para 10.4.
10.18.2.1 Hot finished welded (HFW) Hot finished seamless (HFS) and electric resistance
welded tube shall conform to IS 1161.
10.18.2.2 G.I. pipes used for Hand rail to be conforming to IS 1239-Part I for medium
grade. GI pipes to be screwed and socketed type and of required nominal bore.
10.18.2.3 Galvanising of GI pipes shall conform to IS 4736.
10.18.2.4 All screwed tubes and socket of GI pipes shall have pipe threads conforming to
the requirements of IS 554.
10.18.2.5 The fittings for GI pipes to be conforming to IS 1239 (Part-II).
10.8.3 Measurement of Hand Rail of M.S. Tubular/E.R.W Tubular Pipes
The work as fixed in place shall be measured in running metres correct to a centimeter and
their weights calculated on the basis of standard tables correct to the nearest kilogram or
actual weight whichever is less unless otherwise specified.
Note:- For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 1, Sub Head 10.0

- 211 -
SUB HEAD : 11.0
FLOORING

11.2 CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORING

11.2.1 Cement Concrete
Cement concrete of specified mix grade shall be used and it shall generally conform to the
specifications described under sub head 4.0 .
11.2.2 Base Concrete
11.2.2.1 Flooring shall be laid on base concrete where so provided. The base concrete shall
be provided with the slopes required for the flooring. Flooring in verandah, Courtyard,
kitchens & baths shall have slope ranging from 1 : 48 to 1 : 60 depending upon location and
as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge. Floors in water closet portion shall have slope of
1:30 or as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge to drain off washing water. Further, necessary
drop in flooring in bath, WC, kitchen near floor traps ranging from 6 mm to 10 mm will also
be provided to avoid spread of water. Necessary margin to accommodate this drop shall be
made in base concrete. Plinth masonry off set shall be depressed so as to allow the base
concrete to rest on it.
11.2.2.2 The flooring shall be commenced preferably within 48 hours of the laying of base
concrete. The surface of the base shall be roughened with steel wire brushes without
disturbing the concrete. Immediately before laying the flooring, the base shall be wetted and
a coat of cement slurry @ 2 kg of cement spread over an area of one sqm so as to get a good
bond between the base and concrete floor.
1.2.2.3 If the cement concrete flooring is to be laid directly on the RCC slab, the top surface
of RCC slab shall be cleaned and the laitance shall be removed and a coat of cement slurry
@ 2 kg of cement spread over an area of one sqm so as to get a good bond between the base
and concrete floor.
11.2.3 Thickness
The thickness of floor shall be as specified in the description of the item.
11.2.4 Laying
11.2.4.1 Panels : Flooring of specified thickness shall be laid in the pattern including the
border as given in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The border panels
shall not exceed 450 mm in width and the joints in the border shall be in line with panel
joints. The panels shall be of uniform size and no dimension of a panel shall exceed 2 m and
the area of a panel shall not be more than 2 sqm. The joints of borders at corners shall be
mitred for provision of strips.
11.2.4.2 Laying of Flooring with Strips : Normally cement concrete flooring shall be laid in
one operation using glass/aluminium/PVC/brass strips/stainless steel strips or any other
strips as required as per drawing or instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge, at the junction of
two panels. This method ensures uniformity in colour of all the panels and straightness at
the junction of the panels. 4 mm thick glass strips or 2 mm PVC strips or 2 mm aluminium
or brass strips shall be fixed with their tops at proper level, giving required slopes. Use of
glass and metallic strips shall be avoided in areas exposed to sun. Cost of providing and
fixing strips shall be paid for separately.
Concreting : Cement concrete shall be placed in the panels and be levelled with the help of
straight edge and trowel and beaten with thapy or mason’s trowel. The blows shall be fairly
heavy in the beginning but as consolidation takes place, light rapid strokes shall be given.
Beating shall cease as soon as the surface is found covered with a thin layer of cream of
mortar. The evenness of the surface shall be tested with straight edge. Surface of flooring be
true to required slopes. While laying concrete, care shall be taken to see that the strips are
not damaged/disturbed by the labourers. The tops of strips shall be visible clearly after
finishing with cement slurry.
11.2.4.3 Laying of Flooring without Strips : Laying of cement concrete flooring in alternate
panels may be allowed by the Engineer-in-Charge in case strips are not to be provided.

- 212 -
Shuttering : The panels shall be bounded by angle iron or flats. The angle iron/flat shall
have the same depth as the concrete flooring. These shall be fixed in position, with their top
at proper level giving required slopes. The surface of the angle iron or flats, to come in
contact with concrete shall be smeared with soap solution or non-sticking oil (Form oil or
raw linseed oil) before concreting. The flooring shall butt against the unplastered masonry
wall.
Concreting : The concreting shall be done in the manner described under 11.2.4.2. The
angle iron/ flats used for shuttering, shall be removed on the next day of the laying of
cement concrete. The ends thus exposed shall be repaired, if damaged with cement mortar 1
: 2 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand) and allowed to set for minimum period of 24 hours. The
alternate panels shall then be cleaned of dust, mortar, droppings etc. and concrete laid.
While laying concrete, care shall be taken to see that the edges of the previously laid panels
are not damaged and fresh mortar is not splashed over them. The joints between the panels
should come out as fine straight lines.
11.2.5 Finishing
11.2.5.1 The finishing of the surface shall follow immediately after the cessation of beating.
The surface shall be left for some time, till moisture disappears from it or surplus water can
be mopped up. Use of dry cement or cement and sand mixture stiffening the concrete to
absorb excessive moisture shall not be permitted. Excessive trowelling shall be avoided.
11.2.5.2 Fresh cement shall be mixed with water to form a thick slurry and spreaded @ 2 kg
of cement over an area of one sqm of flooring while the flooring concrete is still green. The
cement slurry shall then be properly processed and finished smooth.
11.2.5.3 The edges of sunk floors shall be finished and rounded with cement mortar 1:2 (1
cement : 2 coarse sand) and finished with a floating coat of neat cement.
11.2.5.4 The junctions of floor with wall plaster, dado or skirting shall be rounded off where
so specified.
11.2.5.5 The men engaged on finishing operations shall be provided with raised wooden
platform to sit on so as to prevent damage to new work.
11.2.6 Curing
The curing shall be done for a minimum period of ten days. Curing shall not be commenced
until the top layer has hardened. Covering with empty gunnies bag shall be avoided as the
colour of the flooring is likely to be bleached due to the remanents of cement dust from the
bags.
11.2.7 Precautions
Flooring in lavatories and bath room shall be laid only after fixing of water closet and
squatting pans and floor traps. Traps shall be plugged while laying the floors and opened
after the floors are cured and cleaned. Any damage done to W.C.’s squatting pans and floor
traps during the execution of work shall be made good. During cold weather, concreting
shall not be done when the temperature falls below 4°C. The concrete placed shall be
protected against frost by suitable covering. Concrete damaged by frost shall be removed
and work redone. During hot weather, precautions shall be taken to see that the temperature
of wet concrete does not exceed 38° C. No concreting shall be laid within half an hour of the
closing time of the day, unless permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge. To facilitate rounding
of junction of skirting, dado and floor, the skirting/dado shall be laid along with the border
or adjacent panels of floor.
11.2.8 Measurement
Length and breadth shall be measured before laying skirting, dado or wall plaster. No
deduction shall be made nor extra paid for voids not exceeding 0.20 sqm. Deductions for
ends of dissimilar materials or other articles embedded shall not be made for areas not
exceeding 0.10 sqm. The flooring done either with strips (in one operation) or without strips
(in alternate panels) shall be treated as same and measured together.
11.2.9 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including application of cement slurry on RCC slab or on base concrete
- 213 -
including roughening and cleaning the surface but excluding the cost of strips which shall be
paid separately under relevant item. Nosing of steps where provided shall be paid for
separately in running metre. Nothing extra shall be paid for laying the floor at different
levels in the same room or courtyard and rounding off edges of sunk floors. In case the
flooring is laid in alternate panels, nothing extra shall be paid towards the cost of shuttering
used for this purpose.
11.3 CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORING WITH METALLIC HARDENER
TOPPING
11.3.0 Wherever floors are required to withstand heavy wear and tear, use of floor hardener
shall be avoided as far as possible by using richer mixes of concrete, unless the use of a
metallic hardner is justified on the basis of cost. Where metallic hardener topping is used, it
shall be 12 mm thick.
11.3.1 Metallic Hardening Compound
The compound shall be of approved quality consisting of uniformally graded iron particles,
free from non-ferrous metal particles, oil, grease sand, soluble alkaline compounds. Where
so directed by the Engineer-in-Charge it shall be tested as described in Appendix A.
11.3.2 Base Concrete
It shall be as specified in 11.2.2.
11.3.3 Under Layer
Cement concrete flooring of specified thickness and mix (mentioned in item for under layer)
shall be laid as under layer (11.2.1 and 11.2.4). The top surface shall be roughened with
brushes while the concrete is still green and the forms/strips shall be kept projecting up 12
mm over the concrete surface, to receive the metallic hardening compound topping.
11.3.4 Topping
This shall consist of 12 mm thick layer of mix 1:2 (1 cement : 2 stone aggregate 6 mm
nominal size) by volume or as otherwise specified with which metallic hardening compound
is mixed in the ratio of 1 : 4 (1 metallic concrete hardener : 4 cement) by weight. Metallic
hardener shall be dry mixed thoroughly with cement on a clean dry pacca platform. This dry
mixture shall be mixed with stone aggregate 6 mm nominal size or as otherwise specified in
the ratio of 1 : 2 (1 cement : 2 stone aggregate) and well turned over. Just enough water shall
then be added to this dry mix as required for floor concrete. The mixture so obtained shall
be laid in 12 mm thickness, on cement concrete floor within 2 to 4 hours of its laying. The
topping shall be laid true to provide a uniform and even surface. It shall be firmly pressed
into the bottom concrete so as to have good bond with it. After the initial set has started, the
surface shall be finished smooth and true to slope with steel floats. The junction of floor
with wall plaster, dado or skirting and finishing operations shall be dealt with as described
in 11.2.5. The men engaged on finishing operations shall be provided with raised wooden
platform to sit on, so as to prevent damage to new work.
11.3.5 The specifications for curing, precautions to be taken, ‘Measurements’ and ‘Rates’
shall be as specified in 11.2.
11.4 CEMENT PLASTER IN RISERS OF STEPS, SKIRTING, DADO
11.4.0 Plaster at the bottom of wall not exceeding 30 cm in height above the floor shall be
classified as skirting. It shall be flush with wall plaster or projecting out uniformly by 6 mm
from the wall plaster, as specified. The work shall be preferably carried out simultaneously
with the laying of floor. It’s corners and junctions with floor shall be finished neatly as
specified.
11.4.1 Thickness
The thickness of the plaster specified shall be measured exclusive of the thickness of key i.e.
grooves or open joints in brick work. The average thickness shall not be less than the
specified thickness. The average thickness should be regulated at the time of plastering by
keeping suitable thickness of the gauges. Extra thickness required in rounding of corners at
junctions of wall shall be ignored.
11.4.2 Preparation of Wall Surface

- 214 -
The joints shall be raked out to a depth of at least 15 mm in masonry walls. In case of
concrete walls, the surfaces shall be roughened by hacking. The surface shall be cleaned
thoroughly, washed with water and kept wet before skirting is commenced.
11.4.3 Application
Skirting with specified mortar and to specifed thickness shall be laid immediately after the
surface is prepared. It shall be laid along with the border or adjacent panels of floor. The
joints in skirting shall be kept true and straight in continuation of the line of joints in borders
or adjacent panels. The skirting shall be finished smooth with top truly horizontal and joints
truly vertical except where otherwise indicated.
11.4.4 Finishing
The finishing of surface shall be done simultaneously with the borders or the adjacent panels
of floor. The cement to be applied in the form of slurry for smooth finishing shall be at the
rate of 2 kg of cement per litre of water applied over an area of 1 sqm. Where skirting is
flush with plaster, a groove 10 mm wide and upto 5 mm deep shall be provided in plaster at
the junction of skirting with plaster.
11.4.5 Curing
Curing shall be commenced on the next day of plastering when the plaster has hardened
sufficiently and shall be continued for a minimum period of 7 days.
11.4.6 Measurement
Length and height shall be measured correct to a cm and its area shall be calculated in sqm
correct to two places of decimals for a specified the thickness. Length shall be measured as
the finished length of skirting. Height shall be measured from the finished level of floor
correct to 5 mm.
11.4.7 Rate
Rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above.
11.5 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT IN COURTYARD AND TERRACE ETC.
11.5.1 Specifications described in 11.2.1, 11.2.2.1, 11.2.3, 11.2.4, 11.2.6 and 11.2.7 shall
hold good as far as applicable except that :
(i) The panels shall be of uniform size and no dimension of a panel shall exceed 1.25 m and
the area of panel should not exceed 1.25 sqm for the thickness of panels upto 50 mm.
(ii) Concreting shall be done in alternate panels only and no glass/asbestos strips shall be
provided.
11.5.2 Finishing
The finishing of the surface shall follow immediately after the cessation of beating. The
surface shall be left for some-time, till moisture disappears from it or surplus water can be
mopped up. Use of dry cement or cement and sand mix on the surface to stiffen the concrete
or to absorb excessive moisture shall not be permitted. Excessive trowelling shall be
avoided. When the surface becomes fairly stiff, it shall be finished rough with wooden floats
or where so specified chequered uniformly by pressing a piece of expanded metal of
approved size.
11.5.3 Measurements
Same as 11.2.8 except that the volume will be calculated in cum nearest to two decimal
places.
11.5.4 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above except the base concrete below flooring which shall be paid for separately.
Chequering to pattern shall be paid for separately unless otherwise specified.
11.15 PRESSED CERAMIC TILE FLOORING
11.15.1 Pressed Ceramic Tiles
The tiles shall be of approved make and shall generally conform to IS 15622. They shall be
flat, and true to shape and free from blisters crazing, chips, welts, crawling or other
imperfections detracting from their appearance. The tiles shall be tested as per IS 13630.
Classification and Characteristics of pressed ceramic tiles shall be as per IS 13712. The tiles
- 215 -
shall be square or rectangular of nominal size. Table 1,3,5, and 7 of IS 15622 give the
modular preferred sizes and table 2,4,6 and 8 give the most common non modular sizes.
Thickness shall be specified by the manufacturer. It includes the profiles on the visible face
and on the rear side. Manufacturer/supplier and party shall choose the work size of tiles in
order to allow a nominal joint width upto 2mm for unrectified floor tiles and upto 1mm for
rectified floor tiles. The joint in case of spacer lug tile shall be as per spacer. The tiles shall
conform to table10 of IS 15622 with water absorption 3 to 6% (Group BII). The top surface
of the tiles shall be glazed. Glaze shall be either glossy or matt as specified. The underside
of the tiles shall not have glaze on more than 5% of the area in order that the tile may adhere
properly to the base. The edges of the tiles shall be preferably free from glaze. However, any
glaze if unavoidable, shall be permissible on only upto 50 per cent of the surface area of the
edges.
11.15.2 Coloured Tiles
Only the glaze shall be coloured as specified. The sizes and specifications shall be the same
as for the white glazed tiles.
11.15.3 Decorative Tiles
The type and size of the decorative tiles shall be as follows :
(i) Decorated white back ground tiles
The size of these tiles shall be as per IS 15622.
(ii) Decorated and having coloured back-ground
The sizes of the tiles shall be as per IS 15622.
11.15.4 Preparation of Surface and Laying
11.15.4.1 Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned,
wetted and mopped. The bedding for the tile shall be with cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4
coarse sand) or as specified. The average thickness of the bedding shall be 20 mm or as
specified while the thickness under any portion of the tiles shall not be less than 10 mm.
11.15.4.2 Mortar shall be spread, tamped and corrected to proper levels and allowed to
harden sufficiently to offer a fairly rigid cushion for the tiles to be set and to enable the
mason to place wooden plank across and squat on it.
11.15.4.3 Over this mortar bedding neat grey cement slurry of honey like consistency shall
be spread at the rate of 3.3 kg of cement per square metre over an area upto one square
metre. Tiles shall be soaked in water washed clean and shall be fixed in this grout one after
another, each tile gently being tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in
level with the adjoining tiles. The joints shall be kept as thin as possible and in straight lines
or to suit the required pattern.
11.15.4.4 The surface of the flooring during laying shall be frequently checked with a
straight edge about 2 m long, so as to obtain a true surface with the required slope. In bath,
toilet W.C. kitchen and balcony/verandah flooring, suitable tile drop or as shown in drawing
will be given in addition to required slope to avoid spread of water. Further tile drop will
also be provided near floor trap.
11.15.4.5 Where full size tiles cannot be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size,
and their edge rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints. Tiles which are fixed in the
floor adjoining the wall shall enter not less than 10 mm under the plaster, skirting or dado.
11.15.4.6 After tiles have been laid surplus cement slurry shall be cleaned off.
11.15.5 Pointing and Finishing
The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement slurry with wire/coir brush or trowel to a
depth of 2 mm to 3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush
pointed with white cement added with pigment if required to match the colour of tiles.
Where spacer lug tiles are provided, the half the depth of joint shall be filled with
polysulphide or as specified on top with under filling with cement grout without the lugs
remaining exposed. The floor shall then be kept wet for 7 days. After curing, the surface
shall be washed and finished clean. The finished floor shall not sound hollow when tapped
with a wooden mallet.
11.15.6 Measurements
- 216 -
Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm before laying skirting, dado or wall
plaster and the area calculated in square metre correct to two places of decimal. Where
coves are used at the junctions, the length and breadth shall be measured between the lower
edges of the coves. No deduction shall be made nor extra paid for voids not exceeding 0.20
square metre. Deductions for ends of dissimilar materials or other articles embedded shall
not be made for areas not exceeding 0.10 square metre. Areas, where glazed tiles or
different types of decorative tiles are used will be measured separately.
11.15.7 Rate
The rate for flooring shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the
operations described above, For tiles of sizes upto 0.16 sqm. unless otherwise specified in
the description of the item. Nothing extra shall be paid for the use of cut (sawn) tiles in the
work. Extra over and above the normal rate for white tiles shall be paid where coloured or
any other type of decorative tiles have been used.
11.16 PRESSED CERAMIC TILE FLOORING (VITRIFIED TILE FLOORING)
11.16.1 Operations as described in 11.15.1 to 11.15.6 shall be followed except the tiles shall
conform to Table 12 of IS 15622 (Tiles with water absorption E ≤ 0.08 per cent Group BIa)
and the joint thickness in flooring shall not be more than 1mm.
11.16.2 Rate
The rate for flooring shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the
operations described above. Nothing extra shall be paid for the use of cut (sawn) tiles in the
work.
11.17 FIXING OF TILE FLOORING WITH CEMENT BASED HIGH POLYMER
MODIFIED QUICK SET
ADHESIVE (WATER BASED)
11.17.1 When tile flooring is to be laid over the existing flooring without dismantling old
flooring it can be laid with adhesive. The old flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned and
checked for undulations, if any shall be rectified with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse
sand). Old cement concrete surface shall be hacked and cleaned off to have proper bond
with the old surface.
11.17.2 High polymer modified quick set tile adhesive (conforming to IS 15477) shall be
thoroughly mixed with water and a paste of zero slump shall be prepared so that it can be
used with in 1.5 to 2 hours. It shall be spread over an area not more than one sqm at one
time. Average thickness of adhesive shall be 3 mm The adhesive so spreaded shall be
combed using suitable trowel. Tiles shall be pressed firmly in to the position with slight
twisting action checking it simultaneously to ensure good contact gently being tapped with
wooden mallet till it is properly backed with adjoining tiles. The tiles shall be fixed within
20 minutes of application of adhesive. The surplus adhesive from the joints, surface of the
tiles shall be immediately cleaned.
11.17.3 The surface of the flooring shall be frequently checked during laying with straight
edge of above 2m long so as to attain a true surface with required slope.
11.17.4 Where spacer lugs tiles are provided these shall be filled with grout with lugs
remaining exposed.
11.17.5 Where full size tile can not be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size
and edges rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints. Tiles which are fixed in floor
adjoining to wall shall enter not less than 10 mm under plaster, skirting or dado.
11.17.6 Finishing: para 11.15.5 shall apply.
11.17.7 Measurements: para 11.15.6 shall apply.
11.17.8 Rate
Provisions of para 11.15.7 and 11.16.2 shall apply.
11.18 PRESSED CERAMIC TILES IN SKIRTING AND DADO
11.18.1 The tiles shall be of approved make and shall generally conform to IS 15622. The
tiles shall be pressed ceramic covered by a glaze thoroughly matured and fitted to the body.
The tiles shall be sound, true to shape, flat and free from flaws and other manufacturing
defects affecting their utility. The top surface of the tiles shall be glazed. The underside of
- 217 -
the tiles shall not have glaze on more than 5% of the area in order that the tile may adhere
properly to the base. The edges of the tiles shall be free from glaze, however, any glaze if
unavoidable shall be permissible on only upto 50 per cent of the surface area of edges. The
glaze shall be free from welts, chips, craze, specks, crawlings or other imperfections
detracting from the appearance when viewed from a distance of one metre. The glaze shall
be either glossy or matt as specified. The glaze shall be white in colour except in the case of
coloured tiles when colours shall be specified by the Engineer-in-Charge. There may be
more than one colour on a tile.
11.18.1 (a) Dimensions and Tolerances
Glazed pressed cramic tiles shall be made square or rectangular in sizes Table 1, 3, 5 & 7 of
IS 15622 give the modular sizes and table 2, 4, 6 & 8 of IS 15622 gives the sizes of non
modular tiles. The tiles shall conform to IS 15622 for dimensional tolerance, physical and
chemical properties. Half tiles for use as full tiles shall have dimensions which shall be such
as to make the half tiles when jointed together (with 1 mm joint) match with dimensions of
full tiles. Tiles may be manufactured in sizes other than those specified. above. The
thickness of the tiles shall be 5 mm or 6 mm or as specified. The dimensions of fittings
associated with the glazed tiles namely cover base, round edge tile, angles corner cups, ridge
and legs, cronices and capping beads shall be of the shape and dimensions as required and
the thickness of fittings shall be the same as the thickness of tiles given above.
11.18.2 Preparation of Surfaces
The joints shall be raked out to a depth of at least 15 mm in masonry walls. In case of
concrete walls, the surface shall be hacked and roughened with wire brushes. The surface
shall be cleaned thoroughly, washed with water and kept wet before skirting is commenced.
11.18.3 Laying
12 mm thick plaster of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) mix of as specified
shall be applied and allowed to harden. The plaster shall be roughened with wire brushes or
by scratching diagonal at closed intervals. The tiles should be soaked in water, washed
clean, and a coat of cement slurry applied liberally at the back of tiles and set in the bedding
mortar. The tiles shall be tamped and corrected to proper plane and lines. The tiles shall be
set in the required pattern and jointed. The joints shall be as fine as possible. Top of skirting
or dado shall be truly horizontal and joints truly vertical except where otherwise indicated.
Odd size/cut size of tile shall be adjusted at bottom to take care of slope of the flooring.
Skirting and dado shall rest on the top of the flooring. Where full size tiles cannot be fixed
these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size and their edges rubbed smooth. Skirting /dado
shall not project from the finished “surface of wall” by more than the tile thickness,
undulations if any shall be adjusted in wall.
11.18.4 Curing and Finishing
The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement grout with wire/coir brush or trowel to a
depth of 2 mm to 3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush
pointed with white cement added with pigments if required to match the colour of tiles. The
work shall then be kept wet for 7 days. After curing, the surface shall be washed and
finished clean. The finished work shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden
mallet.
11.18.5 Measurements
Length shall be measured correct to a cm. Height shall be measured correct to a cm in the
case of dado and 5 mm in the case of riser and skirting. The area shall be calculated in
square metre, correct to two places of decimal. Length and height shall be measured along
the finished face of the skirting or dado including curves where specials such as coves,
internal and external angles and beads are used. Where cornices are used the area of dado
shall be measured excluding the cornices. Nothing extra will be paid for cutting (sawn) the
tiles to sizes. Areas where coloured tiles or different types of decorative tiles are used will
be measured separately to be paid extra over and above the normal rate for white tiles.
11.18.6 Rates

- 218 -
The rate shall include the cost of all material and labour involved in all the operations
described above, for tiles of sizes upto 0.14 sqm. unless otherwise specified in the
description of the item. The specials such as coves, internal and external angles and beading
shall be measured and paid for separately. The rate shall not include cost of cornices which
shall be measured and paid for in running meters separately.
11.21 KOTA STONE FLOORING
11.21.1 Kota Stone Slabs
The slabs shall be of selected quality, hard, sound, dense and homogeneous in texture free
from cracks, decay, weathering and flaws. They shall be hand or machine cut to the requisite
thickness. They shall be of the colour indicated in the drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer-in-Charge. The slabs shall have the top (exposed) face polished before being
brought to site, unless otherwise specified. The slabs shall conform to the size required.
Before starting the work the contractor shall get the samples of slabs approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
11.21.2 Dressing
Every slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and fine chisel dressed on the sides to
the full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be in full contact
with it. The sides (edges) shall be table rubbed with coarse sand or machine rubbed before
paving. All angles and edges of the slabs shall be true, square and free from chippings and
the surface shall be true and plane. The thickness of the slab after it is dressed shall be 20,
25, 30 or 40 mm as specified in the description of the item. Tolerance of ±2 mm shall be
allowed for the thickness. In respect of length and breadth of slabs Tolerance of ± 5 mm for
hand cut slabs and ± 2 mm for machine cut slabs shall be allowed.
11.21.3 Preparation of Surface and Laying
The specification shall be as described in 11.19.3 except that the edges of the slabs to be
jointed shall be buttered with grey cement, with admixture of pigment to match the shade of
the slab. The thickness of the joints should be minimum as possible. In any location, it shall
not exceed 1 mm.
11.21.4 Polishing and Finishing
The specifications shall be as described in 11.19.3 except that (a) first polishing with coarse
grade carborundum stone shall not be done, (b) cement slurry with or without pigment shall
not be applied on the surface before polishing.
11.21.5 Measurements and Rates
These shall be as described in paras 11.19.5 and 11.19.6.
11.22 KOTA STONE IN RISERS OF STEPS, SKIRTING AND DADO
11.22.1 Kota Stone Slabs and Dressing shall be as specified in 11.21.1 and 11.21.2 except
that the thickness of the slabs shall be 25 mm or as specified in the description of the item.
The slabs may be of uniform size if required.
11.22.2 Preparation of surface shall be as specified in 11.20.2.
11.22.3 Laying shall be as specified in 11.20.3 except that the joints of the slabs shall be set
in grey cement mixed with pigment to match the shade of the slabs.
11.22.4 Curing, Polishing and Finishing shall be as specified in 11.20.4 except that first
polishing with coarse grade carborundum stone shall not be done.
11.22.5 Measurements
Length shall be measured along the finished face of riser, skirting or dado correct to a cm.
Height shall be measured from the finished level of tread of floor to the top (the underside
of tread in the case of steps). This shall be measured correct to a mm in the case of risers of
steps and skirting and correct to a cm in the case of dado. The area shall be calculated in
square metre correct to two places of decimal. Lining of pillars etc. shall also be measured
under this item.
11.22.6 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above.
Note:- For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 1, Sub Head 11.0
- 219 -
 SUB HEAD : 12.0
ROOFING
12.0 TERMINOLOGY
12.0.1 Accessories
Purpose made fittings, such as apron flashing pieces, barge boards, bottom glazing flashing,
corner piece (corner flashing), eaves filler pieces, expansion joints, hip capping, hip tile or
cap, ridge capping, ridge finials, roof lights, ventilators, with which the roof is furnished.
12.0.2 Eaves
The lower edge of the inclined roof.
12.0.3 Finial
A decorative fitting used at the Junction of ridges and hips to form a water proof covering
and at the top of conical, pyramidal, or dome roofs.
12.0.4 Flashing
A strip of impervious material, usually metal used to exclude water from the junction
between a roof covering and another part of the structure.
12.0.5 Gable
Part of wall above the general eaves level at tie end of ridged or partially hipped roof.
12.0.6 Gutter
Any form of roof water channel.
12.0.7 Hip
The outer angle (more than 180 degree) formed by the inclined ridge between two
intersecting roof slopes.
12.0.8 Pitch
12.0.8.1 The angle of inclination with the horizontal of the rafters or substructure surface on
which the roof coverings are laid.
12.0.8.2 In patent glazing, the angle at which the plane of a stretch of glazing is inclined to
the horizontal.
12.0.9 Pitched Roof
A roof the pitch of which is greater than 10 degree to the horizontal.
12.0.10 Ridge
The horizontal inter-section at the apex of the two rising roof surfaces inclined in opposite
directions.
12.0.11 Valley
The re-entrant angle formed by the inter-section of two inclined roof surfaces.
12.0.12 Verge
Free edge of a roof surface ending at a gable.
12.1 CORRUGATED GALVANISED STEEL SHEET ROOFING
12.1.1 C.G.S. Sheets
These shall be of the thickness specified in the description of the item and shall conform to
IS 277. The sheets shall be of 275 grade of coating (See Appendix-A) unless otherwise
specified in the description of item. The sheets shall be free from cracks, split edges, twists,
surface flaws etc. They shall be clean, bright and smooth. The galvanizing shall be non-
injured and in perfect condition. The sheets shall not show signs of rust or white powdery
deposits on the surface. The corrugations shall be uniform in depth and pitch and parallel
with the side.
12.1.2 Purlins
Purlins of the specified material or M.S. rolled sections of requisite size shall be fixed over
the principal rafters. These shall not be spaced at more than the following distances. (Table
12.1)

- 220 -
The top surfaces of the purlins shall be uniform and plane. They shall be painted before
fixing on top. Embedded portions of wooden purlins shall be coal tarred with two coats.
12.1.3 Slope
Roof shall not be pitched at a flatter slope than 1 vertical to 5 horizontal. The normal pitch
adopted shall usually be 1 vertical to 3 horizontal.
12.1.4 Laying and Fixing
12.1.4.1 The sheets shall be laid and fixed in the manner described below, unless otherwise
shown in the working drawings or directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
12.1.4.2 The sheets shall be laid on the purlins to a true plane, with the lines of corrugations
parallel or normal to the sides of the area to be covered unless otherwise required as in
special shaped roofs.
12.1.4.3 The sheets shall be laid with a minimum lap of 15 cm at the ends and 2 ridges of
corrugations at each side. The above minimum end lap of 15 cm shall apply to slopes of 1
vertical to 2 horizontal and steeper slopes. For flatter slopes the minimum permissible end
lap shall be 20 cm. The minimum lap of sheets with ridge, hip and valley shall be 20 cm
measured at right angles to the line of the ridge, hip and valley respectively. These sheets
shall be cut to suit the dimensions or shapes of the roof, either along their length or their
width or in a slant across their lines of corrugations at hips and valleys. They shall be cut
carefully with a straight edge chisel to give a smooth and straight finish.
12.1.4.4 Lapping in C.G.S. sheets shall be painted with a coat of approved steel primer and
two coats of painting with approved paint suitable for G.S. sheet, before the sheets are fixed
in place.
12.1.4.5 Sheets shall not generally be fixed into gables and parapets. They shall be bent up
along their side edges close to the wall and the junction shall be protected by suitable
flashing or by a projecting drip course, the later to cover the junction by at least 7.5 cm.
12.1.4.6 The laying operation shall include all scaffolding work involved.
12.1.4.7 Sheets shall be fixed to the purlins or other roof members such as hip or valley
rafters etc. with galvanised J or L hook bolts and nuts, 8 mm diameter, with bitumen and
G.I. limpet washers or with a limpet washer filled with white lead as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge. While J hooks are used for fixing sheets on angle iron purlins, and L
hooks are used for fixing the sheet to R.S. joists, timber or precast concrete purlins. The
length of the hook bolt shall be varied to suit the particular requirements. The bolts shall be
sufficiently long so that after fixing they project above the top of the nuts by not less than 10
mm. The grip of J or L hook bolt on the side of the purlin shall not be less than 25 mm.
There shall be a minimum of three hook bolts placed at the ridges of corrugations in each
sheet on every purlin and their spacing shall not exceed 30 cm. Coach screws shall not be
used for fixing sheets to purlins.
12.1.4.8 The galvanised coating on J or L hooks, and bolts shall be continuous and free from
defects such as blisters, flux stains, drops, excessive projections or other imperfections
which would impair serviceability. The galvanised coating should conform to IS 1367 (Pt.
XIII) The mass of coating per square meter of the surface shall be as under:

12.1.4.9 Where slopes of roofs are less than 21.5 degrees (1 vertical to 2.5 horizontal) sheets
shall be joined together at the side laps by galvanised iron bolts and nuts 25 × 6 mm size,
each bolt provided with a bitumen and a G.I. limpet washer or a G.I. limpet washer filled
with white lead. As the overlap at the sides extends to two corrugations, these bolts shall be
placed zig-zag over the two overlapping corrugations, so that the ends of the overlapping
sheets shall be drawn tightly to each other. The spacing of these seam bolts shall not exceed
60 cm along each of the staggered rows. Holes for all bolts shall be drilled and not punched
in the ridges of the corrugations from the underside, while the sheets are on the ground.
- 221 -
12.1.5 Wind Tie
Wind ties shall be of 40 x 6 mm flat iron section or of other size as specified. These shall be
fixed at the eaves of the sheets. The fixing shall be done with the same hook bolts which
secure the sheets to the purlins. The ties shall be paid for separately unless described in the
item of roofing.
12.1.6 Finish
The roof when completed shall be true to lines, and slopes and shall be leak proof.
12.1.7 Measurements
12.1.7.1 The length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. Area shall be worked out
in sqm correct to two places of decimal.
12.1.7.2 The superficial area of roof covering shall be measured on the flat without
allowance for laps and corrugations. Portion of roof covering overlapping the ridge or hip
etc. shall be included in the measurements of the roof.
12.1.7.3 Roof with curved sheets shall be measured and paid for separately. Measurements
shall be taken on the flat and not girthed.
12.1.7.4 No deduction in measurement shall be made for opening upto 0.4 sqm and nothing
extra shall be allowed for forming such openings. For any opening exceeding 0.4 sqm in
area, deduction in measurements for the full opening shall be made and in such cases the
labour involved in making these openings shall be paid for separately. Cutting across
corrugation shall be measured on the flat and not girthed. No additions shall be made for
laps cut through.
12.1.8 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all the materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including a coat of approved steel primer and two coats of approved steel
paint on overlapping of C.G.S. sheets. This includes the cost of roof sheets, galvanised iron
J or L hooks, bolts and nuts, galvanised iron seam bolts and nuts, bituminous and galvanised
iron limpet washers etc.
12.2 RIDGES AND HIPS OF PLAIN GALVANISED STEEL SHEETS
12.2.1 Ridges and Hips
Ridges and hips of C.G.S. roof shall be covered with ridge and hip sections of plain G.S.
sheet with a minimum lap of 20 cm on either side over the C.G.S. sheets. The end laps of
the ridges and hips and between ridges and hips shall also be not less than 20 cm. The ridges
and hips shall be of 60 cm overall width plain G.S. sheet, 0.6 mm or 0.8 mm thick as given
in the description of the item and shall be properly bent in shape.
12.2.2 Fixing
12.2.2.1 Ridges shall be fixed to the purlins below with the same 8 mm dia G.I. hook bolts
and nuts and bitumen and G.I. limpet washers which fix the sheets to the purlins.
12.2.2.2 Similarly, hips shall be fixed to the roof members below such as purlins, hip and
valley rafters with the same 8 mm dia G.I. hook bolts and nuts and bitumen and G.I. limpet
washers which fix the sheets to those roof members. At least one of the fixing bolts shall
pass through the end laps of ridges and hips, on either side. If this is not possible extra hook
bolts shall be provided.
12.2.2.3 The end laps of ridges and hips shall be joined together with C.G.S sheet by
galvanised iron seam bolts 25 x 6 mm size each with a bitumen and G.I. washer or white
lead as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. There shall be at least two such bolts in each
end lap.
12.2.2.4 Surface of C.G.I. sheets of ridge and hip sections and the roofing sheets which
overlap each other shall be painted with a coat of approved primer and two coats of
approved paint suitable for painting G.S. Sheets before they are fixed in place.
12.2.3 Finish
The edges of the ridges and hips shall be straight from end to end and their surfaces should
be plane and parallel to the general plane of the roof. The ridges and hips shall fit in
squarely on the sheets.
12.2.4 Measurement
- 222 -
The measurements shall be taken for the finished work in length along the centre line of
ridge or hip, as the case may be, correct to a cm. The laps in ridges and hips and between
ridges and hips shall not be measured.
12.2.5 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials specified above, including
painting, cost of seam bolts and any extra G.I. hook bolts, nuts and washers, required.
12.3 VALLEY AND FLASHING OF PLAIN GALVANISED STEEL SHEETS
12.3.1 Valley and Flashing
Valley shall be 90 cm wide overall plain G.S. sheet 1.6 mm thick or other size as specified
in the item bent to shape and fixed. They shall lap with the C.G.S. sheets not less than 25 cm
width on other side. The end laps of valley shall also be not less than 25 cm. Valley sheets
shall be laid over 25 mm thick wooden boarding if so required. Flashing shall be of plain
G.S. sheet of 40 cm overall width 1.25 mm thick or 1.00 mm thick as specified in the item
bend to shape and fixed. They shall lap not less than 15 cm over the roofing sheets. The end
laps between flashing pieces shall not be less than 25 cm.
12.3.2 Laying and Fixing
Flashing and valley sheets shall be fixed to the roof members below, such as purlins and
valley rafters with the same 8 mm dia G.I. hook bolts and nuts and bitumen and G.I. limpet
washers which fix the sheets to those roof members. At least one of the fixing bolts shall
pass through the end laps of the valley pieces on other side. If this is not possible extra hook
bolts shall be provided. The free end of flashing shall be fixed at least 5 cm inside masonary
with the mortar of mix 1: 3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand). Refer Fig. 12.3.
12.3.3 Surface of G.S. sheets under overlaps shall be painted with a coat of approved primer
and two coats of approved paint suitable for painting G.S. sheets.
12.3.4 Finish
The edges of valley and flashing should be straight from end to end. The surfaces should be
true and without bulges and depressions.
12.3.5 Measurements
The length of the valleys and flashing shall be measured for the finished work correct to a
cm. The laps along the length of the valley or flashing pieces, including the portion
embedded in masonary, shall not be measured.
12.3.6 Rates
The rate for valleys, shall be for all the labour and materials specified above, including
painting, cost of seam bolts and the cost of requisite G.I. hook bolts, nuts and washers
required over and above those needed for connecting the roof sheets to the roof members.
The rate for valleys shall exclude the cost of boarding underneath which shall be paid for
separately. The rate for flashing shall be for all the labour and materials specified above, and
shall include the cost of painting and mortar for fixing in wall.
12.4 GUTTERS MADE OF PLAIN GALVANISED STEEL SHEETS (FIG. 12.2)
12.4.1 Gutters
Gutter shall be fabricated from plain G.S. Sheets of thickness as specified in the item. Eaves
gutters shall be of the shape and section specified in the description of the item. The overall
width of the sheet referred to therein shall mean the peripheral width of the gutter including
the rounded edges. The longitudinal edges shall be turned back to the extent of 12 mm and
beaten to form a rounded edge. The ends of the sheets at junctions of pieces shall be hooked
into each other and beaten flush to avoid leakage.
12.4.2 Slope
Gutter shall be laid with a minimum slope of 1 in 120.
12.4.3 Laying and Fixing
12.4.3.1 Gutter shall be supported on and fixed to M.S. flat iron brackets bent to shape and
fixed to the requisite slope. The maximum spacing of brackets shall be 1.20 metres.
12.4.3.2 Where these brackets are to be fixed to the sides of rafters, they shall be of 40 × 3
mm section bend to shape and fixed rigidly to the sides of rafters with 3 Nos. 10 mm dia

- 223 -
bolts, nuts and washers. The brackets shall overlap the rafter not less than 30 cm and the
connecting bolts shall be at 12 cm centres.
12.4.3.3 Where the brackets are to be fixed to the purlins, the brackets shall consist of 50 × 3
mm M.S. flat iron bent to shape with one end turned at right angle and fixed to the purlin
face with 2 Nos. of 10 mm dia bolts nuts and washers. The bracket will be stiffened by
provision of 50 × 3 mm. M.S. flat whose over hung portion bent to right angle shape with its
longer leg connected to the bracket with 2 Nos. 6 mm dia M.S. bolts, nuts and washers and
its shorter leg fixed to face of purlin with 1 No. 10 mm dia, bolt, nut and washer. The over
hang of the vertical portion of the bracket from the face of the purlin shall not exceed 22.5
cm with this arrangement. The spacing of the brackets shall not exceed 1.20 metres.
12.4.3.4 The gutter shall be fixed to the brackets with 2 Nos. G.I. bolts and nuts 6 mm dia,
each fitted with a pair of G.I. and bitumen washers. The connecting bolts shall be above the
water line of the gutters.
12.4.3.5 For connection to down take pipes, a proper drop end or funnel shaped connecting
piece shall be made out of G.S. sheet of the same thickness as the gutter and riverted to the
gutter, the other end tailing into the socket of the rain-water pipe. Wherever necessary stop
ends, angles etc., should be provided.
12.4.4 Finish
The gutters when fixed shall be true to line and slope and shall be leakproof.
12.4.5 Measurements
Measurements shall be taken for the finished work along the centre line of the top width of
the gutter connection to a cm. The hooked lap portion in the junctions and gutter lengths
shall not be measured. The number of brackets which are fixed to purlins with stiffener flats
should be measured.
12.4.6 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials specified above, including all
specials such as angles, junctions, drop ends or funnel shaped connecting pieces, stop ends
etc., flat iron brackets and bolts and nuts required for fixing the latter to the roof members.
Brackets of 50 × 3 mm flats fixed to purlins with stiffener flats will be paid extra.
12.13 CEMENT CONCRETE GOLA (FIG. 12.7)
12.13.1 Cement Concrete
The specifications for concrete shall be the same as described in subhead 4.0 of concrete
work.
12.13.2 Gola
A chase of 75 mm wide and 75 mm deep shall be cut in the parapet wall just above the
junction of mud phuska or lime concrete with parapet wall and it shall be filled with cement
concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 stone aggregate 10 mm and down gauge) the
external face finish with a slope of 1 : 0.75 and the exposed surface of the gola shall be
plastered with cement mortar 1 : 3 (1 cement : 3 fine sand). Expansion joint at every 3.5 to
4.5 metres shall be provided and filled with bitumen filler. The bitumen filler shall be
prepared by mixing bitumen, cement and coarse sand in the ratio of 80 : 1 : 0.25 (80 kg of
hot bitumen : 1 kg of cement and 0.25 cum of coarse sand).
12.13.3 Curing
The finished surface shall be cured for at least 7 days.
12.13.4 Measurements
The length of the finished gola shall be measured at its junction with the wall face correct to
a cm. No deduction shall be made in measurements for gaps for water outlets.
12.13.5 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including the cost of bitumen filler in expansion joint. The rate includes for
all turnings and roundings at all the corners and risers.
12.14 KHURRAS (FIG. 12.7)
12.14.0 The khurras shall be constructed before the brick masonry work in parapet wall is
taken up and it shall be of size 45 cm x 45 cm unless otherwise specified in the description
- 224 -
of the item and shall be made of cement concrete 1:2:4 mix (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4
graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) or other mix as stipulated in the description of
the item.
12.14.1 Laying
12.14.1.1 A PVC sheet of size 1 m x 1 m x 400 micron (alternatively, aluminium foil of 32
SWG) shall be laid under the khurra and then cement concrete shall be laid over it to
average thickness of 50 mm with its top surface lower than the level of adjoining roof
surface by not less than 50 mm.
12.14.1.2 The concrete shall be laid to a size greater than the stipulated size of the khurra in
such a way that the adjoining terracing shall overlap the concrete on its three edges by not
less than 7.5 cm. The concrete will slope uniformly from the edges to the outlet, the slope
being as much as possible and in no case less than 20 mm cement concrete at the outlet. The
concrete shall be continued at the same slope through the width of the wall into the outlet
opening to ensure a water tight joint.
12.14.1.3 The khurras and the sides of the outlet shall then be rendered with 12 mm coat of
cement plaster 1:3 mix (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) or other mix as stipulated in the
description of the item. This shall be done when the concrete is still green and shall be
finished. The sides of the khurras and sides of the outlet opening shall be well rounded. The
size of the finished outlet opening shall be 10 cm wide and by 20 cm high or as directed by
the Engineer-in-Charge.
12.14.1.4 In cases where rain water is to be disposed off through rain water pipes, iron
grating shall be provided at the outlet as a safeguard against choking, if so directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge. Iron gratings, shall be of overall size 20 × 25 cm. with an outer frame
of 15 × 3 mm M.S. flat to which 4 Nos M.S. bars of 10 mm dia shall be welded in a vertical
direction keeping equal clear spacing of 2.5 cm. or as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
12.14.2 Measurements
Khurras shall be counted in numbers.
12.14.3 Rate
The rate is for each completed khurra of the specified size and is inclusive of the cost of all
materials and labour in forming the khurras and outlet opening as described above, except
for iron gratings which shall be paid for separately.
12.22 RAIN WATER SPOUTS
12.22.0 The sectional area of rain water spouts provided shall be generally at the rate of 1
square cm per 70 to 80 square decimetre of roof area drained. However in locations subject
to excessive and high intensities of rainfalls, the area of spouts provided may be suitably
increased to suit local conditions. No spout shall be less than 80 mm in diameter. The
spacing of spouts shall be arranged to suit the position of openings in the wall.
12.26 UNPLASTICISED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPES AND FITTINGS
12.26.1 UPVC Pipes
Pipes shall conform to Type A pipes of IS 13592. The internal and external surfaces of the
pipes shall be smooth and clean and free from groovings and other defects. The end shall be
clearly cut and shall be square with the axis of the pipe. The end may be chamfered on the
plain sides. Slight shallow longitudinal grooves or irregularities in the wall thickness shall
be permissible provided the wall thickness remains within the permissible limit.
12.26.2 Colour of Pipe
Surface colour of the pipes shall be dark shade of grey or as specified .
12.26.3 Marking
Each pipe shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the following informations at intervals
not more than 3 meter.
(a) Manufacturer’s name or trade mark.
(b) Nominal outside dia of pipe.
(c) Type ‘A’
(d) Batch number.
12.27.4 Dimensions
- 225 -
12.26.4.1 Diameter and Wall Thickness: Mean outside diameter, outside diameter at any
point and wall thickness for type –A manufactured plain or with socket shall be as given in
Table- 1 of IS 13592. UPVC rain water pipes shall be of the dia, specified in the description
of the item and shall be in nominal lengths of 2,3,4 or 6 metres either plain or with
sliding/grooved socket unless shorter lengths are required at junctions with fittings.
Tolerances on specified length shall be + 10 mm and – 0 mm.
12.26.5 Fixing and Jointing
Pipes shall be either fixed on face of wall or embedded in masonry as required in the
description of the item. Plain pipes shall be secured to the walls at all joints with PVC Pipes
clips by means of 50 x 50 x 50 mm hard wood plugs, screwed with M.S. screws of required
length i/c cutting brick work and fixing in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand ).
The clips shall be kept about 25 mm clear off finished face of wall, so as to facilitate
cleaning of pipes. Pipes shall be fixed perfectly vertical or to the lines as directed. The pipes
shall be fitted to fittings with seal ring conforming to IS 5382 allowing 10 mm gap for
thermal expansion.
12.26.6 Installation in Wall/Concrete
The walls/concrete slots should allow for a stress free installation. Pipes and fittings to be
inserted into the slots without a cement base have to be applied first with a thin coat of PVC
solvent cement followed by sprinkling of dry sand (medium size). Allow it to dry. The
process gives a sound base for cement fixation. This process is repeated while joining PVC
material to CI/AC materials.
12.26.7 Fittings
Fittings used shall be of the same make as that of the PVC pipes Injeciton moulded or
fabricated by the manufacturer and shall have a minimum wall thickness of 3.2 mm. The
fittings shall be supplied with grooved socketted ends with square grooves and provided
with Rubber Gasket conforming to IS 5382. The plain ends of the fittings should be
chamfered. The fittings shall be joined with the help of Rubber lubricant. The details of
fittings refer IS 13592.
12.26.8 Measurements
The fittings shall be measured by numbers. The pipes shall be measured net when fixed
correct to a cm. excluding all fittings along its length.
12.26.9 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including jointing but excluding the supply and fixing of wall plugs and
PVC clips which shall be paid for separately.
Note : These pipes shall be used only in shaft or unexposed location to avoid damage to
these pipes due to willful act.
Note:- For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 1, Sub Head 12.0

- 226 -
 SUB HEAD : 13.0
FINISHING
13.1 CEMENT PLASTER
The cement plaster shall be 12 mm, 15 mm or 20 mm thick as specified in the item.
13.1.1 Scaffolding
For all exposed brick work or tile work double scaffolding independent of the work having
two sets of vertical supports shall be provided. The supports shall be sound and strong, tied
together with horizontal pieces over which scaffolding planks shall be fixed. For all other
work in buildings, single scaffolding shall be permitted. In such cases the inner end of the
horizontal scaffolding pole shall rest in a hole provided only in the header course for the
purpose. Only one header for each pole shall be left out. Such holes for scaffolding shall,
however, not be allowed in pillars/columns less than one metre in width or immediately near
the skew backs of arches. The holes
left in masonry works for scaffolding purposes shall be filled and made good before
plastering.
Note : In case of special type of brick work, scaffolding shall be got approved from
Engineer-in-charge in advance.
13.1.2 Preparation of Surface
The joints shall be raked out properly. Dust and loose mortar shall be brushed out.
Efflorescence if any shall be removed by brushing and scrapping. The surface shall then be
thoroughly washed with water, cleaned and kept wet before plastering is commenced. In
case of concrete surface if a chemical retarder has been applied to the form work, the surface
shall be roughened by wire brushing and all the resulting dust and loose particles cleaned off
and care shall be taken that none of the retarders is left on the surface.
13.1.3 Mortar
The mortar of the specified mix using the type of sand described in the item shall be used. It
shall be as specified in Subhead 3.0. For external work and under coat work, the fine
aggregate shall conform to grading IV. For finishing coat work the fine aggregate
conforming to grading zone V shall be used.
13.1.4 Application of Plaster
13.1.4.1 Ceiling plaster shall be completed before commencement of wall plaster.
13.1.4.2 Plastering shall be started from the top and worked down towards the floor. All
putlog holes shall be properly filled in advance of the plastering as the scaffolding is being
taken down. To ensure even thickness and a true surface, plaster about 15 × 15 cm shall be
first applied, horizontally and vertically, at not more than 2 metres intervals over the entire
surface to serve as gauges. The surfaces of these gauged areas shall be truly in the plane of
the finished plaster surface. The mortar shall then be laid on the wall, between the gauges
with trowel. The mortar shall be applied in a uniform surface slightly more than the
specified thickness. This shall be brought to a true surface, by working a wooden straight
edge reaching across the gauges, with small upward and side ways movements at a time.
Finally the surface shall be finished off true with trowel or wooden float according as a
smooth or a sandy granular texture is required. Excessive troweling or over working the
float shall be avoided.
13.1.4.3 All corners, arrises, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the
case may be and shall be carefully finished. Rounding or chamfering corners, arrises,
provision of grooves at junctions etc. where required shall be done without any extra
payment. Such rounding, chamfering or grooving shall be carried out with proper templates
or battens to the sizes required.
13.1.4.4 When suspending work at the end of the day, the plaster shall be left, cut clean to
line both horizontally and vertically. When recommencing the plastering, the edge of the old
work shall be scrapped cleaned and wetted with cement slurry before plaster is applied to
the adjacent areas, to enable the two to properly join together. Plastering work shall be
- 227 -
closed at the end of the day on the body of wall and not nearer than 15 cm to any corners or
arrises. It shall not be closed on the body of the features such as plasters, bands and
cornices, nor at the corners of arrises. Horizontal joints in plaster work shall not also occur
on parapet tops and copings as these invariably lead to leakages. The plastering and
finishing shall be completed within half an hour of adding water to the dry mortar. No
portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up later on. The plastering and
finishing shall be completed within half an hour of adding water to the dry mortar.
13.1.5 Thickness
Where the thickness required as per description of the item is 20 mm the average thickness
of the plaster shall not be less than 20 mm whether the wall treated is of brick or stone. In
the case of brick work, the minimum thickness over any portion of the surface shall be not
less than 15 mm while in case of stone work the minimum thickness over the bushings shall
be not less than 12 mm.
13.1.6 Curing
Curing shall be started as soon as the plaster has hardened sufficiently not to be damaged
when watered. The plaster shall be kept wet for a period of at least 7 days. During this
period, it shall be suitably protected from all damages at the contractor’s expense by such
means as the Engineer-in-Charge may approve. The dates on which the plastering is done
shall be legibly marked on the various sections plastered so that curing for the specified
period thereafter can be watched.
13.1.7 Finish
The plaster shall be finished to a true and plumb surface and to the proper degree of
smoothness as required. The work shall be tested frequently as the work proceeds with a
true straight edge not less than 2.5 m long and with plumb bobs. All horizontal lines and
surfaces shall be tested with a level and all jambs and corners with a plumb bob as the work
proceeds.
13.1.8 Precaution
Any cracks which appear in the surface and all portions which sound hollow when tapped,
or are found to be soft or otherwise defective, shall be cut out in rectangular shape and
redone as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
(i) When ceiling plaster is done, it shall be finished to chamfered edge at an angle at its
junction with a suitable tool when plaster is being done. Similarly when the wall plaster is
being done, it shall be kept separate from the ceiling plaster by a thin straight groove not
deeper than 6 mm drawn with any suitable method with the wall while the plaster is green.
(ii) To prevent surface cracks appearing between junctions of column/beam and walls, 150
mm wide chicken wire mesh should be fixed with U nails 150 mm centre to centre before
plastering the junction. The plastering of walls and beam/column in one vertical plane
should be carried out in one go. For providing and fixing chicken wire mesh with U nails
payment shall be made separately.
13.1.9 Measurements
13.1.9.1 Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm and its area shall be
calculated in square metres correct to two places of decimal.
13.1.9.2 Thickness of the plaster shall be exclusive of the thickness of the key i.e. grooves,
or open joints in brick work.
13.1.9.3 The measurement of wall plaster shall be taken between the walls or partitions (the
dimensions before the plaster shall be taken) for the length and from the top of the floor or
skirting to the ceiling for the height. Depth of coves or cornices if any shall be deducted.
13.1.9.4 The following shall be measured separately from wall plaster.
(a) Plaster bands 30 cm wide and under
(b) Cornice beadings and architraves or architraves moulded wholly in plaster.
(c) Circular work not exceeding 6 m in radius.
13.1.9.5 Plaster over masonry pilasters will be measured and paid for as plaster only.
13.1.9.6 A coefficient of 1.63 shall be adopted for the measurement of one side plastering
on honey comb work having 6 x 10 cm. opening.
- 228 -
13.1.9.7 Moulded cornices and coves.
(a) Length shall be measured at the centre of the girth.
(b) Moulded cornices and coves shall be given in square metres the area being arrived at by
multiplying length by the girth.
(c) Flat or weathered top to cornices when exceeding 15 cm in width shall not be included in
the girth but measured with the general plaster work.
(d) Cornices which are curved in their length shall be measured separately.
13.1.9.8 Exterior plastering at a height greater than 10 m from average ground level shall be
measured separately in each storey height. Patch plastering (in repairs) shall be measured as
plastering new work, where the patch exceed 2.5 sqm. extra payment being made for
preparing old wall, such as dismantling old plaster, raking out the joints and cleaning the
surface. Where the patch does not exceed 2.5 sqm in area it shall be measured under the
appropriate item under sub head ‘Repairs to Buildings.’
13.1.9.9 Deductions in measurements, for opening etc. will be regulated as follows:
(a) No deduction will be made for openings or ends of joists, beams, posts, girders, steps
etc. upto 0.5 sqm in area and no additions shall be made either, for the jambs, soffits and
sills of such openings. The above procedure will apply to both faces of wall.
(b) Deduction for opening exceeding 0.5 sqm but not exceeding 3 sqm each shall be made
for reveals, jambs, soffits sills, sills, etc. of these openings.
(i) When both faces of walls are plastered with same plaster, deductions shall be made for
one face only.
(ii) When two faces of walls are plastered with different types of plaster or if one face is
plastered and other is pointed or one face is plastered and other is unplastered, deduction
shall be made from the plaster or pointing on the side of the frame for the doors, windows
etc. on which width of reveals is less than that on the other side but no deduction shall be
made on the other side. Where width of reveals on both faces of wall are equal, deduction of
50% of area of opening on each face shall be made from area of plaster and/or pointing as
the case may be. (iii) For opening having door frame equal to or projecting beyond thickness
of wall, full deduction for opening shall be made from each plastered face of wall.
(c) For opening exceeding 3 sqm in area, deduction will be made in the measurements for
the full opening of the wall treatment on both faces, while at the same time, jambs, sills and
soffits will be measured for payment. In measuring jambs, sills and soffits, deduction shall
not be made for the area in contact with the frame of doors, windows etc.
13.1.10 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the operations
described above.
13.2 CEMENT PLASTER WITH A FLOATING COAT OF NEAT CEMENT
13.2.0 The cement plaster shall be 12, 15 or 20 mm thick, finished with a floating coat of
neat cement, as described in the item.
13.2.1 Specifications for this item of work shall be same as described in 13.1 except for the
additional floating coat which shall be carried out as below.
When the plaster has been brought to a true surface with the wooden straight edge (clause
13.1.4.2) it shall be uniformly treated over its entire area with a paste of neat cement and
rubbed smooth, so that the whole surface is covered with neat cement coating. The quantity
of cement applied for floating coat shall be 1 kg per sqm. Smooth finishing shall be
completed with trowel immediately and in no case later than half an hour of adding water to
the plaster mix. The rest of the specifications described in 13.1.4 shall apply.
13.3 18 MM CEMENT PLASTER (TWO COAT WORK)
13.3.1 The specification for scaffolding and preparation of surface shall be as described in
13.1
13.3.2 Mortar
The mix and type of fine aggregate specified in the description of the item shall be used for
the respective coats. Generally the mix of the finishing coat shall not be richer than the
under coat unless otherwise described in item.
- 229 -
Generally coarse sand shall be used for the under coat and fine sand for the finishing coat,
unless otherwise specified for external work and under coat work, the fine aggregate shall
conform to grading zone IV. For finishing coat work the fine aggregate conforming to
grading zone V shall be used.
13.3.3 Application
13.3.3.1 The plaster shall be applied in two coats i.e. 12 mm under coat and then 6 mm
finishing coat and shall have an average total thickness of not less than 18 mm.
13.3.3.2 12 mm Under Coat : This shall be applied as specified in 13.1.4 except that when
the plaster has been brought to a true surface a wooden straight edge and the surface shall be
left rough and furrowed 2 mm deep with a scratching tool diagonally both ways, to form key
for the finishing coat. The surface shall be kept wet till the finishing coat is applied.
13.3.3.3 6 mm Finishing Coat : The finishing coat shall be applied after the under coat has
sufficiently set but not dried and in any case within 48 hours and finished in the manner
specified in 13.1.4.
13.3.4 Specifications for Curing, Finishing, Precautions, Measurements and Rate shall be as
described under 13.1.
13.4 6 MM CEMENT PLASTER ON CEMENT CONCRETE AND REINFORCED
CEMENT
CONCRETE WORK
13.4.1 Scaffolding
Stage scaffolding shall be provided for the work. This shall be independent of the walls.
13.4.2 Preparation of Surface
Projecting burrs of mortar formed due to the gaps at joints in shuttering shall be removed.
The surface shall be scrubbed clean with wire brushes. In addition concrete surfaces to be
plastered shall be pock marked with a pointed tool, at spacings of not more than 5 cm.
Centres, the pock being made not less than 3 mm deep. This is to ensure a proper key for the
plaster. The mortar shall be washed off and surface, cleaned off all oil, grease etc. and well
wetted before the plaster is applied.
13.4.3 Mortars
Mortar of the specified mix using the types of sand described in the item shall be used. It
shall be as specified in 3.2.
13.4.4 Application
To ensure even thickness and a true surface, gauges of plaster 15 x 15 cm. shall be first
applied at not more than 1.5 m intervals in both directions to serve as guides for the
plastering. Surface of these gauged areas shall be truly in the plane of the finished plaster
surface. The plaster shall be then applied in a uniform surface to a thickness slightly more
than the specified thickness and shall then be brought to true and even surface by working a
wooden straight edge reaching across the gauges. Finally the surface shall be finished true
with a trowel or with wooden float to give a smooth or sandy granular texture as required.
Excess troweling or over working of the floats shall be avoided. The plastering and finishing
shall be completed within half an hour of adding water to the dry mortar.Plastering of
ceiling shall not be commenced until the slab above has been finished and centring has been
removed. In the case of ceiling of roof slabs, plaster shall not be commenced until the
terrace work has been completed. These precautions are necessary in order that the ceiling
plaster is not disturbed by the vibrations set up in the above operations.
13.4.5 Finish
The plaster shall be finished to a true and plumb surface and to the proper degree of
smoothness as required. The work shall be tested frequently as the work proceeds with a
true straight edge not less than 2.5 m long and with plumb bobs. All horizontal lines and
surfaces shall be tested with a level and all jambs and corners with a plumb bob as the work
proceeds.
13.4.6 Thickness
The average thickness of plaster shall not be less than 6 mm. The minimum thickness over
any portion of the surface shall not be less than 5 mm.
- 230 -
13.4.7 Curing
The specifications shall be as detailed in 13.1.6.
13.4.8 Precautions
The specifications shall be as detailed in 13.1.8.
13.4.9 Measurements
13.4.9.1 Length and breadth shall be measured correct a cm. and its area shall be calculated
in sqm. correct to two places of decimal. Dimensions before plastering shall be taken.
13.4.9.2 Thickness of plaster shall be exclusive of the thickness of the key i.e. depth or rock
marks and hacking.
13.4.9.3 Plastering on ceiling at height greater than 5 m above the corresponding floor level
shall be so described and shall be measured separately stating the height in stages of 1 m or
part thereof.
13.4.9.4 Plastering on the sides and soffits of the projected beams of ceiling at a height
greater than 5 m above the corresponding floor level shall be measured and added to the
quantity measured under 13.4.9.3.
13.4.9.5 Plastering on spherical and groined ceiling and circular work not exceeding 6 m in
radius, shall be measured and paid for separately.
13.4.9.6 Flowing soffits (viz. portion under spiral stair case etc.) shall be measured and paid
for separately.
13.4.9.7 Ribs and mouldings on ceiling shall be measured as for cornices, deductions being
made from the plastering on ceiling in case the width of the moulding exceed 15 cm.
13.4.9.8 The mode of measurement of exterior plastering and patch plastering (in repairs)
shall be as laid down in 13.1.9.8
13.4.9.9 Deduction shall not be made for openings or for ends of columns, or columns caps
of 0.5 sqm each in area and under. No additions will be made either for the plastering of the
sides of such openings. For openings etc. of areas exceeding 0.5 sqm deduction will be
made for the full opening but the sides of such openings shall be measured for payment.
13.4.10 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the operations
described above.
13.6 NEAT CEMENT PUNNING
13.6.1 The specifications given for floating coat described in 13.2.1 shall apply.
13.6.2 Specification for scaffolding and curing shall be as described in 13.1.1 and 13.1.6.
respectively. Specifications for Finish and Precautions shall be as described in 13.1.7. and
13.1.8.
13.6.3 Measurements
13.6.3.1 The measurements for cement punning shall be taken over the finished work. The
length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. The area shall be calculated in sqm
correct to two places of decimal.
13.6.3.2 Punning over Plaster on bands, skirting, coping, cornices, drip courses, string
courses etc. shall not be measured separately but only as wall surfaces. In these cases the
measurements shall be taken girthed over the above features.
13.6.3.3 Punning over plaster on circular work also, of any radius shall be measured only as
wall surfaces, and not separately.
13.6.3.4 Cement punning in patch repairs irrespective of the size of the patch shall be
measured as new work, and in this case the rate shall include for cutting the patch to
rectangular shape before lime punning.
13.6.3.5 Deductions in measurements for openings shall be regulated generally as described
in 13.1.9.9.
13.6.4 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the operations
described above.
13.12 CEMENT WATER PROOFING COMPOUND
13.12.0 It shall be used for cement mortar for plastering or concrete work.
- 231 -
13.12.1 Water Proofing Compound
Integral cement water proofing compound conforming to IS 2645 and of approved brand
and manufacture, enlisted by the Engineer-in-Charge from time to time shall be used.
13.12.2 The contractor shall bring the materials to the site in their original packing. The
containers will be opened and the material mixed with dry cement in the proportion by
weight, recommended by the manufacturers or as specifically described in the description of
the item. Care shall be taken in mixing, to see that the water proofing material gets well and
integrally mixed with the cement and does not run out separately when water is added.
13.12.3 It shall be measured by weight.
13.12.4 The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the
operations described above.
13.13 POINTING ON BRICK WORK, TILE WORK AND STONE WORK
13.13.1 Scaffolding
For all exposed brick work, tile work or stone work independent double scaffolding having
two sets of vertical supports shall be provided. The supports shall be sound and strong tied
together with horizontal pieces over which scaffolding planks shall be fixed. For all other
work in building, single scaffolding shall be permitted. In such cases, the inner end of the
horizontal scaffolding pole shall rest in a hole provided only in the header course for the
purpose. Only one header for each pole shall be left out. Such holes for scaffolding shall,
however, not be allowed in pillars/columns less than one metre in width, or immediately
near the skew backs of arches. The holes
left in masonry works for scaffolding purposes shall be filled and made good before
plastering.
Note : In case of special type of work, scaffolding shall be got approved from Engineer-in-
Charge in advance.
13.13.2 Preparation of surface
The joints shall be raked out properly. Dust and loose mortar shall be brushed out.
Efflorescence if any shall be removed by brushing and scraping. The surface shall then be
thoroughly washed with water, cleaned and kept wet before pointing is commenced. In case
of concrete surface if a chemical retarder has been applied to the form work, the surface
shall be roughened by wire brushing and all the resulting dust and loose particles cleaned off
and care shall be taken that none of the retarders is left on the surface. The joints shall be
raked to such a depth that the minimum depth of the new mortar measured from either the
sunk surface of the finished pointing or from the edge of the brick shall not be less than 12
mm.
13.13.3 Mortar
Mortar of specified mix shall be used. It shall be as specified under Chapter 3.0.
13.13.4 Application and Finishing
13.13.4.1 The mortar shall be pressed into the raked out joints, with a pointing trowel, either
flush, sunk or raised, according to the type of pointing required. The mortar shall not spread
over the corner, edges or surface of the masonry. The pointing shall then be finished with
the proper tool, in the manner described below:
13.13.4.2 Flush Pointing : The mortar shall be pressed into the joints and shall be finished
off flush and level with the edges of the bricks, tiles or stones so as to give a smooth
appearance. The edges shall be neatly trimmed with a trowel and straight edge.
13.13.4.3 Ruled Pointing : The joints shall be initially formed as for flush pointing and then
while the mortar is still green, a groove of shape and size as shown in drawings or as
instructed, shall be formed by running a forming tool, straight along the centre line of the
joints. This operation shall be continued till a smooth and hard surface is obtained. The
vertical joints shall also be finished in a similar way. The vertical lines shall make true right
angles at their junctions with the horizontal lines and shall not project beyond the same.
13.13.4.4 Cut or Weather Struck Pointing : The mortar shall first be pressed into the joints.
The top of the horizontal joints shall then be neatly pressed back about 3 mm or as directed,
with the pointing tool so that the joints are sloping from top to bottom. The vertical joints
- 232 -
shall be ruled pointed. The junctions of vertical joints with the horizontal joints shall be at
true right angles.
13.13.4.5 Raised and Cut Pointing : Raised and cut pointing shall project from the wall
facing with its edges cut parallel so as to have a uniformly raised band about 6 mm raised
and width 10 mm more as directed.
13.13.4.6 The superfluous mortar shall then be cut off from the edges of the lines and the
surface of the masonry shall also be cleaned off all mortar. The finish shall be such that the
pointing is to the exact size and shape required and the edges are straight, neat and clean.
13.13.5 Curing
The pointing shall be kept wet for seven days. During this period it shall be suitably
protected from all damages. The pointing lines shall be truly horizontal and vertical except
where the joints are slanting as in rubble random masonry. Lines of joints from different
directions should meet neatly at the junctions instead of crossing beyond.
13.13.6 Measurements
13.13.6.1 Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm and its area shall be
calculated in square metres upto two places of decimal.
13.13.6.2 The various types of pointing for example, struck, keyed, flush, tuck, etc. shall
each be measured separately.
13.13.6.3 Pointing on different types of walls, floors, roofs etc. shall each be measured
separately. The type and material of the surface to be pointed shall be described.
13.13.6.4 Pointing in a single detached joint as for flashing shall be given in running metres.
13.13.6.5 For jambs, soffits, sills etc. for opening not exceeding 0.5 sqm each in area, ends
of joists, beams, posts, girders, steps etc. not exceeding 0.5 sqm each in area and opening
not exceeding 3 sqm each deductions and additions shall be made in the following way, in
case of pointing on external face only.
(a) No deduction shall be made for ends of joists, beams, posts etc. and openings not
exceeding 0.5 sqm each, and no addition shall be made for reveals, jambs, soffits, sills, etc.
of these openings.
(b) Deductions for openings exceeding 0.5 sqm but not exceeding 3 sqm each shall be made
as follows and no additions shall be made for reveals, jambs, soffits, sills, etc. for these
openings.
(c) When both the faces of the wall are pointed with the same pointing deduction shall be
made for one face only.
(d) When two faces of wall are pointed with different pointings or if one face is plastered
and other is pointed or plastered, deduction shall be made from the plaster or pointing on the
side of frames for doors, windows, etc. on which the width of the reveal is less than that on
the other side, but no deduction shall be made from the other side.
(e) Where width of reveals on both faces of wall are equal, deduction of 50% of area of
opening on each face shall be made from area of pointing or plaster as the case may be.
(f) For opening having door frame equal to or projecting beyond thickness of wall, full
deduction for opening shall be made from each pointed face of wall.
13.13.6.6 In case of openings of area above 3 sqm each, deduction shall be made for the
openings, but jambs, soffits and sills shall be measured.
13.13.6.7 The following shall be measured separately.
(a) Raking out joints for old work only shall be measured and given in square metres.
(b) Raking out joints of old work built in mud mortar, lime mortar and cement mortar shall
each be measured separately.
(c) Raking out joints of different types of old walls, floors etc. shall each be measured
separately.
(d) Raking single detached joints as for flashing old work shall be given in running metres.
13.13.7 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above.
13.19 OIL EMULSION (OIL BOUND) WASHABLE DISTEMPERING
- 233 -
13.19.1 Materials
Oil emulsion (Oil Bound) washable distemper (IS 428) of approved brand and manufacture
shall be used. The primer where used as on new work shall be cement primer or distemper
primer as described in the item. These shall be of the same manufacture as distemper. The
distemper shall be diluted with water or any other prescribed thinner in a manner
recommended by the manufacturer. Only sufficient quantity of distemper required for day’s
work shall be prepared. The distemper and primer shall be brought by the contractor in
sealed tins in sufficient quantities at a time to suffice for a fortnight’s work, and the same
shall be kept in the joint custody of the contractor and the Engineer-in-Charge. The empty
tins shall not be removed from the site of work, till this item of work has been completed
and passed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
13.19.2 Preparation of the Surface
13.19.2.1 For new work the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, old white or colour
wash by washing and scrubbing. The surface shall then be allowed to dry for at least 48
hours. It shall then be sand papered to give a smooth and even surface. Any unevenness
shall be made good by applying putty, made of plaster of paris mixed with water on the
entire surface including filling up the undulations and then sand papering the same after it is
dry.
13.19.2.2 In the case of old work, all loose pieces and scales shall be removed by sand
papering. The surface shall be cleaned of all grease, dirt etc. Pitting in plaster shall be made
good with plaster of paris mixed with the colour to be used. The surface shall then be rubbed
down again with a fine grade sand paper and made smooth. A coat of the distemper shall be
applied over the patches. The patched surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly
before the regular coat of distemper is applied.
13.19.3 Application
13.19.3.1 Priming Coat : The priming coat shall be with distemper primer or cement
primer, as required in the description of the item. The application of the distemper primer
shall be as described in 13.18.4.
Note : If the wall surface plaster has not dried completely, cement primer shall be applied
before distempering the walls. But if distempering is done after the wall surface is dried
completely, distemper primer shall be applied. Oil bound distemper is not recommended to
be applied, within six months of the completion of wall plaster. However, newly plastered
surfaces if required to be distempered before a period of six months shall be given a coat of
alkali resistant priming Paint conforming to IS 109 and allowed to dry for atleast 48 hours
before distempering is commenced. For old work no primer coat is necessary.
13.19.3.2 Distemper Coat : For new work, after the primer coat has dried for at least 48
hours, the surface shall be lightly sand papered to make it smooth for receiving the
distemper, taking care not to rub out the priming coat. All loose particles shall be dusted off
after rubbing. One coat of distemper properly diluted with thinner (water or other liquid as
stipulated by the manufacturer) shall be applied with brushes in horizontal strokes followed
immediately by vertical ones which together constitutes one coat. The subsequent coats
shall be applied in the same way. Two or more coats of distemper as are found necessary
shall be applied over the primer coat to obtain an even shade. A time interval of at least 24
hours shall be allowed between successive coats to permit proper drying of the preceding
coat. For old work the distemper shall be applied over the prepared surface in the same
manner as in new work. One or more coats of distemper as are found necessary shall be
applied to obtain an even and uniform shade. 15 cm double bristled distemper brushes shall
be used. After each days work, brushes shall be thoroughly washed in hot water with soap
solution and hung down to dry. Old brushes which are dirty and caked with distemper shall
not be used on the work.
13.19.4 The specifications in respect of scaffolding, protective measures and measurements
shall be as described under 13.14.
13.19.5 Rate

- 234 -
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the above
operations (including priming coat) described above.
13.20 CEMENT PRIMER COAT
13.20.0 Cement primer coat is used as a base coat on wall finish of cement, lime or lime
cement plaster or on non-asbestos cement surfaces before oil emulsion distemper Paints are
applied on them. The cement primer is composed of a medium and pigment which are
resistant to the alkalies present in the cement, lime or lime cement in wall finish and
provides a barrier for the protection of subsequent coats of oil emulsion distemper Paints.
Primer coat shall be preferably applied by brushing and not by spraying. Hurried priming
shall be avoided particularly on absorbent surfaces. New plaster patches in old work should
also be treated with cement primer before applying oil emulsion Paints etc.
13.20.1 Preparation of the Surface
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, old white or colour wash by washing and
scrubbing. The surface shall then be allowed to dry for at least 48 hours. It shall then be
sand papered to give a smooth and even surface. Any uneveness shall be made good by
applying putty, made of plaster of paris mixed with water on the entire surface including
filling up the undulations and then sand papering the same after it is dry.
13.20.2 Application
The cement primer shall be applied with a brush on the clean dry and smooth surface.
Horizontal strokes shall be given first and vertical strokes shall be applied immediately
afterwards. This entire operation will constitute one coat. The surface shall be finished as
uniformly as possible leaving no brush marks. It shall be allowed to dry for at least 48
hours, before oil emulsion Paint is applied.
13.20.3 The Specifications in respect of scaffolding, protective measures, measurements and
rate shall be as described under 13.1.4.
13.21 CEMENT PAINT
13.21.1 Material
The cement Paint shall be (conforming to IS 5410) of approved brand and manufacture. The
cement Paint shall be brought to the site of work by the contractor in its original containers
is sealed condition. The material shall be brought in at a time in adequate quantities to
suffice for the whole work or at least a fortnight’s work. The materials shall be kept in the
joint custody of the Contractor and the Engineer-in-Charge. The empty containers shall not
be removed from the site of work till the relevant item of the work has been completed and
permission obtained from the Engineer-in-Charge.
13.21.2 Preparation of Surface
For New Work, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mortar dropping, dirt dust,
algae, grease and other foreign matter by brushing and washing. Pitting in plaster shall be
made good and a coat of water proof cement Paint shall be applied over patches after
wetting them thoroughly.
13.21.3 Preparation of Mix
Cement Paint shall be mixed in such quantities as can be used up within an hour of its
mixing as otherwise the mixture will set and thicken, affecting flow and finish. Cement
Paint shall be mixed with water in two stages. The first stage shall comprise of 2 parts of
cement Paint and one part of water stirred thoroughly and allowed to stand for 5 minutes.
Care shall be taken to add the cement Paint gradually to the water and not vice versa. The
second stage shall comprise of adding further one part of water to the mix and stirring
thoroughly to obtain a liquid of workable and uniform consistency. In all cases the
manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed meticulously. The lids of cement Paint drums
shall be kept tightly closed when not in use, as by exposure to atmosphere the cement Paint
rapidly becomes air set due to its hygroscopic qualities. In case of cement Paint brought in
gunny bags, once the bag is opened, the contents should be consumed in full on the day of
its opening. If the same is not likely to be consumed in full, the balance quantity should be
transferred and preserved in an airtight container to avoid its exposure to atmosphere.
13.21.4 Application
- 235 -
13.21.4.1 The solution shall be applied on the clean and wetted surface with brushes or
spraying machine. The solution shall be kept well stirred during the period of application. It
shall be applied on the surface which is on the shady side of the building so that the direct
heat of the sun on the surface is avoided. The method of application of cement Paint shall be
as per manufacturer’s specification. The completed surface shall be watered after the day’s
work.
13.21.4.2 The second coat shall be applied after the first coat has been set for at least 24
hours. Before application of the second or subsequent coats, the surface of the previous coat
shall not be wetted.
13.21.4.3 For new work, the surface shall be treated with three or more coats of water proof
cement Paint as found necessary to get a uniform shade.
13.21.4.4 For old work, the treatment shall be with one or more coats as found necessary to
get a uniform shade.
13.21.5 Precaution
Water proof cement Paint shall not be applied on surfaces already treated with white wash,
colour wash, distemper dry or oil bound, varnishes, Paints etc. It shall not be applied on
gypsums, wood and metal surfaces. If water proofing cement is required to be applied on
existing surface, previously treated with white wash, colour wash etc., the surface shall be
thoroughly cleaned by scrapping off all the white wash, colour wash etc. completely.
Thereafter, a coat of cement primer shall be applied followed by two or more coat of water
proof cement.
13.21.6 The specifications in respect of scaffolding, protective measures, measurements and
rate shall be as described under 13.14. The coefficient for cement Paint on RCC Jalli shall
be the same as provided in Sl. No. 7 of Table 1 under para 13.23.6.4 for painting trellis for
Jaffri work.
13.22 EXTERIOR PAINTING ON WALL
13.22.1 Material
The paint shall be (Texured exterior paint/Acrylic smooth exterior paint/premium acrylic
smooth exterior paint) of approved brand and manufacture. This paint shall be brought to
the site of work by the contractor in its original containers in sealed condition. The material
shall be brought in at a time in adequate quantities to suffice for the whole work or at least a
fornight’s work. The materials shall be kept in the joint custody of the contractor and the
Engineer-in-Charge. The empty containers shall not be removed from the site of work till
the relevant item of work has been completed and permission obtained from the Engineer-
in-Charge.
13.22.2 Preparation of Surface
For new work, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned off all mortar dropping, dirt dust,
algae, fungus or moth, grease and other foreign matter of brushing and washing, pitting in
plaster shall make good, surface imperfections such as cracks, holes etc. should be repaired
using white cement. The prepared surface shall have received the approval of the Engineer
in charge after inspection before painting is commenced.
13.22.3 Application
Base coat of water proofing cement paint
13.22.3.1 All specifications in respect of base coat of water proofing cement paint shall be
as described under 13.21.
13.22.3.2 Before pouring into smaller containers for use, the paint shall be stirred
thoroughly in its container, when applying also the paint shall be continuously stirred in the
smaller containers so that its consistency is kept uniform. Dilution ratio of paint with
potable water can be altered taking into consideration the nature of surface climate and as
per recommended dilution given by manufacturer. In all cases, the manufacturer’s
instructions & directions of the Engineer-in-charge shall be followed meticulously. The lids
of paint drums shall be kept tightly closed when not in use as by exposure to atmosphere the
paint may thicken and also be kept safe from dust. 13.22.3.3 Paint shall be applied with a
brush on the cleaned and smooth surface. Horizontal strokes shall be given, First and
- 236 -
vertical strokes shall be applied immediately afterwards. This entire operation will constitute
one coat. The surface shall be finished as uniformly as possible leaving no brush marks.
13.22.4 The specifications in respect of scaffolding, protective measures, measurements and
rate shall be as described under 13.14.
13.23 PAINTING
13.23.1 Materials
Paints, oils, varnishes etc. of approved brand and manufacture shall be used. Only ready
mixed Paint (Exterior grade) as received from the manufacturer without any admixture shall
be used. If for any reason, thinning is necessary in case of ready mixed Paint, the brand of
thinner recommended by the manufacturer or as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge shall
be used. Approved Paints, oil or varnishes shall be brought to the site of work by the
contractor in their original containers in sealed condition. The material shall be brought in at
a time in adequate quantities to suffice for the whole work or at least a fortnight’s work. The
materials shall be kept in the joint custody of the contractor and the Engineer-in-Charge.
The empties shall not be removed from the site of work, till the relevant item of work has
been completed and permission obtained from the Engineer-in-Charge.
13.23.2 Commencing Work
Painting shall not be started until the Engineer-in-Charge has inspected the items of work to
be painted, satisfied himself about their proper quality and given his approval to commence
the painting work. Painting of external surface should not be done in adverse weather
condition like hail storm and dust storm. Painting, except the priming coat, shall generally
be taken in hand after practically finishing all other building work. The rooms should be
thoroughly swept out and the entire building cleaned up, at least one day in advance of the
Paint work being started.
13.23.3 Preparation of Surface
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and dusted off. All rust, dirt, scales, smoke
splashes, mortar droppings and grease shall be thoroughly removed before painting is
started. The prepared surface shall have received the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge
after inspection, before painting is commenced.
13.23.4 Application
13.23.4.1 Before pouring into smaller containers for use, the Paint shall be stirred
thoroughly in its containers, when applying also, the Paint shall be continuously stirred in
the smaller containers so that its consistency is kept uniform.
13.23.4.2 The painting shall be laid on evenly and smoothly by means of crossing and
laying off, the latter in the direction of the grains of wood. The crossing and laying off
consists of covering the area over with Paint, brushing the surface hard for the first time
over and then brushing alternately in opposite direction, two or three times and then finally
brushing lightly in a direction at right angles to the same. In this process, no brush marks
shall be left after the laying off is finished. The full process of crossing and laying off will
constitute one coat.
13.23.4.3 Where so stipulated, the painting shall be done by spraying. Spray machine used
may be (a) high pressure (small air aperture) type, or (b) a low pressure (large air gap) type,
depending on the nature and location of work to be carried out. Skilled and experienced
workmen shall be employed for this class of work. Paints used shall be brought to the
requisite consistency by adding a suitable thinner.
13.23.4.4 Spraying should be done only when dry condition prevails. Each coat shall be
allowed to dry out thoroughly and rubbed smooth before the next coat is applied. This
should be facilitated by thorough ventilation. Each coat except the last coat, shall be lightly
rubbed down with sand paper or fine pumice stone and cleaned off dust before the next coat
is laid.
13.23.4.5 No left over Paint shall be put back into the stock tins. When not in use, the
containers shall be kept properly closed.
13.23.4.6 No hair marks from the brush or clogging of Paint puddles in the corners of
panels, angles of mouldings etc. shall be left on the work.
- 237 -
13.23.4.7 In painting doors and windows, the putty round the glass panes must also be
painted but care must be taken to see that no Paint stains etc. are left on the glass. Tops of
shutters and surfaces in similar hidden locations shall not be left out in painting. However,
bottom edge of the shutters where the painting is not practically possible, need not be done
nor any deduction on this account will be done but two coats of primer of approved make
shall be done on the bottom edge before fixing the shutters.
13.23.4.8 On painting steel work, special care shall be taken while painting over bolts, nuts,
rivets overlaps etc.
13.23.4.9 The additional specifications for primer and other coats of Paints shall be as
according to the detailed specifications under the respective headings.
13.23.5 Brushes and Containers
After work, the brushes shall be completely cleaned of Paint and linseed oil by rinsing with
turpentine. A brush in which Paint has dried up is ruined and shall on no account be used for
painting work. The containers when not in use, shall be kept closed and free from air so that
Paint does not thicken and also shall be kept safe from dust. When the Paint has been used,
the containers shall be washed with turpentine and wiped dry with soft clean cloth, so that
they are clean, and can be used again.
13.23.6 Measurements
13.23.6.1 The length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. The area shall be
calculated in sqm (correct to two places of decimal), except otherwise stated.
13.23.6.2 Small articles not exceeding 10 sq. decimetre (0.1 sqm) of painted surfaces where
not in conjunction with similar painted work shall be enumerated.
13.23.6.3 Painting upto 10 cm in width or in girth and not in conjunction with similar
painted work shall be given in running metres and shall include cutting to line where so
required.
Note : Components of trusses, compound girders, stanchions, lattices and similar work
shall, however, be given in sq. metres irrespective of the size or girth of members. Priming
coat of painting shall be included in the work of fabrication.
13.23.6.4 In measuring painting, varnishing, oiling etc. of joinery and steel work etc. The
coefficients as indicated in following tables shall be used to obtain the area payable. The
coefficients shall be applied to the areas measured flat and not girthed.

- 238 -
Explanatory Notes for Table 13.1
(1) Measurements for doors windows etc., shall be taken flat (and not girthed) over all
including chowkhuts or frames, where provided. Where Chowkhuts or frames are not
provided, the shutter measurements shall be taken.
(2) Where doors, windows etc., are of composite types other than those included in Table 1
the different portion shall be measured separately with their appropriate coefficients, the
centre line of the common rail being taken as the dividing line between the two portions.
(3) The coefficients for door and windows shall apply irrespective of the size of frames and
shutter members.
(4) In case steel frames are used the area of doors, windows shutters shall be measured flat
excluding frames.
(5) When the two faces of a door, window etc. are to be treated with different specified
finishes, measurable under separate items, the edges of frames and shutters shall be treated
with the one or the other type of finish as ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge and
measurement of this will be deemed to be included in the measurement of the face treated
with that finish.
(6) In the case where shutters are fixed on both faces of the frames, the measurement for the
door frame and shutter on one face shall be taken in the manner already described, while the

- 239 -
additional shutter on the other face will be measured for the shutter only excluding the
frame.
(7) Where shutters are provided with clearance at top or/and bottom each exceeding 15 cm
height, such openings shall be deducted from the overall measurements and relevant
coefficient shall be applied to obtain the area payable.
(8) Collapsible gates shall be measured for width from outside to outside of gate in its
expanded position and for height from bottom to top of channel verticals. No separate
measurements shall be taken for the top and bottom guide rails rollers, fittings etc.
(9) Coefficients for sliding doors shall be the same as for normal types of doors in the table.
Measurements shall be taken outside to outside of shutters, and no separate measurements
shall be taken for the painting guide rails, rollers, fittings etc.
(10) Measurements of painting as above shall be deemed to include painting all iron fittings
in the same or different shade for which no extra will be paid.
(11) The measurements of guard bars, expanded metal, hard drawn steel wire fabric of
approved quality, grill work and gratings, when fixed in frame work, painting of which is
once measured else where shall be taken exclusive of the frames. In other cases the
measurements shall be taken inclusive of the frames.
(12) For painting open palisade fencing and gates etc., the height shall be measured from the
bottom of the lowest rail, if the palisades do not go below it, (or from the lower end of the
palisades, if they project below the lowest rail), upto the top of rails or palisades whichever
are higher, but not up to the top of standards when the latter are higher than the top rails or
the palisades.
13.23.6.5 Width of moulded work of all other kinds, as in hand rails, cornices, architraves
shall be measured by girth.
13.23.6.6 For trusses, compound girders, stanchions, lattice girders, and similar work, actual
areas will be measured in sq. metre and no extra shall be paid for painting on bolt heads,
nuts, washers etc. even when they are picked out in a different tint to the adjacent work.
13.23.6.7 Painting of rain water, soil, waste, vent and water pipes etc. shall be measured in
running metres of the particular diameter of the pipe concerned. Painting of specials such as
bends, heads, branches, junctions, shoes, etc. shall be included in the length and no separate
measurements shall be taken for these or for painting brackets, clamps etc.
13.23.6.8 Measurements of wall surfaces and wood and other work not referred to already
shall be recorded as per actual.
13.23.6.9 Flag staffs, steel chimneys, aerial masts, spires and other such objects requiring
special scaffolding shall be measured separately.
13.23.7 Precautions
All furnitures, fixtures, glazing, floors etc. shall be protected by covering and stains, smears,
splashings, if any shall be removed and any damages done shall be made good by the
contractor at his cost.
13.23.8 Rate
Rates shall include cost of all labour and materials involved in all the operations described
above and in the particular specifications given under the several items.
13.24 PAINTING PRIMING COAT ON WOOD, IRON OR PLASTERED
SURFACES
13.24.1 Primer
13.24.1.1 The primer for wood work, iron work or plastered surface shall be as specified in
the description of item.
13.24.1.2 Primer for plaster/wood work/Iron & Steel/Aluminium surfaces shall be as
specified below:

- 240 -
13.24.1.3 The primer shall be ready mixed primer of approved brand and manufacture.
13.24.1.4 Where primer for wood work is specified to be mixed at site, it shall be prepared
from a mixture of red lead, white lead and double boiled linseed oil in the ratio of 0.7 kg :
0.7 kg : 1 litre.
13.24.1.5 Where primer for steel work is specified to be mixed at site, it shall be prepared
from a mixture of red lead, raw linseed oil and turpentine in the ratio of 2.8 kg : 1 litre : 1
litre.
13.24.1.6 The specifications for the base vehicle and thinner for mixed on site primer shall
be as follows:
(a) White Lead : The White lead shall be pure and free from adulterants like barium sulphate
and whiting. It shall conform to IS 103.
(b) Red Lead : This shall be in powder form and shall be pure and free from adulterants like
brick dust etc. It shall conform to IS 102.
(c) Raw Linseed Oil : Raw linseed oil shall be lightly viscous but clear and of yellowish
colour with light brown tinge. Its specific gravity at a temperature of 30 degree C shall be
between 0.923 and 0.928.
Note : The oil shall be mellow and sweet to the taste with very little smell. The oil shall be
of sufficiently matured quality. Oil turbid or thick, with acid and bitter taste and rancid
odour and which remains sticky for a considerable time shall be rejected. The oil shall
conform in all respects to IS 75. The oil shall be of approved brand and manufacture.
(d) Double Boiled Linseed Oil : This shall be more viscous than the raw oil, have a deeper
colour and specific gravity between 0.931 and 0.945 at a temperature of 30 degree C. It shall
dry with a glossy surface. It shall conform in all respects to IS 77. The oil shall be of
approved brand and manufacture.
Turpentine : Mineral turpentine i.e. petroleum distillate which has the same rate of
evaporation as vegetable turpentine (distillate product of oleeresin of conifers) shall be used.
It shall have no grease or other residue when allowed to evaporate. It shall conform to IS
533.
13.24.1.7 All the above materials shall be of approved manufacture and brought to site in
their original packing in sealed condition.
13.24.2 Preparation of Surface
13.24.2.1 Wooden Surface : The wood work to be painted shall be dry and free from
moisture. The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned. All unevenness shall be rubbed down
smooth with sand paper and shall be well dusted. Knots, if any shall be covered with
preparation of red lead made by grinding red lead in water and mixing with strong glue
sized and used hot. Appropriate filler material conforming to IS 345 with same shade as
Paint shall be used where specified. The surface treated for knotting shall be dry before
Paint is applied. After obtaining approval of Engineer-in-Charge for wood work, the
priming coat shall be applied before the wood work is fixed in position. After the priming
coat is applied, the holes and indentation on the surface shall be stopped with glazier’s putty

- 241 -
or wood putty. Stopping shall not be done before the priming coat is applied as the wood
will absorb the oil in stopping and the latter is therefore liable to crack.
13.24.2.2 Iron & Steel Surface : All rust and scales shall be removed by scrapping or by
brushing with steel wire brushes. Hard skin of oxide formed on the surface of wrought iron
during rolling which becomes loose by rusting, shall be removed. All dust and dirt shall be
thoroughly wiped away from the surface. If the surface is wet, it shall be dried before
priming coat is undertaken.
13.24.2.3 Plastered Surface : The surface shall ordinarily not be painted until it has dried
completely. Trial patches of primer shall be laid at intervals and where drying is
satisfactory, painting shall then be taken in hand. Before primer is applied, holes and
undulations, shall be filled up with plaster of paris and rubbed smooth.
13.24.3 Application
The primer shall be applied with brushes, worked well into the surface and spread even and
smooth. The painting shall be done by crossing and laying off as described in 13.22.3.3.
13.24.4 Treatment on Steel for Aggressive Environment
13.24.4.1 A second coat of ready mixed red oxide zinc chromate primer may be applied
where considered necessary in aggressive environment such as near Industrial Establishment
and Coastal regions where the steel members are prone to corrosion. The second coat
(which shall be paid for separately) is to be applied after placing the member in position and
just before applying Paint. The second coat of primer is not necessary in case of painting
with synthetic enamel Paint as it is applied over an under coat of ordinary Paint.
13.24.4.2 The specifications described under 13.33 shall hold good so far as they are
applicable.
13.32 PAINTING WITH SYNTHETIC ENAMEL PAINT
13.32.1 Synthetic Enamel Paint (conforming to IS 2933) of approved brand and
manufacture and of the required colour shall be used for the top coat and an undercoat of
ordinary Paint of shade to match the top coat as recommended by the same manufacturer as
far the top coat shall be used.
13.32.2 Painting on New Surface
13.32.2.1 Preparation of surface shall be as specified in 13.24.2 as the case may be.
13.32.2.2 Application : The number of coats including the undercoat shall be as stipulated
in the item.
(a) Under Coat : One coat of the specified ordinary Paint of shade suited to the shade of the
top coat, shall be applied and allowed to dry overnight. It shall be rubbed next day with the
finest grade of wet abrasive paper to ensure a smooth and even surface, free from brush
marks and all loose particles dusted off.
(b) Top Coat : Top coats of synthetic enamel Paint of desired shade shall be applied after
the undercoat is thoroughly dry. Additional finishing coats shall be applied if found
necessary to ensure properly uniform glossy surface.
13.32.2.3 Other details shall be as specified in 13.22 as far as they are applicable.
13.32.3 Painting on Old Surface
13.32.3.1 Preparation of Surface : Where the existing Paint is firm and sound it shall be
cleaned of grease, smoke etc. and rubbed with sand paper to remove all loose particles
dusted off. All patches and cracks shall then be treated with stopping and filler prepared
with the specified Paint. The surface shall again be rubbed and made smooth and uniform. If
the old paint is blistered and flaked it will be necessary to completely remove the same as
described in para 13.41. Such removal shall be paid for separately and the painting shall be
treated as on new surface.
13.32.3.2 Painting : The number of coats as stipulated in the item shall be applied with
synthetic enamel Paint. Each coat shall be allowed to dry and rubbed down smooth with
very fine wet abrasive paper, to get an even glossy surface. If however, the surface is not
satisfactory additional coats as required shall be applied to get correct finish.
13.32.3.3 Other details shall be specified in 13.22 as far as they are applicable.
13.35 PAINTING WITH ANTI-CORROSIVE BITUMASTIC PAINT
- 242 -
13.35.1 Ready mixed Paint (conforming to IS 158) shall be of approved brand and
manufacture. It shall be black, lead free, acid-alkali-heat-water resistant.
13.35.2 Preparation of surface and application shall be as specified in 13.32 for painting on
new or old surfaces as the case may be. The drying time between consecutive coats,
however, shall be not less than 3 hours.
13.35.3 Other details shall be as specified in 13.23 as far as applicable.
Note:- For further detail refer CPWD specification Volume 2, Sub Head 13.0

- 243 -
 SUB HEAD : 14.0
REPAIRS TO BUILDINGS
14.1 REPAIRS TO PLASTER
14.1.0 The work includes cutting the patch and preparing the wall surface. Patches of 2.50
square metres and less in area shall be measured under item of ‘Repairs to Plaster’ under
this sub-head. Plastering in patches over 2.5 square metres in area shall be paid for at the
rate as applicable to new work under sub head ‘Finishing’.
14.1.1 Scaffolding
Scaffolding as required for the proper execution of the work shall be erected. If work can be
done safely with the ladder or jhoola these will be permitted in place of scaffolding.
14.1.2 Cutting
The mortar of the patch, where the existing plaster has cracked, crumbled or sounds hollow
when gently tapped on the surface, shall be removed. The patch shall be cut out to a square
or rectangular shape at position marked on the wall as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge or
his authorized representative. The edges shall be slightly under cut to provide a neat joint.
14.1.3 Preparation of Surface
The masonry joints which become exposed after removal of old plaster shall be raked out to
a minimum depth of 10 mm in the case of brick work and 20 mm in the case of stone work.
The raking shall be carried out uniformly with a raking tool and not with a basuli, and loose
mortar dusted off. The surface shall then be thoroughly washed with water, and kept wet till
plastering is commenced.
In case of concrete surfaces, the same shall be thoroughly scrubbed with wire brushes after
the plaster had been cut out and pock marked as described in 13.1.2. The surface shall be
washed and cleaned and kept wet till plastering is commenced.
14.1.4 Application of Plaster
Mortar of specified mix with the specified sand shall be used. The method of application
shall be as described for single coat plaster work of the specified mix and under Chapter 13.
The surface shall be finished even and flush and matching with the old surrounding plaster.
All roundings necessary at junctions of walls, ceilings etc. shall be carried out in a tidy
manner as specified in sub-head 13.0. All dismantled mortar & rubbish etc. shall be
disposed off within 24 hours from its dismantling promptly as directed by the Engineer-in-
Charge.
14.1.5 Protective Measure
Doors, windows, floors, articles of furniture etc. and such other parts of the building shall be
protected from being splashed upon. Splashing and droppings, if any, shall be removed by
the contractor at his own cost and the surface cleaned. Damages, if any, to furniture or
fittings and fixtures shall be recoverable from the contractor.
14.1.6 Curing
Curing shall be done as per plaster work with special reference to the particular type of
plaster mix as described under sub-head ’finishing’.
14.1.7 Finishing
After the plaster is thoroughly cured and dried the surface shall be white washed or colour
washed to suit the existing finishing as required unless specified
14.1.8 Measurements
Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. The area shall be calculated in square
metre correct to two places of decimal. Patches below 0.05 square metre in area shall not be
measured for payment. Pre-measurements of the patches to be plastered shall be recorded
after the old plaster has been cut and wall surface prepared.
14.1.9 Rate
The rate includes the cost of all the materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including lead as described in the item for disposal of old dismantled
plaster /material.
Note:- For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 2, Sub Head 14.0.

- 244 -
 SUB HEAD : 15.0
DISMANTLING AND DEMOLISHING

15.0 TERMINOLOGY
(i) Dismantling: The term ‘Dismantling’ implies carefully separating the parts without
damage and removing. This may consist of dismantling one or more parts of the building as
specified or shown on the drawings.
(ii) Demolition : The term ‘Demolition’ implies breaking up. This shall consist of
demolishing whole or part of work including all relevant items as specified or shown on the
drawings.
15.1 GENERAL
This chapter relates to buildings only.
15.1.1 Precautions
15.1.1.1 All materials obtained from dismantling or demolition shall be the property of the
Government unless otherwise specified and shall be kept in safe custody until they are
handed over to the Engineer in-Charge/ authorized representative.
15.1.1.2 The demolition shall always be well planned before hand and shall generally be
done in reverse order of the one in which the structure was constructed. The operations shall
be got approved from the Engineer-in-Charge before starting the work Due care shall be
taken to maintain the safety measures prescribed in IS 4130.
15.1.1.3 Necessary propping, shoring and or under pinning shall be provided to ensure the
safety of the adjoining work or property before dismantling and demolishing is taken up and
the work shall be carried out in such a way that no damage is caused to the adjoining work
or property. Wherever specified, temporary enclosures or partitions and necessary
scaffolding with suitable double scaffolding and proper
cloth covering shall also be provided, as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
15.1.1.4 Necessary precautions shall be taken to keep noise and dust nuisance to the
minimum. All work needs to be done under the direction of Engineer-in-Charge. Helmets,
goggle, safety belts etc. should be used whenever required and as directed by the Engineer-
in-Charge. The demolition work shall be proceeded with in such a way that it causes the
least damage and nuisance to the adjoining building and the public.
15.1.1.5 Dismantling shall be done in a systematic manner. All materials which are likely to
be damaged by dropping from a height or by demolishing roofs, masonry etc. shall be
carefully removed first. Chisels and cutters may be used carefully as directed. The
dismantled articles shall be removed manually or otherwise, lowered to the ground (and not
thrown) and then properly stacked as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
15.1.1.6 Where existing fixing is done by nails, screws, bolts, rivets, etc., dismantling shall
be done by taking out the fixing with proper tools and not by tearing or ripping off.
15.1.1.7 Any serviceable material, obtained during dismantling or demolition, shall be
separated out and stacked properly as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge within a lead of 50
metres. All unserviceable materials, rubbish etc. shall be disposed off as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge .
15.1.1.8 The contractor shall maintain/disconnect existing Service, whether temporary or
permanent, where required by the Engineer-in-Charge.
15.1.1.9 No demolition work should be carried out at night especially when the building or
structure to be demolished is in an inhabited area.
15.1.1.10 Screens shall be placed where necessary to prevent injuries due to falling pieces.
15.1.1.11 Water may be used to reduce dust while tearing down plaster from brick work.
15.1.1.12 Safety belts shall be used by laborers while working at higher level to prevent
falling from the structure.
15.1.1.13 First-aid equipment shall be got available at all demolition works of any
magnitude.
15.3.11 Reinforced Concrete and Brick Work

- 245 -
Reinforced concrete structures and reinforced brick roofs and walls shall be measured in
cubic metres and if reinforcement is required to be salvaged, it shall be so stated Where
reinforcement is required to be separated, scraped and cleaned, the work shall be measured
separately in quintal of salvaged steel.
15.3.13 Wood Work
All wood work including karris average 40 sq cm or over in section, shall be measured in
cubic metres, while that under 40 sq cm in section, in running metres. Ballies shall be
measured in running metres Boarding including wooden chajjas and sun shades along with
supports shall be measured in square metres in its plane.
15.3.15 Doors and Windows
Dismantling of doors, windows, clerestory windows, ventilators etc. (wood or metal)
whether done separately or along with removal of wall by making recess in the wall shall
be enumerated. Those exceeding 3 sqm each in area shall be measured separately. The item
shall include removal of chowkhats architraves, holdfasts and other attachments. If only
shutters are to be taken out it shall be measured separately.
Note:- For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 2, Sub Head 15.0

- 246 -
 SUB HEAD : 16.0
ROAD WORK
16.1.1 Aggregate Coarse
Coarse aggregate as specified in the item shall be either crushed/broken stone, crushed slag,
over burnt brick aggregate or one of the naturally occurring aggregates such as kanker or
laterite of suitable quality as stated hereinafter and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The
stone aggregate shall conform to the physical requirements set forth in Table 15.1. The type
and size range of the aggregate shall be specified in the contract.

16.2 SUB-GRADE : PREPARATION AND CONSOLIDATION

16.2.0 In sub-grade composed of clay, fine sand or other soils that may be forced up into the
coarse aggregate during rolling operation, an insulation layer of suitable thickness of
granular materials or oversize brick aggregate not less than 10 cm thick shall be provided
for blanketing the sub-grade, which shall be paid for separately, unless otherwise specified.
In slushy soils or in areas that are water logged, special arrangements shall be made to
improve the sub-grade and the total pavement thickness shall be designed after testing the
properties of the subgrade soil. Necessary provision for the special treatment required shall
be made in the project and paid for separately.
16.2.1 Preparation of Sub-Grade

- 247 -
The surface of the formation for a width of sub-base, which shall be 15 cm more on either
side of base course, shall first be cut to a depth equal to the combined depth of sub-base and
surface courses below the proposed finished level (due allowance being made for
consolidation). It shall then be cleaned of all foreign substances. Any ruts or soft yielding
patches that appear due to improper drainage conditions, traffic hauling or from any other
cause, shall be corrected and the sub-grade dressed off parallel to the finished profile.
16.2.2 Consolidation
The sub-grade shall be consolidated with a power road roller of 8 to 12 tonnes. The roller
shall run over the sub grade till the soil is evenly and densely consolidated and behaves as
an elastic mass (the roller shall pass a minimum of 5 runs on the sub grade). All undulations
in the surface that develop due to rolling shall be made good with material or quarry spoils
as the cases may be and the sub-grade is rerolled.
16.2.3 Surface Regularity
The finished surface shall be uniform and conform to the lines, grades and typical cross
section shown in the drawings, when tested with the template and straight edge, the
variation shall be within the tolerances specified in
16.36 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT (UNDER ORDINARY CONDITIONS)
Specifications of item 16.37 to be followed except that cement concrete of grade 1:2:4 or
specified otherwise to be prepared and compacted.
16.37 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT UNDER CONTROLLED CONDITIONS
16.37.1 Materials
16.37.1.1 Cement
(a) Cement used on work shall be as per sub head cement concrete of CPWD specifications-
2009 (Vol. – I).
16.37.1.2 Water : Water used on work shall conform to SH: cement concrete of CPWD,
Specification 2009- Vol. I.
16.37.1.3 Coarse Aggregate : These shall be crushed or broken from hard stones obtained
from approved quarry. These shall be clean strong, durable of fairly cubical shape and free
from soft, friable, thin elongated and laminated disintegrated pieces. These shall also be free
from dirt, organic deleterious and any other foreign matter and adherent coatings and shall
satisfy the physical requirements laid down in para 16.37.19 under quality control.
16.37.1.4 Fine Aggregate : This shall be coarse sand conforming to CPWD Specification
2009 Vol. I.
16.37.1.5 Grading of Mixed Aggregates : The grading of all aggregates (coarse and fine
aggregates) to be used in the work shall be determined in the laboratory. The coarse and
fine aggregates shall be mixed in suitable proportions so that the grading of the mixed
aggregates shall be in the range indicated in Table 16.32.

16.37.2 Mix Design

16.37.2.1 The mix shall be approved by Engineer-in-Charge so as to obtain the following
mean strength that exceeds the minimum specified flexural strength by 1.64 times the
designed standard deviation.
Minimum works beam flexural strength at 28 days = 300 kg/sqm. for M-30 or
specified in item

- 248 -
Designed standard deviation = 60 kg/sqm. for M-30 or for
specified grade(s)
Design flexural strength at 28 days = 300+60x1.64 = 398.4 kg/sqm.(f
+1.64 s)says 400 kg.
Water cement ratio by weight = 0.5
Minimum slump not more than 25 mm
16.37.2.2 For the purpose of tendering the contractor shall base his rate on the assumption
that the quantity of cement used for one cum. of finished concrete shall be 340 kg. or M -
30. If the actual quantity of cement required to be used as a result of the laboratory test is
different from that assumed above, necessary adjustment in the cost due to short cement
used shall be made on the basis of issue rate of cement including storage charges plus 2.5%
for handling charges. However, under no circumstances the quantity of cement to be used
shall either exceed 350 kg./cum or fall below 330 kg. per cum of finished concrete.
16.37.3 Statistical Field Check
16.37.3.1 Samples of concrete shall be taken at the mixer and works beams, made, cured
and tested in accordance with IS 1199 and IS 516.
16.37.3.2 When a mix is used for the first time, it is important to get a large number of
results, as soon as possible, in order to establish the level of control and then suitability of
the mix proportions. A sample of concrete shall be taken at random on eight separate
occasions during each of the first five days of using that mix. From each sample two beams
shall be made one for test at 7 days and the other for test at 28 days.
16.37.3.3 The work beam results shall be examined both individually and in consecutive
(but not overlapping) sets of four, for which the average and the range of each set is
calculated. The mix proportions shall be modified to increase the strength, if in the first ten
consecutive (but not overlapping) sets any of the following conditions are not satisfied.
(I) Each sample has a test strength not less than the minimum specified strength i.e. 30
kg/sq. cm. (or otherwise specified in item).
OR
(II) (a) Not more than two individual results (Not more than one of first twenty) of the 40
beams tests shall fall below the minimum work beam strength but they shall not be less than
80% of the specified beam strength of 30 kg./sq. cm (or otherwise specified in item) or the
minimum specified strength minus 1.35 times the standard deviation whichever is greater.
(b) No value of the range in any set shall exceed 3 times the designed standard deviation.
(c) The average for all samples (10 sets) shall not be less than the minimum specified
strength i.e. 30 kg/sq. cm (or otherwise specified in item) plus 1.64 times the designed
standard deviation 60 kg./sq.cm M-30.
16.37.3.4 If either of these conditions (16.37.3.3 I or 16.37.3.3 II) are not satisfied, the mix
shall be modified and the procedure described above shall be repeated till results satisfying
the above criterias are obtained.
16.37.3.5 Subsequently samples shall be taken at the rate of one for every 30 cubic metre of
concrete laid. Eight beam specimen shall constitute one sample. A set of 4 specimen shall be
tested after 7 days and another set of 4 specimen shall be tested after 28 days. These test
results shall be checked individually and in sets of four as the work progresses. If at any
stage it is found that either of conditions 16.43.4.3,I or 16.4.3,II are not satisfied, the overall
average and the standard deviation of the previous consecutive 40 beam test results
including the non-complying set shall be calculated. If the overall average strength minus
1.64 times the standard deviation is more than the specified beam strength (30 kgm/sq.cm)
(or otherwise specified in item) the concrete shall be accepted. But if it is less than the
concrete work corresponding to these 40 beams tests shall be rejected and the mix
proportion shall be modified forth with for further work. The rejected work shall be replaced
by the contractor immediately at his own cost and expense.
16.37.3.6 The statistical field checks described in 16.37.3.1 to 16.37.3.2 are meant to control
the quality of concrete. The standard of acceptance of concrete shall be governed by the
provision of para 16.37.3.3 to 16.37.3.5.
- 249 -
16.37.4 Slump Test
The test shall be carried out as per IS 1199. A slump test shall be carried out at each mixer
at least one in fifty batches mixed or more frequently if directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Any batch from which slump test is being made shall not be transferred to the place of
laying till the slump test has been completed. Not only the batch which gives a slumps in
excess of that specified shall be rejected but the concrete already laid immediately preceding
the batch tested upto the nearest last transverse joint may be rejected by the Engineer-in-
Charge or his subordinate, if he is satisfied that such preceding batches were substandard in
this respect. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge in this respect shall be final and
binding on the contractor. Such rejected concrete shall be removed by the contractor
immediately and replaced with proper slump concrete at his cost and expense.
16.37.5 Steel Forms
16.37.5.1 All side forms shall be of mild steel. The steel forms shall be of M.S. Channel
sections and their depth shall be equal to the thickness of the pavement.
16.37.5.2 The side forms shall have a length of at least 3.0 metres except on curves of less
than 4.5 metres radius where shorter lengths may be used. When set to grade and stacked in
place the maximum deviation of the top surface of any section from a straight line shall not
exceed 3 mm. The method of connection between sections shall be such that the joint
formed shall be free from play or movement in any direction. The use of bent, twisted or
worn out forms shall not be permitted. At least three stake pockets for bracing pins or stakes
shall be provided for each 3.0 M length of forms. Bracing and supports must be ample to
prevent the springing of forms under pressure of concrete or weight or thrust of the
machinery (like screed vibrator) operating on the forms. Support to the forms shall be
sufficiently rigid to hold them in position during the entire operation of laying and
compacting and finishing and that they shall not at any time deviate more than 3 mm from
straight edge 3 metres in length. Forms which show a variation from the required rigidity of
the alignment and levels shown on the plans shall be reset or removed as directed. The
length and number or pins or stakes shall be such as to maintain the forms at the correct line
and grade.
16.37.5.3 The supply of forms shall be sufficient to permit their remaining in place for at
least 12 hrs. after the concrete has been placed or longer, if in the opinion of the Engineer-
in-Charge, it is necessary.
16.37.5.4 The top line of the forms is not to vary from the correct level or alignment and the
levels and alignment of the forms are to be checked and corrected as necessary immediately
prior to the placing of concrete. The top edges and faces of the forms are to be carefully
cleaned and maintained in clean condition.
16.37.5.5 While removing the steel forms, care shall be taken to withdraw them gradually,
any damage to the bull nosed edges shall be made good while the concrete is still green.
16.37.5.6 Setting of Forms
(a) Setting of forms shall be according to the slab plan subject to the approval of Engineer-
in-Charge and concreting shall not commence until the setting of forms is approved.
(b) Forms shall be set for at least 50 metres in advance of the point where the concrete is
being laid and shall not be removed until at least 12 hrs. of placing of the concrete or longer
if in the opinion of Engineer-in-Charge is necessary.
(c) After setting, the working faces shall be thoroughly oiled by using approved oil before
concrete is placed against them.
(d) The pavement joints of overlay layer would overlap with the joints of underlay cement
concrete.
16.37.6 Batching and Mixing
As detailed in SH: 5 of reinforced cement concrete work of CPWD specifications 2009.
16.37.7 Placing of Concrete
As detailed in SH: 5 of reinforced cement concrete work of CPWD specifications 2009.
16.37.8 Compaction of Concrete

- 250 -
16.37.8.1 Compaction shall be carried out by electrically (or) diesel operated needle and
screed vibrators as stipulated hereafter. Needle vibrator should be used all over the area for
obtaining initial compaction of concrete. These should be of diameter not less than 4.5 cm.
If the vibrator are pneumatic the pressure must not be below 4 kg/sq.cm. If electrically
operated, they should have a minimum frequency of 3500 impulses per minute.
16.37.8.2 There should be at least three needle vibrators working in any bay. A vibrating
screed consisting of a steel or timber section weighing not less than 15 kg. per metre with a
tamping edge of not less than 7 cm width and having a vibrator mounted thereon shall
follow needle vibrators to obtain full compaction. The face of the wooden tamping edge of
the screed shall be lined with M.S. Plate rigidly fixed by means of counter sunk screw.
Where screed vibrators are used for compaction, a standby unit shall always be maintained
ready for use, should the other one go out of order. Where electrically driven vibrators are
employed, a standby diesel pneumatic unit shall be kept ready for use in case of power
failure. At the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge, for compaction at edges and joints,
vibrators may be supplemented by hand tamping and rodding for securing satisfactory
results. Under no circumstances, honey combing of concrete at joints or elsewhere shall be
permitted.
16.37.8.3 When using screed vibrator for compaction it should not be dragged over the
concrete. During the initial passes it shall be lifted to the adjacent forward position in short
steps, subsequently, it shall be slowly slided over the surface with its axis slightly tilted
away from the direction of sliding and the operation repeated until a close, dense surface is
obtained.
16.37.8.4 Concreting shall be carried out in one operation between the expansion joints and
construction joints without any break at the dummy joints.
16.37.8.5 Concrete shall be deposited on the base as near the joints as possible without
touching them. It shall then be shoveled against the sides, maintaining equal pressure and
deposited approx. 50 mm higher than the depth of the joints, care being taken that it is
worked well around the joints. The concrete shall not be dumped from the bucket directly
upon or against the joints.
16.37.8.6 Workmen shall not be allowed to walk on freshly laid concrete and proper cat
walk shall be provided with independent supports beyond concreting bays.
16.37.9 Finishing of Concrete
16.37.9.1 During compaction, any low or high spots shall be made up by adding or
removing concrete. After longitudinal floating has been completed but while concrete is still
plastic, the slab surface shall be tested for trueness with a 3 m straight edge. Any
depressions or high spots showing departure from the true surface shall be immediately
rectified. High spots shall be cut down and refinished. Depressions shall be enlarged to
about 8-10 cm and filled up with fresh concrete, compacted and finished.
16.37.9.2 The straight edge testing the refloating is to continue until the entire surface:
(a) is free from observable departure from the straight edge,
(b) conforms to the required levels and across section, and
(c) shall conform to the specified surface when the concrete has hardened.
16.37.9.3 The foregoing work is to be carried out while the concrete is still plastic and
workable.
16.37.10 Belting
16.37.10.1 Just before concrete becomes non-plastic, the surface shall be belted with a two
ply canvas belt not less than 20 cm wide and at least 1 metre longer than the width of the
slab. Hand belts shall have suitable handles to permit controlled uniform manipulation. The
belt shall be operated with short strokes transverse to the centre line of the pavement and
with rapid advance parallel to the centre line.
16.37.11 Brooming
16.37.11.1 After belting and as soon as the surplus water, if any, has risen to the surface, the
pavement shall be given a broom finish with an approved steel or fiber broom not less than
45 cm wide. The broom shall be pulled gently over the surface of the pavement from edge to
- 251 -
edge. Adjacent strokes shall be slightly overlapped. Brooming shall be perpendicular to the
centre line of the pavement and so executed that the corrugations formed shall be uniform in
character and width and not more than 1.5 mm deep.
16.37.11.2 Brooming shall be completed before the concrete reaches such a stage that the
surface is likely to be torn or unduly roughened by the operation. The broomed surface shall
be free from porous or rough spots, irregularities, depressions, and small pockets such as
may be caused by accidental disturbing of particles of coarse aggregates embodied near the
surface. The brooming shall be of uniform pattern all through.
16.37.11.3 Edging : After belting/brooming has been completed but before the initial setting
of concrete, the edges of the slab shall be carefully finished with an edger of 6 mm radius,
and the pavement edges shall be left smooth and true to line.
16.37.12 Honey Combing
16.37.12.1 The side forms shall not be removed until 12 hours or such longer period as the
Engineer-in- Charge may decide after the laying of concrete.
16.37.12.2 As soon as the side forms are removed, any minor honey combed area shall be
filled with mortar composed of one part of cement and two parts of fine aggregate. Major
honey combing areas or segregated concrete or other defective work or areas damaged by
removal of the forms or concrete damaged by rain or due to any other reason whatsoever
shall be considered as defective work and shall be removed and replaced by the contractor at
his own expense. The total area of honey combed surface shall not exceed 4 per cent of the
area of the slab side. However, no individual honeycomb patch shall exceed 0.1 sqm.
Engineer-in-Charge’s decision as to whether the concrete is defective or not shall be final
and binding.
16.37.13 Surface Accuracy
16.37.13.1 After the concrete has sufficiently hardened after about 12 hours and not later
than 24 hours, the surface shall be tested again for high spots. All high spots shall be marked
and those exceeding 3 mm shall be ground down immediately. Care shall be taken to see
that the grinding does not in any way damage the concrete surface.
16.37.13.2 The final surface finish is to be such that when tested with a
profilograh/roughness indicator/or a 3 metre long straight edge or an equivalent mechanical
unevenness indicator placed anywhere within the same or adjoining slab in any direction on
the surface, there shall be no variation greater than 3 mm.
16.37.13.3 If the surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm still remains despite grinding as per
para 16.37.13.2 the concrete shall be removed to its full depth. The area of concrete to be
removed shall be complete slab between the nearest joints, where the defective slab is less
than 4.5 metres from the expansion joint, the whole area upto the expansion joint shall be
removed to the full depth. The concrete so removed shall not be reused in the work. Fresh
concrete shall be laid in the manner already described in above paras and shall again be
subject to test for surface accuracy and other quality control measures. Nothing extra shall
be paid on this account.
16.37.13.4 Every slab shall bear an impression not exceeding 3 mm in depth comprising the
number allotted to the slab and the date on which it is laid. This impression shall be formed
by the contractor when the concrete is green so as to leave permanent mark on setting.
16.37.13.5 Initial Curing
16.37.13.5.1 Immediately after completion of the finishing operations, the surface of the
pavement shall be entirely covered with wetted burlap, cotton or jute mats. The mats used
shall be of such length (or width) that as laid they shall extend at least 45 cm beyond the
edges of the slab. The mats shall be placed so that the entire surface and both edges of the
slab are completely covered. This covering shall be placed as soon as, in the judgment of the
Engineer-in-Charge the concrete has set sufficiently to prevent damage to the surface prior
to being placed, the mats shall be thoroughly saturated with water and shall be placed with
the wettest side down. The mats shall be so placed and weighed down as to cause them to
remain in intimate contact with the surface covered, and the covering shall be maintained
full wetted and in position for 24 hours after the concrete has been placed or until the
- 252 -
concrete is sufficiently hard to be walked on without suffering damage. Water shall be
gently sprayed so as to avoid damage to the fresh concrete. If it becomes necessary to
remove a mat for any reason, the concrete slab shall not be exposed for a period of more
than half an hour.
16.37.13.5.2 Worn burlap or burlap with holes shall not be permitted. Burlap reclaimed
from previous use other than curing concrete shall be thoroughly washed prior to use for
curing purposes. If burlap is obtained in strips, shall be laid to overlap by at least 150 mm.
16.37.14 Burlap shall be placed from suitable bridges. Walking on freshly laid concrete to
facilitate placing burlap shall not be permitted.
16.37.15 Final Curing
16.37.15.1 Upon the removal of the burlaps, the slab shall be thoroughly wetted and then
cured as follows:-
All joints shall be filled with filler in order to prevent the edges of joints from getting
damaged and entry of clay materials into the joints during final curing. Exposed edges of the
slab shall be banked with a substantial berm of earth. Upon the slab shall then be laid a
system of transverse and longitudinal dykes of clay about 50 mm high immediately covered
with a blanket of sandy soil free from stones to prevent the drying up and cracking of clay.
The rest of slab shall then be covered with sufficient sandy soil so as to produce a blanket of
earth not less than 40 mm deep after wetting. The earth covering shall be thoroughly wetted
while it is being placed on the surface and against the sides of the slab and kept thoroughly
saturated with water for 21 days and thoroughly wetted down during the morning of the 22 nd
day and shall thereafter remain in place until the concrete has attained the required strength
and permission is given by the Engineer-in-Charge. Thereafter the covering shall be
removed and the pavement cleaned and swept. If the earth covering becomes displaced
during the curing period, it shall be replaced to the original depth and re-saturated.
16.37.15.2 Contractor shall appoint chowkidars at his expense to prevent workmen, cattle,
etc., straying on the pavement concrete.
16.37.15.3 Concrete shall not be subjected to any load or weight of any plant until at least
28 days after laying.
16.37.16 Construction Joints
16.37.16.1 Construction joints shall be provided as shown in the drawing and also at places
where concreting is stopped due to unforeseen circumstances. The joints shall be straight
and vertical through the full thickness of the slab. While concrete in adjacent bay is still
green, flats of suitable size shall be drawn along the edge and a groove of size 10 mm × 25
mm deep shall be neatly formed and finished. The edges of the groove shall be full nosed.
After curing of concrete is complete, this groove shall be thoroughly cleaned of all sand dust
and shall be perfectly dried and filled with hot poured sealing compound conforming to
grade B of IS 1834. Before filling with sealing compound the faces of concrete of the joint
shall be coated with primer of approved brand to a depth of 25 mm at the rate of 2.6 liters
per 10 square meters. Bitumen emulsion shall not be used as primer.
16.37.17 Dummy Joints
16.37.17.1 The joints shall be 10 mm wide and shall extend vertically from the surface of
the slab to a depth equal to 1/3rd of the thickness of the slab but not less than 4 cm in any
case. The joint may be formed by depressing into the soft but compacted concrete a high
tensile M.S. or other approved Tee of flat bar of depth not less than required depth of the
joint plus 25 mm. The bar used for forming the groove shall be coated with soft soap or
other suitable lubricant to facilitate its removal when the steel Tee or flat is removed joints
shall be neatly formed with proper tools and mortar/fine material from the slab itself. No
additional cement mortar (rich or otherwise) shall be used.
16.37.17.2 Cutting or sawing by a saw mounted on a movable frame and driven
mechanically shall also be permitted as a method for making the joint. In this case the width
may be reduced to 6 mm. any other method for making joints can be followed with the prior
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

- 253 -
16.37.17.3 In all cases, except where cutting is done with saw, the joint edges shall be bull
nosed. Care should be taken to see that the edges of the grooves are not damaged.
16.37.17.4 The grooves shall be filled with hot poured sealing compound conforming to
Grade B of IS:1834. Prior to filling with sealing compound, the joints shall be cleaned by
compressed air and primed with Shalijet primer or equivalent at the rate specified in Para
16.37.16.1
16.37.17.5 All joints shall be sealed as soon as practicable after 28 days of casting of cc
pavement. Joints shall be sealed flush with the adjacent pavement surface in summer and 3-
4 mm below finished concrete surface in winter. The pavement shall be opened to traffic
only after joint sealing over the entire pavement. To prevent tackiness or pickup under
traffic, the exposed surfaces of the sealing compound shall be dusted with hydrated lime, if
directed by Engineer-in-Charge, for which nothing extra shall be paid to the contractor.
16.37.17.6 In case of sudden rain or storm, the work can be concluded at the dummy joints
but these will then be formed as construction joints.
16.37.17.7 Before sealing of joints, it may be ensured that the groove extends fully across
the bay between consecutive longitudinal joints, in the case of transverse joints and is
continuous in the case of longitudinal joints. Any concrete or other foreign matter must be
removed from the groove.
16.37.18 Concreting during Rains
16.37.18.1 To prevent damage to freshly laid concrete during monsoon, or sudden rains, the
contractor shall provide an adequate supply of tarpuolines or other water proof covering
material. Any concrete damaged by rain shall be removed and replaced by the contractor at
his own cost as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
16.37.19 Quality Control
The following quality control tests shall be carried out at frequencies specified against each
as in Table 16.33.

- 254 -
16.37.20 Equipments
16.37.20.1 Equipments as per list at Appendix C shall be provided by the contractor in the
field testing laboratory. Nothing extra shall be paid to him on this account. Records as
required shall be maintained at site. All tests details in support of mix design shall be
maintained as part of records of the contract and shall be signed both by the contractor and
the Engineer-in-Charge. The contractor shall provide all labour, materials and equipment
required for all tests to be carried out at his own cost.
16.37.20.2 The Engineer-in-Charge reserves the right to test any part of concrete laid
regarding quality soundness, compactness, thickness, strength and finish of the concrete, at
any time before the expiry of the “Defect liability period” not withstanding that necessary
tests had been carried out and found satisfactory at the time of execution.
16.37.20.3 All defective unsound sub-standard work and concrete of sub-standard strength
and quality etc. as established vide paras 16.37.3 shall be rejected and shall be replaced by
the contractor at his own expense in the manner as detailed in para 16.37.3. Where due to
operational or any other reason such replacement does not become possible (decision of
Engineer-in-Charge in this respect being final and binding on the contractor), the cost of
removal and replacement of such rejected work shall be recovered from the contractor
whether such rejected work is subsequently replaced by the Government or not.
16.37.21 Defects Liability Period
16.37.21.1 This period shall be reckoned in the case of this work as one year from the date
of completion of work and it shall be the liability of the contractor to repair, strengthen or
reconstruct any portion of the work which has shown damage or any defect, arising out of
- 255 -
any bad workmanship or defective material used in the work during this period. In the case
of this rectification not being commenced by the contractor within 7 days from the date of
notice from the Engineer-in-Charge and completed expeditiously the Engineer-in-Charge
reserves the right to get the repair work executed at the risk and cost of the contractor.
16.37.22 Measurements
16.37.22.1 For the purpose of ascertaining the quantity of concrete in the pavement,
thickness shall be measured by means of a scale correct to the nearest 2 mm. The thickness
of the concrete pavement slabs shall be taken on either side of the pavement at each dummy
joint at four corners of the slab immediately after removal of the side forms. In case the
average thickness of the slab exceeds the specified thickness, payment shall be restricted to
the specified thickness.
16.37.22.2 The dimensions of each slab of pavement shall be measured as follows to the
nearest 5 mm.
(a) Length
(i) Between the end of a pavement to the centre line of the expansion joints.
(ii) Between the centre lines of consecutive expansion joints.
(b) Width
(i) Between the edge of a pavement and the centre line of the construction joints.
(ii) Between the centre lines of construction joints and expansion joints.
(iii) Between the centre lines of consecutive construction joints.
Note : The quantity of concrete in the pavement slab shall be worked out by multiplying the
area of the slab and its average thickness or specified thickness whichever is less. No
deduction shall be made for any joints in the concrete slab.
16.37.22.3 Measurements of concrete slabs shall be recorded jointly by the Engineer-in-
Charge or his authorized subordinate and the contractor or his authorized agent.
16.37.23 Rate
The rate of the item for concrete in pavement shall include the cost of all materials and
labour including charges for machinery tools & plants required in all the operations
described above. The rate also includes all cost of setting up the laboratory at site and
carrying out the quality control measures/tests enumerated above by the contractor at his
own cost in the presence of Engineer-in- Charge or his authorized representative and
submission of test results on completion of tests to the Engineer-in-Charge thereof.
16.38 HARD CRETE
Hard crete of approved quality and brand to be used. It shall be mixed in ratio and method
as recommended by manufacturer and approved by Engineer-in-charge in cement concrete
for laying in paramount. Quantity shall be measured in litre used in cement concrete.
Hardcrete to be brought in sealed container and proper record of quantity be maintained.
Empty containers of hardcrete shall not be removed from site with but prior permission of
Engineer-in-Charge.
16.39 EXPANSION JOINT
16.39.0 Materials
Premoulded Joint Filler in Expansion Joint : It shall conform to IS 1838 (Pt. I). The
thickness shall be 25 mm with tolerance 1.5 mm. and shall be of the maximum available
standard length not less than one lane width. The filler board shall be positioned vertically
with the prefabricated joint assemblies along the line of the joint within tolerance of + 10
mm from the intended line of the joint. The depth of board shall be 25 mm less than
thickness of slab within a tolerance of ± 3mm so that the top of the board shall be below the
surface or will not impead the passage of the finishing straight edge or oscillating beam of
the paving machine.
Bitumine Hot Sealing Compound : The joint sealing compound shall be fuel and heat
resistant type complying to grade B of IS 1834. It shall be capable of adhering to the
concrete without cracking, spalling and disintegration.
16.40 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURE

- 256 -
16.40.1 Expansion joints shall be provided as shown in the drawing and as per directions of
Engineer-in- Charge. All joints shall be constructed true to line with their faces
perpendicular to the surface of the pavement. The joint shall be 20 mm wide. The depth of
the non-extruding filler pad shall be 25 mm less than the depth of the concrete slab.
16.40.2 Before the provision of expansion joint, the face of the already laid concrete slab
shall be painted with primer at the rate of 2.6 liters per 10 square metres. The expansion pad
shall be properly cut to shape and shall then be placed in position abutting the painted face
of the already laid concrete slab. The adjacent slab shall then be concreted. The face of the
pad against which the new concrete slab is to be laid shall also be painted with primer
before laying the concrete, while concreting a neat groove of size 20 mm x 25 mm as per
drawing shall be formed on top of the pad taking care that the edges are absolutely straight
and that the groove so made does not get filled with any material like concrete, mortar and
other rubbish.
16.40.3 Before the curing process is started, the top of expansion joint shall be filled with
bitumen sand mixture in order to ensure that no foreign material used in curing enters into
the joint. This filling shall be removed before filling the joints with sealing compound.
16.40.3.1 For sealing the joints following operations shall be carried out :—
(a) The joints are cleared of any foreign matter to the full depth upto the top of expansion
pad with steel spatula.
(b) The joints are blown with compressed air.
(c) Cleaning is done with Kerosene oil.
(d) Priming is done with spray gun @ 2.6 liters per 10 sqm of the surface to be primed.
(e) The primer is allowed to dry completely before pouring the sealing compound.
(f) The sealing compound grade ‘A’ is heated to the required temperature ranging between
155 deg. C to 165 deg. C or to the temperature range specified by the manufacturer. Over
heating shall be avoided. Pouring shall be done from vessel with spout in such a manner that
the material will not get spilled on the exposed surface of the concrete, any excess filler on
the surface of the pavement shall be removed immediately and the pavement surface
cleaned.
(g) The filling shall be worked into the joints with hot flats to ensure escape of trapped air.
(h) The filling is then ironed with hot iron. It is recommended that while in summer the
joints may be sealed flush with the adjacent pavement surface, in winter the sealing
compound may be filled to a depth 3-4 mm below the surface.
(i) The edges of the joints are then cut and trimmed to ensure neat and straight line finish.
(j) To prevent tackiness or pick up under traffic, the exposed surfaces of the sealing
compound shall be dusted with hydrated lime, if directed by Engineer-in-Charge (Nothing
extra shall be paid for the same).
16.40.3.2 Measurements : The measurement of the specified depth of joint shall be
recorded in metres correct to two places of decimals.
16.40.4 Rate
Rate for the item shall include the cost of all materials, plant, machinery and labour
involved in all operations described above, including all cartages and lifts.
16.41 PAINTING ROAD/ RUNWAYS MARKINGS
16.41.1 Materials
16.41.1.1 Special Road marking paint of approved brand and manufacture shall be used.
The paint shall conform to IS 164. Ready mixed paint as received from the manufacturer
shall be used without adding any admixture.
16.41.1.2 During work, if the consistency of the paint gets thick and thinning becomes
necessary it shall be done by use of thinner of the approved brand of paint recommended by
the manufacturer and with the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
16.41.1.3 The paint shall be brought to the site of work by the contractor in original sealed
containers. The material shall be brought in one lot in adequate quantity to suffice for the
entire work. The material shall be kept in the joint custody of the contractor and the

- 257 -
Engineer-in-Charge. The empty container shall not be removed from the site of work, till the
work has been completed and permission obtained from the Engineer-in-Charge.
16.41.2 Preparation of Surface
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and free from dust. All the dirt, scales, oil and
grease shall be thoroughly removed before painting is started. The prepared surface shall be
inspected and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before painting is commenced.
16.41.3 Application
16.41.3.1 Before pouring into smaller containers for use, the paint shall be stirred
thoroughly in its original container. The paint shall be continuously stirred in the smaller
container while applying to runway surface so that its consistency is kept uniform.
16.41.3.2 The painting shall be applied evenly and smoothly by means of crossing and
laying off. The crossing and laying off consists of covering the area over with paint,
brushing the surface hard for the first time over and then brushing alternatively in opposite
direction, two or three times and then finally brushing lightly in a direction at right angle to
the same. In this process, no brush marks shall be left after the laying off is finished. The
full process of crossing and laying off will constitute one coat.
16.41.3.3 Each coat shall be allowed to dry out thoroughly before the next coat is applied.
16.41.3.4 Earlier applied coat shall be cleaned off dust before the next coat is laid.
16.41.3.5 No left over paint shall be put back into the stock tins. When not in use, the
containers shall be kept properly closed.
16.41.3.6 No hair marks from the brush or clogging of paint puddles shall be left on the
work.
16.41.3.7 The surface shall ordinarily not be painted until it has dried up completely. Trial
patches of paint shall be laid at intervals to check if drying is satisfactory.
16.41.3.8 The runway marking shall be done in accordance with the drawing unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
16.41.4 Brushes and Containers
16.41.4.1 After work, the brushes shall be completely cleaned of paint by rinsing with
turpentine. A brush in which paint has dried up is spoiled and shall on no account be reused
for painting work. On no account kerosene oil shall be used for washing the brush.
16.41.4.2 When the paint has been used, the containers shall be washed with turpentine and
wiped dry with soft clean cloth so that they are clean, and can be used again.
16.41.5 Measurement
16.41.5.1 Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. Area shall be worked out in
square metre, correct to two places of a decimal.
16.41.6 Rate
16.41.6.1 Rate shall include cost of all materials, tools and labour involved in all the
operations described above including all cartages and lifts.
16.57 FACTORY MADE CEMENT CONCRETE INTERLOCKING PAVER BLOCK
16.57.1 Base
Interlocking paver block to be fixed on the bed 50 mm or specified otherwise thick of coarse
sand of approved specification and filling the joints with the sand of approved type and
quality or as specified and as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
16.57.2 Interlocking Paver Block
Factory made precast paver block of M-30 or otherwise specified grade to be used. Paver
blocks to be of approved brand and manufacturer and of approved quality. Minimum
strength as prescribed by manufacturer and as per direction of Engineer-in-Charge for the
grade specified to be tested as per method mentioned in specification of subhead cement
concrete of CPWD Specification 2009 Vol. I.
16.57.3 Measurement & Rates
Area provided with paver block to be measured in sqm. correct upto two places of decimal.
The rate include the cost of the material, labour, tools etc. required in all the operations
described above.
16.58 KERB STONE (PRECAST)
- 258 -
16.58.1 Laying
16.58.1.1 Trenches shall first be made along the edge of the wearing course of the road to
receive the kerb stones of cement concrete of specified grade. The bed of the trenches shall
be compacted manually with steel rammers to a firm and even surface and then the stones
shall be set in cement mortar of specified proportion.
16.58.1.2 The kerb stones with top 20 cm. wide shall be laid with their length running
parallel to the road edge, true in line and gradient at a distance of 30 cm. from the road edge
to allow for the channel and shall project about 12.5 cm. above the latter. The channel
stones with top 30 cm. wide shall be laid in position in chamber with finished road surface
and with sufficient slope towards the road gully chamber. The joints of kerb and channel
stones shall be staggered and shall be not more than 10 mm. Wherever specified all joints
shall be filled with mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) and pointed with mortar 1:2 (1
cement: 2 fine sand) which shall be cured for 7 days.
16.58.1.3 The necessary drainage openings of specified sizes shall be made through the kerb
as per drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge for connecting to storm water
drains.
16.58.2 Finishing
Berms and road edges shall be restored and all surplus earth including rubbish etc. disposed
off as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Nothing extra shall be paid for this.
16.58.3 Measurements
It shall be measured in cubic meters with Length of the finished work (for specified width
and height of stone) shall be measured in running metre along the edge of the road correct to
a cm.
16.58.4 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all the materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above.
Note:- For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 2, Sub Head 16.0

- 259 -
 SUB HEAD : 17.0
SANITARY INSTALLATIONS

17.0 TERMINOLOGY
Antisiphon Pipe (Fig. 17.1)
A ventilating pipe connected to or close to the outlet side of a trap seal.
Automatic Flushing Cistern (Fig. 17.3)
A flushing cistern arranged to discharge its content by siphonage at regular intervals,
determined by the rate at which water is fed into the cistern.
Ball Cock (Fig. 17.3)
A faucet opened or closed by the fall or rise of a ball floating in the surface of water.
Ball Valve (Fig. 17.3)
A simple non return valve consisting of a ball resting on a cylindrical seat within a fluid
passageway.
Bell Mouth (Fig. 17.3)
An expanded rounded entrance to a pipe or orifice.
Bend
Length of pipe bent or cast into an angle shape.
Bib Tap
A tap with a horizontal inlet and nozzle bent to discharge in a downward direction.
Blister
A raised portion of the surface protruding not more than one millimeter above the surface
and not greater than 3 mm in its greatest dimension.
Box Union
A device for joining two threaded pipes.
Branch (Fig. 17.1)
(a) A special form of vitrified sewer and cast iron pipe used for making connections to a
sewer or water main. The various types are called T, Y, T-Y, double Y, and V branches,
according to their respective shapes.
(b) Any part of piping system other than a main.
Caulking
(a) The process of driving, pouring or forcing lead, oakum, plastic or other material into a
joint to make it leak proof.
(b) The material used in the caulking process.
Caulked Joint
A spigot and socket joint in which the jointing material is compacted by means of caulking
tool and hammer.
Chase
A continuous recess in wall, floor or ceiling for the purpose of holding pipes and conduits.
Cistern (Fig. 17.3)
A fixed container for water in which the water is at atmospheric pressure. The water is
usually supplied through a ball valve.
Collar
A pipe-fitting in the form of sleeve for jointing the spigot ends of two pipes in the same
alignment.
Cowl (Fig. 17.1)
A hood on the top of a vent pipe or soil stack.
Craze or Crazing
Fine cracks in the glaze.
Cross
A pipe fitting used for connecting four pipes at right angles.
Fittings
Coupling, flange, branch, bend, tee, elbow, union, waste with plug, P or S trap with vent,
ferrule, stop tap, bib tap, pillar tap, globe tap, ball valve, cistern, storage tank, baths, water
- 260 -
closets, boiler geyser, pumping set with motor and accessories, metre, hydrant valve and any
other article used in connection with water supply, drainage and sanitation.
Float Valve (Fig. 17.3)
A valve in which the closure to an opening such as a plug or gate, is actuated by a float to
control the flow in to a tank.
Flush Bend
A bend located at the bottom of low level flushing cistern for the purpose of flushing
pedestal type water closet and similar fixture.
Flushing Cistern (Fig. 17.3)
A cistern provided with a device for rapidly discharging the contained water and used in
connection with a sanitary appliance for the purpose of cleaning the appliance and carrying
away its contents into a drain.
Gasket
A piece of compressible material used to make a joint between two flat surfaces.
Oakum
Hemp or old hemp rope soaked in oil to make it water proof.
One Pipe System (Fig. 17.1)
In this a single soil waste pipe conveys both soil and waste directly to the building drain.
Pinhole
A hole in the body, less than 1.5 mm, in its maximum dimension.
Reducer
A pipe-fitting with inside threads larger at one end than at the other. All such fittings having
more than one size are reducers because of the custom of stating the larger size first.
Single Stack System (Fig. 17.1)
This is the name given to a simplified one pipe system wherein all ventilation pipes are
omitted. The stack itself is made to cater (or provide) for all the vent requirements by
restricting the flow into the stack to certain predetermined limits.
Sink (Fig. 17.7)
A shallow fixture, ordinarily with a flat bottom, that is usually used in kitchen or in
connection with the preparation of food, laboratory purposes and for certain industrial
processes.
Socket
The female part of spigot and socket joint.
Soil Pipe
A pipe which conveys to drain the discharge from a water closet or urinals. In ‘One pipe’
and ‘single stack’ system the soil pipe also conveys to a drain the discharges from bath,
wash basins, sinks and similar appliances.
Speck
Area of the finished surface with contrasting colour less than one millimeter maximum
dimension.
Spigot
The male part of a spigot and socket joint.
Spigot and Socket Joint
Joint in which the end of the one pipe enters the enlarged end of the next pipe.
Stack
A main vertical discharge or ventilating pipe.
Trap
A fitting or device so designed and constructed as to provide, when properly vented, a liquid
seal which will prevent the back passage of air without materially affecting the flow of
sewage or waste water through it.
Two Pipe System (Fig. 17.1)
In this, the soil pipe conveys discharges from water closets, urinals, and similar soil
appliances directly to the drainage system and the waste pipe conveys waste from

- 261 -
ablutionary and culinary appliances to the drainage system directly or through a trapped
gully where desired.
Union
A pipe fitting used for joining the ends of two pipes neither of which can be turned.
Valve
A device used for controlling the flow of liquid in a line of pipe.
Ventilating Pipe (Vent Pipe)
The pipe which provides a safe outlet into the atmosphere for the foul gases in the drain or
sewer.
Warpage
Distortion of original shape during manufacturing process.
Water Seal
The depth of water which should be removed from a fully charged trap before air can pass
through the trap.
Waste Pipe
A pipe used to convey liquid waste not containing human excreta.
Waste Stack
A vertical pipe used to convey liquid waste not containing human excreta.
17.1 APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS
17.1.0 All vitreous sanitary appliances (Vitreous China) shall conform to IS 2556 (Part-I)
general requirements.
17.1.1 Flushing Cisterns (Fig. 17.3)
The flushing cisterns shall be automatic or manually operated high level or low level as
specified, for water closets and urinals. A high level cistern is intended to operate with
minimum height of 125 cm and a low level cistern with a maximum height of 30 cm
between the top of the pan and the under side of the cistern. Cisterns shall be of following
type (i) Vitreous China (IS 774) for Flushing type (ii) Automatic Flushing Cistern (IS 2326)
and (iii) Plastic cisterns (IS 7231).
17.1.1.1 Vitreous Chine Cisterns : The thickness of the body including cover shall be not
less than 6 mm for vitreous China cisterns. The outlet of each syphon or stand pipe shall be
securely connected to the cistern by means of lock nut. The cistern shall be free from
manufacturing faults and other defects affecting their utility. All working parts shall be
designed to operate smoothly and efficiently. Cistern shall be mosquito proof. A cistern
shall be considered mosquito proof only if there is no clearance any where which would
permit a 1.6 mm wire to pass through in the permanent position of the cistern i.e. in the
flushing position or filling position. The breadth of a low level cistern, from front to back
shall be such that the cover or seat, or both, of water closet pan shall come to rest in a stable
position when raised. The cistern shall be supported on two cast iron brackets of size as
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge and embedded in cement concrete 1:2:4 block 100 x 75
x 150 mm. These shall be properly protected by suitable impervious paint. Alternatively the
cisterns shall have two holes in the back side above the overflow level for screwing into the
wall, supplemented by two cast iron wall supports. A 5
litres cistern, however, may be supported by larger brackets cast on the body of the cistern.
The cistern shall have a removable cover which shall fit closely on it and be secured against
displacement. In designs where the operating mechanism is attached to the cover this may
be made in two sections, but the section supporting the mechanism shall be securely bolted
or screwed to the body. The outlet fitting of each cistern shall be securely connected to the
cistern. The nominal internal diameter of cistern outlet shall be not less than 38 ± 1mm for
low level cisterns respectively. The length of the outlet of the cistern shall be 37 ± 2 mm.
Ball valve shall be of screwed type 15 mm in diameter and shall conform to IS 1703. The
float shall be made of polyethylene as specified in IS 9762. (The design shall permit the
cistern to fill in rapidly and close effectively when the level of water reaches the working
water level.) In the case of manually operated cisterns the siphonic action of the flushing
cistern shall be capable of being rapidly brought into action by the operating lever, but shall
- 262 -
not self siphon or leak. When tested according to IS 774 the discharge rate shall be 10 ± 0.5
litre in 6 seconds and 5 ± 0.5 litre in 3 seconds for cisterns of capacities 10 litre and 5 litre
respectively. The cisterns shall be so designed that there is not appreciable variation in the
force of flush during the discharge of the required quantity of water. The
cistern shall have a discharge capacity of 5 & 10 litres as specified. When required to give a
full flush, they shall respectively discharge 5 litres and 10 litres with variation of ± 0.5 litres.
The flush pipe shall be of (a) medium quality galvanised iron having internal diameter of 38
± 1 mm for low level cistern. The flush pipe shall be of suitable length with bends etc. as
required for fixing it with front or back inlet W.C. Pan. (b) Polyethylene pipes low density
conforming to IS 3076 or high density (c) Unplasticised PVC pipes. For high density
polyethylene and unplasticised PVC pipes, the outside diameter of the pipes shall be 40 mm.
When PVC plumbing pipes are used the outside diameter of the pipe shall be 40 mm for
high level cisterns and 50 mm for low level cisterns. In case of low level cistern the flush
pipe shall be a vertical pipe 30 cm long and having a nominal internal dia 38 ± 1 mm
(except plastic flush pipes).
Over Flow Pipe
(a) GI overflow pipe shall be of not less than 20 mm nominal bore and shall incorporate a
noncorrodible mosquito proof brass cover having 1.25 mm dia perforation, screwed in a
manner which will permit it to be readily cleaned or renewed when necessary. No provision
shall be made whereby the overflow from the cistern shall discharge directly into the water
closet or soil pipe without being detected. The invert of the overflow pipe in the case of high
level and low level cisterns shall be 19 mm minimum above the working water level. In case
of overflow due to any reason water should drain out through the over flow pipe and not
through the siphon pipe.
(b) The plastic overflow pipes shall be manufactured from high density polyethylene
conforming to IS 4984 or unplasticised P.V.C. conforming to IS 4985.
Inlet and Overflow Holes: The cistern shall be provided with inlet and overflow holes,
situated one at each end which shall be capable of accommodating an overflow pipe of not
less than 20 mm nominal bore and a 15 mm size ball valve. The holes shall be cleanly cast
or drilled and the adjacent surfaces shall be smooth.
17.1.1.2 PVC Cisterns : Plastic flushing cisterns for WC and Urinals shall be as per IS
7231. The materials for manufacturing various components of the flushing cisterns shall
conform to the requirements given in Table 17.1 below:

- 263 -
1) Talc as filler, if used shall not exceed 20%
Note: Where the requirements for the material of any component or the relevant Indian
Standard designation for any material are not specified, these shall be as directed by the
Engineer-in- Charge. The thickness of the body including cover at any point shall not be less
than 2 mm for GRP, and not less than 3 mm for other plastic materials. The cistern shall be
free from manufacturing faults and other defects affecting its utility. All working parts shall
be designed so as to operate smoothly and efficiently. The cistern shall be mosquito-proof. It
shall be deemed to be mosquito proof only when there is no clearance anywhere in it which
would permit a 1.6 mm diameter wire to pass through. The outlet of each siphon or stand
pipe or flush valve shall be securely connected to the cistern by means of a lock nut. In the
case of plastic siphon, it shall be provided with suitable means of ensuring and maintaining
watertight and airtight joint to the cistern. The cistern shall be provided with a removable
cover which shall fit closely and shall be secured against displacement. In designs, where
the operating mechanism is attached to the cover, the cover may be made in two sections,
the section supporting the mechanism being securely fixed or booked to the body. The flush
pipe (except plastic flush pipe) shall have an internal diameter of 32 + 1 mm for high level
cistern and 38 + 1 mm for low level cistern. The steel flush pipe shall be not less than 1 mm
thick whereas the lead flush pipe shall have a minimum thickness of 3.5 mm. For high
density polyethylene pipes, the outside diameter of the pipes shall be 40 mm. For
unplasticised PVC plumbing pipes the outside diameter of the pipe shall be 40 mm for high
level cisterns, and 50 mm for low level cisterns. In the case of high level flushing cisterns, a
pipe clip fitted with a rubber buffer shall be fixed to the flush pipe to prevent damage either
to the pipe or to the seat when the seat is raised. No flush pipe is required for coupled
cisterns.
Note: The minimum thickness specified is for normal conditions of service. Where highly
corrosive atmospheres are expected, greater thicknesses are required to be provided as per
nomenclature of the item.
Flush Pipe Connection to Cistern
The flush pipe shall be securely connected to cistern outlet and made airtight by means of a
coupling nut. The nuts made of injection-molded HDPE/Polyacetal may be used only if the
- 264 -
end pipe is also made of plastic. The nominal internal diameter of the cistern outset shall be
not less than 32 mm and 38 mm for high-level and low-level cisterns respectively. The
screw threads for connection to the flush pipe shall not be less than size 1½ of IS 2643 (Part
3). In the case of polyethylene and unplasticised PVC flush pipes, the upper end of the flush
pipe shall be provided with suitable means of ensuring and maintaining a watertight and
airtight joint to the flushing cistern. When ordered for use with a flush pipe, the outlet
connection may be supplied with coupling nut made of copper based alloy or other non-
corrodible material and a plain tail piece having a minimum length of 60 mm. The centre of
the outlet hole shall be generally central to the length of the cistern. The length of the outlet
shall be 37±2 mm in case of interchangeable siphon; however, where integral siphon is
provided, the outlet length shall be 20±2 mm.
Note: The length of the cistern outlet shall be the dimension from the bottom surface of the
cistern to the end of the outlet after the cistern with siphon/stand pipe has been duly fitted
with all washers, lock-nuts, etc.
Inlet and Overflow Holes
The cistern shall be provided with inlet and overflow holes, situated one at each end, which
shall be capable of accommodating overflow pipe of not less than 20 mm nominal bore and
a 15 mm size float valve. The holes shall be cleanly moulded or drilled and the adjacent
surfaces shall be smooth.
Float Valve
The float valve shall be 15 mm nominal size and shall conform to IS 1703 or IS 12234 or IS
13049.
Operating Mechanism Lever
The operating mechanism/lever shall not project beyond the side of the cistern for a distance
greater than 350 mm measured from the centre of the cistern to the end of the lever arm. The
lever arm shall be provided with a suitable hole near the end through which a split ring or S-
hook can be inserted. A string (chain) shall be attached to the ring or hook. When S-hook is
employed, it shall be effectively closed after assembly to prevent accidental disconnection.
In the case of low-level cisterns, where the mechanism is handle operated, the handle,
whether situated on the front or at the end of the cistern, shall be within the projection limit.
Particular attention shall be given to the case of operation of the handle.
String (Chain)
The string (chain) shall be of such strength as to sustain a dead load of 500 N without any
apparent or permanent deformation.
The string (chain) shall terminate in a suitable handle or pull made of a moulding in any
heatresisting and non-absorbent plastic or any other equally suitable material. The finish
shall be smooth and all burrs which are liable to cause injury to the hand when gripped shall
be removed.
Overflow Pipe
The overflow pipe shall be of not less than 20 mm nominal bore and shall incorporate a
noncorrodible mosquito-proof device secured in a manner which will permit it to be readily
cleaned or renewed when necessary. No provision shall be made whereby the overflow from
the cistern shall discharge directly into the water-closet or soil pipe without being detected.
The invert of the overflow pipe in the case of high-level and low level cisterns and the top
edge of the overflow pipe in the case of coupled cistern shall be 19 mm (Min) above the
working water level. In case of overflow due to any reason, water should drain out through
the overflow pipe and not through the siphon pipe.
Finish
The surface of the cistern including cover shall be free from blisters and delamination, and
reasonably free from flow lines, streaking or colour variations. The cistern and cover shall
be opaque to light.
Operational and Performance Requirements
Flushing Arrangement

- 265 -
The cistern under working conditions and with the float valve in closed position shall
operate on a single operation of the operating mechanism/lever without calling for a sudden
jerk in pulling. If a valve is used instead of siphon for flushing purposes, the valve shall be
completely leak proof.
Working Water Level
The working water-level shall be a minimum of 6.5 cm. below the effective top edge of the
cistern and shall be legibly and permanently marked on the inside of the cistern. Effective
top edge shall be taken on edge after top of the body without considering bead.
Freedom from Self Siphonage
The siphonic system shall be capable of being rapidly brought into action when the water is
at the working water level, but shall not self siphon or leak into the flush pipe when the
water is up to 1 cm above the invert of the overflow pipe.
Reduced Water Level
The discharge shall operate satisfactorily when the cistern is filled to a level up to 1 cm.
below the working water level.
Discharge Capacity
When tested in accordance with IS 7231, cistern of 5 litres and 10 litres capacities, when
required to give a full flush, shall respectively discharge 5 litres and 10 litres with variation
of ± 0.5 litres. Dual-flush cistern of 10 litres capacity shall discharge alternatively a short
flush of 5 ± 0.5 litres. Dual flush cistern of 6/3 litres capacity shall discharge 6 ± 0.5 litres
and alternatively a half flush of 3 ± 0.5 litres.
Discharge Rate
When tested in accordance with IS 7231, the discharge rate shall be 10 ± 0.5 litres within 6
seconds and 5 ± 0.5 litres within 3 seconds for cistern of capacities 10 litres and 5 litres and
6 ± 0.5 litres within 6 second and 3 ± 0.5 litres within 3 second for cistern of 6/3 litres
capacity respectively. The cistern shall be so designed that there is no appreciable variation
in the force of the flush during the discharge of the required quantity of water. For coupled
cisterns, this test shall not be applicable.
Special Requirements
Distortion Resistance Test
The cisterns, complete with its fittings, shall be installed and filled with water to the marked
water line and observed for any distortion. The cistern shall not budge more than 6 mm and
the cover shall not be dislodged.
Dead Load Test
When the flushing mechanism incorporates chain pull or hand operated lever, the cistern,
complete with its fittings, when installed and filled with water to the marked water line and
tested by the application of a dead load of 230 N applied 6 mm from the end of the
operating lever arm for 30 seconds, shall not distort to such an extent that any part becomes
detached. In the case of other operating mechanism, the dead load applied shall be a mass
equivalent to the operating force required to overcome the normal hydrostatic head; Thirty
seconds after the load is removed, the function and appearance of the cistern shall not be
impaired.
Front Thrust Test
The front thrust test shall be applied only to cisterns intended for low level use. The cistern
complete with its fittings, when installed and filled with water to the marked water line and
tested by the method described in IS 7231, shall not distort to such an extent as to be
inoperable or unsightly when the load is removed.
Impact Test
The cistern, complete with its fittings, when installed and filled as described in IS 7231 shall
show no defect after one impact. Repeat the test but with the cistern empty. The cistern shall
show no defect after the further impact.
17.1.2 Draining Board

- 266 -
Draining board made of Glazed fireclay conforming to C.P.W.D. Specifications and as per
directions of Engineer-in-Charge, shall be provided. The size of the board shall be as
specified. The entire surface including bottom of the board shall be finished smooth.
17.1.3 Foot Rests (Fig. 17.4)
Foot rests shall be of Vitreous China conforming to IS 2556 (Part-X). Foot rests which are
rectangular shall meet the minimum requirements and dimensions shown in Fig. 4 and may
be of different designs where so specified. Foot rests of different shapes and sizes shall also
be allowed subject to approval of Engineer-in-Charge.
17.1.4 Glass Shelf/PVC Shelf
Glass shelf shall consist of an assembly of glass shelf, with anodised aluminium angle frame
to support the glass shelf. The shelf shall be of glass of best quality with edges rounded off,
and shall be free from flaws specks or bubbles. The size of the shelf shall be 60 x 12 cm
unless otherwise specified and thickness not less than 5.5 mm. The shelf shall have C.P.
brass brackets which shall be fixed with C.P. brass screws to rawl plugs firmly embedded in
the walls. PVC shelf as per manufacturer’s specifications and size as specified shall be
provided.
17.1.5 Mirror
The mirror shall be of superior glass with edges rounded off or beveled, as specified. It shall
be free from flaws, specks or bubbles. The size of the mirror shall be 60 x 45 cm unless
specified otherwise and its thickness shall not be less than 5.5 mm. It shall be uniformly
silver plated at the back and shall be free from silvering defects. Silvering shall have a
protective uniform covering of red lead paint. Where beveled edge mirrors of 5.5 mm
thickness are not available, fancy looking mirrors with beading/border or aluminium
beading or stainless steel beading/border based on manufacture’s specifications be provided
nothing extra shall be paid on this account. Backing of mirrors shall be provided with
environmentally friendly material other than asbestos cement sheet.
17.1.6 M.S. Stays and Clamps (Fig. 17.5)
The clamps shall be made from 1.5 mm thick M.S. flat of 32 mm width, bent to the required
shape and size to fit tightly on the socket, when tightened with nuts & bolts. It shall be
formed of two semicircular pieces with flanged ends on both sides with holes to fit in the
screws, bolts and nuts 40 mm long. The stay shall be minimum one metre long of 10 mm dia
M.S. bar. One end of the stay shall be bent for embedding in the wall in cement concrete
block of size 20 x 10 x 10 cm in 1:2:4 mix (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone
aggregate 20 mm nominal size). The concrete shall be finished to match with the
surrounding surface.
17.1.7 Pillar Taps
Pillar taps shall be chromium plated brass and shall conform to IS 1795. The nominal sizes
of the pillar tap shall be 15 mm or 20 mm as specified. The nominal size shall be designated
by the nominal bore of the pipe outlet to which the tap is to be fitted. Finished weights of 15
mm and 20 mm pillar taps shall be as prescribed in Table 17.2.

Casting shall be sound and free from laps, blow hole and pitting. External and
internal surfaces shall
be clean, smooth and free from sand and be neatly dressed. The body, bonnet and other parts
shall be
machined true so that when assembled, the parts shall be axial, parallel and cylindrical with
surfaces
smoothly finished.
- 267 -
 The area of waterway through the body shall not be less than the area of the circle of
diameter equal
to the bore of the seating of the tap. The seating of pillar tap shall be integral with the body
and edges
rounded to avoid cutting of washer. Pillar taps shall be nickel chromium plated and
thickness of coating
shall not be less than service grade No. 2 of IS 4827 and plating shall be capable of taking
high polish
which shall not easily tarnish or scale.
Every pillar tap, complete with its component parts shall withstand an internally
applied hydraulic
pressure of 20 Kg/sq. cm maintained for a period of 2 minutes during which period it shall
neither leak
nor sweat.
17.1.9 Plastic Seat and Covers for Water Closet (Fig. 17.6)
The seat and cover shall be of thermosetting or thermoplastic conforming to IS 2548 as
specified. Unless otherwise specified these shall be of closed pattern.
17.1.9.1 Thermosetting plastic used shall conform to grade 2 or 3 of IS 1300 when it is
phenolic plastic or IS 3389 when of urea formaldehyde. Thermo plastic materials used may
be of Polystyrene conforming to type 2 or 3 of IS 2267 or of polypropylene, Appendix A of
IS 2548. In public buildings where rough and heavy use of seats and covers are common,
plastic seats shall be moulded out of thermosetting materials, phenolic or urea formaldehyde
only and the under side of the seat shall be flat with solid moulding.
17.1.9.2 The hinging device shall be bronze or brass with nickel chromium plating
confirming to IS 1068 and the seat shall have not less than three rubber or plastic buffers of
size 25 mm x 40 mm x 10 mm for closed front seats and not less than four for open front
seats, which shall be securely fixed to the under side of the seat unless otherwise specified.
The cover shall be fitted with the same number of buffers as provided for the seat.
17.1.9.3 Seats shall have a smooth finish and shall be non absorptive and free from cracks
and crevices. They shall be capable of being easily cleaned and shall not be adversely
affected by common solvents or household cleanser.
17.1.9.4 Strength: The seats shall withstand without permanent distortion of the seat or
hinge fittings or damage to any finish, a load of 1150 N for 30 minutes applied in the
manner prescribed in IS 2548.
17.1.10 Sinks (Fig. 17.7)
Laboratory sinks and Kitchen sinks shall be of white glazed fire clay confirming to IS 771
(Part-2) with up to date amendments. The kitchen sink shall be of one piece construction
with or without rim but without overflow.
17.1.10.1 Stainless steel kitchen sink shall be of sizes as specified and shall be conforming
to IS 13983 (Fig. 17.7).
17.1.11 Towel Rail
The towel rail shall be of PTMT as specified and as per direction of Engineer-in-charge.
17.1.12 Toilet Paper Holder
The toilet paper holder shall be of CP brass or vitreous china as specified and of size and
design as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. It shall be fixed in position by means of C.P.
brass screws and rawl plugs embedded in the wall.
17.1.13 Urinals
17.1.13.2 Half Stall Urinals (Fig. 17.11) : They shall be of white vitreous China
conforming to IS 2556 (Part 6). They shall be of one piece construction with or without an
integral flushing box rim and provided with slots or alternative fixing arrangement at the flat
back end. They shall be provided with ridges where integral flushing rim is not provided in
the sides of the interior of the bowl, to divert the water towards the front line of the urinal
where integral flushing box rim is specified, water spreaders provided shall conform to IS
2556 Part-6 (Fig. 17.13). These shall be vitreous China of one piece construction with
- 268 -
integral flush inlet. The tolerance of ± 4 per cent may be allowed on the dimensions
specified.
17.1.13.3 Urinal Partition Slabs : Urinal Partition slabs shall be provided, as specified in
the item of work.
17.1.14 Wash Basins (Fig. 17.14, 17.15, 17.16, 17.17 & 17.18)
Wash basins shall be of white vitreous china conforming to IS 2556 (Part-I) and IS 2556
(Part-4). Wash basins either of flat back or angle back as specified shall be of one piece
construction, including a combined overflow. All internal angles shall be designed so as to
facilitate cleaning. Each basin shall have a rim on all sides, except sides in contact with the
walls and shall have a skirting at the back. Basins shall be provided with single or double
tap holes as specified. The tap holes shall be 28 mm square or 30 mm round or 25 mm round
for pop up hole. A suitable tap hole button shall be supplied if one tap hole is not required in
installation. Each basin shall have circular waste hole to which the interior of basin shall
drain. The waste hole shall be either rebated or beveled internally with dia meter of 65 mm
at top. Each basin shall be provided with a non-ferrous 32 mm waste fitting. Stud slots to
receive the brackets on the underside of the wash basin shall be suitable for a bracket with
stud not exceeding 13 mm diameter, 5 mm high and 305 mm from the back of basin to the
centre of the stud. The stud slots shall be of depth sufficient to take 5 mm stud. Every basin
shall have an integral soap holder recess or
recesses, which shall fully drain into the bowl. A slot type of overflow having an area of not
less than 5 sq. cm, shall be provided and shall be so designed as to facilitate cleaning of the
overflow. Where oval shape or round shape wash basins are required to be fixed these shall
be fixed preferably in RCC platform with local available stone topping either fully sunk in
stone top or top flush with the stone topping as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
The wash basins shall be one of the following patterns and sizes as specified (Fig. 17.14).
(a) Flat back: 660 x 460 mm (Surgeon’s Basin)
630 × 450 mm
550 × 400 mm
450 × 300 mm
(b) Angle back: 600 × 480 mm
400 × 400 mm
White glazed pedestals for wash basins, where specified shall be provided. The quality of
the glazing of the pedestal shall be exactly the same as that of the basin along with which it
is to be installed. It shall be completely recessed at the back to accommodate supply and
waste pipes and fittings. It shall be capable of supporting the basin rigidly and adequately
and shall be so designed as to make the height from the floor to top of the rim of basin 75 to
80 cm as shown in Fig. 17.14, 17.15, 17.16, 17.17 & 17.18. All the waste fittings shall be
brass chromium plated, or as specified.
17.1.15 Waste Fittings for Wash Basins and Sinks (Fig. 17.8)
The waste fittings shall be of nickel chromium plated brass, with thickness of plating not
less than service grade 2 of IS 4827 which is capable of receiving polish and will not easily
scale off. The fitting shall conform in all respect to IS 2963 and shall be sound, free from
laps, blow holes and fittings and other manufacturing defects. External and internal surfaces
shall be clean and smooth. They shall be neatly dressed and be truly machined so that the
nut smoothly moves on the body. Waste fitting for wash basins shall be of nominal size of
32 mm. Waste fittings for sinks shall be of nominal size 50 mm.
17.1.16 Water Closet (Fig. 17.19, 17.20, 17.21, 17.22 & 17.23)
17.1.16.1 Squatting Pans (Indian Type W.C.) (Fig. 17.19, 17.20 & 17.21) : Squatting pans
shall be of white vitreous china conforming to IS 2556 Part-I for General Requirements and
relevant IS codes for each pattern as described below:
(i) Long pattern-conforming to IS 2556 (Part-3).
(ii) Orissa pattern-conforming to IS 2556 (Part-3).
(iii) Integrated type conforming to IS 2556 (Part-14).
Preferably Orissa type pan should be used.
- 269 -
Each pan shall have an integral flushing rim of suitable type. It shall also have an inlet or
supply horn for connecting the flush pipes, as shown in Fig. 17.19, 17.20 & 17.21. The
flushing rim and inlet shall be of the self draining type. It shall have weep hole at the
flushing inlet to the pan. The flushing inlet shall be in the front, unless otherwise specified
or ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge. The inside of the bottom of the pan shall have
sufficient slope from the front towards the outlet and the surface shall be uniform and
smooth to enable easy and quick disposal while flushing. The exterior surface of the outlet
below the flange shall be an unglazed surface which shall have grooves at right angles to the
axis of the outlet. In all cases a pan shall be provided with a (100 mm) S.C.I. trap ‘P’ or ‘S’
type with approximately 50 mm water seal and 50 mm dia vent horn, where required by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
17.1.16.2 Wash Down Type (European Type W.C.) (Fig. 17.22 & 17.23) : Water closets
shall be of white vitreous china conforming to IS 2556 (Part-1) and 2556 (Part-2), as
specified and shall be of “Wash down type”. The closets shall be either of the two patterns
(Pattern I & Pattern II) and sizes as shown in Fig. 17.22 & 17.23 as specified. The closets
shall be of one piece construction. Each water closet shall have not less than two holes
having a minimum diameter of 6.5 mm for fixing to floor and shall have an integral flushing
rim of suitable type. It shall also have an inlet or supply horn for connecting the flushing
pipe of dimensions as shown in table in Fig. 17.20 & 17.21 the flushing rim may be boxed
or open type. In the case of box rims adequate number of holes, on each side together with a
slot opposite the inlet shall be provided. The flushing rim and inlet shall be of the self
draining type. The water closet shall have a weep hole at the flushing inlet. Each water
closet shall have an integral trap with either ‘S’ or ‘P’ outlet with at least 50 mm water seal.
For P trap, the slope of the outlet shall be 14 deg. below the horizontal. Where required the
water closet shall have an antisiphonage 50 mm dia vent horn on the outlet side of the trap
with dimension conforming to those given in Fig. 17.22 and on either right or left hand or
centre as specified set at an angle of 45 deg. and invert of vent hole not below the central
line of the outlet. The inside surface of water closets and traps shall be uniform and smooth
in order to enable an efficient flush. The serrated part of the outlet shall not be glazed
externally. The water closet, when sealed at the bottom of the trap in line with the back
plate, shall be capable of holding not less than 15 litres of water between the normal water
level and the highest possible water level of the water closet as installed.
17.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION OF W.C. PAN
17.2.1 The work shall be carried cut, complying in all respects with the requirements of
relevant byelaws of the local body in whose jurisdiction the work is situated.
17.2.2 Any damage caused to the building, or to electric, sanitary, water supply or other,
installations etc. therein, either due to negligence on the part of the contractor, or due to
actual requirements of the work, shall be made good and the building or the installation shall
be restored to its original condition by the contractor. Nothing extra shall be paid for such
restoration works except where otherwise specified.
17.2.3 For making good the damage to the under mentioned items of work, the
specifications as given in the following paras shall apply, unless directed otherwise.
(a) Masonry Work: The masonry work shall be made good by using the same class of
bricks, tiles or stones as was damaged during the execution of the work. The mortar used
shall be cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 fine sand) or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
(b) Plain Concrete Work : Concrete work for sub-grade of the flooring, foundations and
other plain concrete works shall be cement concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand : 10
graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size). A coat of neat cement slurry shall be applied
at the junction with old work, before laying fresh concrete.
(c) Cement Concrete Flooring and R.C.C. Work : Cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 Cement : 2
Coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) shall be used after applying a
coat of neat cement slurry at the junction with old work, and the surface finished to match
with the surrounding surface.

- 270 -
(d) Plastering: Cement plaster 1:4 (1 cement: 4 sand) shall be used. The sand shall be fine
or coarse, as used in the original work. The surface shall be finished with two or more coats
of white wash, colour wash, distemper or painting as required, but where the surface is not
to be white washed, colour washed, distempered or painted, it shall be finished as required
to match with the surrounding surface.
(e) Other Items: Damage to any other item shall be made good as directed by the Engineer-
in-Charge.
Note: In all the above operations the damaged portion shall be cut in regular geometric
shape and cleaned before making good the same.
17.2.4 All exposed G.I., C.I. or lead pipes and fittings shall be painted with approved quality
of paint and shade as specified. The painting work shall conform to specification described
under SH: Painting.
17.2.5 All sanitary and plumbing work shall be carried out through licensed plumbers.
17.2.6 On completion of the work the site shall be cleaned and all rubbish disposed off as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
17.2.7 Various sanitary fittings described under 17.1 including fixing shall be enumerated
individually or in combination under relevant items of works as described below. When
used in combination, specifications as described under relevant paras shall apply but nothing
extra shall be paid for making connections required for successful functioning of the
combination.
17.4 INSTALLATIONS OF FLUSHING CISTERN
17.4.1 Fixing
17.4.1.1 Low Level Cistern: The cistern shall be fixed on C.I. cantilever brackets which
shall be firmly embedded in the wall in cement concrete (1:2:4) block 100 x 75 x 150 mm.
Connection between cistern and closet shall be made by means of 40 mm dia flush bend
with rubber or G.I. inlet connection as specified.
17.4.1.2 Automatic Cistern: Clause 17.4.1.1 shall apply except that CP Brass stop cock
shall be provided for cistern having a capacity of more than 5 liter. The main & distribution
flush pipe shall be fixed to the wall by means of standard pattern holder bat clamp shown in
Fig. 17.5.
17.4.2 Painting
The brackets shall be painted, if specified, with two or more coats of paint of approved
shade and quality.
17.4.3 Measurements
Cistern, including all fittings, shall be measured in numbers.
17.4.4 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above.
17.5 INSTALLATION OF MIRROR
17.5.1 Fixing
The mirror shall be mounted on backing with environmentally friendly material other than
asbestos cement sheet shall be fixed in position by means of 4 C.P. brass screws and C.P.
brass washers, over rubber washers and wooden plugs firmly embedded in walls. C.P. brass
clamps with C.P. brass screws may be an alternative method of fixing, where so directed.
Unless specified otherwise the longer side shall be fixed horizontally.
17.5.2 Measurements
Mirror shall be measured in numbers.
17.5.3 Rate
Rate shall include the cost of all the materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above.

17.7 INSTALLATION OF SEAT AND COVER TO WATER CLOSET

17.7.1 Fixing

- 271 -
The seat shall be fixed to the pan by means of two corrosion resistant hinge bolts with a
minimum length of shank of 65 mm and threaded to within 25 mm of the flange supplied by
the manufacturer along with the seat. Each bolt shall be provided with two suitably shaped
washers of rubber or other similar materials for adjusting the level of the seat while fixing it
to the pans. In addition, one non-ferrous or stainless steel washer shall be provided with
each bolt. The maximum external diameter of the washer fixed on the underside of the pan
shall not be greater than 25 mm. Alternative hinging devices as supplied by the
manufacturer of the seat can also be used for fixing with the approval of Engineer-in-
Charge.
17.7.2 Measurements
Seat with cover shall be measured in numbers.
17.7.3 Rate
Rate shall include the cost of all the materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above.
17.8 INSTALLATION OF SINK
17.8.0 The installation shall consist of assembly of sink C.I. brackets, union and G.I. or
P.V.C. waste pipe.
17.8.1 Fixing
The sink shall be supported on C.I. cantilever brackets, embedded in cement concrete
(1:2:4) block of size 100 x 75 x 150 mm. Brackets shall be fixed in position before the dado
work is done. The C.P. brass or P.V.C. union shall be connected to 40 mm nominal bore
G.I. or PVC waste pipe which shall be suitably bent towards the wall and shall discharge
into a floor trap. C.P. brass trap and union and waste shall be paid separately. The height of
front edge of sink from the floor level shall be 80 cm.
17.8.2 Measurements
The sinks shall be measured in numbers.
17.8.3 Rate
Rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above but shall not included the cost of waste fitting and brackets which shall be
paid for separately.
17.9 INSTALLATION OF URINAL LIPPED, HALF STALL (SINGLE OR RANGE)
(FIG. 17.9 & 17.11)
17.9.0 Urinal installation shall consist of a lipped urinal (Single or range), an automatic
flushing cistern, G.I. flush and waste pipe. The capacity of flushing cistern and relevant size
of flush pipe for urinals in a range shall be as prescribed in Table 17.3. Waste pipe shall be
of 32 mm nominal bore G.I. pipe and shall be paid separately.
17.9.1 Fixing
Urinals shall be fixed in position by using wooden plugs and screws. It shall be at a height
of 65 cm from the standing level to the top of the lip of the urinal, unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer-in- Charge. The size of wooden plugs shall be 50 mm × 50 mm at base
tapering to 38 mm × 38 mm at top and of length 5.0 cms. These shall be fixed in the wall in
cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 fine sand). After the plug fixed in the wall, the mortar shall
be cured till it is set.

Each urinal shall be connected to 32 mm dia waste pipe which shall discharge into the
channel or a floor trap. The connection between the urinal and flush or waste pipe shall be
made by means of putty or white lead mixed with chopped hemp.
17.9.2 Measurements
- 272 -
Urinals shall be measured in numbers.
17.9.3 Rate
Rate shall include the cost of all the materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above.
17.10 INSTALLATION OF STALL URINAL (SINGLE OR RANGE)
17.10.0 The installation shall consist of stall urinal (single or range), automatic flushing
cistern, C.P. brass standard flush pipes, C.P. brass spreader and C.I. trap with tail piece and
outlet grating of C.P. brass. Capacity of flushing cistern and relevant size of flush pipe, C.I.
trap shall be as prescribed in Table 17.4.

17.10.1 Fixing
The floor slab shall be suitably sunk to receive the stall urinal. Where the floor slab is not
sunk, the stall urinal shall be provided over a platform. The lip of the stall urinal shall be
flush with the finished floor level adjacent to it. The stall urinal shall be laid over a fine sand
cushion of average 25 mm thickness. A space of not less than 3 mm shall be provided all-
round, in front, sides and filled with water proofing plastic compound. Care shall be taken
that after the sub-grade for the floor is cast, one week should lapse before urinals are
installed. The trap and fittings shall be fixed as directed by the Engineerin- Charge. Payment
for the floor and its sub-grade shall be made separately.
17.10.2 Measurements
Stall urinals shall be measured in numbers.
17.10.3 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all the materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above.
17.11 INSTALLATION OF WASH BASIN (FIG. 17.14, 17.15, 17.16, 17.17 & 17.18)
17.11.0 The installation shall consist of an assembly of wash basin, pillar taps, C.I. brackets,
C.P. brass or P.V.C. union, as specified. The wash basin shall be provided with one or two
15 mm C.P. brass pillar taps, as specified. The height of top of the rim of wash basin from
the floor level shall be within 750 mm to 800 mm.
17.11.1 Fixing
The basin shall be supported on a pair of C.I. cantilever brackets conforming to IS 775 and
be embedded in cement concrete (1:2:4) block 100 x 75 x 150 mm. Use of M.S. angle or
Tee section as bracket is not permitted. Brackets shall be fixed in position before dado work
is done. The brackets have been shown in Fig. 17.15. The wall plaster on the rear shall be
cut to rest over the top edge of the basin so as not to leave any gap for water to seep through
between wall plaster & skirting of basin. After fixing the basin, plaster shall be made good
and surface finished matching with the existing one. S.C.I. floor traps conforming to IS
1729 having 50 mm water seal (minimum 35 mm in two pipe systems with gully trap)
should be used. Waste pipes laid horizontally should have gradient not flatter than 1 in 50
and not steeper than 1 in 10. The waste water from wash basin shall be discharged directly
to vitreous semi-circular open drain, discharging to a floor trap and finally to the vertical
stack (Fig.17.15) on upper floors and in case of ground floor, the waste water shall be
discharged either directly to the gully trap or through the floor trap (Fig. 17.16). C.P. brass
trap and union are not to be used in such situations.
If waste pipe is concealed or crosses the wall, waste water shall be discharged through non
ferrous trap like PVC Engineering plastic or C.P. brass and union (Fig. 17.17) to vertical
stack. The C.P. brass trap and union shall be paid for separately. Where so specified a 20

- 273 -
mm G.I. puff pipe terminating with a perforated brass cap screwed on it on the outside of
the wall or connected to the antisyphon stack shall be provided.
17.11.2 Measurements
Wash basins shall be measured in numbers.
17.11.3 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all the materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above.
17.13 INSTALLATION OF WATER CLOSET
17.13.0 Installation shall consist of water closet with seat and cover, flushing cistern and
flush bend.
17.13.1 Fixing
The closet shall be fixed to the floor by means of 75 mm long 6.5 mm diameter counter-
sunk bolts and nuts embedded in floor concrete.
17.13.2 Measurements
Water closets shall be measured in numbers.
17.13.3 Rate
Rate shall include the cost of all the materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above.
17.16 INSTALLATION OF TOWEL RAIL
It shall be fixed in position by means of C.P. brass screws on wall surface by PVC dash
fasteners, firmly embedded in wall.
17.16.1 Measurements
Tower rails shall be measured in numbers.
17.16.2 Rate
Rate shall include the cost of all the materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above.
Note:- For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 2, Sub Head 17.0

- 274 -
 SUB HEAD : 18.0
WATER SUPPLY
18.1 TERMINOLOGY
Air Gap: The unobstructed vertical distance through the free atmosphere between the
lowest opening from any pipe or fitting supplying water to a tank or other device and the
flood level rim of the receptacle in a water supply system.
Air Valve: A valve that releases air from a pipe line automatically without loss of water, or
introduces air into a pipe line automatically if the internal pressure becomes less than that of
the atmosphere.
Available Head: The head of water available at the point of consideration due to main’s
pressure or overhead tank or any other source of pressure.
Back Flow: The flow of water into the distributing pipes of water system from any source
or sources other than its intended source.
Back Siphonage: The flowing back of used, contaminated or polluted water from a
plumbing fitting or vessel into a water supply system due to a lowering of pressure in such
system.
Ball Cock (Fig. 18.1): A faucet opened or closed by the fall or rise of a ball floating on the
surface of water.
Branch (Fig. 18.2): (i) A special form of cast iron pipe used for making connections to
water mains. The various types are called T, Y, T-Y, double Y, and V branches, according
to their respective shapes.
(ii) Any part of a piping system other than a main.
Capacity: The storage capacity of storage or flushing cistern or a tank when filled up to the
water line.
Non Return Valve (Fig. 18.4): A device provided with a disc hinged on one edge so that it
opens in the direction of normal flow and closes with reversal of flow.
Collar: A pipe fitting in the form of a sleeve for jointing the spigot ends of two pipes in the
same alignment.
Coupling: A pipe fitting with inside threads only, used for connecting two pieces of pipe.
Cross (Fig. 18.2): A pipe fitting used for connecting four pipes at right angles.
Elbow (Fig. 18.2): A pipe fitting for providing a sharp change of direction in a pipe line.
Ferrule (Fig. 18.2): A pipe fitting for connecting a service pipe to a water main.
Fitting: Anything fitted or fixed in connection with the supply, measurement, control,
distribution, utilization or disposal of water.
Fire Hydrant (Fig. 18.5): A device connected to a water main and provided with necessary
valve and outlets, to which a fire hose may be attached for discharging water at a high rate
for the purpose of extinguishing fires, washing down streets, or flushing out the water main.
Flange (Fig. 18.2): A projecting flat rim on the end of a valve, pipe etc.
Flanged Pipe (Fig. 18.2): A pipe provided with flanges so that the ends can be joined
together by means of bolts.
Float Valve: A valve in which the closure to an opening such as a plug or gate is actuated
by a float to control the flow into a tank.
Sluice Valve (Gate Valve) (Fig. 18.4) : A valve in which the flow of water is cut off by
means of a circular disc., fitting against machine-smoothed faces, at right angles to the
direction of flow. The disc is raised or lowered by means of a threaded stem connected to
the handle of the valve; the opening in the valve is usually as large as the full bore of the
pipe.
Nipple (Fig. 18.2): A tubular pipe fitting usually threaded on both ends and less than 300
mm long used for connecting pipes or fittings.
Offset: A combination of elbows or bends which brings one section of the pipe out of line
but into a line parallel with the other section in a piping system.
Reflux Valve (Fig. 18.4): A non return valve used in a pipe line at a rising gradient to
prevent water that is ascending the gradient from flowing back in the event of a burst lower
down.
- 275 -
Socket (Fig. 18.2): The female part of the spigot and socket joint.
Spigot (Fig. 18.2): The male part of a spigot and socket joint.
Stop Cock (Fig. 18.3): A control valve fixed at the end of a communication pipe which
controls the supply from the water main.
Storage Tank: A tank or a cistern for storage of water which is connected to the water main
by means of a supply pipe.
Service or Supply Pipe: Pipe through which supply is drawn from water mains.
Union (Fig. 18.2): A pipe fitting used for joining the ends of two pipes neither of which can
be turned.
Valve: A device used for controlling the flow of water in a pipe line.
18.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
18.2.1 Any damage caused to the building, or to electric, sanitary water supply or other
installations etc. therein either due to negligence on the part of the contractor, or due to
actual requirements of the work, shall be made good and the building or the installations
shall be restored to its original condition by the contractor. Nothing extra shall be paid for it,
except where otherwise specified.
18.2.2 All water supply installation work shall be carried out through licensed plumbers.
18.2.3 It is most important to ensure that wholesome water supply provided for drinking and
culinary purposes, is in no way liable to contamination from any less satisfactory water.
There shall, therefore, be no cross connection whatsoever between a pipe or fitting for
conveying or containing wholesome water and a pipe or fitting for conveying or containing
impure water or water liable to contamination or of uncertain quality of water which has
been used for any purpose. The provision of reflux or non-return valves or closed and sealed
valves shall not be construed a permissible substitute for complete absence of cross-
connection.
18.2.4 Where a supply of wholesome water is required as an alternative or standby to supply
of less satisfactory water or is required to be mixed with the latter, it shall be delivered only
into a cistern, and by a pipe or fitting discharging into the air gap at a height above the top
edge of the cistern equal to twice its nominal bore, and in no case less than 15 cm.
18.2.5 No piping shall be laid or fixed so as to pass into, through or adjoining any sewer,
scour outlet or drain or any manhole connected therewith nor through any ash pit or manure-
pit or any material of such nature that can cause undue deterioration of the pipe.
18.2.6 Where the laying of any pipe through fouled soil or previous material is unavoidable,
the piping shall be properly protected from contact with such soil or material by being
carried through an exterior cast iron tube or by some other suitable means. Any piping or
fitting laid or fixed which does not comply with the above requirements, shall be removed
and re-laid in conformity with the above requirements.
18.2.7 The design of the pipe work shall be such that there is no possibility of backflow
towards the source of supply from any cistern or appliance whether by siphonage or
otherwise, and reflux or nonreturn valves shall not be relied upon to prevent such back flow.
18.2.8 All pipe work shall be so designed, laid or fixed, and maintained so that it remains
completely watertight, thereby avoiding wastage of water, damage to property and the risk
of contamination of the water conveyed.
18.2.9 In designing and planning the layout of the pipe work, due attention shall be given to
the maximum rate of discharge, required economy in labour and materials, protection
against damage and corrosion, protection from frost, if required, and to avoidance of
airlocks, noise transmission and unsightly arrangement.
18.2.10 To reduce frictional losses, piping shall be as smooth as possible inside. Methods of
jointing shall be such as to avoid internal roughness and projection at the joints, whether of
the jointing materials or otherwise.
18.2.11 Change in diameter and in direction shall preferably be gradual rather than abrupt to
avoid undue loss of head. No bend or curve in piping shall be made so as to materially
reduce or alter the cross-section.

- 276 -
18.2.12 Underground piping shall be laid at such a depth that it is unlikely to be damaged by
frost or traffic loads and vibrations. It shall not be laid in ground liable to subsidence, but
where such ground cannot be avoided; special precautions shall be taken to avoid damage to
the piping. Where piping has to be laid across recently disturbed ground, the ground shall be
thoroughly consolidated so as to provide a continuous and even support.
18.2.13 Where the service pipe is of diameter less than 50 mm the stop valves shall be of the
screwdown type and shall have loose washer plates to act as non-return valves. Other stop
valves in the service line may be of the gate type.
18.2.14 In flats and tenements supplied by a common service pipe a stop valve shall be fixed
to control the each branch separately. In large buildings a sufficient number of stop valves
shall be fixed on branch pipes, and to control groups of ball valves and draw off taps, so as
to minimize interruption of the supply during repairs, all such stop valves shall be fixed in
accessible positions and properly protected from being tampered with, they may be of the
gate type to minimize loss of head by friction.
18.2.15 Water for drinking or for culinary purposes as far as possible shall be on branch
pipes connected directly to the service pipe.
18.2.16 Pumps shall not be allowed on the service pipe as they cause a drop of pressure on
the suction side thereby affecting the supply to the adjoining properties. In cases where
pumping is required, a properly protected storage tank of adequate capacity shall be
provided to feed the pump.
18.2.17 Service pipes shall be so designed and constructed as to avoid air-locks, so that all
piping and fittings above ground can be completely emptied of water to facilitate repairs.
There shall be draining taps or draw-off taps (not underground) at the lowest points, from
which the piping shall rise continuously to draw-off taps, ball valves, cisterns, or vents
(where provided at the high points).
18.2.18 Service pipes shall be designed so as to reduce the production and transmission of
noise as much as possible. Appliances which create noise shall be installed as far distant as
possible from the living rooms of the house. High velocity of water in piping and fittings
shall be avoided. Piping shall be confined, as far as possible, to rooms where appliances are
fixed, it shall have easy bends, and where quietness is particularly desired, holder bats or
clamps shall be insulated from the piping by suitable pads.
18.2.19 The rising pipe to the storage cistern, if any, or to any feed cistern shall be taken as
directly as possible to the cistern and shall be fixed away from windows or ventilators.
18.2.20 All pipe work shall be planned so that the piping is accessible for inspection,
replacement and repair. To avoid its being unsightly, it is usually possible to arrange it in or
adjacent to cupboards, recesses, etc. provided there is sufficient space to work on the piping
with the usual tools. Piping shall not be buried in walls or solid floors. Where unavoidable,
piping may be buried for short distances provided that adequate protection is given against
damage and that no joints are buried. If piping is laid in ducts or chases, these shall be
roomy enough to facilitate repairs and shall be so constructed as to prevent the entry of
vermin. To facilitate removal of pipe casing, floor boards covering piping shall be fixed
with screws or bolts.
18.2.21 When it is necessary for a pipe to pass through a wall or floor, a sleeve shall be
fixed therein for insertion of the pipe and to allow freedom for expansion, contraction and
other movement. Piping laid in wood floors shall, where possible, be parallel with the joists.
18.2.22 Where storage tanks are provided to meet overall requirements of water connection
of service pipe with any distributing pipe shall not be permitted except one direct connection
for culinary or drinking requirements.
18.2.23 No service pipe shall be connected to any water closet or urinal. All such supplies
shall be from flushing cisterns which shall have supply from storage tank.
18.2.24 No service or supply pipe shall be connected directly to any hot-water system or to
any apparatus used for heating other than through a feed cistern thereof.

18.3 MATERIALS
- 277 -
18.3.0 The standard size of brass or gun metal fittings shall be designated by the nominal
bore of the pipe outlet to which the fittings are attached. A sample of each kind of fittings
shall be got approved from the Engineer-in-Charge and all supplies made according to the
approved samples. All cast iron fittings shall be sound and free from laps, blow holes and
pitting. Both internal and external surfaces shall be clean, smooth and free from sand etc.
Burning, plugging, stopping or patching of the casting shall not be permissible. The bodies,
bonnets, spindles and other parts shall be truly machined so that when assembled the parts
shall be axial, parallel and cylindrical with surfaces smoothly finished. The area of the water
way of the fittings shall not be less than area of the nominal bore, chromium plating
wherever specified shall be of 0.3 micron. The chromium shall never be deposited on brass
unless a heavy coating of nickel is interposed. In the case of iron a thick coat of copper shall
first be applied, then one of nickel and finally the chromium. In finish and appearance the
plated articles when inspected shall be free from plating defects such as blisters, pits
roughness and unplated areas and shall not be stained or discoloured. Before fitting is
plated, the washer plate shall be removed from the fittings, the gland packing shall be
protected from the plating solution.

18.3.1 Ball Valve (Brass)

The ball valve shall be of Brass or Gunmetal as specified conforming to IS 1703 (Fig. 18.1).
The ball valve shall be of following two classes:—
(a) High Pressure: High pressure float valves are indicated by the abbreviation ‘HP’ and are
designed for use on mains having pressure of 0.175 MPa or above.
(b) Low Pressure: Low Pressure float valves are indicated by the abbreviation ‘LP’ and are
designed for use on mains having a pressure up to. 0.175 MPa.
The ball valves shall be of following nominal sizes 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm, 40 mm
and 50 mm. The nominal size shall correspond with the nominal bore of the inlet shanks.
Polyethylene floats shall conform to IS 9762.

18.3.2 Bib Taps and Stop Valve

Brass (Fig. 18.3): A bib tap is a draw off tap with a horizontal inlet and free outlet and a stop
valve is a valve with suitable means of connections for insertion in a pipe line for
controlling or stopping the flow. They shall be of specified size and shall be of screw down
type and shall conform to IS 781. The closing device shall work by means of disc carrying a
renewable non-metallic washer which shuts against water pressure on a seating at right
angles to the axis of the threaded spindle which operates it. The handle shall be either crutch
or butterfly type securely fixed to the spindle. Valve shall be of the loose leather seated
pattern. The cocks (taps) shall open in anti-clock wise direction. The bib tap and stop valve
shall be polished bright. The minimum finished weights of bib tap and stop valve shall be as
specified in Table 18.1.

In case these are required to be nickel plated, the plating shall be of the first quality with a
good thick deposit of silvery whiteness capable of taking high polish which will not easily
tarnish or scale.
- 278 -
18.3.3 Ferrules (Fig. 18.2)
The ferrules for connection with C.I. main shall generally conform to IS 2692. It shall be of
non ferrous materials with a C.I. bell mouth cover and shall be of nominal bore as specified.
The ferrule shall be fitted with a screw and plug or valve capable of completely shutting off
the water supply to the communication pipe, if and when required.

18.3.4 Fire Hydrants (Fig. 18.5)

The hydrant shall conform to IS 909 and shall consist of the following components:
(a) Body (d) Gland (g) Valve
(b) Bonnet (e) Spindle Cap (h) Screwed Outlet
(c) Spindle (f) Spindle Nut (i) Outlet and Chain
The body, bonnet, gland, outlet cap and spindle cap and shall be of good quality cast iron
grade FG 200 of IS 210. Outlet, seat for valve, valve, spindle nut, check nut shall be made
of copper alloy as per IS 909.

18.3.5 Gate Valve - Gun Metal (Fig. 18.5)

These shall be of the gun metal fitted with wheel and shall be of gate valve type opening full
way and of the size as specified. These shall generally conform to IS 778.

18.3.6 Pig Lead

Pig lead shall be of uniform quality, clean and free from foreign materials. It shall be of
uniform softness and capable of being easily caulked or driven. It shall conform to IS 782
for caulking lead in all respects.

18.3.7 Lead Wool

Lead wool shall conform to IS 782 in all respects. Lead wool shall consist of fine strands or
plated ribbons of lead. The cross-section of the individual strands shall be flat. The
dimensions in the sectional plane shall not be less than 0.13 mm and not more than 0.90 mm
and the rope shall be supplied in minimum lengths of two metres and the maximum length
in any one package shall be such that the package does not weigh more than 50 Kg.

18.3.8 Non-Return Valve (Gun Metal) (Fig. 18.4)

A non-return valve permits water to flow in one direction only and is provided on the
ascending part of the main to check return flow. The non-return valve shall be of Gun metal
and shall be of horizontal or vertical flow type as specified. The valve shall be of quality
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge and shall generally conform to IS 778.

18.3.9 Pipes and Specials

Pipes and specials may be of any of the following types as specified:
(a) Cast iron centrifugally cast (spun) – IS 1536
(b) Galvanised steel – IS 1239 & IS 4736
(c) PE-AL-PE Pipes – IS 15450
(d) PP-R Pipes – IS 15801
(e) CPVC pipes – IS 15778
In choosing the material for piping and fittings, account shall be taken of the character of the
water to be conveyed through it, the nature of the ground in which the pipes are to be laid
and the relative economics.

18.3.11 Pipes-Galvanised Iron

18.3.11.1 The pipes (tubes) shall be galvanised mild steel hot finished seamless (HFS) or
welded (ERW) HRIW or HFW screwed and socketed conforming to the requirements of IS
1239 Part-I for medium grade. They shall be of the diameter (nominal bore) specified in the

- 279 -
description of the item, the sockets shall be designated by the respective nominal bores of
the pipes for which they are intended.

18.3.11.2 Galvanising shall conform to IS 4736 : The zinc coating shall be uniform
adherent, reasonably smooth and free from such imperfections as flux, ash and dross
inclusions, bare batches, black spots, pimples, lumping runs, rust stains, bulky white
deposits and blisters. The pipes and sockets shall be cleanly finished, well galvanised in and
out and free from cracks, surface flaws laminations and other defects. All screw threads
shall be clean and well cut. The ends shall be cut cleanly and square with the axis of the
tube.

18.3.11.3 The dimensions and weights of pipes and sockets and tolerances shall be as
prescribed in Appendix ‘C’.

18.3.11.4 All screwed tubes and sockets shall have pipe threads conforming to the
requirements of IS 554. Screwed tubes shall have taper threads while the sockets shall have
parallel threads.

18.3.11.5 All tubes shall withstand a test pressure of 50 Kg/sq.cm without showing defects
of any kind.
18.3.11.6 Fittings : The fittings shall be of mild steel tubular or wrought steel fittings
conforming to IS 1239 (Part-2) or as specified. The fittings shall be designated by the
respective nominal bores of the pipes for which they are intended.

18.3.12 Shower Rose Brass

The shower rose shall be of chromium plated brass of specified diameter. It shall have
uniform perforations. The inlet size shall be 15 mm or 20 mm as required.

18.4 LAYING AND JOINTING OF PIPES AND FITTINGS

18.4.1 Unloading

18.4.1.1 The pipes shall be unloaded where they are required.

18.4.1.2 Unloading (except where mechanical handling facilities are available) : Pipes
weighing up to 60 kg shall be handled by two persons by hand passing. Heavier pipes shall
be unloaded from the lorry or wagon by holding them in loops, formed with ropes and
sliding over planks set not steeper than 45 degree. The planks shall be sufficiently rigid and
two ropes shall always be used to roll the pipes down the planks. The ropes should be tied
on the side opposite the unloading. Only one pipe shall be unloaded at a time.

18.4.1.3 Under no circumstances shall the pipes be thrown down from the carriers or be
dragged or rolled along hard surfaces.

18.4.1.4 The pipes shall be checked for any visible damage (such as broken edges, cracking
or spalling of pipe) while unloading and shall be sorted out for reclamation. Any pipe which
shows sufficient damage to preclude it from being used shall be discarded.

18.4.2 Storing
18.4.2.1 The pipes and specials shall be handled with sufficient care to avoid damage to
them. These shall be lined up on one side of the alignment of the trench, socket facing
upgrade when line runs uphill and upstream when line runs on level ground.

18.4.2.2 Each stack shall contain pipes of same class and size, consignment or batch number
and particulars of suppliers, wherever possible, shall be marked on the stack.
- 280 -
18.4.2.3 Storage shall be done on firm, level and clean ground. Wedges shall be provided at
the bottom layer to keep the stack stable.

18.4.3 Cutting
18.4.3.1 Cutting of pipes may be necessary when pipes are to be laid in lengths shorter than
the lengths supplied, such as while replacing accessories like tees, bends, etc. at fixed
position in the pipe lines.

18.4.3.2 A line shall be marked around the pipe with a chalk piece at the point where it is to
be cut. The line shall be so marked that the cut is truly at right angle to the longitudinal axis
of the pipe. The pipe shall be rigidly held on two parallel rafters nailed to cross beams,
taking care that the portion to be cut does not overhang and the cut mark is between the two
rafters. The pipe shall be neatly cut at the chalk mark with carpenter’s saw or hacksaw
having a long blade, by slowly rotating the pipe around its longitudinal axis so as to have the
uncut portion on top for cutting. Cutting of the pipe at the overhang should, as far as
possible, be avoided, as an overhanging and is liable to tear off due to its weight before the
cutting is complete.

18.4.4 Trenches
18.4.4.1 The trenches shall be so dug that the pipes may be laid to the required alignment
and at required depth.

18.4.4.2 Cover shall be measured from top of pipe to the surface of the ground.

18.4.4.3 The bed of the trench, if in soft or made up earth, shall be well watered and
rammed before laying the pipes and the depressions, if any, shall be properly filled with
earth and consolidated in 20 cm layers.

18.4.4.4 If the trench bottom is extremely hard or rocky or loose stony soil, the trench shall
be excavated at least 150 mm below the trench grade. Rocks, stone or other hard substances
from the bottom of the trench shall be removed and the trench brought back to the required
grade by filling with selected fine earth or sand (or fine moorum if fine soil or sand is not
available locally) and compacted so as to provide a smooth bedding for the pipe. Where
excavation requires blasting operation, it shall be ensured that no pipes have been stacked in
the vicinity and completed pipe line in the vicinity has already been covered before starting
of blasting operations; this is necessary to prevent damage to the exposed pipes in the
vicinity by falling stones as a result of blasting.

18.4.4.5 After the excavation of the trench is completed, hollows shall be cut at the required
position to receive the socket of the pipes and these hollows shall be of sufficient depth to
ensure that the barrels of the pipes shall rest throughout their entire length on the solid
ground and that sufficient spaces left for jointing the underside of the pipe joint. These
socket holes shall be refilled with sand after jointing the pipe.

18.4.4.6 Roots of trees within a distance of about 0.5 metre from the side of the pipe line
shall be removed or killed.

18.4.4.7 The excavated materials shall not be placed within 1 metre or half of the depth of
the trench, whichever is greater, from the edge of the trench. The materials excavated shall
be separated and stacked so that in refilling they may be re-laid and compacted in the same
order to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

- 281 -
18.4.4.8 The trench shall be kept free from water. Shoring and timbering shall be provided
wherever required. Excavation below water table shall be done after dewatering the
trenches.

18.4.4.9 Where the pipe line or drain crosses an existing road, the road crossing shall be
excavated half at a time, the 2nd half being commenced after the pipes have been laid in the
first half and the trench refilled. Necessary safety measures for traffic as directed shall be
adopted. All types, water mains cables, etc. met within the course of excavation shall be
carefully protected and supported. Care shall be taken not to disturb the electrical and
communication cable met with during course of excavation, removal of which, if necessary,
shall be arranged by the Engineer-in-Charge.

18.4.5 Laying
18.4.5.1 The pipes shall be lowered into the trench by means of suitable pulley blocks, sheer
legs chains ropes etc. In no case the pipes shall be rolled and dropped into the trench. One
end of each rope may be tied to a wooden or steel peg driven into the ground and the other
end held by men which when slowly released will lower the pipe into the trench. After
lowering, the pipes shall be arranged so that the spigot of one pipe is carefully centered into
the socket of the next pipe, and pushed to the full distance that it can go. The pipe line shall
be laid to the levels required. Specials shall also be laid in their proper position as stated
above.

18.4.5.2 Where so directed, the pipes and specials may be laid on masonry or concrete
pillars. The pipe laid on the level ground, shall be laid with socket facing the direction of
flow of water.

18.4.5.3 The pipes shall rest continuously on the bottom of the trench. The pipes shall not
rest on lumps of earth or on the joints. Four metre long wooden templates may be used to
check the level of the bed. Clearance of approximately 100 mm in depth and width equal to
length of the collar plus 30mm on both sides shall be provided at the joint which shall be
refilled from sides after the joint is made.

18.4.5.4 In unstable soils, such as soft soils and dry lumpy soils it shall be checked whether
the soils can support the pipe lines and if required suitable special foundation shall be
provided.

18.4.5.5 Some clayey soils (for example black cotton soil) are drastically affected by
extremes of
saturation and dryness. In changing from saturated to a dry condition, these soils are
subjected to extraordinary shrinkage which is usually seen in the form of wide and deep
cracks in the earth surface and may result in damages to under ground structures, including
pipe materials. The clay forms a tight gripping bond with the pipe, subjecting it to excessive
stresses as the clay shrinks. It is recommended that in such cases an envelope of a minimum
100 mm of tamped sand shall be made around the pipe line to avoid any bonding.

18.4.5.6 In places where rock is encountered, cushion of fine earth or sand shall be provided
for a depth of 150 mm by excavating extra depth of the trench, if necessary, and the pipes
laid over the cushion. Where the gradient of the bed slopes is more than 30 degree it may be
necessary to anchor a few pipes against sliding downwards (Fig. 18.8).

18.6 LAYING AND JOINTING OF G.I. PIPES (EXTERNAL WORK)

18.6.0 The specifications described in 18.4 shall apply, as far as applicable.

18.6.1 Trenches
- 282 -
The galvanised iron pipes and fittings shall be laid in trenches. The widths and depths of the
trenches for different diameters of the pipes shall be as in Table 18.11.

At joints the trench width shall be widened where necessary. The work of excavation and
refilling shall be done true to line and gradient in accordance with general specifications for
earth work in trenches. When excavation is done in rock, it shall be cut deep enough to
permit the pipes to be laid on a cushion of sand minimum 7.5 cm deep.

18.6.2 Cutting and Threading

Where the pipes have to be out or rethreaded, the ends shall be carefully filed out so that no
obstruction to bore is offered. The end of the pipes shall then be carefully threaded
conforming to the requirements of IS 554 with pipe dies and tapes in such a manner as will
not result in slackness of joints when the two pieces are screwed together. The taps and dies
shall be used only for straightening screw threads which have become bent or damaged and
shall not be used for turning of the threads so as to make them slack, as the later procedure
may not result in a water tight joint. The screw threads of pipes and fitting shall be protected
from damage until they are fitted.

18.6.3 Jointing
The pipes shall be cleaned and cleared of all foreign matter before being laid. In jointing the
pipes, the inside of the socket and the screwed end of the pipes shall be oiled and rubbed
over. Teflon Tape should be used on threads instead of ‘Dhaaga/ Safeda’. The end shall
then be screwed in the socket, Tee etc. with the pipe wrench. Care shall be taken that all
pipes and fittings are properly jointed so as to make the joints completely water tight and
pipes are kept at all times free from dust and dirt during fixing. Burr from the joint shall be
removed after screwing. After laying, the open ends of the pipes shall be temporarily
plugged to prevent access of water, soil or any other foreign matter.

18.6.4 Thrust Blocks (Fig. 18.8)

In case of bigger diameter pipes where the pressure is very high, thrust blocks of cement
concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate of 20 mm nominal size)
of adequate size and shape shall be provided on all bends to transmit the hydraulic thrust to
the ground, spreading it over a sufficient areas, depending upon the type of soil met with.

18.6.5 Painting
The pipes shall be painted with two coats of anticorrosive bitumastic paint of approved
quality.

18.6.6 Testing of Joints

The pipes and fittings after they are laid and jointed shall be tested to hydraulic pressure of 6
Kg/sq. cm (60 meter). The pipes shall be slowly and carefully charged with water allowing
all air to escape and avoiding all shock or water hammer. The draw off taps and stop cocks
shall then be closed and specified hydraulic pressure shall be applied gradually. Pressure
gauge must be accurate and preferably should have been recalibrated before the test. The
test pump having been stopped, the test pressure should be maintained without loss for at
least half an hour. The pipes and fittings shall be tested in sections as the work of laying
proceeds, having the joints exposed for inspection during the testing. Pipes or fittings which
are found leaking shall be replaced and joints found leaking shall be redone, without extra
payment.

- 283 -
18.6.7 Trench Filling
The pipes shall be laid on a layer of 7.5 cm sand and filled up to 15 cm above the pipes. The
remaining portion of the trench shall then be filled with excavated earth as described in
20.3.7. The surplus earth shall be disposed off as directed.

18.6.8 Measurements
The lengths shall be measured in running metre correct to a cm for the finished work, which
shall include G.I. pipe and G.I. fittings such as bends, tees, elbows reducers, crosses, plugs,
sockets, nipples and nuts, but exclude brass or gun metal taps (cocks), valves, unions, lead
connection pipes and shower rose. All pipes and fittings shall be classified according to their
diameters, method of jointing and fixing substance quality and finish. In case of fittings of
an equal bore the pipe shall be described as including all cuttings and wastage. In case of
fittings of unequal bore the largest bore shall be measured.

Note: G.I. unions shall be paid for separately in external work as well as in internal work.
Digging and refilling of trenches shall either be measured separately as specified in the
appropriate clauses of excavation and earth work or clubbed with main item.

18.6.9 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of labour and materials involved in all the operations
described above. The rate shall not include excavation in trenches, painting of pipes and
sand filling all round the pipes, unless otherwise specified.

18.7 LAYING AND JOINTING G.I. PIPES (INTERNAL WORK)

18.7.0 For internal work the galvanised iron pipes and fittings shall run on the surface of the
walls or ceiling (not in chase) unless otherwise specified. The fixing shall be done by means
of standard pattern holder bat clamps, keeping the pipes about 1.5 cm clear of the wall.
When it is found necessary to conceal the pipes, chasing may be adopted or pipes fixed in
the ducts or recess etc., provided there is sufficient space to work on the pipes with the usual
tools. The pipes shall not ordinarily be buried in walls or solid floors. Where unavoidable,
pipes may be buried for short distances provided adequate protection is given against
damage and where so required joints are not buried. Where directed by the Engineer-in-
Charge, a M.S. tube sleeve shall be fixed at a place the pipe is passing through a wall or
floor for reception of the pipe and to allow freedom for expansion and contraction and other
movements. In case the pipe is embedded in walls or floors it should be painted with
anticorrosive bitumastic paints of approved quality. The pipe shall not come in contact with
lime mortar or lime concrete as the pipe is affected by time. Under the floors the pipes shall
be laid in layer of sand filling as done under concrete floors. All pipes and fittings shall be
fixed truly vertical and horizontal unless unavoidable. The pipes shall be fixed to walls with
standard pattern holder bat clamps of required shape and size so as to fit tightly on the pipes
when tightened with screwed bolts, these clamps shall be embedded in brick work in cement
mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand), and shall be spaced at regular intervals in straight
lengths as shown in Table 18.12. The clamps shall be fixed at shorter lengths near the
fittings as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. For G.I. pipes 15 mm diameter, the holes in
the walls and floors shall be made by drilling with chisel or jumper and not by dismantling
the brick work or concrete. However, for bigger dimension pipes the holes shall be carefully
made of the smallest size as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. After fixing the pipes the
holes shall be made good with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) and properly
finished to match the adjacent surface.

- 284 -
Unions will be provided to facilitate connections additions and alterations as well as for
maintenance and for change of pipes. The locations where unions are to be provided will be
decided with prior written approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

18.7.1 Measurements
The lengths shall be measured in running metre correct to a cm for the finished work, which
shall include G.I. pipe and G.I. fittings such as bends, tees elbows, reducers, crosses, plugs,
sockets, nipples and nuts, but exclude brass or gun metal taps (cocks), valves, unions, lead
connection pipes and shower rose. All pipes and fittings shall be classified according to their
diameters, method of jointing and fixing substance, quality and finish. In case of fittings of
an equal bore the pipe shall be described as including all cuttings and waste. In case of
fittings of unequal bore, the largest bore shall be measured. Pipes laid in trenches (or
without supports) and pipes fixed to walls, ceilings, etc. with supports shall be measured
separately.

18.7.2 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of labour and material involved in all the operations described
above. The rate shall include the cost of cutting holes in walls and floors and making good
the same. This shall not however, include concealed pipe work in which case cutting of
chase and making good shall be paid separately. It shall not include painting of pipes and
providing sleeves, unless specified otherwise. It will also not include union which shall be
paid for separately.

18.11 MAKING CONNECTION OF G.I. DISTRIBUTION BRANCH WITH G.I.

MAIN
18.11.1 Preliminary Work
A pit of suitable dimensions shall be dug at the point where the connection is to be made
with the main and earth removed up to 15 cm below the main. The flow of water in the
water main shall also be disconnected by closing the sluice or wheel valves on the mains.

18.11.2 Making Connection

For cutting and jointing 18.6.2 and 18.6.3 shall apply. The G.I. main shall first be cut. Water
if any collected in the pit shall be bailed out and, ends of the G.I. pipes threaded. The
connection of distribution pipe shall then be made after fixing G.I. tee of the required size to
the G.I. main and fittings such as Jam nut, G.I. socket connecting piece etc.

18.11.3 Testing of Joints

After laying and jointing, the pipes and fittings shall be inspected under working condition
of pressure and flow. Any joint found leaking shall be redone and all leaking pipes removed
and replaced without extra payment. The pipes & fittings after they are laid shall be tested to
hydraulic pressure of 6 kg./sq.cm. (60 m). The pipes shall be slowly and carefully charged
with water allowing all air to escape and avoiding all shock of water hammer. The draw of
laps and stop cocks shall then be closed and specified hydraulic pressure shall be applied
gradually. Pressure gauge must be accurate and preferably should have been recalibrated
before the test. The test pump having been stopped, the test pressure should be maintained
- 285 -
without loss for at least half an hour. The pipes and fittings shall be tested in sections as the
work of laying proceeds, having the joints exposed for inspection during the testing.

18.11.4 Finishing
The portion of the pipe in the pit shall be painted with bitumastic paint and encased with
sand 15 cm all-round. The pit shall be filled with earth in level with the original ground
surface watered, rammed and the area dressed.

18.11.5 Measurements
The work of making connections shall be enumerated.

18.11.6 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of labour and materials involved in all the operations
described above.

18.12 FIXING BRASS AND GUN METAL WATER FITTINGS

18.12.0 The fitting shall be fully examined and cleared of all foreign matter before being
fixed. The fitting shall be fitted in the pipe line in a workman like manner. The joints
between fittings and pipes shall be leak-proof when tested to a pressure of 17.5 kg/sq.cm.
The defective fittings and joints shall be replaced or redone.

18.12.1 Measurements
Fittings shall be enumerated.

18.12.2 Rate
The rate shall include cost of all the material and labour involved in all the operation
described above.

18.13 FIXING FERRULES

18.13.1 For fixing ferrule the empty main shall be drilled and tapped at 45 degree to the
vertical and the ferrule screwed in. The ferrule must be so fitted that no portion of the shank
shall be left projecting within the main into which it is fitted.

18.13.2 Measurements
Ferrule shall be enumerated.

18.13.3 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in fixing the ferrule.

18.18 POLYETHYLENE WATER STORAGE TANKS

18.18.1 Material
Polyethylene used for manufacture of tanks and manhole lids may be high density (HDPE),
low density (LDPE) or linear low density (LLDPE) and shall conform to IS 10146.
Polyethylene shall be compounded with carbon black so as to make the tank resistant to
ultra violet rays from the sun. The percentage of carbon black content in polyethylene shall
be 2.5 ± 0.5 percent and it shall be uniformly distributed. The materials used for the
manufacture of tank, manhole lid and fittings shall be such that they neither contaminate the
water nor impart any taste, colour, odour or toxity to water.

18.18.2 Manufacture and Finish

The tanks shall be manufactured by rotational moulding process. Each tank and the manhole
lid shall be single piece having arrangement for fixing and locking the manhole lid with the
- 286 -
tanks. Excess material at the mould parting line and near the top rim shall be neatly cut and
finished. The internal and external surface of the tanks shall be smooth, clean and free from
hidden internal defects like air bubbles, pit and metallic or other foreign material inclusion.
Capacity of the tank, minimum weight of the empty tank (without manhole lid) and the
manufacture brand name shall be embossed on the top surface of the tank near manhole.

18.18.3 Shape, Size and Capacity

The tank shall be cylindrical vertical with closed top having a manhole. Diameter and height
of the tank of various capacities shall be as per manufacturer’s specifications and a
clearance of ± 3 percent shall be permitted on these dimensions. Capacity of the tank or up
to the bottom of the inlet location whichever is less. Capacity of the tank shall be specified.
Extra capacity if any shall be ignored.

18.18.4 Weight and Wall Thickness

Minimum weight of the empty tank (exclusive of manhole lid fittings) and the minimum
wall thickness of top, bottom and sides shall be specified in Table 18.23. Wall thickness
shall be checked beyond 150 mm of the edge where the direction the plane of tank surface
changes.

18.18.5 Installation and Fittings

The flat base of the tank shall be fully supported over its whole bottom area on a durable
rigid flat and level platform sufficiently strong to stand without deflection the weight of the
tank when fully filled with water. Depending upon the capacity and location tanks may be
suitably anchored as per the directions of the Engineer-in-Charge. For inlet, outlet and other
connections fully threaded GI, HDPE or PVC connections with hexagonal check nuts and
washers on either side of the tank wall shall be
provided. Holes for threaded connections shall be drilled and not punched. Pipes entering of
leaving the tank shall be provided with unions and suitably supported on a firm base to
avoid damage to the tank walls.

18.18.6 Manhole Lid

The lid shall rest evenly and fit over the rim of the manhole so as to prevent the ingress of
any foreign matter into the tank. The lid shall be provided with suitable arrangement for
locking it with the tank.

18.18.7 The tank and its components shall conform to the local bye-laws for preventions of
mosquito menace.

18.18.8 Measurements
Dimensions shall be measured to the nearest cm. and weight of the empty tank shall be
recorded to the nearest 100g. Capacity of the tank as defined in 18.18.3 shall be calculated
to the nearest litre.

- 287 -
18.18.9 Rates
The rate shall include the cost of the tank, manhole lid, carriage and delivery at the place
specified. Hoisting, installation, fittings, platform and anchoring shall be payable separately.

18. 20 CUTTING HOLES IN WALL UPTO 30 × 30 CM

18.20.0 Square holes of size as specified or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be
cut in the masonry. Any damage to the adjoining portion or to any other item shall be made
good as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. All dismantled material shall be removed from
the site.

18.20.1 Masonry Work

Brick work etc. shall be made good by using the same class of brick, tile or stone masonry
as was cut during the execution of work. The mortar to be used shall be cement mortar 1:4
(1 cement: 4 fine sand) or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

18.20.2 Finishing
Cement mortar in 1:4 mix (1 cement: 4 sand) shall be used for plastering or pointing, as may
be required. Sand shall be fine or coarse, as used in the original work. The surface shall be
finished with two or more coats of white wash, colour wash, distemper or painting as
required but where the surface is not to be white washed, colour washed, distempered or
painted; it shall be finished smooth with a floating coat of neat cement or as required to
match with the surrounding surfaces.

18.20.3 Measurements
The holes shall be enumerated.

18.20.4 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of labour and materials required for all the operations
described above.

18.21 CUTTING HOLES IN R.C.C. FLOORS (UPTO 15 × 15 CM)

18.21.0 Square holes of size as specified shall be cut in R.C.C. floor and roofs for passing
drain pipe etc. Any damage to the adjoining portion or to any other item shall be made good
- 288 -
as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. All the dismantled material shall be removed from
the site.

18.21.1 Cement Concrete

After insertion of drain pipe etc. the hole shall be repaired with cement concrete 1:2:4 (1
cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) and the surface
finished to match with the existing surface. The top and bottom shall be finished properly to
make the joint leak proof. The specifications for cement concrete work and finishing etc.
shall be the same as detailed under relevant sub-heads.

18.21.2 Measurements
Holes shall be enumerated.

18.21.3 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of labour and material required for all the operations
described above except the pipe which shall be paid for separately.

18.22 CUTTING CHASES IN MASONRY WALLS

18.22.1 Making Chases
Chases are made in the walls for housing G.I. Pipes etc.
I. Cutting of chases in one brick thick and above load bearing walls :
(i) As far as possible services should be planned with the help of vertical chases. Horizontal
chases should be avoided.
(ii) The depths of vertical chases and horizontal chases shall not exceed one third and one
sixth of the thickness of the masonry respectively.
(iii) When narrow stretches of masonry (or short lengths of walls) such as between doors
and windows, cannot be avoided, they should not be pierced with openings for soil pipes or
waste pipes or timber joints, etc. Where there is a possibility of load concentration, such
narrow lengths of walls shall be checked for stresses and high strength bricks mortar or
concrete walls provided, if required.
(iv) Horizontal chases when unavoidable should be located in the upper or lower one third
of height of storey and not more than three chases should be permitted in any stretch of a
wall. No continuous horizontal chase shall exceed one metre in length. Where unavoidable,
stresses in the affected area should be checked and kept within the permissible limits.
(v) Vertical chases should not be closer than 2 m in any stretch of a wall. These shall be kept
away from bearings of beams and lintels. If unavoidable, stresses in the affected area should
be checked and kept within permissible limits.
(vi) Masonry directly above a recess, if under than 30 cm (Horizontal dimension) should be
supported on lintel. Holes in masonry may be provided up to 30 cm width x 30 cm height
without any lintel. In the case of circular holes in masonry, no lintel should be provided up
to 40 cm in diameter.

II. Cutting of chases in half brick load bearing walls

No chase shall be permitted in a half brick load bearing wall and as such no recessed
conduits and concealed pipes shall be provided in half brick thick load bearing walls.

III. Cutting of chases in half brick non-loading bearing walls

In case of non load bearing half brick walls services should be planned with the help of
vertical chases. Horizontal chases should be provided only when unavoidable.

IV. Cutting of chases in stone masonry walls

The provision (i) to (vi) under Sl. No. I are equally applicable to stone masonry walls also.
Note:

- 289 -
1. No inclined chase shall be permitted in brick masonry or stone masonry walls. In case
inclined chases are unavoidable these shall be cut with written approval of the Engineer-in-
Charge, and shall be repaired properly to his satisfaction. However, in half brick masonry
wall, no inclined chase will be permitted.
2. Chases shall be made by chiseling out the masonry to proper line & depth. Any damage
to the adjoining portion or to any other item shall be made good, as decided by the
Engineer-in-Charge, for which no extra payment shall be made. All dismantled material
shall be removed from site.

18.22.2 Filling Chases

After G.I. Pipes etc. are fixed in chases, the chases shall be filled with cement concrete 1:3:6
(1 cement: 3 coarse sand: 6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) or cement mortar
1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) as may be specified or otherwise directed by the Engineer-in-
Charge and made flush with the masonry surface. The concrete surface shall be roughened
with wire brushes to provide a key for plastering.

18.22.3 Measurements
Chases shall be measured in running meter correct to a cm.

18.22.4 Rates
The rate shall include the cost of labour the materials involved in all the operations
described above excluding the cost of providing pipes etc. which shall be paid separately.
Note:- For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 2, Sub Head 18.0

- 290 -
 SUB HEAD : 22.0
WATER PROOFING TREATMENT

22.0 TERMINOLOGY

Water Bars
Water bars are preformed strips of impermeable materials which are embedded in the
concrete during construction.

Low Partition Walls

Parapet walls of height less than 45 cm.

Expansion Joints
Joints provided in the structure to allow for thermal expansion/construction.

Blended Cement
Cement mixed with water proofing compound in liquid or powder form.

22.3 WATER PROOFING TREATMENT TO VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL

SURFACE OF
DEPRESSED PORTION OF WC, KITCHEN AND THE LIKE
22.3.1 Before the Water Proofing Treatment
Before the water proofing treatment, the internal plaster of ceiling and walls of WC block
leaving the portion for dado/skirting should be completed. Grooving / chasing for doing the
concealed work of GI/CI pipes/Electrical conduits should be completed. Cleaning the
depressed/sunken portion of WC of all debris, extra mortar sticking to the vertical and
horizontal surface etc. Necessary holes for ‘P’ trap /Nhani trap/Water escape pipe etc should
be completed.

22.3.2 Preparing Surface and Fixing Pipes and Fittings

Before the water proofing treatment work, proper key in the concrete surface should be
provided. The depressed/sunken portion should be hacked by a hacking tool, after the
concrete slab is cast and when this concrete is still green. The vertical surfaces of the
depressed /sunken portion should be hacked with a hacking tool just
after the shuttering is removed. In case of old work, the water proofing treatment on such
surfaces shall be permitted after making proper spatter dash key. Fixing the ‘P’ trap in
position and all other pipes work including the water escape pipe shall be fixed properly and
the holes should be plugged carefully before taking up the water proofing work.

22.3.3 1st Course

Cement duly blended with water proofing compound as explained in clause 22.1 shall be
used for preparing the cement slurry. The consistency of the slurry should be such that 4.4
kg. of blended cement with water proofing
compound is used per sq. metre area of surface to be treated. The slurry should be started
from the vertical faces towards the bottom of the floor as shown in Fig. 22.4. Particular care
should be taken to see that the slurry is applied to corners without leaving any gap.

22.3.4 2nd Course

Immediately on applying the blended cement slurry on the surface to be treated cement
plaster 20 mm thick in CM 1:3 (1 blended cement: 3 coarse sand) shall be applied both on
vertical and horizontal surfaces taking particular care to complete the entire depressed/
sunken portion of WC within a day so that the plaster can be done without any joint.
Junctions shall be properly rounded. The surfaces of the plaster shall be left rough but

- 291 -
finished in one plain and cured for a week. On completion of the curing period both
horizontal and vertical surfaces shall be cleaned properly and gently and allowed to dry.

22.3.5 3rd Course

Only after the surface is completely dried the blown or residual bitumen shall be applied @
1.7 kg. of bitumen per sqm area.

22.3.6 4th Course

PVC sheet 400 micron thick shall be spread evenly without any kink immediately, so that
the PVC sheet sticks to the surface firmly. PVC sheet shall be continued to be laid over the
main slab upto 100 mm. Overlapping of PVC sheet should be done with a minimum overlap
of 100 mm, duly pasting the overlapped sheet with an application of bitumen @ 1.7 kg./
sqm. The projections of pipes and ‘P’ trap outlet etc. inside the depressed/sunken portion of
WC shall also be cladded with water proofing treatment layer upto a height of 150 mm,
using a coat of bitumen with PVC sheet complete. The surfaces of depressed/sunken portion
of WC shall not be left without covering with specified filling material and base concrete,
otherwise the PVC sheet layer may be tampered by the labour working in the vicinity.
Fixing up of WC pan, filling specified material and the top base concrete should be done as
early as possible and the top horizontal layer of water proofing may be taken up later i.e.
just before laying the floor tiles.

22.3.7 Measurement
Length and breadth shall be measured along the finished surface correct to a cm. and area
shall be worked out to nearest 0.01 sqm. No payment however shall be made for the 100
mm overlap of PVC Sheet over the roof slab.

22.3.8 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of labour and materials involved in all the operations
described above.

22.5 WATER PROOFING TREATMENT IN SUNKEN PORTION OF WCs,

BATHROOMS ETC.
22.5.1 Preliminaries to be Attended
The preliminaries shall be attended as described in clause 22.3.1.

22.5.2 Preparing Surface, Fixing Pipes and Fittings

In this case, unlike as described in clause 22.3.2, no hacking of surface need be made, but
only extra mortar sticking to the surface should be removed and the surface should be
cleaned thoroughly. Fixing ‘P’ trap etc. shall be done as described in Clause 22.3.2.

22.5.3 Providing and Laying of Slurry for First Layer

The consistency of the slurry should be such as to cover the desired area by using 0.488 kg
of blended cement per sqm of area. On deciding the correct quantity of water required per
sqm. area the required quantity of slurry
should be prepared which can be applied over the desired surface within half an hour of
mixing with 0.488 kg. of grey cement + 0.253 kg. water proofing compound as per
manufacturer specifications + x litres of water per sqm. area and the required quantity of
slurry thus prepared should only be used for first application. The first layer shall be applied
with painting brushes over the specified and dampened area carefully including the corners,
holes on the surfaces and joints of pipes in concrete etc. and the application should continue
at least upto 150 mm height of fixtures of pipes from the surface. The surface on application
shall be air cured for 4 hours.

22.5.4 Providing and Laying of Slurry for Second Layer

- 292 -
The quantity of slurry required for second application to be covered within an hour of
mixing shall be prepared with 0.242 kg. cement + 0.126 kg. water proofing compound + y
litres of water per sqm. Area and the required quantity of slurry thus prepared should only
be used for second application. The application of 2nd layer of slurry is same as for first
layer as detailed in clause 22.5.3. The applied surface shall be allowed to air cure for 4 hours
and thereafter water curing shall be done for full 48 hours. In case no further work as
described above is to be taken up immediately on completion of water proofing treatment
due to any reason it is recommended to protect the treated portion with cement plaster 1:4 as
a protective layer for which separate payment shall be made to the contractor.

22.5.5 Measurement
Length and breadth shall be measured along the finished surface correct to a cm and area
shall be worked out to nearest 0.01 sqm.

22.5.6 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the operations
described above. The cost of plastering shall be measured and paid for separately.

22.9 GRADING ROOF WITH CEMENT CONCRETE 1:2:4

22.9.1 Materials
Cement, coarse sand and graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size, shall be used as
specified in the item. The specifications for the materials and method of preparation of
concrete shall conform in general to the specification described in sub-head 4.0 of CPWD
Specifications.

22.9.1.1 Laying: Before laying cement concrete for grading, the level markings to the
required slope/gradient shall be made only with cement concrete on the surface of the slab at
suitable spacing with the help of string and steel tape (Measuring tape) so that the mason
can lay the concrete to the required thickness, slope / gradient easily in between the two
level markings. On getting the level marking approved by the Site Engineer the surface
should be sprinkled with thick cement slurry and the concrete should be laid carefully,
without throwing from height, in predetermined strips. The concrete should be consolidated
by specially made wooden tamping. After the tamping is done the surface should be finished
to required slope/gradient with wooden trowels without leaving any spots of loose
aggregates etc. The mixed cement concrete must be laid in position, within half an hour of
its mixing. In case any quantity of concrete remains unused for more than half an hour the
same should be rejected and removed from the site.

22.9.1.2 Finishing: The slope of finished terrace shall not be more than 1 in 120 unless a
steeper slope is desired by the Engineer-in-Charge. The minimum thickness of the concrete
at its junction with Khurra or parapets shall be 5 cm. The concrete shall be rounded at the
junction of roof slab and parapet. It is desirable to provide a haunch/gola/filler at the
junction of the parapet wall and the roof slab as shown in Fig. 22.8. The finished concrete
surface shall present a smooth surface with correct slopes and uniform rounding. The
concrete should be free from cracks. Excess trowelling shall be avoided.

22.9.1.3 Thickness: Average thickness shall be as per clause 22.9.1.2 as shown in Fig. 22.8.

22.9.1.4 Curing: Curing shall be done either by spreading straw/Hessian cloth over the
graded surface, keeping the same wet for full 10 days or flooding the graded area with water
by making kiaries with weak cement mortar, for 10 days. Occasional curing by simply
spraying water now and then shall not be permitted under any circumstances.

- 293 -
22.9.1.5 Measurement: Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. Area shall be
worked out to nearest 0.01 sqm. and the cubical contents shall be worked out to nearest
0.001 cum. No deduction shall be made for either opening or recesses for chimney stacks,
roof lights etc., Khurra for area upto 0.1 sqm. Nothing extra shall be paid either for any
extra material or labour involved in forming such opening or recess or in rounding the
concrete function of roof with parapet walls, chimney stack, khurra etc.

22.9.1.6 Rate: The rate shall include the cost of all the materials and labour involved in all
the operations described above.

22.10 GRADING ROOF WITH CEMENT MORTAR

22.10.1 Materials
Cement and coarse sand shall be as specified in the item of work or as described in sub-head
3.0 of CPWD Specifications.

22.10.1.1 Cement Mortar : Cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) /1:4(1 cement: 4
coarse sand) specified in the item of work shall conform to the specification described in
sub-head 3.0 of CPWD Specifications.

22.10.1.2 Preparation of the Surface: The surface shall be cleaned properly with brooms
bruch, cloth to remove all dirts, dust, mortar droppings.

22.10.1.3 Laying: Same as described in clause 22.9.1.1, except that cement mortar shall be
tamped with wooden and steel trowels and surface finished with steel trowel.

22.10.1.4 Finishing
(i) The slope of finished surface shall not be more than 1 in 120 unless a steeper slope is
specified in the item of work.
(ii) The finished surface of the grading shall present a smooth surface with correct slopes
and uniform roundings wherever they are provided. The mortar surface shall be free of
cracks. Excess trowelling shall be avoided.

22.10.1.5 Thickness: The minimum thickness of cement mortar grading at the junction with
khurra or parapet wall shall be 20 mm. The cement mortar shall be rounded at the junction
of roof slab and parapet. It is desirable to provide a haunch/gola/filler at the junction of
parapet wall and the roof slab. The maximum thickness that shall be adopted for grading
with cement mortar shall be 50 mm. It is not at all desirable to lay the cement mortar
grading for greater thickness and in that case it is advised to go in for grading with Cement
Concrete. The average thickness shall be as shown in Fig. 22.9 and 22.10.

22.10.1.6 Curing: Curing for the grading with cement mortar shall be done exactly as
described in clause 22.9.1.4.

22.10.1.7 Measurement: Same as specified in clause 22.9.1.5.

22.10.1.8 Rate: The rate shall include the cost of all the labour and material involved in all
the operations described above.
Note:- For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 2, Sub Head 22.0

- 294 -
 SUB HEAD : 23.0
HORTICULTURE
AND LANDSCAPE

23.0 HORTICULTURE WORK

Horticultural operations shall be started on ground previously levelled and dressed to
required formation levels and slopes. In case where unsuitable soil is met with, it shall be
either removed or, replaced or it shall be covered
over to a thickness decided by the Engineer-in-charge with good earth. In the course of
excavation or trenching during horticultural operations, any walls, foundations, etc. met
with shall not be dismantled without pre-measurement and prior to the written permission of
the Engineer-in-charge.

23.1 TRENCHING IN ORDINARY SOIL

23.1.0 Trenching is done in order to loosen the soil, turn over the top layer containing weeds
etc. and to bring up the lower layer of good earth to form a proper medium for grassing,
regrassing, hedging and shrubbery. Trenching shall be done to the depth ordered by the
Engineer-in-charge. The depth is generally 30 cm for grassing and 60 cm for regrassing in
good soil.

23.1.1 The trenched ground shall, after rough dress, be flooded with water by making small
kiaries to enable the soil to settle down. Any local depression unevenness etc. shall be made
good by dressing and/or filling with good soil.

23.1.2 Weeds or other vegetation which appear on the ground are then uprooted and
removed and disposed off and paid.

23.1.3 Trenching
Trenching shall consist of the following operations:
1. The whole plot shall be divided into narrow rectangular strips of about 1.5 m width or as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
2. These strips shall be sub-divided lengthwise into about 1 m long sections. Such sections
shall be excavated serially and excavated soil deposited in the adjacent section preceding it.
3. In excavating and depositing care shall be taken that the top soil with all previous plant
growth including roots, get buried in the bottom layer of trenched area, the dead plants so
buried incidentally being formed into humus.
4. The excavated soil shall be straight away dumped into the adjoining sections so that
double handling otherwise involved in dumping the excavated stuff outside and in back
filling in the trenches with leads is practically eliminated.

23.1.4 Measurements
Length and breadth of the plot shall be taken correct to 0.1 m and depths correct to cm.
Cubical contents shall be calculated in cubic meters, correct to two places of decimal. No
deduction shall be made nor extra paid for removing stones, brick bats and other foreign
matter met with during excavation upto initial lead of 50 m and stacking the same.

23.1.5 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and material involved in the operations described
above, including cost of all precautionary measures to be taken for protections and
supporting all services etc. met with during trenching. It does not include the cost of mixing
of earth, sludge/manure.

23.2 GOOD EARTH

- 295 -
23.2.1 The earth shall be stacked at site in stacks not less than 50 cm high and of volume not
less than 3.0 cum.

23.2.2 Measurements: Length, breadth and height of stacks shall be measured correct to a
cm. The volume of the stacks shall be reduced by 20% for voids before payment, unless
otherwise described.

23.2.3 Rate: The rate shall include the cost of excavating the earth from areas lying at
distance not exceeding one km. from the site, transporting the same at site breaking of clods
and stacking at places indicated. The rate shall also include royalty if payable.

23.3 OIL CAKE

23.3.1 Neem/Castor: The cake shall be free from grit and any other foreign matter. It should
be undecorticated and pulverized. The material shall be packed in old serviceable gunny
bags of 50 kgs capacity approximately. The weight of gunny bag shall be deducted @1 kg
per bag and payment shall be made for net quantity. The quality of cake should be got
approved by the Engineer-in-charge before supply.

23.3.2 Measurements
The arrangement for weighing shall be made at site of work by the department. The gunny
bags shall be the property of the government.

23.3.3 Rate: The rate shall include the cost of labour and material involved in all operations
described above, including carriage up to site of work with all lead and lifts, weighing etc.

23.4 SUPPLY AND STACKING OF SLUDGE

23.4.1 It shall be transported to the site in lorries with efficient arrangement to prevent
spilling enroute. It shall be stacked at site. Each stack shall not be less than 50 cm height and
volume not less than 3 cum.

23.4.2 Measurements
Length, breadth and depth of stacks shall be measured correct to a cm. The volume of the
stack shall be reduced by 8% for looseness in stacking and to arrive at the net quantity for
payment.

23.4.3 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of labour and material involved in all operations described
above, including carriage up to one km. The rate shall also include royalty if payable.

23.5 SUPPLY AND STACKING OF MANURE

23.5.1 Farmyard Manure: Same as 23.4.1.

23.5.2 Measurements: Same as 23.4.2.

23.5.3 Rate : Same as 23.4.3.

23.6 ROUGH DRESSING OF THE TRENCHED GROUND

23.6.0 Rough dressing of the area shall include making kiaries for flooding.

- 296 -
23.6.1 The trenched ground shall be levelled and rough dressed and if there are any hollows
and depressions resulting from subsidence which cannot be so levelled, these shall be filled
properly with earth brought from outside to bring the depressed surface to the level of the
adjoining land and to remove discontinuity of slope and then rough dressed again. The
supply and spreading of soil in such depressions is payable separately. In rough dressing, the
soil at the surface and for 75 mm depth below shall be broken down to particle size not more
than 10 mm in any direction.

23.6.2 Measurements
Length, breadth of superficial area shall be measured correct to 0.1 metre. The area shall be
calculated in sqm. correct to two places of decimal.
23.6.3 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all the labour and material involved in all the operations
described above.

23.7 UPROOTING WEEDS FROM TRENCHED AREAS

23.7.1 After 10 days and within 15 days of flooding the rough dressed trenched ground with
water, the weeds appearing on the ground shall be rooted out carefully and the rubbish
disposed off as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

23.7.2 Measurements
Length, breadth of superficial area shall be measured correct to 0.1 meters. Superficial area
of the weeded ground shall be measured for purpose of payments.

23.7.3 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all the labour and material involved in all the operations
described above.

23.8 FINE DRESSING THE GROUND

23.8.1 Slight unevenness, ups, and downs and shallow depressions resulting from the
settlement of the flooded ground, in drying and from the subsequent weeding operations,
shall be removed by fine dressing the surface to the formation levels of the adjoining land as
directed by the Engineer-in-charge, and by adding suitable quantities of good earth brought
from outside, if necessary.

23.8.2 Measurements
Length, breadth and depth of stacks shall be measured correct to a cm. The area shall be
calculated in sqm. correct to two places of decimal.

23.8.3 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all the labour and material involved in all the operations
described above.
23.9 SPREADING GOOD EARTH
23.9.1 Good earth shall be removed from stacks by head load and spread evenly over the
surface to the thickness ordered by the Engineer-in-charge. It shall be spread with a twisting
motion to avoid segregation and to ensure that spreading is uniform over the entire area.

23.9.2 Measurements: The quantity of good earth spread shall be determined by the
difference in the volume of good earth in stacks before and after spreading duly reduced for
looseness in stacking by 20% of good earth.

23.9.3 Rate: The rate shall include of all the labour and material involved in all the
operations described above, but does not include the cost of the good earth which shall be
paid for separately unless specifically described in the item.
- 297 -
23.9.A SPREADING SLUDGE/MANURE

23.8.A.1 Good earth shall be thoroughly mixed with sludge or manure in specified
proportion as described in the item or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The mixing
shall be spread as described in 23.9.1 to the thickness ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge.

23.9.A.2 Measurements
The quantity of good earth and sludge or manure mixed shall be determined by the
difference in the volume of good earth and sludge or manure in stack, before and after
spreading duly accounted for voids and looseness in stack.

23.9.A.3 Rate
The rate shall include of all the labour and material involved in all the operations described
above, but does not include the cost of good earth sludge or manure which shall be paid for
separately, unless otherwise described in the item.

23.10 MIXING OF GOOD EARTH AND SLUDGE/MANURE

23.10.1 The stacked earth shall, before mixing be broken down top particle of sizes not
exceeding 6 mm in any direction. Good earth shall be thoroughly mixed with sludge or
manure in specified proportion as described in the item or as directed by the Engineer-in-
charge.

23.10.2 Measurements
The quantity of good earth and sludge or manure mixed shall be determined by the
difference in the volume of good earth, sludge or manure in stack, before and after spreading
duly accounted for voids and looseness in stack.

23.10.3 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the operations
described above, but does not include the cost of good earth sludge or manure which shall
be paid for separately, unless otherwise described in the item.

23.11 GRASSING WITH SELECT GRASS NO. 1

23.11.0 The area from where the grass roots are to be obtained shall be specified by the
Engineer-in- Charge at the time of execution of the work and no royalty shall be charged on
this account from the contractor. Grass is to be arranged by contractor (cost of grass to
be paid separately).

23.11.1 The soil shall be suitably moistened and then the operation of planting grass shall be
commenced. The grass shall be dibbled at 10 cm, 7.5 cm, 5 cm apart in any direction or
other spacing as described in the item. Dead grass and weeded shall not be planted. The
contractor shall be responsible for watering and maintenance of levels and the lawn for 30
days or till the grass forms a thick lawn free from weeded and fit for moving whichever is
later. Generally planting in other direction at 15 cm, 10 cm, spacing is done in the case of
large open spaces, at 7.5 cm spacing in residential lawn and at 5cm spacing for Tennis Court
and sports ground lawn. Rates are including cost of labour and material (grass shall be paid
separately.)

23.11.2 During the maintenance period, any irregularities arising in ground levels due to
watering or due to trampling by labour, or due to cattle straying thereon, shall be constantly
made up to the proper levels with earth as available or brought from outside as necessary,
Constant watch shall be maintained to ensure that dead patches are replanted and weeds are
removed.
- 298 -
23.11.3 Measurements
Length, breadth of the lawn grassed shall be measured correct to 0.1 meter and the area shall
be calculated in sqm. correct to two places of decimal.

23.11.4 Rate
The rate shall include of all the labour and material involved in all the operations described
above, excluding supply of the requisite quantity of good earth and grass so needed for
properly maintaining the levels of the lawns. (payment of grass to be paid separately).

23.12 RENOVATION OF LAWNS

23.12.1 The area shall be first weeded out of all undesirable growth. The entire grass shall
be scrapped (cheeled) without damaging roots and level of the grounds. Slight irregularities
in surface shall be levelled off and the area shall then be forked so as to aerate the roots of
the grass without, however uprooting them. Specified quantity of sludge or manure shall
than be spread uniformly with wooden straight edge (phatti) as directed by the Engineer-in-
charge. The area shall then be slightly sprinkled with water so as to facilitate proper
integration of the manure or sludge with the soil and later flooded. The contractor shall be
responsible for watering, proper maintenance and tending of the lawn for 30 days or till the
grass forms a lawn fit for mowing, whichever is later. During the above operations, all
undesirable growths shall be constantly weeded out and all rubbish removed and disposed
off as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

23.12.2 Measurements
Length, breadth of the lawn renovated shall be measured correct to 0.1 meter and the area
shall be calculated in sqm. correct to two places of decimal.

23.12.3 Rate
The rate shall include of all the labour and T&P (excluding RH pipe/grass) involved in all
the operations described above, excluding the supply of the requisite quantity of good earth
if so needed for proper maintenance of the levels of the lawns. The cost of the sludge or
manure shall be measured and paid for separately, unless its supply is specifically included
in the description of the item.

23.13 UPROOTING RANK VEGETATION AND WEEDS AND PREPARING THE

GROUND FOR
PLANTING ‘SELECT GRASS NO. 1’
23.13.1 Initially the area shall be dug up to a depth of 30 cm. and weeds and rank vegetarian
with roots removed thereon by repeated forking. The whole area then shall be retrenched to
a depth of 60 cm in the same manner as described in 23.1. Clods of excavated earth shall
then be broken upto the size not more than 75 mm in any direction. The area shall then be
flooded with water and after 10 days and within 15 days of flooding, weeds shall be
uprooted carefully. The rubbish arising from the above operations shall be removed and
disposed off in a manner directed by the Engineer-in-charge, away from the site. The earth
shall then be rough dressed and fine dressed as described in 23.6 & 23.8.

23.13.2 Measurements
Length, breadth of uprooted area shall be measured correct to 0.1 meter and the area shall be
calculated in sqm. correct to two places of decimal.

23.13.3 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all the labour and material involved in all the operations
described above.

- 299 -
23.14 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING FOR PREPARATION OF BEDS FOR
HEDGE AND
SHRUBBERY
23.14.1 Beds for hedges and shrubbery are generally prepared to width of 60 cm. to 125 cm.
and 2 to 4 meters respectively.

23.14.2 Beds for hedges and shrubbery shall be prepared in the following manner. The beds
shall first be excavated to a depth of 60 cm. and the excavated soil shall be stacked on the
sides of the beds. The surface of the excavated bed shall then be trenched to a further depth
of 30 cm, in order to loosen the soil, in the manner described in 23.1. No flooding will be
done at this stage but the top surface shall be rough dressed and levelled. The excavated soil
from the top 60 cm depth of the bed stacked at the site shall then be thoroughly mixed with
sludge over manner in the proportion 8:1 by ratio or other proportion described in the item.
The mixed earth and manure shall be refilled over the trenched bed, leveled neatly and
profusely flooded so that the water reaches even the bottom most layers of the trenched
depth of the bed. The surface after full subsidence shall again be refilled with the earth and
manure mixture, watered and allowed to settle and finally fine dressed to the level of 50 mm
to 75 mm below the adjoining ground or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Surplus
earth if any, shall be disposed off as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Any surplus earth if
removed beyond initially lead shall be paid separately. Stones, bricks bats and other foreign
matter if met with during excavation or trenching shall be removed and stacked within
initially lead & lift, such material as is declared unserviceable by the Engineer-in-charge
shall be disposed by spreading and levelling at places ordered by him. If disposed outside
the initial lead & lift, then the transport for the extra leads will be paid for separately. If a
large proportion of material unsuitable for the hedging and shrubbery operations is met with
and earth from outsides is required to be brought in for mixing with manure and filling, the
supply and stacking of such earth will be paid for separately.

23.14.3 Measurements
Length, breadth and depth of the pit excavated and trenched shall be measured correct to a
cm. The cubical contents shall be calculated in cubic meter correct to two places of decimal.

23.14.4 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all the labour and material involved in all the operations
described above. The rate shall not include the cost of supply & stacking of the manure
unless the same is specifically included in the description of the item.

23.15 DIGGING HOLES FOR PLANTING TREES

23.15.1 In ordinary soil, including refilling earth after mixing with oil cake, manure and
watering.

23.15.1.1 Holes of circular shape in ordinary soil shall be excavated to the dimensions
described in the items and excavate soil broken to clods of size not exceeding 75 mm in any
direction, shall be stacked outside the hole, stones, brick bats, unsuitable earth and other
rubbish, all roots and other undesirable growth met with during excavation shall be
separated out and unserviceable material removed from the size as directed. Useful material,
if any, shall be stacked properly and separately. Good earth in quantities as required to
replace such discarded stuff shall be brought and stacked at site by the contractor which
shall be paid for separately. The tree holes shall be manured with powdered Neam/castor oil
cake at the specified rate along with farm yard manure over sludge shall be uniformly mixed
with the excavated soil after the manure has been broken down to powder, (size of particle
not be exceeded 6 mm in any direction) in the specified proportion, the mixture shall be
filled in to the hole up to the level of adjoining ground and then profusely watered and
- 300 -
enable the soil to subside the refilled soil shall then be dressed evenly with its surface about
50 to 75 mm below the adjoining ground level or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

23.15.1.2 Measurements : Holes shall be enumerated.

23.15.1.3 Rate: The rate shall include the cost of all the labour and material involved in all
the operations described above, excluding the cost of supply and stacking the requisite
quantity of manure/sludge and oil cake.

23.15.2 In Soil other than Ordinary Soil

23.15.2.1 Where holes are dug in (a) Hard soil (b) Ordinary rock or (c) Hard rock, the above
soils occurring independently over in conjunction with each other and /or ordinary soil in
any hole, the different excavated soil shall be stacked separately. Excavation in hard rock
shall be carried out by chiseling only.

23.15.2.2 The stack measurement of ordinary rock and hard rock shall be reduced by 50%
and of soil by 20% to arrive at the excavated volume. This excavation shall be paid for as
extra over the rate for holes dug in ordinary soil above, at rate appropriate to particular soil
concerned.

23.15.2.3 Sufficient quantity of good soil to replace the solid volume of stones, brick bats,
unsuitable earth and other rubbish, all roots and other undesirable growth, ordinary and hard
stacks shall be brought and stacked at site but the supply and stacking of such shall be paid
for separately.
23.15.2.4 The useless excavated stuff shall be disposed off by spreading at places as ordered
by the Engineer-in-charge. If such places are outside initially leads, carriage for the extra
lead shall be paid for separately.

23.15.2.5 The ordinary soil excavated from the hole and the earth brought from outside shall
then be mixed with manure screened through sieve of IS designation 16 mm in the
proportion specified in the description of the item and filled with the pit and the same
watered and finally dressed.

23.15.2.6 Measurements: The pit shall be enumerated. The volume of excavation in soil
and other than a ordinary soil shall be determined by reducing the stack volume of the
relevant soil with respective percentage for voids specified in 23.14.2.2.

23.15.2.7 Rate: The rate shall include the cost of all the labour and material involved in all
the operations described above, including mixing refilling, watering, dressing etc. but shall
not include (a) cost of manure over sludge (b) cost of supplying and stacking of good earth
for replacement and (c) the cost of carriage beyond initial lead for disposing off useless
materials. The excavation other than that of ordinary soil shall be paid extra over and above
the rate if excavation in ordinary soil.
23.16 M.S. FLAT IRON TREE GUARD

23.16.1 M.S. Iron Riveted Tree Guard

23.16.1.1 The tree guard shall be 600 mm in diameter and 2 meter high above ground level
and 25 cm in below ground level.

23.16.1.2 The tree guard shall be framed of 4 nos. 25 x 6 m M.S. flat 2 meter long excluding
displayed outward at lower and upto an extent 10 cm and 8 nos. 25 x 3 mm vertical M.S.
Flat Rivetted to 3 Nos. 25 x 6 mm Flat iron rings in two halves, bolted together 8 mm dia
- 301 -
and 30 mm long M.S. bolts and nuts. The entire tree guard shall be given two coats of
synthetic enamel paint of approved brand and manufacturer of required shade over a
priming coat of ready mixed steel primer of approved brand and manufacturer. The design
of tree guards shall be shown in the drawing.

23.16.1.3 Measurement : The tree guard shall be enumerated.

23.16.1.4 Rate: The rate shall include the cost of all the labour and material involved in all
the operations described above.

23.16.2 M.S. Flat Iron Welded Tree Guard

23.16.2.1 The tree guard shall be 600 mm in diameter and 2 meter high above ground level
and 25 cm in below ground level.

23.16.2.2 The tree guard shall be framed of 4 nos. 25 x 6 mm MS. Flat 2 metres long
excluding displayed outward at lower and upto an extent 10 cm and 8 Nos. 25 x 3 mm
vertical M.S. Flat Riveted to 3 nos. 25 x 6 mm flat iron rings in two halves, bolted together
8 mm dia and 30 mm long M.S. Bolts & nuts. The entire tree guard shall be given two coats
of synthetic enamel paint of approved brand and manufacturer of required shade brand and
manufacturer of required shade over a priming coat of ready mixed steel primer of approved
brand and manufacturer. The design of tree guards shall be shown in the drawing.
23.16.2.3 Measurement : The tree guard shall be enumerated.

23.16.2.4 Rate: The rate shall include the cost of all the labour and material involved in all
the operations described above.

23.17 FILLING MIXTURE OF EARTH & SLUDGE OVER MANURE

23.17.0 The separately specified earth and sludge shall be broken down to particles of size
not exceeding 6 mm in any directions before mixing. Good earth shall be thoroughly mixed
with sludge over manure in specified proportions as directed by Officer-in-Charge. During
the process of preparing the mixture as above, trenches shall be flooded with water and
levelled.

23.17.1 Measurements
Measurement shall be made in (Length, breadth and height of stacks) cubic meter. The
cubical contents shall be worked out to the nearest two places of decimal in cubic meter.

23.17.2 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all the labour and material involved in all the operations
described above, but do not include the good earth, sludge or manure which will be paid
separately.

23.18 EXCAVATION OF DUMPED STONE OR MALBA

23.18.1 Excavation operations shall include excavation and getting out water if required.
During the excavation stone, brick bats and other foreign material if met shall be removed
and stacked within 50 meter leads and lifts. Such material as is declared unserviceable by
the Engineer-in-Charge be disposed within 50 m. The excavated surface shall be neatly
dressed and levelled.

23.18.2 Measurements
Measurement shall be made in (Length, breadth and height of stacks) cubic meter. The
cubical contents shall be worked out to the nearest two places of decimal in cubic meter.
- 302 -
23.18.3 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all the labour and material involve in all the operations
described above.

23.19 EXCAVATION IN BAJRI PATH

23.19.1 All excavated operations shall include excavation and stacking of serviceable and
unserviceable material. Excavated surface of Bajri path shall be removed and stacked upto
50 meter lead and disposed material neatly dressed.

23.19.2 Measurements
Same as 23.18.2.

23.19.3 Rate
Same as 23.18.3.

23.20 EXCAVATION OF WATER BOUND MACADAM

23.20.1 All excavated operations shall include excavation, stacking of serviceable and
unserviceable material. Excavation shall be straight and uniform in width. Soling stone and
aggregate obtained from excavation of W.B.M. shall be stacked separately and
unserviceable material disposed off with lead upto 50 meter and lift upto 1.50 meter and
neatly dressed.

23.20.2 Measurements
Measurement shall be made in (Length, breadth and height of stacks) cubic meter. The
cubical contents shall be worked out to the nearest two places of decimal in cubic meter.

23.20.3 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all the labour and material involved in all the operations
described above.

23.21 FLOODING THE GROUND WITH WATER AND MAKING KIARIES

23.21.1 The water for flooding shall be of soft water and free from chemical and good for
growing the trees and shrubs etc. Before flooding the kiaries shall be made in required size
and shape as per directions of Officer-in-charge. After uprooting weeds from the trenched
area and uprooting vegetation, kiaries shall be dismantled.

23.21.2 Measurements
Measurement shall be made in sqm. of area.

23.21.3 Rate
The rate shall be for 100 sqm of area and include the cost of all the labour and material
involved in all the operations described above.

Note:- For further detail refer CPWD specification volume 2, Sub Head 23.0

- 303 -